Technical Specs CP5 2A - EN - Part 2

HANOI PEOPLES COMMITTEE
HANOI METROPOLITAN RAIL TRANSPORT PROJECT BOARD (HRB)
DESIGN REPORT
TECHNICAL DESIGN
PROJECT: HANOI PILOT LIGHT METRO LINE
Section Nhon - Hanoi Railway Station
PACKAGE: ARCHITECTURAL WORKS OF DEPOT
PACKAGE NUMBER: HPLMLP/CP-05
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART 2

DIVISIONS 14, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27, 32, 33
Location: Tu Liem District, Ha Noi
PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION CONSULTANT: SYSTRA S.A

July 2011
Project Reference: : PIC-TEC-TTS-WDO-D00-69141-E-2A
This document is Contractor property and may only be copied or disclosed by HRB in connection with
project business to competent authorities
HANOI PEOPLES COMMITTEE

HANOI METROPOLITAN RAIL TRANSPORT PROJECT BOARD (HRB)
DESIGN REPORT
TECHNICAL DESIGN
PROJECT: HANOI PILOT LIGHT METRO LINE
Section Nhon - Hanoi Railway Station
PACKAGE: ARCHITECTURAL WORKS OF DEPOT
PACKAGE NUMBER: HPLMLP/CP-05
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART 2

DIVISIONS 14, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27, 32, 33
Location: Tu Liem District, Ha Noi
Hanoi, 18 June, 2011
HANOI METROPOLITAN RAIL

TRANSPORT PROJECT BOARD
PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION
CONSULTANT
Architectural Works of Depot Package - Design Report

Technical Specifications Part 2
Contractor Approval / Revision Record Sheet
Revision
Date
Subject of issue / Revision
1A
30/03/2011
First Issue
Project Team
2A
18/06/2011
Second Issue
Project Team
Revision N:
2A
Name
Date
Prepared by
PROJECT TEAM
18/06/2011
Checked by
P. ARNAUD
18/06/2011
Approved by
A. BECHEREAU
18/06/2011
Authors
Signature
Contractor specific comments:
Doc N PIC-TEC-TTS-WDO-D00-69141-E-2A
Page 3/374

Table of contents
DIVISION 14
CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14 21 00
Electric traction elevators
DIVISION 21
FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section 21 00 10
General requirement for fire fighting and detection system
Section 21 12 00
Fire suppression standpipe systems
Section 21 22 00
Clean-agent fire extinguishing systems
Section 21 24 00
Fire extinguisher
Section 21 50 00
Staircase pressurization system
Section 28 31 00
Fire detection and alarm system
DIVISION 22
PLUMBING
Section 22 00 10
General provisions for plumbing work section
Section 22 05 00
Common work results for plumbing
Section 22 11 00
Facility water distribution
Section 22 14 00
Facility drainage
Section 22 40 00
Plumbing fixture section
DIVISION 23
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Section 23 00 10
General provisions for HVAC section
Section 23 05 00
Common work results for HVAC
Section 23 05 19
Meters and gages for HVAC
Section 23 05 48
Vibration and Seismic Control for HVAC
Section 23 05 93
Testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC
Section 23 07 00
HVAC insulation
Section 23 09 00
Instrumentation and control for HVAC
Section 23 19 00
System AC
Section 23 30 00
Air distribution system equipment
Section 23 34 00
Mechanical ventilation system
Section 23 64 00
Chilled water system
Page 4/374

Section 23 73 00
Air handling system equipment section
DIVISION 25
Section 25 13 00
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Integrated automation control and monitoring network
DIVISION 26
ELECTRICAL
Section 26 00 10
General provision
Section 26 05 00
Basic materials and common work
Section 26 05 19
Low voltage cable
Section 26 05 26
Grounding and bonding for electrical systems
Section 26 05 33
Raceway & boxes for electrical systems
Section 26 05 34
Trucking
Section 26 05 36
Cable trays
Section 26 05 53
Electrical identification
Section 26 24 13
Switchboards
Section 26 24 16
Distribution boards
Section 26 27 13
Electricity metering
Section 26 27 26
Wiring devices
Section 26 28 13
Fuses
Section 26 33 53
Uninterruptible power system
Section 26 41 13
Lighting protection system
Section 26 51 00
Lighting
DIVISION 27
Section 27 15 00
COMMUNICATIONS
Communications horizontal cabling
DIVISION 32
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 33
UTILITIES
Section 33 30 00
Sanitary sewerage utilities
Section 33 36 00
Utility septic tanks
Section 33 71 19
Electrical underground ducts and manholes
Page 5/374

SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This Section includes all labour, materials and accessories for the complete
performance Elevators in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.
B.
Elevators shall be of public service and heavy duty type.
C.
Elevators shall be of electrical type and machine-room-less type.
D.
Elevators shall be used for disabled passengers.
E.
Each elevator shall be independent (electrically and mechanically).
F.
Elevators shall comply with the standards and regulations in force, notably with
European standard EN81-1 and amendments (Safety rules for the construction and
installation of lifts electrical lifts), or equivalent Vietnamese or International
Standards.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS

Related documents
1.
Requirements in the Tender document - Chapter 2: General requirements
shall apply to all work in this section.
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
A.
Equivalent Vietnamese Standards (VS) can be substituted for foreign Standards

specified in this section.
B.
All supplies and services offered in response to this specification shall be based on
the latest standards.
C.
Elevators shall be designed and selected according the requirements from following
standards:
1.
EN 81-1 (+amendments)
Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts part 1: Electric lifts
2.
TCVN 4086
Electrical safety in construction. General requirements.
3.
EN 81-3 (+amendment)
Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts part 3: Electric and
hydraulic service lifts
4.
EN 81-28
Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts Lifts for the transport
Page 6/374

of person and goods part 28: Remote alarms on passenger and goods
passenger lifts
D.
5.
EN 81-58
Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts examination and test
part 58: landing doors fire resistance test
6.
Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts Particular application
for passenger and goods passenger lifts part 70: accessibility to lifts for
persons including persons with disability
7.
for passenger and goods passenger lifts part 71: Vandal resistant lifts
8.
EN 81-72
for passenger and goods passenger lifts part 72: Fire-fighters lifts
9.
EN 81-73
for passenger and goods passenger lifts part 73: Behaviour of lifts in the
event of fire.
10.
EN 12015
Electromagnetic compatibility - Product family standard for elevators,
escalators and passenger conveyors - Emission
11.
EN 12016 (+amendment)
Electromagnetic compatibility - Product family standard for elevators,
escalators and passenger conveyors - Immunity
12.
EN 13015 (+amendment)
Maintenance for elevators and escalators - Rules for maintenance
instructions
13.
EN 50214
Flat polyvinyl chloride sheathed flexible cables for lifts
14.
EN 12385-5
Steel wires ropes Safety part 5 : Stranded ropes for lifts
15.
The UTE rules in force, in particular standard C 15-100 and its addenda or
the equivalent International Standards.
16.
The regulations in force relative to protection of workers against electric

current.
17.
UTE Standards S 30-006 and NF EN 21683 or the equivalent International

Standards regarding the acoustical nuisances of rotating machines.
If any other national standard is used or if the Contractor chooses to not comply
with the EN81-1 and additional requirements of these specifications, the Contractor
shall:
Page 7/374

1.
To inform the Employer with which standards he will comply with,
2.
To demonstrate equivalence or improvement (safety and performance) with

EN81-1 and additional requirement here specified,
3.
In this case the Contractor shall submit a copy (in English language) of this
standard and complete comparison matrix to clearly indicate points of
improvement of the news standards
E.
Generally, the standards shall comply with international practices and with the
working International Standards in force at the time of execution.
F.
However, the Contractor shall follow and submit the international standards or the
equivalent European Standards in force at this time.
1.4
SUBMITTAL
A.
Submit shop drawings, Coordination Service Drawings (CSD), product data,

samples and certificates of compliance required by contract documents.
B.
Drawings
1.
Layout of electromechanical equipment s

Design and layout of the equipment shall be based on the drawings supplied:
a.
Civil work and layout drawings.
b.
Elevator guide drawings.
c.
Should the Contractor propose an alternative solution, it shall
mandatorily be able to be integrated into the arrangements planned.
d.
The Contractor shall record in situ all dimensions and arrangements
required for production of the execution drawings; these drawings shall
indicate the overall dimensions (with respect to the shaft and the doors,
dimensions - for indication - of the structural and layout for the landing
doors).
2.
C.
Electrical and electronic equipment

a.
The Contractor shall carry out the electrical study and the functional
analysis of the installation, according to the design requirements and to
the standards in force.
Documentation
1.
The documentation required shall comprise three sections:

a.
design and working documents,
b.
maintenance documents,
c.
acceptance documents.
2.
Design and working documents

a.
Before manufacturing (first-off elevator), the Contractor shall submit
complete sets of all detail and assembly drawings of the various
components, together with the wiring diagram and a complete parts list,
indicating makes, part numbers and characteristics, for the Employer's
or his Representative approval.
Page 8/374

3.
Maintenance documents
These maintenance documents shall be used by maintenance entities and
shall include at least:
a.
a fully up-to-date set of all working documents,
b.
a file defining routine maintenance operations (frequency, procedure,
consumables required),
c.
a file defining troubleshooting rules (description of the most probable
faults and their symptoms, how they are detected and the repair
operations required).
4.
Acceptance documents
a.
These shall comprise:
1)
the certified results of tests and measurements carried out by the
Contractor before installation,
2)
the certified results of tests and inspections carried out during
installation,
3)
the certified results of tests and inspections carried out after
installation.
b.
1.5
A file containing all results of acceptance tests shall be appended to

these acceptance documents.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A.
Receive and accept materials and equipment at the site; properly handle, house,
and protect them from damage and the weather until installation. Replace
equipment damaged in the course of handling without additional charge.
B.
Arrange for and provide storage space in an area at the job site for all materials and
equipment to be received and/or installed in this project.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for products furnished under
this Contract. However, such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all
other liabilities which manufacturers and the Contractor may have by law or by
other provisions of the Contract (Defect Notification Period).
B.
Guarantee all materials, equipment, apparatus and workmanship to be free of

defective materials and faulty workmanship for at least the Defect Notification
Period defined in the Contract.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
Except otherwise specified, 20% spare parts shall be provided.
B.
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer a spare part list for approval.
C.
The spare part list shall be based on the number of elevators installed and the
failure rate of the component and enabling normal maintenance of the equipment
for five years time.
Page 9/374

D.
All electrical and mechanical devices essential to operation of elevators shall be

provided.
E.
For the main components, a minimum of 10 % of spare parts shall be provided by

the Contractor.
F.
Spare parts shall be covered by the same warranty as the equipment installed.
G.
Spare parts shall be kept in the central stores.
H.
Spare parts shall be new and shall be subject to acceptance in the factory in the
same way as the elevators themselves.
I.
All spare parts and components shall be procurable in Vietnam
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1
A.
GENERAL
Quantity Elevator vertical table
1.
The table below indicates the characteristics of each elevator:
Building
Type of
elevator
Travelling
height (m)
Number of
level
Number of
elevator
(1)
OCC-Admin.
Building
2.
B.
Public
elevator
16.2m
Freight
elevator
5.4m
The final height shall be given according to the approved architectural

drawings.
Functions Main characteristics for public elevators

1.
The main technical characteristics of the elevators shall be as follows:

Min rated load:
10 passengers 800 kg
Rated speed:
1m/s
Starts per hour:
at least 180
Page 10/374

Car doors:
designed for intensive traffic

automatic, horizontally sliding type and
centrally split
Door actuator shall be able to operate 240
cycles per hour
Car floor:
able to withstand with a load of 600kg/m
Acoustic pressure:
not exceed 80dBA at a distance of 1m from

any rotating machine
Noise level:
not exceed 60 dBA
Control mode:
local / remote (monitor by CCTV)
Shaft dimension:
2000 x 2000mm (internal)
(LxW)
C.
2.
VAC system shall be provided to maintain comfortable conditions inside the

car
3.
Emergency stop buttons and emergency intercoms shall be provided inside

the elevator to the passengers.
4.
All measures shall be taken to avoid transmitting vibration to neighbouring

structures.
5.
Elevators shall be designed and selected with fire detection and fire fighting
system according to NFPA 130.
Functions Main characteristics for freight elevators

1.
The main technical characteristics of the elevators shall be as follows:

Rated load:
2000 kg
Rated speed:
1m/s
Starts per hour:
at least 180
Car doors:
automatic, horizontally sliding type and

centrally split
Door actuator shall be able to operate 240
cycles per hour
Car floor:
able to withstand with a load of 600kg/m
Acoustic pressure:
not exceed 80dBA at a distance of 1m from

any rotating machine
Page 11/374

Noise level:
not exceed 60 dBA
Control mode:
Local
Operation time:
20 hours per day, every day of the year
Shaft dimension:
3200 x 2710mm (internal)
(LxW)
D.
2.
VAC system shall be provided to maintain comfortable conditions inside the

car
3.
Emergency stop buttons and emergency intercoms shall be provided inside

the elevator to the passengers.
4.
All measures shall be taken to avoid transmitting vibration to neighbouring

structures.
5.
Elevators shall be designed and selected with fire detection and fire fighting
system according to NFPA 130.
Restrictions
1.
Safety
a.
Elevators shall not present a risk to passengers and staff.
b.
All elements that users are liable to come close to, to touch or to tread
upon shall be designed so as to avoid all accidents and inconvenience.
c.
The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the requirements of the standards
and of this specification as regards maximum tolerance, safety devices,
fire protection, shape and surface finish of elements in contact with the
users, noise, vibrations, etc.
d.
An operation on an elevator shall not affect the security of the other
elevators,
e.
All components (wheel, motor...) which could present a risk shall be
rounded by guards.
f.
The maximum clearance at any point accessible to passengers shall
always be less than four millimetres.
g.
The passenger shall be able to call the OCC with the intercoms
systems.
h.
The cars shall be fitted with an emergency hatch to enable passengers
evacuation.
i.
This hatch is located on the roof and is equipped with a metal ladder.
2.
Maintenance
a.
The same procedure shall be used to operate and maintain all
elevators. The controls, indicators and automation system shall be
identical for all the elevators.
b.
In order to simplify maintenance work and operations, it shall be
provided one type of public elevator and one type of freight elevator.
c.
Documents and manuals shall be provided by the Contractor. They
shall be clear, complete and accurate and shall allow the systems to be
easily understood.
Page 12/374

d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
3.
4.
Maintenance manuals shall describe all the maintenance operations

including test of each safety equipment.
Maintenance operations shall not affect the safety of passengers and
staff.
Maintenance operations shall be reduced to the minimum and shall be
as simple as possible.
The components which require frequent access shall be installed in
accessible area.
It shall be possible to remove and replace all parts, either as detailed
parts or sub-assemblies, without dismantling any other parts or
subassemblies.
If special tools are required for certain removal / replacement
operations, the Contractor shall provide these tools with the first
elevator delivered.
Standardization: metric dimensions shall be used and threads shall
comply with the International standards.
Interchangeability: elevators shall be designed to use the same
components (as much as possible).
Removability: no parts subject to wear or which require adjustment shall
be attached to neighbouring components by welding, riveting or any
other inseparable type of fastener.
The Contractor shall provide and install in the shaft hoisting beams
necessary for handling heavy parts (all parts weighing more than 100
daN).
The Contractor shall indicate the load which the hoisting beam shall be
required to support and the required location.
Hoisting beams shall be marked with their maximum allowable load in
daN.
Environment
a.
Climate
Elevators shall be capable of operating under climatic conditions
prevailing in Hanoi:
1)
Temperature range
-10C to 60C
2)
Relative humidity range 10% to 100 %
b.
Infiltration
It should be noted that there is a possibility of infiltration, containing
particularly corrosive products.
c.
Passengers
The design and method of adjusting elevator shall allow for certain
situations which can arise due to the behaviour of passengers using
elevators:
1)
Vandalism (various blows, graffiti, ...)
2)
Behaviour (people jumping inside the car, abusive use of
emergency stop buttons and emergency intercom).
3)
Incidents (people carrying bulky and high objects, the possibility
of panic and the need for emergency evacuation)
Civil works
a.
The reservations required in civil works shall be kept to the strict
minimum necessary.
Page 13/374

5.
6.
7.
Protection against fire

a.
All precautions shall be taken to eliminate potential sources of fire and

smoke and prevent flame propagation:
1)
Cables shall be halogen-free
2)
No inflammable materials shall be used
3)
Oil, grease and dust shall be collected
4)
Each elevator shall be installed with a fire and smoke detection
system and a fire fighting system.
b.
The Contractor shall coordinate the interface with the civil work for
installation of the fire fighting system. The system shall be approved by
the Employer and the relevant authorities.
c.
If a fire is detected, the elevator shall return to the first floor level, open
the landing doors and the main power supply shall automatically be cut.
Then the fire emergency switch shall be opened to confirm isolation of
the elevator and allow the fire-service to intervene.
d.
The assembly constituted by the door and the frontage shall possess a
fire shutoff rating of 30 minutes.
e.
A fire response test report, produced by a laboratory approved by the

Employer, and including a description of the tests and drawings of the
assembly, shall be required to be provided by the Contractor.
f.
Materials used for noise and vibration proofing shall be incombustible

(class M1). The Contractor shall provide a detailed list of material used
for the car.
g.
This list shall contain the weight of each material used and the
fire/smoke classification and shall be submitted to Employer's approval.
Planning organization of work

The installation of each elevator shall be part of a general schedule of work
with absolute deadlines. Consequently, the following dates shall be
respected:
a.
The date the elevator is brought onto site, to avoid interfering with or
delaying other trades.
b.
The acceptance date, to avoid delaying the entry into service of the
elevator.
Nuisances
a.
The acoustical pressure, measured according to standards NF S 30006 and NF S 31-027 or the equivalent International Standards, shall
not exceed 80 dBA at a distance of 1 meter from any rotating machine.
b.
The noise level in public area shall not exceed the ISO 55 rating.
c.
All precautions required to prevent transmission of vibrations to the

neighboring structures shall be implemented.
d.
Noise level in the car and at floor landings shall not exceed 60 3 dBA .
Page 14/374

E.
F.
Performance and objectives criteria

1.
Life
a.
The life of the elevator shall be at least 30 years without requiring major
work as the changes of the car, the doors or the motor.
2.
Availability
a.
The availability of the elevators shall be at least 98% when operating
one hundred and forty hours per week (twenty hours per day).
b.
The availability of each individual elevator shall be calculated
considering an operating time of 7300 hours a year (20 hours per day,
every day of the year).
3.
Reliability
a.
The number of faults on each elevator shall be less than 2.5 per month
during the first 2 months after commissioning.
b.
The number of faults on each elevator shall be less than 1.5 per month
starting from the third month until the eighth month after commissioning.
c.
If one of these requirements is not attended, the guarantee period
restarts from the beginning.
d.
From the ninth month, the number of faults on each elevator shall be
less than 2 per month.
Interfaces
1.
The Contractor shall supply all arrangements with other interfaces as other
electrical, mechanical and civil works.
2.
Civil works arrangements interface

a.
Execution of elevator shaft and resting surfaces (based on the
information supplied by the "electromechanical equipment" Contractor)
b.
Execution of floors adjacent to the elevator entrances
c.
Execution of accesses (dimensions, floor strength) enabling insertion
and handling of the devices
d.
Execution of recesses for electric cabinets
3.
Mechanical interface
a.
Access doors to exterior recesses
4.
Electrical interface
a.
Laying of the main power supply cable up to the master elevator power
cabinet.
b.
Laying of the general earthing cable inside recess.
5.
Low current interface

a.
Laying of transmission cable from terminal block located inside the
elevator electrical cabinet up to OCC.
b.
Supply and installation of all intercoms related to elevators (including
intercoms inside elevators).
6.
Air treatment interface

a.
The ventilation of the shaft shall be carried out with air treatment
equipment.
Page 15/374

2.2
A.
B.
C.
CONTROL AND MONITORING

General
1.
Signals and alarm shall continuously be reported to the BMS-system.
2.
Monitoring from the OCC and the control cabinet shall be active in both local
and remote control.
3.
It shall be possible to operate the elevators in two modes:

a.
The normal mode with local (from the car or from the landing),
b.
The maintenance mode (inspection running)
4.
The choice shall be made with a two positions selector: Normal mode and
Maintenance mode located at the control box above the car.
5.
All boxes and Cabinets shall be dust and water tight.
Monitoring strategy from the OCC

1.
As minimum the system shall be able to:

a.
Monitor if the elevator is in service or not
b.
Monitor the way of operation. Up or Down
c.
Monitor the position of the car (floor levels)
d.
Monitor MS
e.
Monitor NMS. It shall be possible to rearm from the BMS-system
f.
Monitor the operation mode (Normal / Maintenance)
2.
Alarm shall be provided for at least the following:

a.
Emergency button (NMS)
b.
Top and bottom cabinet emergency stop button (MS)
c.
Maintenance access hatches (MS)
d.
Fire and smoke detection (NMS)
e.
Over weight monitoring switches (NMS)
f.
MS
g.
NMS
3.
Any untimely stopping of the elevator shall trigger at least one alarm indicator
light, plus an aural signal.
4.
Any fault detected during normal operation shall immediately stop the elevator
(whatever the normal mode selected) and transmit an alarm to the BMS.
However, this alarm shall not be transmitted if the elevator is out of service or
in the maintenance mode.
5.
An emergency intercom shall be installed inside the elevator car to

communicate with the OCC.
6.
Intercoms shall be connected with the station intercom system.
7.
An electrical operated emergency actuator shall be installed in order to

enable car emergency movement in case of breakdown
Control and monitoring for normal operation (CBO)
Page 16/374

D.
E.
1.
It shall be possible to control each elevator locally or remotely.
2.
A control box for normal operation (CBO) shall be installed:

a.
At each landing
b.
Inside the car
c.
At the OCC
Car control box

1.
All inscriptions shall be written in Vietnamese and English languages.
2.
The car control box shall be located in the elevator car. It shall be flush
mounted on the service side. The car control box shall be accessible for
disabled people.
3.
Each car control box shall be provided with the following buttons and
indicators :
a.
A destination button per level
b.
A destination indicator (Up and Down)
c.
A door re-open button
d.
A door close button
e.
A separate alarm push button with ringing
f.
A car position indicator
g.
An over-load indicator
h.
A fan operating switch
i.
A plate containing emergency instructions
j.
An emergency intercom: This intercom shall be present in each car.
The passengers shall be allowed to contact the OCC in the event of
failure or accident.
4.
The front side of the car control box shall be made of satin-finish aluminum,
with edges beveled at 45 degree and rounded angles. Marking of emergency
instructions shall be made in red by chemical engraving.
5.
The car control box shall be vandal proof and protected against water and
dust infiltration (IP54 according to IEC 60364.5).
6.
It shall be possible for the maintenance staff to replace or to repair that box
from the elevator car using a specific tool (a user shall not be able to apart the
car control box).
Landing control box

1.
Each landing shall be equipped with a signal box. This box shall be flushed
mounted in the lateral cladding, at the same height as the one installed in the
car.
2.
This box shall include:

a.
A destination indicator ("Up" and "Down")
b.
A call button with indicator
c.
A red indicator light, carrying the "Out of order" marking
d.
This indicator is backed-up for two hours
e.
The "Out of order" shall be controlled:
1)
Automatically, in the event of malfunction or power supply
breakdown
Page 17/374

f.
F.
2)
Manually, via the Maintenance mode selector,
An intercom shall be fitted with a yellow button carrying the emergency
call symbol (bell).
Control and monitoring strategy for maintenance operation

1.
The maintenance mode shall override the normal mode.
2.
Control from the car roof

a.
The car roof shall be equipped with maintenance controls enabling car
elevator operations at low speed.
b.
As a minimum the control box shall include:
1)
A two position switch to select the normal mode or maintenance
mode.
It shall not be possible to control the elevator in normal mode from
the car roof.
2)
A push button (Open/Close) to open or close the car door.
3)
Two push-button to move the elevator (up and down). The
operator shall press the push button to move the car. As soon as
the operator releases the push-button the car shall stop.
4)
An emergency stop button (mushroom). It shall be accessible
from anywhere in the car roof.
3.
Control from the control cabinet

a.
The control cabinet shall be accessible for the maintenance and
operation staff.
b.
Alarms shall be clearly displayed using indicator lights or using a digital
panel managed by a processor. The text shall be displayed in
Vietnamese and English languages.
c.
The model of information display tool shall be submitted to the
Employer Approval.
d.
Information shall be displayed on the front door of the cabinet and shall
be perfectly visible during operations. Information shall be as a
minimum:
1)
In Operation
2)
Out of Operation
3)
Fault Alarm and Faults identifications
4)
Maintenance mode or normal mode
5)
Car position indicator
6)
Two end of travel safety indicator lights (top and bottom)
7)
A counter indicating the number of elevator starts
e.
The following controls shall be available from the cabinet (selectors and
buttons shall be located on the front door of the cabinet):
1)
Normal/maintenance-high
speed/maintenance-low
speed
operation selector
2)
Technical fault cancellation button
3)
A mushroom type emergency Stop button
4)
Two push buttons "Up" and "Down" to move the car to the closest
landing in case of passenger evacuation
5)
A push button (Open/Close) to open or close the car door
6)
A "lamp test function"
7)
A door safety circuit monitoring indicator light.
Page 18/374

f.
2.3
A.
All boxes and Cabinets shall be dust and water tight.
MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
Car
1.
2.
3.
Body
a.
The car constitutes a distortion-proof body, placed inside a cradle which
supports the emergency brake, the whole having to be perfectly stiff.
The vertical sides, made of steel sheet (at least 20/10 mm thick), shall
be treated in order to avoid any vibration or resonance.
b.
Soundproofing of the sides shall be provided by the Contractor. In all

cases, the soundproofing covering shall be incombustible (class M1)
and asbestos-free.
c.
To enable possible evacuation of users, the cars shall be fitted with an

emergency hatch, measuring 0.35 x 0.50 m, fitted with an electric latch
which controls interlocking and a metal ladder, installed outside the car,
enabling to reach the roof of the car.
d.
The roof of each car shall be fitted with a 0.15 m high skirting board,
made of steel sheet, all along its periphery. This skirting board shall
carry a plate with very visible markings indicating "danger counterweight".
Interior arrangements
a.
The interior arrangements of the car (lighting, control box, reservations
of the intercoms, etc.) shall be tamper-proof. Use of man-made
materials for outfitting the car is prohibited.
b.
The interior of the car shall be clad with removable panels of stainless
steel Z6 CN 18/10, with "leather-grained" finish. The fastening and
joints of these panels shall be vandal-proof.
c.
The floor of the car shall be covered with a sheet of ribbed aluminium,
with raised edges.
Ventilation
a.
The lateral sides of the car shall be fitted with openings, of sufficient
size, concealed behind a skirting board at floor level and in the ceiling of
the car. The total area of clear openings, at top and bottom respectively,
shall be at least 1 dm per m of floor area.
b.
4.
In addition, a fan shall be installed to ensure 20 air renewals per hour.

This fan shall operate in extraction mode. Its noise level shall not
exceed 60 dBA.
Car door
a.
The door actuator shall be capable of executing 240 cycles per hour.
b.
The door shall be horizontally sliding and centrally-split.
Page 19/374

c.
d.
B.
Opening and closing of the door shall be made automatically, by means

of an actuator installed above the car roof via an isolated frame.
The variable-speed motion shall enable high-speed travel of the leaves
as defined in standard EN81-1.
e.
The adjustment system shall be accessible. The running rails shall be

hollowed-out to enable systematic removal of foreign matter. Rollers
shall be type "CESTIDUR" or equivalent, and shall be mounted on ball
bearings. The leading edge of the door shall be fitted with a protective
system via photocells, with an impact sensor and with a device to hold
the door closed (electromechanical).
f.
Door leaves shall consist of distortion-proof box structures, made of

soundproofed steel sheet.
g.
Doors shall be clad as the car sides (stainless steel Z6 CN 18/10, with
"leather-grained" finish).
Hoist (motor-reducer set)

1.
The hoist shall be reducer type, with synchronous motor supplied with 400 V,
3-phases + neutral 50 Hz current.
2.
The motor speed shall be variable through speed controller:

a.
High starting torque, moderate starting current.
b.
A synchronous motor running in smooth bearings.
c.
Construction shape "B3" (fastening type).
d.
Cylindrical shaft mounded in smooth bearings (the outer end being
protected by a sleeve type "Loher" or equivalent).
e.
Insulation type Class F.
f.
Start up current ratio: Id/In < 3.
g.
Over load acceptance 10% for one hour.
3.
The motor shall be IP55 according to IEC 60364.5.
4.
The bronze wheel and the screw shall be paired following very thorough
machining.
5.
Oil level shall be checked by means of a dipstick. The drainage hole shall be
easily accessible and enable placement of a container having the capacity of
the casing.
6.
The coupling between motor and reducer shall be easily removable and
enable easy checking of alignment of the motor and reducer shafts after insitu installation of the set.
7.
Level adjustment of the motor shall be made by means of stainless steel

shims.
8.
The assembly shall be fitted with an electromechanical brake (friction type).

This assembly shall be installed on a single frame, mounted via vibrationdamping devices.
9.
The Contractor shall provide the motor power with all the necessary
calculation and technical specifications.
Page 20/374

C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Pulleys and idler

1.
Return of the car and counterweight cables shall be made via cast steel
pulleys, mounted on bearings which can be of any make provided they are of
usual series.
2.
Possible lubrication of bearings shall be made via grease nipples make

"Tecalemit" or equivalent.
Emergency brake
1.
The emergency brake shall be of damped-operation type.
2.
The reaction shall be balanced between the guides so as to avoid generation

of slanted strains on the latter and distortion of the car.
3.
The emergency brake shall release once the speed of the car reaches a
value equal to 115% normal speed.
4.
Installation: the emergency brake shall be attached to the cross-piece of the

cradle which supports the car body. The cross-piece shall carry the guide
slides and their lubricators, all linkages and the cable idler pulley.
Counterweight
1.
The practical balancing load (actual tare weight of the car, including the
emergency brake and suspension accessories, plus 50% of load) shall be
placed in a counterweight frame, clad with protective steel sheet panels.
2.
The total height of the frames, including their suspension device and the
possible intermediate elastic parts, shall provide an upper void above the
counterweights in accordance with the standards when the car rests onto its
dampers.
3.
N.B.: Correction shims placed underneath the counterweights are of various

thicknesses and in sufficient number to enable any subsequent adjustment.
Guides
1.
The car and counterweight guides are stiff and attached via fasteners with
plugs (all screwed hardware shall be thoroughly locked).
2.
All metalwork and metal framing work relative to attachment of the guides
shall be carried out by the Contractor, as well as all drillings and anchorings
required. Attachment must be designed so as to enable subsequent readjustment of the guides (some cases may require the use of tight plugs).
3.
Automatic lubricators and scrapers are provided to ensure lubrication of the

car and counterweight guides while avoiding excess lubricant, unless a selflubricating material is used (type "Isogliss", "Cestidur" or equivalent).
Buffers
1.
Buffers shall be installed in the pit, underneath the car and the counterweight.
Page 21/374

2.
H.
I.
J.
K.
They shall be anchored into the masonry of the pit; the Contractor shall
indicate their location and loads in a drawing of the pit.
Suspension cables
1.
The eight-strand suspension cables shall be "elevator" grade and "Seal Lay"
type, with pre-shaped cross-stranding with lubricated textile central core. The
strength of the steel wires shall be 1370-1770 N/mm and ratio D/d shall be
equal to or greater than 40 (D and d being the respective diameters of the
pulley and the cable).
2.
However, the Contractor shall submit for the Employer's approval his own
type of cable, provided it is of equivalent quality and easily procurable.
3.
A balancing system enables achieving the same tension in each cable; the
traction pulley and the cables shall be guaranteed for five years by the
Contractor.
Emergency actuator
1.
This equipment shall be accessible by any person allowed to actuate elevator

in case of emergency
2.
Such device allows to control the car and to manually bring it to a safety level
with landing doors opened.
3.
This system shall include a lighted panel indicating the level at which the car
is located.
4.
The power supply source of this device shall be backed up for two hours.
Ventilation of shaft
1.
Natural or forced Ventilation of shaft shall be considered in order to maintain

an acceptable temperature inside the shaft for all elevators.
2.
The Contractor shall determine the type of ventilation advisable, the section of
openings, their location an air flow rate necessary.
3.
In case of forced ventilation, the Contractor shall provide the complete

installation of ventilation system with fans, fire dampers, control and power
cabinets and all equipment necessary to the correct functioning of the
ventilation system of the shaft.
Landing doors
1.
Each landing shall be fitted, on the service side, with an automaticallyoperated door, driven by the car door.
2.
It shall consist of two leaves, split centrally and sliding horizontally.
3.
The leaves shall consist of distortion-proof box structures made of steel

sheet, soundproofed and of fireproof construction; minimum thickness of the
steel sheets shall be 20/10 mm. The visible part of these leaves shall be clad
with stainless steel Z6 CN 18/10 "brushed" finish.
Page 22/374

2.4
A.
4.
The car door actuator shall also drive the landing doors open and closed via
coupling grips mounted on the car door leaves which simultaneously control
release of locks and drive of the landing door leaves.
5.
Suspension shall be via a trolley, moving on a rail of special profile, bottom

guidance being by means of pads sliding in a rail. The threshold guide shall
be made of special alloy.
6.
This floor rail shall be hollowed-out to enable automatic evacuation of foreign

matter.
7.
The door must be locked mechanically as soon as the car starts to leave the
landing; a manual release device, concealed in the door and operated by
means of a standard 3-sided spanner, must also be provided.
8.
The surround of the landing door, which constitutes the frontage, is made of
masonry and shall be executed by the Civil Works Contractor.
9.
The frame of the landing door, with uprights and upper cross-piece, shall be
splayed and clad with stainless steel Z6 CN 18/10 "brushed" finish.
10.
The bottom door guides shall be replaceable. All doors shall be fitted with
rollers of the same type as those of the car doors and mounted on supports
adjustable for height.
11.
The landing doors shall not be cantilevered in the shaft and shall be installed
in the civil work structure.
12.
The assembly constituted by the door and the frontage shall possess a fire
shutoff rating of 30 minutes.
13.
A fire response test report, produced by CSTB or a laboratory approved by

the Employer, and including a description of the tests and drawings of the
assembly, shall be required.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
General
1.
The term "electrical equipment" includes all electrical equipments needed to

operate the elevator. All these facilities are part of the scope of work.
2.
The elevators shall not generate interference to the power supply system.
3.
The Contractor shall carry out the electrical study and the functional analysis
of the installation, according to the design requirements and to the standards
in force.
4.
The Contractor shall submit the control and power electrical diagrams for the
Employer approval.
5.
Terminal boxes and terminals shall be sized to facilitate the connection and
lightening of terminals.
6.
All electrical boxes and cabinets shall include 20% spare capacity.
Page 23/374

B.
C.
Master power supply

1.
Power network
a.
400 V 10%, 50 Hz, 3-phase with grounded neutral, + ground.
2.
Lighting network (car, shaft, power outlets in pit and on car roof)
a.
230 V, 50 Hz, single-phase, derived from the power network. Standby
network for alarm bell and position indicator, supplied from a 48 or 24
VDC backed-up source (standby set with 2 hours capacity) to be
supplied and erected by the Contractor.
b.
Installation of power, lighting, grounding and alarm cables on cable
ways, from electrical cabinet up to their connection to the relevant
boxes, shall also be provided.
c.
These cables, originating in the LPS, shall be left pending with a
sufficient length to enable reaching the control cabinet.
d.
They shall be of a single length, without any splice or other intermediate
connection between emitter and receiver. They shall enter the boxes
and cabinets at bottom, via glands "CARRI TYPE EUROPE" or
equivalent.
e.
All cables used shall comply with standard NFF 55 625.
f.
The cross-sectional area of safety conductors shall not be less than 1
mm.
g.
The elevator car pendant shall include 20% spare capacity.
3.
Marking:
a.
All conductors and cables shall be marked at both ends and at their
arrival terminals, in accordance with standard NF C 30-204 or the
equivalent International Standards.
4.
Fastening:
a.
Cables running on cable ways shall be fastened by means of corrosionproof metal clamps.
b.
Outside of cable ways (metal gutters) and along small lengths,
conductors shall be protected by a metal sheath.
c.
Fastening of these sheaths shall be made via "ATLAS" clamps or
equivalent. In case of fanned-out laying, the fastenings shall be kept
away from walls by means of galvanized steel spacers.
Control cabinet and boxes

1.
This equipment shall be installed in an accessible location.
2.
Power supply and wiring shall be in compliance with the approved diagrams.
3.
Control cabinet
a.
All actuation devices shall be gathered in a cabinet, made of steel
sheet, sealed per IP 54, coated with two rust proofing coats and one
oven-fired finishing coat,. All these devices shall be interchangeable
and accessible from the front face.
b.
The following equipment shall be provided:

1)
Phase monitoring relay and held earthing relay, monitoring the
control circuit supplied with rectified current.
2)
The cabinet shall comply with standard NF C 15 100 or the
equivalent International Standards (elevators).
Page 24/374

3)
4)
5)
D.
The control voltage shall be indicated (48 to 127 V).

Relays shall be plug-in type; the control diagram shall be
submitted to the Employer for approval.
Relays shall be marked by means of "DILOPHANE" tags.
c.
The programmed management system may be the Contractor's specific

type.
d.
The door of the cabinet shall be fitted with:

1)
The car position indicator lights.
2)
A mushroom type "stop" button with two stable positions.
3)
A 3-position selector: normal/high-speed maintenance/low-speed
maintenance.
4)
Two push buttons "up" "down" to send the car to the furthest
positions.
5)
Two push buttons "up" "down" for low-speed control.
6)
A "lamp test" push button.
7)
Two end of travel safety indicator lights (top and bottom).
8)
A door safety circuit monitoring indicator light.
9)
A static safety circuit monitoring indicator light.
10) A counter indicating the number of elevator starts.
11) Access to the cabinet for repairs shall be very easy.
e.
N.B.: The position indicator must be perfectly visible during cranking

operations.
4.
Fire safety box

a.
All boxes and cabinets shall be dust-and water-tight. Boxes shall be
coated internally with two white finishing paint coats and externally with
two coats of hammered gray or blue paint.
b.
Metal sheets and parts installed inside these boxes shall be corrosionproof (Schoopage, zinc plating, cadmium plating, galvanization, etc.).
5.
Distribution box
a.
The main power supply cable from the LPS is connected into this box,
which shall house all the safeties (circuit breakers, fuses) and controls
(breakers and isolating switches) for the various outlets (power supply
electrical cabinet elevator, lighting, power sockets, etc.).
b.
This box shall include the power terminal strips, the isolating switch and
the circuit-breakers. The power cable shall enter the cabinet at bottom
and be connected to a switch, the actuation handle of which shall be
installed outside, on the RH side lateral face, at an appropriate height.
c.
The entire operating system shall be protected against all earthing
faults.
Lighting
1.
Normal lighting
a.
In normal operation, the car lighting shall provide even lighting of about
200 lux as measured 1 m above the car floor.
b.
Lighting of the shaft shall be installed for maintenance purpose and
shall comply with health and safety codes applicable in Vietnam.
Page 25/374

2.
E.
Power outlets
1.
F.
Standby lighting
a.
The Contractor shall provide and install self-contained lighting units.
b.
The duration time of stand by lighting has to be of two hours.
c.
One unit shall be incorporated into the normal car lighting system.
d.
A minimum of three units shall be installed in the shaft and shall comply
with codes and standard applicable in Vietnam.
e.
The location shall be defined on site.
Power outlets shall be 230 V, 10/16 A rated, tight type. They shall be installed
as a minimum as follows:
a.
One on the roof car.
b.
One below the car.
c.
One in the pit.
Safety switches and monitoring systems

1.
A safety circuit shall check the correct working of the elevator, and shall
check that there is no risk for users or for the maintenance staff.
2.
The safety circuit shall be made of switches.
3.
All switches require a positive operation. They shall be fitted with two
independent simultaneous contacts. The first contact shall be used for the
safety system and the second one used as an input for the programmable
logic controller.
4.
All safety devices shall satisfy IP 65 according to IEC 60364.5 protection

requirements.
5.
The Contractor shall provide all safety systems necessary.
6.
The safety circuit shall include the verification of the following devices as a
minimum:
a.
Emergency push buttons: Actuation of the emergency push buttons
(mushroom type) shall stop the elevator.
b.
Emergency push-button shall be installed (on the control cabinet), in the
shaft pit and on the car roof.
c.
Check of the closed position of openings leading to the elevator shaft
(inspection traps).
d.
Check of the closing and the locking of the car doors.
e.
Check of the closing and the locking of landing doors.
f.
Check of the locking of the car emergency trap.
g.
Check of the abnormal relative extension of a rope.
h.
Check of the operation of safety gear.
i.
Electrical protective components which shall be installed in the boxes
and the control cabinet. They notably include :
1).
Thermal relays.
2).
Differential circuit breakers.
3).
Main switch control.
j.
Fire and smoke detector.
k.
Check of the operation of the over-speed governor.
l.
Check of the release of the over-speed governor.
m. Check of the tension of the over-speed governor rope.
Page 26/374

n.
o.
p.
q.
G.
Check of the tension in the device for transmission of the car position
(final limit switch).
Final limit switches for traction drive elevators.
Check for slack rope.
Inspection operation switch
Cables
1.
2.
Cables for equipment

a.
The insulation on cables and wires shall contain no halogen and shall
not propagate fire. They shall comply with standard NF F 55-625 or the
equivalent International Standards.
b.
All cables supplied for power, control and instrumentation circuits shall
be of flexible-core type.
c.
Core: class S flexible cores
d.
Core cross-section: 1.5 mm2 at least
Identification and installation

a.
The line used to identify phase lines in power cables shall be in

conformity with the identification of cables in the station.
b.
Each leg of a circuit shall be a single length; there shall be no splices or

joints.
c.
All cables shall carry identification marks at both their ends and
according to their length, all about 15m with the number of cable book.
d.
Conductors and terminals shall carry the numbers indicated on the

various wiring diagrams.
e.
Cable installation:
Cables and wires shall be laid and clamped on hot-galvanized
perforated steel raceways. 220 and 300 mm wide raceways shall be
2.5 mm thick while 165, 105 or 75 mm raceways shall be 1.5 mm thick.
f.
Plastic clamps shall only be used to attach cables to the horizontal floor
of raceways. Bichromate steel clamps shall be used in all other cases.
g.
The Contractor shall grout in all supports required to attach the

raceways. He shall also produce holes and insert sleeves where cables
pass through walls.
h.
Maximum distance between grouted supports (or Spit pegs or sleeves):

1 m.
i.
Maximum distance between clamps: 0.50 m.
j.
Steel conduit tubes may be used for isolated circuits or circuits which
only comprise a few wires or cables (normal and safety lighting). The
wires and cables in each conduit shall fulfil similar functions. The
conduit diameters shall be sufficient to ensure that cables or wires are
not tight in them. Prefabricated elbows are forbidden.
k.
A plastic end-fitting shall be grooved to each end of the tube. The

spacing of clamps shall not exceed 0.60 m.
l.
Cable glands at the entry of cables into lighting units (normal and safety
lighting), junction boxes, boxes and cables (except for main power
Page 27/374

supply cables) shall be in brass and at the bottom of the unit or, if
unavoidable, on its side.
m.
H.
All cables shall enter boxes, safety systems or miscellaneous

equipment via bottom-end cable glands.
3.
Any connections between two adjacent boxes shall be sealed.
4.
There shall be no splices in the boxes or on raceways.
5.
Plastics
No plastic materials shall be used in these systems.
6.
Spare capacity
a.
Multi-core cables used for connection between junction boxes and

auxiliary electrical equipment shall include at least 20% spare capacity.
b.
Terminal strips in junction boxes shall include at least 20% spare

capacity.
c.
Steel conduits and raceways shall not be filled beyond 2/3rds of their
maximum capacity.
Grounding
1.
All metallic frames of equipment and structural sections shall be grounded via
a 25 mm2 copper cable. Spur lines shall be in copper at least 10 mm2 in
section. This circuit shall be connected to a grounding strip.
2.
It shall not be possible to loosen grounding circuit connections without using a

tool.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work

where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal
operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts.
Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding
operators.
C.
Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating

mounts designed to minimize transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby
minimize structure-borne noise from elevator system.
D.
Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by

manufacturers.
E.
Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of

elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible,
Page 28/374

delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce
clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.
F.
Leveling Tolerance: 3 mm, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
G.
Possibly insert paragraphs for other tolerances, such as plumb tolerance for guide
rails and entrance alignments.
H.
Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
I.
Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Delete subparagraph below if push-button stations are shown on plans.

For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators
at center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.
2.
Delete first subparagraph below if jamb-mounted lanterns are used.

Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.
Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 1829 mm above finished floor.
3.2
A.
B.
TESTS
Examination
1.
Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine
rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting
structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.
2.
Delete first subparagraph below if not desired. For the record, prepare a
written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and
conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions and
conditions were found to be satisfactory.
3.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
In-factory testing
1.
In-factory inspections and tests, on-site inspections and the trial runs are all
designed to prepare for acceptance.
2.
Independently of the tests on each elevator, the Contractor shall inform the
Employer, in good time, of the completion of elevator equipment in the
factory. The Employer shall then take measurements and then carry out
checks in the Contractor's workshops. The Contractor shall provide the
acceptance authority with all personnel, drawings, templates, small
measurement instruments, etc., required for the acceptance operations.
Page 29/374

3.
The inspection procedures defined by the Contractors shall be approved by

the Employer.
4.
These procedures shall mainly comprise the following test:

for the first elevators:
a.
Over speed governor and progressive safety gear
b.
Test of the cabin completely assembled with its door
c.
Test of the landing door installed in a reservation prefabricated in
factory
d.
Test of electrical control boxes
e.
Test of winding equipment
for all elevators:

a.
Dimensional checks of all the parts and components.
b.
Checks for compliance with the standards and technical specifications.
c.
Electrical test of control box.
C.
On site testing
1.
Acceptance
a.
After completion of installation work, operational tests shall be carried
out in the presence of representatives of all other Contractors involved.
These tests shall mainly comprise:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
2.
Checks of the conformity of the equipment with the electrical and

mechanical standard
Checks of the conformity of the elevator with the technical
specification
Dynamic tests at different load tests of safety systems
Deceleration measurement of the cabin during the dynamic tests
of the safety brake in over-speed and with 125% of nominal load
Insulation measurement
Transmission of information to the electromechanical
maintenance office and to the station master's office (example :
alarms,...)
All tests and checks requested by the Employer and in particular:
a)
Dynamic tests with 25% overload, in "up" functioning
without any guarantee of speed.
b)
Static test with 200% overload during one hour without any
distortion on the equipment.
Tests of handling iron
b.
The Contractor shall provide the Employer with all tools, test loads and
personnel required to carry out these tests. If the tests are satisfactory,
the certificate of completion of works is signed by both parties.
c.
Otherwise, the Contractor shall take all corrective action necessary.
Provisional Taking Over
Page 30/374

a.
3.3
A.
3.4
At the end of the Experimental Working Period and in view of issuing

provisional taking over, simplified testing of the controls and safety
equipment shall be conducted jointly by the Contractor and the
Employer.
PROTECTION
Temporary Use:
Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one
elevator. Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction
purposes:
1.
Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of
finished car, to protect finishes from damage.
2.
Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames.
3.
Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and
frame faces.
4.
Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as

needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment.
5.
Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
6.
Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include

preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as necessary for proper
elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies
same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
7.
Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence

remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as
required.
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
A.
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide two

year's full maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include
monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator
operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those
used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
B.
Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
C.
Response Time: Two hours or less.
D.
Optional Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from

Installer to Employer, in the form of a standard three-year maintenance agreement,
starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded.
State services,
obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal
options.
Page 31/374

E.
F.
Training of maintenance staff

1.
Training of maintenance staff shall be organised and a training program will

have to be submitted. The training session shall last for one month and
involve 2 engineers.
2.
The training sessions held at the Contractor's premises and those of his
suppliers shall cover, at least:
a.
the elevators,
b.
electrical equipment,
c.
mechanical equipment,
d.
safety rules to be applied for elevators maintenance.
Maintenance of elevators
1.
The maintenance shall involve all work required to keep the elevators
operating correctly throughout their normal in-service period.
2.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, supplies, tools, special tools and
accessories specifics to the devices supplied, measurement and test
equipment required to keep the installations in perfect working order. He shall
also provide the equipment required for the work (torches, lead lights,
ladders, scaffolding, etc.) and all the consumables necessary (oil, rag,
insulators, solder, etc.).
3.
In accordance with the contract, the Contractor shall provide preventive

maintenance services by staff of sufficient technical level to ensure that
maintenance (routine and corrective) can be carried out under satisfactory
conditions.
4.
These maintenance services shall be provided as follows:

a.
a permanent maintenance team (routine and corrective).
Troubleshooting services shall be provided throughout the daily
operating period (times to be defined in agreement with the Employer or
his Representative).
b.
on-call maintenance services
5.
Outside the period when the above maintenance team is available, the
Contractor shall provide on-call maintenance services such that the
Employer, when necessary, can call in a maintenance team by telephone.
6.
In addition, the Contractor shall carry out periodic checks to ensure that
maintenance operations are being performed correctly by the maintenance
staff.
7.
Throughout this period, it shall be possible for the Employer's maintenance

staff to progressively take over the maintenance and troubleshooting of all or
some of the installation, to a degree compatible with the skills they have
acquired. Nonetheless, the Contractor shall still carry full responsibility.
8.
Preventive maintenance operations and systematic inspections shall be

grouped into a typical maintenance program provided by the Contractor.
9.
The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements, imposed by

elevator operating conditions, in carrying out all maintenance work.
Page 32/374

3.5
10.
The OCC shall be informed of the time each elevator stops and returns to
service; this information, together with the type of work carried out, shall be
recorded in a log in the master's station.
11.
In general, work shall be carried out in a way which minimises interference

with operation. The Contractor shall not, during normal hours of service, start
any work which could cause inconvenience to passengers; in particular, he
shall not deposit any equipment in zones accessible to passengers. The
Employer or his Representative shall have the right of decision in this area.
Consequently, the Contractor shall strictly comply with instructions received
from the Employer's staff and these decisions shall in no way relieve him of
any or all of his responsibility for the correct operation of the equipment. The
Contractor shall place sufficient mechanical guards around all holes or access
to elevator shaft, during work to prevent any accidents. He shall leave the
premises perfectly clean after completion of any work.
CHECKS DURING THE GUARANTEE PERIOD
A.
B.
Two years after Provisional Taking Over

1.
A joint inspection of all elevators shall be carried out to check that none of the
reservations made at acceptance remains valid.
2.
An inspection report shall be prepared indicating:

a.
The real availability achieved
b.
Any major problems encountered
At Final Taking Over

1.
Elevators shall be inspected to check that the requirements of the contracts

have been satisfied.
End of section 142100
SECTION 210010 GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR FIRE FIGHTING AND

DETECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
EXTENT OF CONTRACT
The Contract includes the supply, testing, packing for transport, delivery to site, unloading,
installations, connections, final testing and commissioning, handing over in approved working
order and maintenance thereafter for the Maintenance Period shall be in accordance with the
condition of Main Contract, the whole of the Contract Works as detailed hereunder and as shown
in the Contract Drawings.
The work to be carried out under this Contract shall include the whole of the materials and all
necessary labour for the completion of the Contract in every detail ready for continuous operation
whether such be directly mentioned in the Specification or not. The Contract Works including all
equipment shall be suitable for the purpose of the Contract Works.
Page 33/374

B.
OBVIOUS WORK
The Contractor shall include the whole of the works which are described in or implied by the
Contract Document. All matters omitted from the Contract Document, which may be inferred to
be obviously necessary for the efficiency, stability and completion of the works, shall be deemed
to be included in the Contract Price. Also the Contractor shall provided all materials, fittings or
perform any work functioning of the installation, or which is generally provided or performed in
accordance with good accepted trade practice even though such materials or work may not be
explicitly mentioned in the Specification.
Works shown upon the Contract Drawings and not mentioned or described in the Specification
and not shown on the Specification Drawings shall nevertheless be hold to be included in this
Contract, and their execution is to covered by the Contract Price in the same manner as if they
had been expressly shown upon the Contract Drawings and described in the Specification.
C.
SCOPE OF WORK
The following will be provided by the Electrical Contractor:
1.2
1.
The incoming electrical power cables to the starter panels of the fire pumps shall be provided
by the Electrical Sub-Contractor including termination of incoming cables to the starter panels.
The Fire Service Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for extending the power supply and other
accessories thereafter to the respective equipment for necessary control and operation
requirements.
2.
For small power equipment such as sub-indicator board, electrical power supply will be
provided by the Electrical Sub-Contractor terminating as circuit breaker unit, isolating switch,
socket outlets, etc. The Fire service Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for extending the
power supply and other equipment for necessary control and operation requirement.
RELATED WORKS AND DOCUMENT

The work embraced by this Specification covers the supply, delivery on site, installation, testing,
commissioning and maintenance of fire services installation of the building in accordance with this
Specification and associated drawings, and without abrogating the more extensive details described
elsewhere in the Specification and Drawings, including the followings:
A.
Section 211200, FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPE SYSTEMS.
B.
Section,212200, CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS.
C.
Section, 212400, FIRE EXTINGUISHER
D.
Section 215000, STAIRCASE PRESSURIZATION SYSTEMS.
E.
Section 283100, FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEM
F.
Interfacing works with others Trades
G.
Testing & Commissioning
H.
Provision of a maintenance and breakdown service during Defects Liability Period in accordance with
the condition of Main Contract.
I.
Provision of Operating Instruction and Maintenance Manuals and As-Built Drawings
J.
Provision of Spare Parts
K.
Training of the employers staff for proper operation of the entire Fire Protection system
L.
Temporary Fire Fighting System during construction period
Page 34/374

M.
Attend local Fire Authority inspections
N.
All other works and system as specified in the Sub-Contract Document or shown on the Contract
Drawings
1.3
The works and all equipment and materials forming part of this Contract shall comply in all respects
with the latest issues or amendments of the following codes, regulations and standards as applicable.
Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, Industry governmental
organizations apply to applicable work in all sections as noted below.
Equivalent Vietnam Standards (VS) or American Standards specified in this section.
1.
The contractor shall be in compliance with all applicable statutes, laws, orders, judgments and
decrees of Vietnam and any government authority having jurisdiction over the contractors
business or property (the Laws).
2.
In case that any standard or reference not applicable in the Laws is required by the
specification, the contractor shall be deemed to provide with services least substantially
equivalent in quality to the said required standard or reference.
Construction Codes and construction Standards:

A.
B.
TCVN 5738: 2001/ Automatic Fire Alarm System/ Technical Requirements

TCVN 5760: 1993/ Fire Extinguishing System General Requirements for Design,
Installation and Utilization.
C. TCVN 6160: 1996/ Fire Protection/ High Rise Building. Design Requirements.
D. TCVN 7336: 2003/ Fire Protection / Automatic Sprinkler System. Design and Installation
Requirements.
E. TCXDVN 323: 2004/ High rise Apartment Building / Design Standard.
F. TCVN 2622: 1995/ Fire Protection and Protection for Buildings and Structure Design
Requirements.
G. TCVN 4513: 1988/ Internal Water Supply- Design Standard.
H. TCVN 3254: 1989 Fire protection. General safety requirements
I. TCVN 5738: 2001 Auto fire alarm. Technical criteria
J. TCVN 4879: 1989 Fire protection - Safety signs
K. TCVN 6102: 1996 Fire extinguishing media. Foam
L. TCVN 7278-2,3: 2003 Fire extinguishing media. Foam. Part 2,3
M. TCVN 7161-1: 2002 Gaseous fire-extinguishing systems Physical properties and system
design. Part 1: General requirements
N. TCVN 7161-9: 2002 Gaseous fire-extinguishing systems Physical properties and system
design. Part 9: extinguishing media HFC 227
O. TCVN 7026: 2002 Fire extinguishing media. Portable fire extinguishers
P. TCVN 6100: 1996 Fire protection. Fire extinguishing media - Carbon dioxide
Page 35/374

Q. TCVN 6379: 1998 Fire fighting equipment. Fire fighting hydrant, technical requirement
R. TCVN 5739: 1993 Fire fighting equipment. Fittings
S. TCVN 5740: 1993 Fire fighting equipment. Rubber coated fire hose
T. TCVN 3890: 1984 Fire fighting devices and equipment. Installation, storage, checking,
maintenance
U. TCVN 4756 : 1989 Standards of Earth/Air connection for electrical equipments
V. TCVN 6101 1996 Fire protection equipment. Carbon dioxide extinguishing systems for
use on premises. Design and installation
W. TCVN 5040-1990 Fire prevention and protection equipments - Graphical symbols used for
protection schemes - Specifications
X. NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)
Y. International Building Code (IBC), Latest Edition
Z. Loss Prevention Council (LPC)/ Rules and Regulations
AA.
1.4
A.
Clients Insurers
INTERFACE
Interfacing with BMS System
The following shall be provided by the BMS trade (if any):
B.
C.
1.
Signal indication on the BMS for the following status and alarm :
a.
Fire detection and alarm signals from fire detectors and manual call points
b.
Power supply failure alarms for all fire pump
c.
Running signals for all fire pumps
2.
Wiring and interfacing connection for the above signals to the BMS outstations shall be done in
the scope of work of BMS system.
Interfacing with ACMV and Other Auxiliary Systems

1.
The fire alarm will interface with ACMV (air conditioning & mechanical ventilation) and Other
Auxiliary Systems (as mentioned below) through BMS system:
a.
Pressurization for corridor surrounding rooms being gaseous extinguished
b.
Smoke exhaust
c.
Automatic door
d.
Fans of pressurize staircase
e.
Lifts (For lift homing)
2.
The wiring and terminations from the above auxiliary to the BMS panel shall also be done in
the scope of work of BMS system.
Interfacing with outdoor system

1.
The indoor water fire fighting system will interface with the outdoor water fire fighting pipeline.
The Contractor shall have to connect the fire fighting pipelines with the outdoor water fire
fighting pipeline, which is involved in package CP-4.
2.
The pumping station with fire fighting pumps is involved in package CP-4. The fire alarm
system will interface with those pumps via BMS system.
Page 36/374

1.5
DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL
Following site progress on site, the Contractor shall submit fully detailed and dimensioned drawings
showing any necessary builders work required in connection with the Contract together with full
technical information to enable the associated builders work to be coordinated.
A.
SHOP DRAWINGS
Before the work is put in hand, the Contractor shall submit dimensioned shop drawings showing all
details of the equipments, materials, pipes, ducts, etc to be used to the Engineer for his review.
The drawings shall be submitted as soon as possible after the award of the Contract and in any case
in sufficient time to permit renew and approval to be made by the Engineer without delaying the
delivery or installation of the Works. The drawings submitted shall be checked as necessary and, if
requested by the Engineer, re-submitted for final review.
For each submission of drawings, a minimum time defined in the Contract Document shall be allowed
for review of all drawings by the Engineer. Delay caused by late submission of drawings or
modifications of the drawings due to neither repeated errors will under no circumstances be construed
as reasons for extension of the Contract Period. The Engineers review of drawings does not
exonerate the Contractor from any responsibility under the Contract terms and conditions. If the SubContractor required early review of any drawings to avoid delay in the delivery or installation of the
works, he shall advise the Engineers to such effect when submitting the drawings.
B.
OPERATION / MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AS BUILT DRAWINGS

General
The Contractor shall warranty against fault or defect all materials and works under this contract and
maintenance the various fire protection systems for a period of twelve months from the date of issue of
the Certificate of Substantial Practical Completion.
A maintenance schedule setting out the proposed programme of maintenance, inspection and
servicing together with advice of arrangement of prompt attention to emergency call shall be submitted
to and approved by the Architect/Engineer.
Operation/Maintenance Manuals and As Built Drawings

Before reaching the date of Completion of the Contract Works, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for approval, two copies of the original draft of the operation and maintenance manuals and
as built drawings for the whole system.
The operation/maintenance manuals shall comprise an A4 size plastic hard cover, 3-ring binder,
containing the following documents:
a.
A cover giving :
i. The name of the development,
ii. The title of the document
iii. The name and address of the Installation Contractor
b. Inside page giving the similar information to the cover but including contact telephone
number for normal and emergency call
c. Contents page
d. Description of the installation
e. Scheduled details of all equipment and plant
f. Operating instructions including details of any automatic control system
Page 37/374

g. Maintenance and fault finding instructions including composite schedule for routine
maintenance. The maintenance schedule shall include details such as frequency of
servicing, overhauling, replacement, etc.
h. Test reports and commissioning records
i. Recommended spare parts and lubricants
j. List of equipment and plant with manufacturers name and address and local agent, if
applicable
k. Manufacturer' s literature and catalogues/brochures suitably indexed to include shop
drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves, and the like
l. List of as-built drawings
m. All other necessary information for proper maintenance and operation including all
necessary instructions for testing and replacing any part of the system.
n. As-built drawings shall show the complete installation including all necessary details for
the proper maintenance and operating of the system.
o. Upon approval, the Contractor shall submit 4 sets of the approved operation and
maintenance manual, 2 sets of tracings and 1 set of computer drafting diskette of the as
fitted drawings to the Engineer.
C.
MOCK-UPS AND SAMPLES

The Contractor shall construct mock-ups of typical installations of services and common items of
equipment in conjunction with the other trades on site as and when directed by the Engineer for his
review. Mock-ups shall be constructed to ensure proper installation and co-ordination of all services on
site.
Sample of components, fixtures, etc shall where required, be properly labelled, submitted to the
Engineer for his review before commencement of installation work.
The Contractor shall replace or modify such mock-up and samples, if deemed necessary by the
Architect and the Engineer, and such final mock-ups and samples shall be used as the basis of
installation work. Any agreement by the Engineer to such mock-ups and samples does not exonerate
the Contractor from any responsibilities under the Contract terms and conditions.
1.6

A.
Receive and accept materials and equipment at the site; properly handle, house, and protect them
from damage and the weather until installation. Replace equipment damaged in the course of handling
without additional charge.
B.
Arrange for and provide storage space in an area at the job site for all materials and equipment to be
received and/or installed in this project.
C.
Rejection of equipment and materials

Any item of plant or system or component which fails to comply with the requirements of this
Specification in any respect whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at
site may be rejected by the Engineer either in whole or in part as he considers necessary/appropriate
adjustment and/or modification work as required by the Engineer so as to comply the Authority's
requirement and the intent of the specification shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own
expense and to the satisfaction of the Authority Engineer.
After works have been accepted, the Contractor may be required to assist in carrying out additional
performance tests as reasonably required by the Engineer/Employer.
Page 38/374

1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for products furnished under this Contract.
However, such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which
manufacturers and the Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents
(Defect Notification Period).
B.
Guarantee all materials, equipment, apparatus and workmanship to be free of defective materials and
faulty workmanship for at least the Defect Notification Period defined in the Contract documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE SUPPORTS
Piping shall be supported from the building structure which shall support the sum of the load of a
water-filled pipe and a minimum of 120kN applied at the point of hanging.
Vertical pipework shall be supported at intervals at least one per floor level.
When the combined pipe supports are needed, please refer to Mechanical Specification Section
Details of all pipe brackets shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication.
All fixings, pipe brackets, hangers shall be of galvanised steel.
Spacing of pipe brackets/hangers shall comply with the requirements specified on the TCVN
7336:2003.
External Pipe Size
18mm
25mm
32mm
40mm
45mm
57mm
76-114mm
140mm
152mm
219mm
2.2
Max. Distance between Pipe Supports

(Both horizontal/vertical run)
2.5m
3.0m
3.5m
4.0m
4.5m
5.0m
6.0m
7.0m
8.0m
9.0m
PIPES SLEEVES
Pipe sleeves shall be provided and installed by the contractor for casting in where pipes penetrate the
concrete structure.
The minimum clearance between the pipe and sleeve shall not be less than15mm.
Sleeves through fire rated partitions or walls or floor shall be of galvanized wrought iron pipe. The
annular space of pipes sleeves shall be tightly packed with approved fire-rated material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VIBRATION CONTROL
General
Page 39/374

This section of the Specification covers the supply, delivery, installation and testing of noise for
vibration control equipment to be used in the isolation of the various mechanical equipment as called
for in this Specification.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing vibration isolators of the appropriate size and
capacity to meet the specified deflection requirements and are required to follow the instructions from
the manufacturer or vendor of these products.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval product data, including manufacturer's
specifications and installation instructions.
The Contractor shall submit samples of vibration isolators (each type) for the Engineer's approval.
Steel Springs in Series with Neoprene Pads
Unless specified otherwise, spring type isolator shall be unhoused, free standing, laterally stable with
levelling bolts rigidly bolted to inertia blocks/base frames.
All springs shall be mounted with adequate clearance from brackets and shall be clearly in view for
critical inspection.
The springs shall be selected to support the calculated loads with the minimum spring deflections as
specified without being compressed solid, or bridged out, or exceeding the Manufacturer's maximum
rated loads under any operating condition. In the selection of the springs the Sub-contractor shall also
take into account the weight distribution of the equipment under normal operating conditions, weight of
unsupported pipes/ducts and any large dynamic forces due to fluid movement, torque reaction and
starting/stopping.
Inertia Block
Inertia Blocks shall be installed where specified. The mechanical equipment shall be bolted directly on
to the integral concrete inertia blocks.
The base shall consist of a concrete slab cast into a welded steel base frame assembly. Frames shall
be welded steel channels.
Anchor bolts shall be fixed into positions, and housed in steel bolt sleeves to allow minor bolt location
adjustments or alternatively, pocket shall be cast into inertia block to permit the later insertion of
anchor bolts.
A suitable base formed of minimum 10mm plywood or equivalent shall be included for forming the
slab. Steel channel isolator bracket shall be welded directly to channel frames, and suitably located to
accommodate the height of the deflected springs and inertia block clearance with plinth.
There shall be adequate clearance (min 20mm) all around the springs to assure that there is no
contact between any spring and any part of the mounted assembly for any possible alignment or
position of the installed inertia block. The clearance between inertia block and floor/plinth shall be at
least 50mm.
Calculation, sizing and selection of spring isolators and inertia blocks shall be submitted for Engineers
approved prior to installation
Resilient Hangers
Resilient hangars are to be used for resilient suspension of pumping mains pipes.
For specified deflections in excess of 12mm, use spring in series with neoprene type and for
deflections less than 12mm use neoprene in shear type hangars.
During installation, inspection shall be made to ensure that no hangars are compressed, solid or
bridge out, and that the stipulated minimum deflection are achieved.
The first three hangars/supports from all mechanical equipment shall be spring in series with neoprene
types as specified.
Page 40/374

3.2
PAINTING, LABELLING AND FINISHING
Material
All metal parts of the work installed in accordance with this Specification shall be painted with first
quality enamel paints of quality, colours and brands as approved, except for those items exempted
from painting as more particularly described in this section of the Specification.
Paint shall be selected to withstand the temperature of the surface which it is to be applied, and shall
be suitable in all respects for the environmental conditions in which it shall be located.
All paint used shall be of one manufacturer and finishes shall be full gloss unless otherwise instructed.
Before ordering any primer, undercoat and finishing paint, the Sub-Contractor shall submit the colour
scheme for approval.
A.
Equipment
All items of equipment supplied painted ex factory shall be given one finishing coat of full gloss
enamel, except where the manufacturer's standard finish shall be approved.
B.
Exposed Metalwork
All exposed metalwork shall be cleaned from rust, scale, dirt and grease, and shall then be given one
priming coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat of full gloss enamel.
C.
Concealed Metalwork
All galvanised iron surfaces concealed in false ceilings, building ducts and the like shall not be
painted.
All black iron and steel surfaces shall be given one coat of zinc chromate or red lead.
D.
Pipework Identification
Pipework identification shall be painted in letterings of contrasting colours. The letterings shall be in
block letters not less than 15mm high for pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and in block letter not
less than 40mm high for larger pipes.
Direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow painted on the pipe adjacent to its lettered
identification. Arrows shall be 75mm long on pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and 150mm long on
large pipe.
E.
Labelling
All plant and equipment provided under this Specification shall be labeled in English as to duty or
services, all such labelling to correspond to schedules, diagrams, and the like to be provided as part of
the As-fitted Drawings. Labels shall be of Traffolyte with black engraved lettering not less than 20mm
high or as otherwise required and approved.
Manufacturer's nameplate shall generally be provided for all plant and equipment and shall show serial
and model numbers and date of manufacture.
The following refer to specific items (but not be limited to) requiring labelling:
1.
All valves, motor starters, distribution board, gauges, contactors, cable terminals in
switchboards, circuit breakers.
Labels shall be attached to valves (or pipe adjacent thereto) with a light gauge metal band or
alternatively to be screwed to the insulated valve boxes where provided.
Page 41/374

Distribution boards, starters and the like shall be labelled to indicate the circuit number, phase and
item controlled.
Labels shall be screwed or riveted to sheet metal. Adhesive fixing is not acceptable.
Details of exact lettering shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to manufacture.
F.
Painting and Finishing

1.
All paints shall be prepared and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2.
All galvanized metal surfaces shall be properly etch-primed to ensure correct adhesion of the paint to
the surface. Materials for etch-priming shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturers.
Subsequent painting of galvanized surfaces shall comply with this Specification.
3.
Prior to painting, all metallic surfaces except galvanized surfaces shall be thoroughly scraped and
wire brushed as necessary to remove scale, rust and swarf.
4.
When the surfaces to be painted are clean and dry, one coat of primer shall be evenly applied over
the entire area. After surfaces have been primed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer so that an
inspection of the primed surfaces can be made prior to the application of the undercoat and the
finishing coat.
5.
When the priming coating has been completed, one coat of an approved paint undercoat shall be
applied. Before applying the finishing coats, the Contractor shall ensure that the undercoated surface
is rubbed flat and smooth. Finally, two coats of a high gloss finishing paint shall be applied when all
dust has been removed.
6.
Each successive coating shall be completely dry prior to the application of the next coat. The
minimum thickness of each layer of paint shall be 50u.
G.
Cutting away and making good

All builder work that are required to be done as early as possible in order that holes, chases, etc. may
be formed as the building work proceeds.
3.3
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
General
The entire works included in this contract shall be fully tested in stages as the work proceeds and on
completion of work as applicable.
The contractor shall provide during normal working hours, all necessary labour, instruments,
equipment, materials, fuel, power and maker's representatives, to carry out such tests as may be
necessary to satisfy the Engineer that the installation meets the requirement and intent of the
specifications as well as such tests required by the local Fire Authority.
All tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer or his representative or any inspecting
authority. At least five working days notice in writing shall be given to the inspecting parties before
performing any test.
Three copies of all test results shall be submitted to the Engineer in A4 size sheet paper within two
weeks after completion of the tests.
Tests described hereinafter and including all tests prescribed by the Authority having jurisdiction shall
be carried out. Any tests proved unsatisfactory shall be repeated to the satisfaction of the inspecting
parties.
The contractor shall provide skilled technicians/engineers to commission the plant and associated
controls to the satisfaction of the Architect. The technicians/engineers will be required to demonstrate
Page 42/374

the correct procedures in starting and stopping the plant, running the various items of equipment
under automatic and manual control and the correct maintenance of the plant.
A.
On-Site Testing and Commissioning

Two months prior to completion of the Sub-Contract Works, the Contractor shall submit for the
Engineer's approval a detailed program for conducting on-site acceptance tests and commissioning.
The Contractor shall start up, operate, test and adjust the systems in accordance with the agreed
program. The setting shall be supervised by the manufacturer's representative, who shall remain on
site until the equipment is operating satisfactorily and accepted by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall advice and co-ordinate with the manufacturer's representatives so that all testing
is carried out according to the agreed program.
The whole installation shall be given the following tests to bring the plant into running order. The
Engineer shall be given reasonable notice together with a copy of recorded test results, generally not
less than seven (7) days, regarding the nature of tests, the time and location. Acceptance tests will
only be witnessed by the Engineer when the submitted tests results are found satisfactorily.
1.
Hydrostatic Tests
All parts of the pipework shall be filled with water before hydrostatic pressure testing, and pump
running tests for verification of pressure and flow rate, are conducted.
Where any section of pipework or equipments unable to withstand the maximum pipework test
pressure, it shall be isolated during the pipework test then that section of pipework or
equipment shall be retested at the appropriate test pressure.
Before performing the hydrostatic test, the following system component shall be fulfilled:
a.
b.
c.
2.
All isolating gate valves shall be closed.

All hose nozzles shall be opened.
The pump isolating valves shall be opened.
Electrical Tests
Electrical tests shall comply with the current edition of I.E.E. regulations and requirements by
the local Authorities.
Electrical insulation tests, earth electrode resistance test and continuity test shall apply to
busbars, isolators control panels and other equipment and wiring where applicable.
A 500V D.C. instrument shall be used to check the insulation resistance. The reading shall not
be less than 1 mega-ohm in all instances.
3.
System Operating Test

The various systems shall be operated for the following system performance tests:
A.
Indoor Fire Hydrant System
The two topmost indoor fire hydrants when operating simultaneously shall each be able to
deliver at least 2.5 l/s with a jet of 6 meter length.
The maximum operating pressure of each indoor fire hydrant shall not exceed 1500 kPa.
Provide orifice plates to reduce the operating pressure when the maximum pressure is
exceeded.
B.
Fire Alarm System
Every manual call point and detector shall be tested for proper function and efficient
operation by fire alarm simulation tests.
Page 43/374

Approved type gas shall be used to test the response of the smoke detectors by spraying it
on the detector head.
Alarm bells shall be adjusted and tested such that every corner of the building shall be
suitably alarmed by the bells.
Other alarm functions and control functions shall also be tested to confirm satisfactory
operation. Battery charger tests, battery inspections and the like shall be performed.
4.
Statutory Authorities Tests and Inspections

As and when notified in writing or instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall attend all
tests and inspections carried out by Local Fire Authority, Water Authority and other Statutory
Authorities, and shall forthwith execute free of charge any rectification work ordered by the
Engineer as a result of such tests and inspections which determine noncompliance with
Statutory Regulation. Some of these tests may take place after the issue of Practical
Completion of the contract and the Contractor shall make all allowances in this respect.
5.
Final Acceptance Tests

Following commissioning and authorities tests/inspections of the entire installation, and prior to
issue of the Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall carry out final acceptance tests in
accordance with a programme to be agreed with the Engineer.
Should the results of the acceptance tests show the plant, systems and/or equipment fail to
perform to the efficiencies or other performance figures as given in this Specification, the
Contractor shall adjust, modify and if necessary replace the equipment without further payment
in order that the required performance be obtained.
Where acceptance tests are required by the relevant Authorities having jurisdiction, these tests
shall be carried out by the Contractor prior to the issue of Completion Certificate to the
acceptance of the Authorities.
3.4
SITE STAFF/SITE SUPERVISION

The Contractor shall appoint for full-time duties at Site a Project Manager suitably qualified and fully
experienced in the type of work being carried out, who shall manage and administer all of the work of
the Contract on the site on his behalf. Such Project Manager shall familiarize himself with all work
involved in the Contract and keep himself up-to-date with all reports and updating of the construction
works Programme and shall attend all site meetings.
The Contractor shall appoint and maintain at the site a competent Project Engineer who shall be
continuously in charge of the works with a sufficient number of competent supervisors to assist in the
supervision of the works.
In addition to the above personnel the Contractor shall provided adequate back-up staff. The
Contractor shall provide an organization chart and a full detailed list of the site supervisory staff for the
project. This shall include site draughtsman to facilities prompt issue/submission of shop drawings.
The list shall include all relevant details of each staff including his designation, duties, qualifications,
experience, age and length of employment with the Contractor. The provision of the organization chart
and the staff list does not limit the Contractors responsibility with respect to adequate staffing of the
project and should additional staff be considered necessary to supervise the works, the Contractor
shall provide such staff at no extra cost to the Employer.
END OF SECTION 210010
Page 44/374

SECTION 211200- FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPE SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The standpipe system shall be supplied and installed in accordance with standards and local authority
requirements.
B.
The word piping or pipework shall mean all pipes drains, pipe fittings and valves including hangers,
brackets, anchors, expansion devices, sleeves and all accessories connected there for the complete piping
installation.
C.
All material installed shall be brand new. Used material shall not be accepted. Pipes shall have colour
branded
to identify different grades.
D.
All pipework shall be free from burrs, rust and scale and shall be cleaned before installation. All
personnel engaged on welding operations must process a certificate of competence issued by an
acceptable/recognized authority.
1.2
A.
1.3

Requirements in the Contract Document - Chapter II: Employers Requirements shall apply to all work
in this section.
A.
Equivalent Vietnamese Standards (VS) can be substituted for foreign Standards specified in this
section.
B.
All supplies and services offered in response to this specification shall be based on the latest
standards.
1.4
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings, Coordination Service Drawings (CSD), product data, samples and certificates
of compliance required by contract documents.
B.
Prior to any ordering or installation, the Contractor shall furnish the following information for
endorsement
E.
1.5
1. Manufacturer for all pipes and fittings

a.
2. Specification and standard for all pipes and fittings
b.
3. Manufacturers catalogues and technical data.
c.
4. Details of all pipe supports, thrust blocks and anchors,
F.
G.
Page 45/374

1.6
WARRANTY
H.
I.
1.7
J.
SPARE PARTS
a.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE MATERIALS

A.
The drawings indicate the nominal size of pipes and the manner in which the various piping systems
are to be installed. The actual work involving shall be ascertained by the Contractor, who shall coordinate the pipe work installation with the work of other trades and services.
A.
The galvanized pipes and fittings shall be used for working pressure up to the 1,177 kPa. When the
pipe working pressure are needed between 1,177 kPa and 1,962 kPa, Schedule 40, galvanized
pipes and fittings shall be used. Schedule 80 , galvanized pipes and fittings shall be used for working
pressure exceeding 1,962 kPa.
2.2
B.
Fittings
Fittings shall be of galvanized malleable cast iron threaded fitting up to pipe size 50mm and 65mm
and above shall be welded type fittings. And all the Schedule pipes shall be welded type fittings
2.3
Pipe Joints
1.
All screwed joints shall be made in accordance with TCVN 4513: 1988 jointing Compound
carefully selected to suit the type of service.
1.
Sufficient joints shall be provided to ensure that access to equipment for maintenance, removal
and replacement can be affected without dismantling large sections of pipework or adjacent
equipment.
2.
Where pipework is connected to items of equipment having flanged of dissimilar metal to the
pipework, then isolating flanges of proprietary brand shall be used with plastic bolt inserts.No
pipe joint shall be permitted within the thickness of walls or floors, etc.
3.
Pipe unions shall be installed to facilities the future removal of pipework in sections and where
pipework connects to fixed items of plant.
2.
Welding of Ferrous Pipework
4.
The welding procedure and standards must be submitted for approval before any work
commences.
5.
All personnel engaged on the welding operation must possess a certificate of competence
issued by an approved authority. These certificates must be produced for inspection by the
Engineer before any welding is undertaken But welds shall be made using the single V
Page 46/374

principle where the pipe end shall be cut square and beveled with all internal and external burr
removed. Pipes shall be properly aligned before welding is commenced and care shall be
taken during the operation that the weld does not penetrate unduly and restrict the pipe bore.
6.
Branch welds shall be made using manufactured branch fittings accurately profiled to fit the
pipe. The openings in the main shall be correctly shaped to coincide with the branch and both
pieces shall have beveled edges. All burrs shall be removed before welding is commenced and
the branch pipes shall not project into the bore of the main.
7.
The Engineer reserves the rights to order at random the cutting out of 2% of the welded joints
for inspection and testing. Should anyone of the above welds prove faulty in materials or
workmanship, further removal of welds may be ordered up to a total of 4% of the total welded
joints. If the number of welds failing the tests within the above 4% is sufficient to suggest that
an operative is not consistence in his standard, the Architect may order any number of that
operatives welds to be removed. The cutting out and repair of all such welds for inspecting
shall be at the cost of the contractor.
8.
All testing shall be at the cost of the Contractor. Test for each weld are to be recorded and
passed to Engineer in approved form.
2.4 Pipe Supports

C.
Piping shall be supported from the building structure which shall support the sum of the load of a
water-filled pipe and a minimum of 120kN applied at the point of hanging.
D.
Vertical pipework shall be supported at intervals pf (per floor) at least one per floor level.
E.
Details of all pipe brackets shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication.
F.
All fixings, pipe brackets, hangers shall be of galvanised milds steel.
2.5 Pipes Sleeves

G.
Pipe sleeves shall be provided and installed by the contractor for casting in where pipes penetrate the
concrete structure.
H.
The minimum clearance between the pipe and sleeve shall not be less than15mm.
I.
Sleeves through fire rated partitions or walls or floor shall be of galvanized wrought iron pipe. The
annular space of pipes sleeves shall be tightly packed with approved fire-rated material.
2.6 LANDING VALVES
J.
Provide landing valves as indicated on the drawings.
K.
Landing valves shall be provided with a female 65mm diameter instantaneous coupling complete with
cap and chain. Leather strap and lock shall be provided to each landing valve.
2.7 DRAIN VALVE

L.
25mm drain valve at the lowest point of each riser.
2.8 INDOOR HYDRANT SYSTEM

A.
General
M.
The indoor hydrant system shall be supplied and installed in accordance with the technical design and
full compliance with the requirements of the TCVN 4513: 1988.
Page 47/374

B.
Performance Requirements
N.
The maximum operating pressure of each indoor hydrant shall not exceed 686 kPa. Provide orifice
plates to reduce the pressure where the maximum pressure is exceeded.
O.
The galvanized pipes and fittings shall be used for working pressure up to the 1,177 kPa. When the
pipe working pressure are needed between 1,177 kPa and 1,962 kPa, Schedule 40, galvanized pipes
and fittings shall be used. Schedule 80, galvanized pipes and fittings shall be used for working
pressure exceeding 1,962 kPa.
C.
Indoor Hydrant Pipework
P.
Fittings shall be of galvanized malleable cast iron threaded fitting up to pipe size 50mm and 65mm
and above shall be welded type fittings. All schedule pipes shall be welded type fittings
Q.
Upon completion of installation, all indoor hydrant pipework shall be tested for 2 hours to 1.5 times the
maximum working pressure , with not more than 3% drop over the 2 hour period. The test pressure
shall be measured at the lowest point of the system. All tests shall be witnessed and certified by
Employer representative/Engineer.
D.
Water Supply
R.
It is essential that water sources, whatever their type, are able to, simultaneously during 180 minutes,
feed at least two indoor hydrants in the system including the furthest reel, at the minimum flow rate.
Under these conditions the inlet pressure to the furthest hose reel should be at least 0.06 MPa.
S.
For indoor fire fighting system, fire hoses will be installed inside the structures, near exits, staircases,
corridors where they are easily visible and use. All fire hoses are designed assuring their reach for any
of locations of the buildings and structures. Fire hose center is placed at the height of 1.2m from the
floor surface.
T.
Each Fire Hose shall include a 20 m long hose of minimum internal diameter 50 mm, with a 13 mm
internal diameter solid stream nozzle of chromium plated brass / bronze, as detailed on drawing.
U.
Fire hose flow of 2.5 litters/second and pressure assure height of full water column over and equal 6m.
Based on actual architectural features of the buildings and structures, fire hoses are arranged to
assure stamping out any fire occurred at any locations in the buildings and structures, operating radius
of fire hose is up to 25m
E.
Positions
V.
The number and distribution of indoor hydrants should be such that the whole of the floor area is
protected, as per detail on plans.
W.
Wherever practicable, indoor hydrants should be installed in uniform positions, preferably in corridors,
near exits or on staircase landings at each floor level. Indoor hydrants not fitted in recesses should be
wall mounted in such a manner that they do not form an obstruction to means of escape routes.
F.
Recesses
X.
It may be considered desirable for indoor hydrants to be fitted in recesses in order that they do not
form an obstruction or detract from the appearance of the building.
G.
Cabinets
Y.
Cabinets may also be used to contain other fire fighting equipment, provided that the cabinet is of
sufficient size and the equipment does not interfere with the prompt use of the hose. The cabinet door
should open approximately 180 degrees to allow the hose to be run freely in any direction. For service
in some climatic conditions it may be necessary to provide the cabinet with suitable ventilating
openings.
1.
General
Page 48/374

H.
1.
Cabinets shall be equipped with fire alerting devices such as manual call point, flash light, and
alarm bell, surface mounted cabinets shall be of steel plate and prime coat painted corrosion
protected and final coating with red colour painting.(According to the interior design concept will
be changed other colour, but it have to appropriate the Vietnamese regulation & laws).
Lockable cabinets shall be provided with an emergency opening device, which may be
protected only by transparent frangible material. To provide access for inspection and
maintenance, the cabinet shall be un-lockable with a key.
2.
If the emergency opening device is protected by a frangible glass front, it should be of the type
which when broken does not leave jagged or sharp edges which might cause injury when the
emergency opening is operated. Cabinets should be free of sharp edges, which might damage
the equipment or cause injury.
3.
For OCC, Administrative Building and Training Center, each cabinet will be 1250 x750x200mm
red electrostatic painted steel box. It will be equipped with 1 plastic covered fabric fire hose
with diameter of 50mm, 20m long, 1 nozzle with mouth diameter of 13mm and 1 closing valve
DN50. Fire hose, nozzle and 02 powder fire extinguishers MFZL4 and 02 CO2 MT3
extinguishers and 1 quick valve are also placed in this cabinet.
4.
For remaining buildings, each cabinet will be a 600 x500x180mm red electrostatic-painted steel
box. It will be equipped with plastic covered fabric fire hose with diameter of 50mm, 20m long,
1 nozzle with mouth diameter of 13mm. A closing valve Dn50 and a quick valve are also placed
in this cabinet.
Symbols, Marking and Instruction

1.
Identification Symbol
5.
a.
The indoor hydrant cabinet shall be marked with the symbol according to Council directive
92/58/EEC.
The symbol may have a luminescent surface.
2.
Marking
6.
The indoor hydrant shall be marked with the following information:

a. Suppliers name or trade mark, or both.
b. Number of this TCVN-standard; TCVN 4513: 1988
c. Year of manufacture,
d. Maximum working pressure,
e. Length and bore of hose,
f. Nozzle diameter (marked on the nozzle).
3.
Instructions for Use
7.
Indoor hydrant assemblies shall be provided with full operational instructions for display on or
adjacent to the hose reel.
4.
Installation and maintenance Instructions
8.
The supplier shall mark available an installation and maintenance manual for the indoor
hydrant.
I.
Notices
Z.
If the indoor hydrants are located in recesses to which doors are fitted, the door (whether glazed or
otherwise) should be indicated by the relevant sign conforming to meet the requirements of the Fire
Brigade and Statutory Authorities, also where the location of a hose reel is not obviously apparent
from all viewing angles similar signs be provided.
AA.
The main stop valve controlling the water supply to the indoor hydrants should be indicated by a
permanent notice FIRE SUPPLY DO NOT TURN OFF.
Page 49/374

BB.
All notices should be of such a size so they are easily readable all the time. They should be made so
that they are not unreasonably affected by weathering or by corrosion caused by industrial processes
in the vicinity.
CC.
Notices shall be written either in Vietnamese and English.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPEWORK INSTALLATION
A.
All pipework shall be installed to meet structural, architectural, and functional conditions and shall not
interfere with the work of other trades.
B.
Care shall be taken to ensure neat and workmanlike appearance as well as true alignment and grade.
C.
Every care shall be taken to prevent air pockets in pipework.
D.
Pipes stored at site or installed shall have their ends closed with a metal cap or plugged with a
wooden plug to prevent any ingress of debris or wherever possible.
Page 50/374

SECTION 212200 CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHGING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The Contractor shall furnish all engineering and design changes for a complete fire detection/HFC227ea gas suppression system, including charged HFC-227ea gas storage cylinders, nozzles, control
panel, detectors, wiring, annunciators, alarm and all other equipment required for a complete HFC227ea gaseous fire protection system.
B.
Major system components shall be produced by a well-established HFC-227EA gas systems

manufacturer, and be installed by an authorized distributor of such systems, certified for the design,
installation and service of HFC-227EA gas Suppression Systems.
C.
The Contractor shall provide all engineering design and materials for a complete fire detection/HFC227EA gas suppression system, including HFC-227EA gas storage cylinders, nozzles, control panel,
detectors, wiring, annunciators, alarm and all other equipment necessary for a complete operational
system.
D.
System Description
1.2
1.
The system shall be an HFC-227ea gas total flooding fire suppression system designed to
provide a uniform concentration of HFC-227EA gas for the protected areas.
2.
The amount of HFC-227ea to be provided shall be the amount required to obtain a uniform
minimum concentration as required by the design manual for 10 seconds.
3.
Take into consideration such factors as un-closable openings (if any), undown time of fans,
time required for dampers to close (and requirements for any additional dampers), and any
other feature of the facility that could affect concentration. The design concentration shall be
10.5% by volume at 20
4.
Cross-zoned or counting zone fire detection:
1.
Either counting zone detection circuits or cross-zoned detection circuits shall automatically
actuate the HFC-227EA gas system. Fire detectors shall optical smoke detectors and rate of
rise heat detectors as decribed under section 283100 Fire detection & alarm system. The
detectors shall be alternated throughout the protected area with the system requiring two
detectors in alarm prior to automatic agent release.

A.
Related documents
1.
1.3
Requirements in the Tender document - Chapter II.1: General requirements shall apply to all
work in this section.
A.
section.
B.
standards.
Page 51/374

C.
This installation shall be made in strict accordance with the drawings, specifications and applicable
appropriate standards.
D.
Design and installation of the fire detection/HFC-227EA gas suppression system shall be in strict
accordance with the following guidelines and regulatory agencies:
1.
TCVN 7161-1: 2002
:
Gaseous fire-extinguishing systems Physical
properties and system design. Part 1: General
requirements
2.
TCVN 7161-9: 2002
:
Gaseous fire-extinguishing systems Physical
properties and system design. Part 9: extinguishing
media HFC 227
3.
TCVN 5760: 1993
requirements for
1.4
:
Fire extinguishing system - General
design, installation and use
SUBMITTALS
A.
The Contractor shall submit the following for approval within the time defined in the Contract document
to the Engineer. Materials and equipment information shall include data sheets for each component or
device used in system. This shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
Detectors
2.
Manual discharge switches
3.
Control Panel - intelligent gas control panel
4.
Release devices
5.
Alarm devices
6.
HFC-227EA gas storage cylinders
7.
Mounting brackets
8.
Discharge nozzles
9.
Abort stations
10.
Piping isometrics
11.
Flow calculations
12.
The Contractor shall also submit the following information :
13.
Outlining the warranty of each component or device used in the system,
B.
Outlining the operation and maintenance procedures that will be required with the HFC-227EA gas
system. This information shall explain any special knowledge or tools the Employer will be required to
employ, and all spare parts that should be readily available.
C.
Floor plans showing the locations, piping, point-to-point wiring and other details as required and may
be necessary. Elevations, cross sections and other details shall be drawn to scale as required.
Isometric pipe work layouts shall be provided. In addition, point-to-point electrical layout drawing shall
be provided.
Page 52/374

D.
Sequence of operation, electrical schematics and connection diagrams shall be provided to completely
describe the operation of the HFC-227EA gas system controls.
E.
Elevations, cross sections and other details shall be drawn to a larger scale as required.
F.
Isometric piping layouts shall be provided with the shop drawings.
G.
In addition, point-to point electrical layout drawings shall be provided.
H.
The sequence of operation, electrical schematics and connection diagrams shall be provided to
completely describe the operation of the HFC-227EA gas system controls.
1.5

A.
B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
Activation of any fire detector in any detection zone, shall :

1.
Cause a first-stage alarm
2.
Energize a lamp on the activated detector and control panel (and graphic annunciator, if
included)
Activation of a second fire detector shall:

1.
Transmit an alarm signal to remote monitoring or building alarm panel
2.
Cause a second-stage (pre-discharge) alarm to operate
3.
Operate auxiliary contacts for air conditioning shutdowns, and automatic dampers
4.
Initiate a programmable time delay (HFC-227EA gas release)
Upon completion of the Time Delay the HFC-227EA gas system shall:
Page 53/374

2.2
1.
Cause a discharge alarm to be activated
2.
Operate auxiliary contacts for emergency power off of all electrical equipment (excluding
lighting and emergency circuits for life safety).
3.
Activate visual alarms (strobe) at protected area entrance.
4.
Energize control solenoid for HFC-227EA gas cylinders releasing gaseous agent into the
protected area.
MAIN COMPONENTS
A.
Fire Detectors
Optical type smoke detectors and rate of rise heat detectors shall be located as indicated on the
drawings. Detectors shall be connected together with each space to provide two zones of protection.
Both zone shall additionally connect to detectors in both ceiling and floor voids where applicable.
B.
Remote Indication Panels

Remote status indication panels shall be located as detailed on drawings. Remote panels shall display
lamps indicating system manual, automatic or discharged conditions.
C.
Manual Release Units

Manual release units shall be located as indicated on drawings. Manual release unit casings shall be
coloured YELLOW and shall be inscribed with the lettering, HFC-227EA GAS MANUAL RELEASE
POINT Mounting heights for manual release units shall be agreed on site.
D.
Fire alarm bell

Fire alarm sounders shall be located as indicated on drawings. First stage alarm bells shall be
coloured RED. Second stage alarm shall be a combined electronic sounder and xenon beacon unit.
Mounting heights for the sounders shall be agreed on site
E.
Remote Light Unit

Remote lamp units shall be provided to give indication of an activated smoke detector within a ceiling
of floor void.
F.
Air Conditioning Shutdown Relay

An air conditioning shutdown relay shall be provided to shut down air conditioning on receipt of a first
stage fire signal.
G.
Power Distribution Unit Shutdown Relay

A PDU shutdown relay shall be provided to shut down the PDU on receipt of a second stage fire
signal.
H.
Building Link Relay
E.
A Building Link Relay shall be provided to interface the HFC-227EA gas system and the Building Fire
Alarm System.
2.3
AUXILIARY COMPONENTS
A.
Double action manual releasing units shall be provided at each exit of the protected area, and shall,
when activated, immediately discharge HFC-227EA gas and cause all audible and visual alarms to
activate. In addition, it shall cause immediate shutdown of air and power circuits. Abort units shall be
provided a each exit of the protected area and shall, when operated, interrupt the discharge of HFC-
Page 54/374

227EA gas and emergency power-off functions. The abort units shall be momentary devices (deadman) requiring constant pressure to maintain contact closure.
F.
Note: Manual Releasing unit activation shall override any abort unit.
B.
A Graphic annunciator shall be provided at the control panel location. The graphic annunciator shall
be provided by the equipment manufacturer in an approved NEMA enclosure with keyed faceplate.
The graphic annunciator shall display the entire HFC-227EA protected area and shall indicate each
fire detector and its proximity. Detectors, when activated, will individually annunciate at the graphic
annunciator as follows:
Ceiling Detector :
2.4
Red
LED
GAS CONTROL PANEL

A.
An intelligent gas control panel shall be provided where indicate on the drawings. The panel shall be
of rigid construction, and shall be capable of being either surface mounted or semi-recessed. The
panel fascia shall be equipped with an LCD display and light emitting diodes to indicate fire, fault and
operational status, together with push action switches to control functions. The operation of the
switches shall be accessed via a keypad. The following components shall be provided on the control
panel fascia;
1.
LCD Text Display
2.
Silence Alarm Switch
3.
Test Evacuate Alarm Switch
4.
Alarm Silenced Lamp
5.
Isolate Remote Signal - Switch and Lamp
6.
System Genera Fault - Lamp and Buzzer
7.
Buzzer Silence
8.
Power on Lamp
9.
Lamp Test Switch
10.
Extinguishing System Automatic Mode - Lamp
11.
Extinguishing System Manual Mode - Lamp
12.
Manual/Automatic Mode - Push Switch
B.
Isolate Extinguishing Release Circuit - Switch and Lamp
C.
A Sealed lead acid battery shall be provided within the intelligent HFC-227EA gas control panel to
provide 24 hour of panel operation, and half hour under alarm condition.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A.
All wiring associated with the system shall be fire resistant, CR1-C1 type. Cable sheath shall be ireRed. Cables shall generally be either clipped to structural so-fit, slab, walls or timber ceiling rafters.
Page 55/374

3.2
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
A.
All Mechanical Pipework and fittings downstream of the pressure-reducing orifice shall be Schedule
80, galvanized pipes. Pipes shall be seamless and shall comply with appropriate standards or
equivalent materials specifications. Fittings shall comply with the requirements of appropriate
standards or equivalent materials specification. All pipe work shall be banded with a priority band at a
minimum of every 3 metres and where pipe work passed through walls, etc.
B.
Pipework shall be non-combustible and able to withstand the expected pressures and temperatures.
Threaded steel pipe work and fittings, except those complying with appropriate standards or
equivalent materials specification shall be galvanized inside and out. The laying out of fittings at
branch connections or other fixed points of the system shall be such as to follow provision for
movement without causing undue stress on the pipework. Pipework shall be arranged to reduce the
stain due to expansion on all equipment. The fire suppression system specialist shall clean all
completed pipe work, fittings, support steelwork and brackets. The grade of stainless steel, copper
and copper alloy should be chosen in consultation with the manufacturer, with regard to the duty to be
performed. For high-pressure systems, container and valve manifolds shall be hydraulically tested at
the manufacturer works to a minimum pressure of 2,250 kPa. The Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with a test certificate for this.
C.
All fittings shall be of the same size as the line in which they are installed.
D.
Fittings should be painted externally, after installation, with a zinc-based paint.
E.
Pipe and fittings shall be free of burrs, spelter and rust. Stainless steel, copper and copper alloy pipe
and fittings for high pressure and low pressure systems shall comply with applicable standards or
equivalent materials specification.
F.
For closed sections of pipe, fittings shall be compliant appropriate standards;
G.
For open ended pipe, fittings shall be compliant appropriate standards;
H.
For closed systems of pipe, flanges shall be of forged carbon steel, raised face, complying with
compliant appropriate standards.
Page 56/374

SECTION 212400 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
Work in this Section includes the providing of materials, equipment and services necessary for a
complete and safe installation in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable codes and
authorities having jurisdiction for the fire extinguisher.
A.
section.
B.
standards.
1.3
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4

A.
B.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.6
SPARE PARTS
G.
Page 57/374

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
All Fire Extinguishers shall be installed appropriately as indicated on plans, and shall be from the
same manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. They shall meet the requirements of TCVN 5760:
1993.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER TYPES

The following fire extinguisher sizes shall be installed, unless otherwise specified:
A.
Type A:
Wall mounted 4 kg ABC Dry Chemical MFZ4 Fire Extinguishers shall be installed at each levels of
the building. This type of extinguisher shall have a minimum UL rating of 4A: 60-B:C
B.
Type B:
Wall mounted 3 kg Carbon Dioxide MT3 Fire Extinguishers shall be installed in or adjacent to all
transformer, switchgear and other major electrical distribution equipment, all elevator rooms and
mechanical rooms. This type of extinguisher shall have a minimum UL rating of 4A: 60-B:C
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Each fire extinguisher shall be suitably installed for upright instantaneous operation.
3.2
Wall extinguishers shall be mounted 1m above the floor level. Suitable hangers or brackets shall be
provided.
3.3
The necessary operation, maintenance and reloading instructions shall be clearly displayed
permanently on the body.
Page 58/374

SECTION 215000 STAIRCASE PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
This Section includes all labour, materials and accessories for the complete performance of Staircase
pressurization system in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.

A.
1.3
Related documents
1.
Requirements in the Tender document - Chapter 2: General requirements shall apply to all
A.
section.
B.
standards.
1.4
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5

A.
B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
Page 59/374

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
The staircase pressurization system is equipped for the OCC and Administrative building. In case of
fire the pressure in the staircase will be remained by supply fans, which shall be capable of operating
effectively at 250C for 2 hours. Under fire condit ion, the supply fan run at high speed of their rated
capacity.
The mode of activation shall be provided as below:
A.
automatically by BMS system when it received alarm signal from fire alarm system
B.
by remote manual activation available to firemen at the BMS control panel.
C.
manually activated at the remote fan control panel
2.2
Provide volume control dampers at all shaft wall discharge opening. Where supply duct are not within
their fire compartmented space, provide 2 hour fire rating to the duct internally and externally for the
respective portion.
2.3
All hard wiring, relays and control cabling shall be included in this contract for the complete operation
of the system as described. Voltage free contacts shall be provided to allow for connection of the IBS,
to facilitate monitoring of the status(running/off/fault) of each fan in the system
2.4
Power supply shall be taken from the emergency supply provided at the control panel as indicated on
the drawings.
2.5
All fire signal will be made available on the main fire alarm panel in the OCC control room. This signal
will be distributed to the BMS system. After that the BMS system will send command to stair
pressurization fans control panels.
The pressurization fans, which included in scope of HVAC system, will be activated when:
2.6
A.
there is a fire condition
B.
manually activated from the BMS control panel
C.
manually activated at the remote fan control panel
The system shall be extensively tested and adjusted as necessary to ensure that a velocity of at least
1 m/s is achieved with the lowest stair door open, and any two consecutive upper floors doors open.
When all doors are closed, the pressure in the stair shall be maintained not less than 20 Pa in
accordance with the TCVN 6160:1996, and the force to open any door shall not exceed 110N when
measured by a spring balance at the handle. All door mechanisms shall be properly adjusted.
o
The supply fans shall be capable of operating effectively at 250 C for 2 hours.
The detailed specification of the pressurized fans is mentioned in design of HVAC system and in
Section 233400 Mechanical Ventilation System.
Page 60/374

SECTION 283100 FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The scope of works shall includes design supply, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance
during guarantee period of conventional fire alarm system as specified herein and as indicated in the
related drawings. The system shall consist of but not limited to the following:
B.
Stand alone conventional fire alarm control panel, fire alarm panel/with LCD screen, optical smoke
detectors, rate of rise heat detectors, duct mounted detectors, line isolators, various addressable
interfacing modules, manual fire alarm stations or break glass call points, fire alarm bells and flash
lights, power supplies, etc...
C.
The contractor shall coordinate through BMS system in order to interface the fire alarm system with
the following systems:
1.
HVAC system
2.
Fire fighting System
3.
Elevator controls
4.
Emergency lighting system
5.
Security Access Control System
6.
Public Address System
7.
Integration with BMS system
D.
The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labour, equipment,
materials, and performances of all operations in connection with the installation of the Fire Alarm
system as shown on the drawings and as herein specified for the related items.
1.2

A.
Related documents
1.
B.
The work covered by this section of the specifications is to be coordinated with the related work as
specified elsewhere under the project specifications.
1.3
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.
The fire detection and alarm system, wired in zones, using automatic smoke/heat detectors and nonbreakable manual call point shall be provided in accordance with the relevant Vietnamese Standard or
other internationally recognized standards approved by the Employer's Representative.
D.
Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under
requirement of these specifications shall conform to latest publications or standard rules of the
following:
1.
Vietnam regulations for electrical installation works
2.
Local standards or requirements
Page 61/374

All equipment proposed and planned for use must have proper listing and/or approval from the
nationally recognized agencies listed below:
-
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
TCVN 5738 Automatic fire alarm system Technical Requirements
NFPA 70 and 72
The cables used for fire alarm system shall meet the following standards:
-
IEC 331
Fire Test
IEC332-3
Flame Propagation
IEC754-2
Acid Gas Emission Test
All the equipment shall operate reliably under the following environmental conditions:
1.4
Ambient Temperature:
-10 to +60 C
Relative Humidity Max.:
10 to 100%
QUALITY CONTROL / ASSURANCE

A.
1.5
The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification is to be provided by a
representative or by a certified distributor of the manufacturer, who has been engaged in production of
this type of software driven equipment for at least ten (10) years and has an authorized representative
in Vietnam.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Manufacturers Technical Data
C.
During the time of the contract and before substantial completion of the electrical installation,
submit to three (3) copies of descriptive literature, technical data, maintenance recommendations
(from the
equipment manufacturer), catalogues etc
D.
Installation Instructions
E.
F.
G.
Submit the complete manufacturers installation instructions of all the products used.
Calculations
Forward calculations and data for battery sizing calculations for the power supply.
H.
Interfacing details
I.
Details of interfacing with the various systems indicated in item 1.1 description of work and
sequence of operation in case of alarm activation/fire situations, cause and effect program shall be
submitted for review / approval
J.
The contractor shall obtain approval from the local civil defence authority having jurisdiction for
the
fire alarm system installation for any changes that may be made to the original drawings as
approved
for the project. Detailed shop drawings shall be prepared and submitted for approval
prior to
submission to the Local Civil Defence Authority. All shop drawings shall be approved
by the Local
Civil Defence Authority prior to proceeding with the works.
K.
Shop drawings
L.
Shop drawings shall include, without being limited to, the following drawings prepared
specifically
for
this Works:
Page 62/374

1.
Overall system diagrams complete with catalogue numbers and wiring information. Identify
components, terminations and connections to agree with the identification used in the panels,
boxes and equipment.
2.
Front views of fire panels and mimic panels, showing lights, switches, manual call points,
detectors and other devices, identified to agree with the diagrams.
3.
As-built layouts marked on a set of building plans indicating panels, detectors, alarm bells,
flash lights, signals, and conduit routes, wiring information, junction boxes and pull boxes.
M.
On completion of the installation and testing, submit to the 3 copies of all shop drawings, diagrams,
operating instructions and descriptive literature, assembled in loose leaf binders and identified by
Works.
N.
Special testing tools list and spare parts recommended for 1 year
O.
Provide necessary training for the staff on the system installed by trained personnel of the supplier by
the systems manufacturer.
1.6

A.
B.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Conform to General Requirements for Fire alarm & Detection System
B.
Furnish and install a complete analogue Fire Alarm system as described herein and as shown on the
plans to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition.
1.
The system consist of 2 main zoning fire alarm control panels located in the 2nd floor of the
administrative building as shown on the related drawings. At each other buildings there is 1
repeater fire alarm panel.
2.
The repeater fire alarm panel shall provide a local control for the system in the related zone
where the panel is installed while the command centre shall provide control for the complete
system.
Page 63/374

2.2
3.
A 30-channel main fire alarm panel shall supervise the OCC (N1), administrative building (N2),
training center (N14), and it will also supervise the fire alarm of gaseous fire fighting system
HFC - 227ea.
4.
A 50-channel fire alarm panel shall supervise all of Works Train Workshop (N4), Washing
Machine Area and Technical Room (N5), Pit Wheel Lathe Building (N7), Light, Heavy and
Bogie Overhaul Maintenance Workshop (N8-11), Overhaul Maintenance Workshop (N12),
Traction Sectioning Technical Room (N13), Track Maintenance Workshop (N15), Wayside
Equipments Maintenance Workshop and General Material Store (N17,19), Hazardous Product
Storage (N20), Lighting & Power Substation (N21), Lighting & Power Substation and Traction
Rectifier Substation (N21b,22,24), Signaling Equipments Room and Industrial Water Treatment
Plant (N23,27), Drivers and Cleaners Staff Rooms (N28,29), Staff Canteen (N31)
5.
Normal Operation: Under normal supervisory conditions the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be
silent and display the time, day-of-week, and date on the top line of the visual display. Loss of
operating power shall result in an audible trouble signal, which shall be silence able. Alarm
notification shall be as specified herein.
6.
System Trouble Detection: When a trouble condition is detected the following functions shall
immediately occur. The system internal audible device shall sound. Acknowledgement of the
trouble condition shall silence only the internal audible device.
7.
The alarm bell and flash light circuits shall be programmed in the control panel.
8.
The fire alarm system will be linked with the BMS system through contactors based the modes
On/Off (for zones)
9.
In case of an alarm, the bell shall ring and the flash light shall be switched on as indicated
above. Through the control of BMS system, the AHUs and related power lines in the related
fire zone shall be switched off.
10.
The (AHUs) Air handling units shall be indirectly interlocked with the fire alarm control panel for
tripping purpose during fire condition through BMS system.
11.
The system shall be interlocked through BMS system with the public address system to initiate
a pre-recorded message announcement.
12.
The system shall be interlocked through BMS system with the security access control system
to release the door locks in case of fire, however exact sequence of operation/control shall be
to approval.
13.
The system shall also interface through BMS system with elevator control system; sequence of
elevator recall in case of alarm activation shall be programmed in accordance with
requirements and to their approval.
14.
Following verification, the Fire alarm panel will activate the following:
a.
A mimic map with flash light shall indicate all applicable information of fire zoning.
b.
Flash lights in the panel shall indicate the zones of the alarm
c.
Sound alarms in the zone of incidence and the entire building or all main plant areas.
d.
Staircase pressurization system and smoke extract fans in the affected zone.
e.
Open smoke extract dampers in the floors of alarm and close extract dampers on all
other floors.
f.
Shut down ventilation systems.
g.
Release doors on door hold open devices.
h.
Initiate lift recall. If the ground floor lift lobby smoke detector has operated, the lifts will
be recalled to an alternate floor (level 1 or as required by the fire brigade).
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

A.
Main alarm panels (FAP)

1.
The fire alarm panel is located in Signaling technical Room at 2nd floor of the Administrative
building (N2), where staffs are available all the time (24/24 hours). The FAP will be arranged on
the wall and it is from 1.2m to 1.5m from the floor surface to panel center. FAP receives ins and
Page 64/374

outs and handles all signals originated from fire detectors and manual call point. For large and
important Works, in order to have timely and precise operation of fire alarm system for quick
and effective fire control, fire alarm panel with multiple controlling zones at high risk of fire
within the Works is suggested to use.
2.
Each control area will be available with one Zone in FAP. Based on use aim of the Works,
2 FAP with at least 50 and 30 zones is suggested to use. This panel has quite advanced
software which can receive and handle all fire signals of different zones.
3.
The FAP shall monitor and control fire detection devices. It shall be equipped with a mimic
panel (panel printed with map), which shall indicate fire location with lights. In order to facilitate
identification of fire location, the fire protected areas shall be defined in accordance with the
requirements of the fire codes. They will divide it into zones based on fire zoning.
4.
FAP shall provide audible and visual alarms. FAP shall be capable of detecting the fire zone
and providing signal (audible and visual alarms). The system shall be able to perform tests
either on the complete system or on an individual zone, and shall be able to maintain the full
function of the zone not being tested.
5.
As signal appears from detectors of one zone or many zones, FAP will decipher and transmit
signals via fire alarm and signal light indicating fire zone (the panel may decipher and transmit
signals immediately or keep signals for checking depending on types of fire detectors.
6.
Beside fire alarm function, FAP shall give indication of troubles via signals differing from fire
signals. Specifically, in case of false information from fire detectors, short circuit, or trouble of
the panel, sound and indicator light will be transmitted on the panel as well as fire alarm and
fire-warning light in different floors.
7.
8.
Technical specifications of fire alarm panel:
No.
Technical specifications
Allowed values
50-channel center
30-channel center
AC 220V 50/60Hz
AC 220V 50/60Hz
- Direct current
DC 24V
DC 24V
Zones
50 zones
30 zones
30 detectors/zone
20 detectors/zone
No limit
No limit
10K
10K
24 VCD
24 VCD
Automatic
Automatic
Origin country
Working voltage
- Alternative current
Number of detectors in 1 one zone :

4
- Optical smoke detectors

- Rate of rise heat detectors
Terminal resistance
Alarm voltage
System operation control
Page 65/374

8
B.
Environmental climate condition
0 C 50 C
o
0 C 50 C
o
Repeater fire alarm panel (RFAP)

1.
The repeater fire alarm panels with 5-10 channel shall be located in workshop as indicated in
drawings.
2.
Except the number of channels, the others parameter of the repeater panels shall be the same
as main fire alarm panels described above.
Page 66/374

2.3
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
A.
Fire detectors
1.
Fire detectors shall be conventional type detectors.
2.
Detector types shall be selected based on the characteristics of various occurrences.
3.
The automatic fire detectors shall be fixed to the installation by mean of plug-in bases.
4.
Each type of conventional detector shall have a common mounting base. Detector removal
shall display a signal to the FAP.
5.
The detector-mounting base shall be of the twist/lock type.
6.
Signal in rate of rise heat detectors only disappears upon confirmation of receipt and reset in
panel.
7.
Fire detectors shall be UL Listed.
8.
Fire detectors shall be able to transmit alarm signal to the FAP through zoning wire and RFAP
panels.
9.
Smoke Detectors
a.
Smoke detectors shall be of conventional optical type smoke detectors using the
photoelectric technology.
b.
Optical smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting smoke from fires.
c.
Optical smoke detectors shall be of the spot type activated by the change in scattered
light inside a sampling chamber, caused by the larger smoke particles.
d.
Smoke detectors are installed in areas subject to protection, less 0.3m far from the
ceiling including dimension of smoke detector and not over 5m from the wall, distance
between smoke detectors are not over 10m.
e.
These are optical smoke detectors with high sensibility, operated by photoelectric effect.
1 Led light generating infrared rays and 1 photoelectric Diod Xilic receiving infrared rays
are available in smoke collecting chamber of smoke detector. Normally, photoelectric
Diod receives no infrared rays generated from Led light. As smoke spreads smoke
collecting chamber, smoke particles will reflect infrared rays in different directions, one
of radioactive rays will go to photoelectric Dioc. The more dense smoke is the more
radioactive rays are, it means photoelectric Diod receives more infrared rays. As smoke
density reaches 10% upward, fire-warning light received by Diod will be suffient for
current connection, signal transmittal to fire alarm panel.
10.
Heat Detectors
a.
Heat detectors shall be conventional rate of rise type heat detector.
b.
Rate of rise heat detectors shall be capable of self restoring and providing rate of rise
and fixed temperature sensing.
c.
Each detector shall have 2 levels of triggers, one to warm a potential risk of fire and one
to warm in case of high temperature. They can be used to detect the rapid build-up of
excessive temperatures. Rate-of-rise heat detectors shall respond as soon as the rate
of change in the ambient temperature surrounding the detector exceeds the trigger level
(10C/minute). Fixed temperature sensor shall be ac tivated as soon as the ambient
temperature exceeds a preset temperature limit (60C).
d.
The temperature sensing elements and circuitry of the heat detectors shall be coated
with epoxy resin to provide environmental protection.
11.
Technical specifications of fire detectors:
No.
Technical Specifications
Working voltage
Current strength in security status
Heat detectors
Smoke detectors
DC 24V
DC 24V
40 A
35 A
Page 67/374

Protection area of detectors at the
height (h) of one floor of the structure:
3
- h < 3.5 m
60m
100m
- 3.5 m h 6 m
40m
80m
Distance from detectors to the height

(h) of one structure floor:
4
- h < 3.5 m
- 3.5 m h 6 m
5m
10m
3,5m
8,5m
2.5m
5m
2m
4m
2 lines
2 lines
Distance from detectors to wall at the

height of 1 floor:
5
- h < 3.5 m
- 3.5 m h 6 m
6
B.
Signal line
Manual call points, fire-warning lights, fire alarm bells

1.
The operation of any manual call point (MCP) connected to the system shall cause the station
FAP to enter the ALARM state within three seconds.
2.
MCP shall be manufactured in bright red compliant material, measuring 85 x 85mm with 50mm
overall depth. Operation shall be via a plastic membrane (non breakable) with wording on
method of operation in white lettering. The MCP cover shall be etched in black lettering in
Vietnamese and English "FIRE", the lettering measuring 10mm high.
3.
Where MCP are mounted externally, in outside weather or where intrinsically safe operation is
required, an MCP rated to IP 66 shall be utilized.
4.
MCPs shall be positioned at a height of 1.3m at strategic points such that they are clearly
visible from front and sides as practicable.
5.
Fire-warning lights shall be flash light type.
6.
Fire-warning lights and alarm bell shall be conform with the Vietnamese regulation.
7.
Technical specifications of fire alarm, fire-warning lights and manual call points:
8.
Allowed Values
N
Technical Specifications
Fire alarms
Colour
Working voltage
Current
Fire-warning lights
Manual call points
Red
Red
Red
24 VDC
20-30VDC
24 VDC
8 mA
155 mA(3.7W) in 24V
0,2 A
Page 68/374

0
Environment temperature
Alarm level
Normal
Sound strength
90 dB
C.
-20 C +60 C
-20 C +60 C
0
-10 C +50 C
Exit lights and emergency lightings

1.
General
2.
An emergency and escape lighting system shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements of the technical design, local authorities, Vietnamese regulation and
internationally accepted practice.
3.
Technical Requirements
a.
The minimum levels of illumination (2 lumen/m) shall be maintained during the failure
of the normal supply of electricity, for a period of two hours.
b.
Self-contained battery lighting shall be provided for the emergency lighting for the
indoor area of all the other buildings, workshop, areas and facilities of the Depot.
c.
Sealed lead acid type battery type with a minimum of 30 minutes capacity shall be
provided for each self contained emergency light fitting to supply the connected lamp
load. Battery charger shall be included to recharge the full discharged battery to full
charge within twelve hours.
d.
Automatic transfer switch shall be provided to transfer the supply to the light fitting from
normal supply to battery supply.
e.
TEST switch and AC ON indicator light shall be included in the self-contained
emergency light fitting. They shall be operable and visible from outside the assembled
luminaries.
f.
Throughout the discharge period, the lumen output of the luminaries shall not be less
than 40% of those under mains supply condition.
D.
Linkage system
E.
The system comprises of spare parts, signal lines, signal cable, terminal box and other parts to form
united linkage line of equipments of fire alarm system.
F.
Power source
G.
Main power source for the system is taken from power grid 230VAC of the Works and supplied from
central panel. In order to assure continuous operation of fire alarm system upon power failure or fire
occurrence, stand-by Accu source with capacity sufficient for continuous operation of the system even
in case of power failure of the grid is suggested to use.
H.
Type of Cables
1.
Fire resistant cables complying with IEC Standards shall be used for the wiring of the fire alarm
system.
2.
The signal cabling shall be carried out in Class A configuration.
3.
The NAC cabling shall be carried out in Class B configuration.
4.
Cable running through walls, ceilings, roofs etc. shall be provided with fire stops.
5.
Signal line is for fire detectors, source supply line for fire alarm, alarm flash light and manual
call point.
6.
Signal cables shall go through non-flammable pipes SPDN16 or SPDN20.
7.
All fire alarm cabling shall be fire resistant cables.
8.
Wiring for 240 VAC power to each FAP shall be minimum 2.5 mm2.
9.
Wiring for signaling circuits shall be minimum 1mm.
Page 69/374

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes,
local authority requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with appropriate standard. Upon completion, the
contractor shall so certify in writing to the Employer. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and
labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation.
C.
Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely
coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
D.
The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm
equipment after completion of the installation.
E.
The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on site supervision of installation.
F.
Cabling And Wiring

1.
The installation of all wiring, cable and equipment shall be in accordance with appropriate
standards and in accordance with the local codes and standards.
2.
Wiring for the fire detection and alarm system shall be segregated from all lighting and power
systems.
3.
Wiring within any control equipment shall be readily accessible without removing any
components or parts.
4.
All cabling shall be concealed in the building fabric for all conditioned areas.
5.
Fire alarm cables shall be installed using non-flammable PVC conduits.
6.
Where cables pass through walls or floors then shall be protected by galvanized steel sleeves
and sealed by a fire stopping material.
3.2

A.
Preliminary Tests
B.
Upon the completion of the installation, the system shall be subject to functional and operation
performance tests including test of each installed initiating and notification appliance. Tests shall
include the meggering of all system conductors to determine that the system is free from grounded,
shorted or open circuits. The megger test shall be conducted prior to the installation of fire alarm
equipment. If deficiencies are found corrections shall be made and the system shall be retested to
assure that it functions.
C.
Acceptance Test
D.
Provide the service of competent, factory trained engineer or technician authorized by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the
adjustments and commissioning of the system. Testing shall be in full accordance with appropriate
standard :
1.
Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short
circuits, earth faults, continuity and insulation.
2.
Verify activation of all flow switches.
3.
Open initiating device circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.
4.
Open signaling line circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.
5.
Open and short indicating appliance circuits and verify that fault signal actuates.
6.
Earth initiating device circuits and verify response of fault signals.
Page 70/374

E.
F.
7.
Earth signaling line circuits and verify response of fault signals.
8.
Earth indicating appliance circuits and verify response of fault signals.
9.
Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
10.
Check installation, supervision and operation of all intelligent smoke sensors during a walk test.
11.
Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the
system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the Fire Panel and
the correct activation of the control points.
Conductor Testing
1.
Prior to connection of the equipment all conductors shall be tested in the following manner.
Verify absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors.
2.
Insulation test: To ensure that all conductors other than those intentionally connected together
and completely isolated.
System Testing
1.
Verify that the control unit is in the normal supervisory condition as detailed in the
manufacturers manual.
2.
Test each initiating device and indicating appliance for alarm operation and trouble indication.
3.
Test the operation of control module for proper response
4.
Test all primary power supplies.
5.
Test all secondary power supply
6.
Verify that each test signal is properly reported and received at the main fire alarm panel.
G.
Functional tests to verify the interfacing details with all other systems as described in item 1.1.
Description of works and confirm whether the interfacing logic and sequence of operation is as per
approved programmed.
H.
Fire Alarm Schedule to be completed by the Vendor during tender. One schedule to be completed for
each panel
Page 71/374

SECTION 220010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK SECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work in this Section includes the providing of labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for a
authorities having jurisdiction for the following:
1.
Section 220500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.
2.
Section 221400, FACILITY STORM DARINAGE.
3.
Section 221100, FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION.
4.
Section 224000, PLUMBING FIXTURES
B.
Provide plumbing fixtures.
C.
Provide water for heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment within 3 meters of equipment
connections.
D.
Provide electrical control and alarm wiring, except as noted.
1.2

A.
Temporary Works
1.
All temporary works, such as water and electric power supply, sanitary systems, and all related
works including labors, materials and equipment, shall be carried out by Contractor.
B.
Related documents
1.
1.3
A.
standards.
B.
Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry or

governmental organizations apply to applicable work in all sections as noted below.
1.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
2.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
3.
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
4.
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
5.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
C.
Equivalent Vietnam Standards (VS) can be substituted for American Standards specified in this
section.
1.
2.
Page 72/374

1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Definitions
1.
"Furnish" or "provide": to supply, install, and make complete, safe, and operable, the particular
work referred to unless specifically indicated otherwise.
2.
"Install": to erect, mount, and make complete with all related accessories.
3.
"Supply": to purchase, procure, acquire, and deliver complete with related accessories.
4.
"Work": includes labor, materials, equipment, services, and all related accessories necessary
for the proper and complete installation of complete systems.
5.
"Piping": includes pipe, tube, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, strainers, hangers, supports,
unions, traps, drains, insulation, and all related accessories.
6.
"Wiring": includes raceway, fittings, wire, boxes, and all related accessories.
7.
"Concealed": not in view, installed in masonry or other construction, within furred spaces,
double partitions, hung ceilings, trenches, crawl spaces, or enclosures.
8.
"Exposed": in view, not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.
9.
"Indicated," "shown," or "noted": as indicated, shown, or noted on drawings or specifications.
10.
"Similar" or "equal": of base bid manufacturer, equal in quality, materials, weight, size,
performance, design, and efficiency of specified product, conforming with "Base Bid
Manufacturers."
11.
"Reviewed," satisfactory," "accepted," or "directed": as reviewed, satisfactory, accepted, or

directed by Employers representative.
12.
"Motor Controllers": includes manual or magnetic starters with or without switches, individual
push buttons or hand-off-automatic (HOA) switches controlling the operation of motors.
13.
"Control or Actuating Devices": includes automatic sensing and switching devices such as
thermostats, pressure, float, flow, electro pneumatic switches and electrodes controlling
operation of equipment.
General
1.
All equipment and accessories shall be the product of manufacturers regularly engaged in their
manufacture. All items of a given type shall be the products of the same manufacturer.
2.
Furnish all equipment and accessories new and free from defects.
3.
Provide Manufacturers Certificate and Inspection Certificates, which is requested by Laws on

all electrical equipment and fire protection equipment and components.
4.
Supply all equipment and accessories in accordance with the applicable standards listed in
Article 1.8 of this Section and with all applicable building codes.
Description of bid documents

1.
Specifications in general, describe quality and type of materials and equipment.
2.
Drawings in general are diagrammatic and indicate sizes, locations, connections to equipment
and methods of installation. Provide additional offsets, fittings, hangers, supports, insulation,
valves, drains and escutcheons, as necessary to coordinate with work of other trades.
3.
Scaled and figured dimensions are approximate and are for estimating purposes only. Before
proceeding with work, check and-verify all dimensions.
4.
Assume all responsibility for fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of equipment and
structure. Make adjustments that may be necessary or requested in order to resolve space
problems, preserve headroom, and to avoid architectural openings, structural members and
work of other trades.
Page 73/374

D.
5.
Typical details, where shown on the drawings, apply to each and every item of the project
where such items are applicable. Typical details are not repeated in full on the plans, which in
many cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be
incorporated in full.
6.
If any part of the Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, consult with the
Architect and/or Engineer for interpretation and decision as early as possible during bidding
period. Do not proceed with work without Employers representatives decision.
Review of construction
1.
Work may be reviewed at any time by Employers representative.
2.
Advise Employers representative that work is ready for review at the following times:
a.
Prior to backfilling buried work.
b.
Prior to concealment of work in walls and above ceilings.
c.
When all requirements of Contract have been completed.
3.
Do not backfill or conceal work without consent from Employers representative.
4.
Maintain on site, one set of Specifications and Drawings for use by Employers representative.
E.
Supervision
1.
Supply the services of an experienced and competent supervisor who shall be in charge of
Plumbing work at the site.
F.
Job conditions
1.
Inspection of Site Conditions
a.
Before starting work, visit the site and examine the conditions under which the work has
to be performed. Report in writing any conditions which might adversely affect the work
and do not proceed with the work until defects have been corrected and conditions are
satisfactory.
2.
1.5
Special Traffic Requirements:

a.
Maintain emergency and service entrances so they are usable for pedestrian, truck, and
ambulance traffic at all times.
b.
Where trenches are cut, provide adequate bridging for abovementioned traffic.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Operating instructions, maintenance manuals and parts lists.

1.
Before requesting acceptance of work, submit one set for review by Employers representative.
2.
After review provide five sets of manufacturers' equipment brochures and service manuals
consisting of the following:
a.
Descriptive literature for equipment and components.
b.
Model number and performance data.
c.
Installation and operating instructions.
d.
Maintenance and repair instructions.
e.
Recommended spare parts.
3.
Assemble manufacturers equipment manuals in chronological

specifications numbering system using heavy duty, three ring binders.
4.
Submit valve tag chart.
5.
Submit three (3) sets of field test reports.
order
following
Page 74/374
the

1.6

A.
Ship materials and equipment in crated sections, and in sizes that are sufficiently small to permit
passing through available space, where required.
B.
C.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
C.
Furnish warranty covering all work in accordance with General Contract.
D.
This guarantee also applies to services including Instructions, Adjusting, Testing, Balancing, etc.
E.
Equipment manufacturers shall include extended warranty to give full coverage during warranty
period, unless longer period is specified. Submit all warranties prior to FINAL PAYMENT.
F.
Upon receipt of notice from the Employer of failure of any part of equipment during the warranty
period, replace affected part or parts at no additional cost to the Employer.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
B.
Schedule of work
1.
Arrange work to conform to schedule of construction established or required to comply with
contract documents.
2.
In scheduling, anticipate means of installing equipment through available openings in structure.
3.
Work delays:
a.
If work interferes with Employers operations, Employer may require work to be stopped
and performed at some other time, or after normal working hours. Lost time and
overtime will be compensated for by Employer.
b.
Submit, with bid proposal, schedule of hourly rates and overtime premiums.
Utility connection
1.
Arrange for and pay costs for all specified utilities including the following, but not limited to.
a.
Connection to utility company mains.
b.
Connection to municipal water mains and sewers.
c.
Payment of service charges.
d.
Provisions for temporary utilities.
e.
Connect in accordance with authority having jurisdiction.
Page 75/374

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
The contractor shall submit manufacturers data for following items for approval from Employers
representative.
1.
Access doors:
2.
Vibration isolation devices
3.
Hangers and supports
SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNELS AND SUPPORTS

A.
Furnish supplementary steel, channels, and supports required for proper installation, mounting and
support of equipment.
B.
Connect supplementary steel and channels firmly to building construction in an acceptable manner.
C.
Determine type and size of supporting channels and supplementary steel with sufficient strength to
allow equipment loading.
D.
Install supplementary steel and channels in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to walls, floors,
and ceiling construction.
E.
Make turns with 90 and 45 fittings, as required, to suit construction and installation conditions.
F.
All supplementary steel, channels, supports, and fittings shall be galvanized.
2.3
EXPANSION ANCHORS
A.
Provide smooth wall, non-self-drilling internal plug expansion type anchors constructed of galvanized
steel.
B.
Provide spacing and install anchors in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
2.4
ACCESS DOORS
A.
Supply access doors for all concealed valves in inaccessible walls and ceilings for complete access,
using a minimum door size of 300 mm x 300 mm for installation under the General Construction Work.
Locating and setting will be performed after review.
B.
Provide flush type access doors for wall installation with 18.7 Kg per M steel doors and trim and 12.5
Kg per M steel frame, metal wings for keying into construction, concealed hinges and screwdriveroperated stainless steel cam lock, or approved equivalent construction. Provide lift-off type access
doors, where door cannot swing open.
C.
In acoustic tile ceilings, provide factory finished white access doors, with 2.7 mm(No.13 gauge) (18.7
Kg per M) steel frame, 1.6 mm(No.16 gauge) (12.5 Kg per M) steel pan door, or approved equivalent
construction, suitable for receiving tile thickness and hinges that are not visible when door is closed.
Provide tile filler, as accepted, unless tile filler will be provided under General Construction Work.
Provide screwdriver-operated stainless steel cam locks finishing flush with tile with a minimum of two
per door, or approved equivalent mechanism.
D.
In recessed plaster ceilings, provide access doors with recess to receive plaster. Provide plaster fill, as
accepted, unless plaster fill will be provided under General Construction Work.
E.
In fire-rated construction, provide fire-rated access doors in accordance with applicable code
requirements. Provide fire-rated fill, as accepted, unless fire-rated fill will be provided under General
Construction Work.
Page 76/374

F.
Provide access doors with one coat of shop-painted primer.
G.
Access Tile Identification: Where removable ceiling tiles are provided, install buttons, tabs, or markers
to identify location of concealed work. Submit for review.
2.5
MOTORS
A.
Provide motors constructed and tested in accordance with the latest standards of NEMA and ANSI
C50 conforming therewith for insulation resistance and dielectric strength.
B.
Provide motors specifically and expressly wound for voltage required.
C.
Provide motors with capacities sufficient to operate associated driven devices under all conditions of
operation and load, and at least with horsepower ratings as indicated or specified.
D.
Provide motors of the same manufacturer, except those motors furnished integrally with equipment.
E.
Provide motor enclosures suitable for service and location.
F.
Coordinate size and location of terminal boxes with Electrical Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Clearance from electrical equipment

1.
Piping is prohibited in electric and telephone rooms and closets, elevator machine rooms, and
for installations over or within 1.5 meters of transformers, substations, switchboards, motor
control centers, standby power plants, and motors.
2.
Branch piping to equipment is acceptable when installed over or within 1.5 meters of motors.
3.
Provide drip pans under piping when installation over or within 1.5 meters of electrical
apparatus is unavoidable or in rooms containing electrical equipment or under drainage piping
at ceilings of food preparation areas. Pan shall be reinforced, properly supported and made
watertight. Provide enclosed type for pressure piping. Extend 35mm drain pipe from pan to spill
over nearest floor drain or as indicated. Pans shall be constructed of light gauge sheet copper
or galvanized sheet metal.
Accessibility
1.
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair
are readily accessible. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this,
but changes of substantial magnitude shall not be made without written approval.
2.
C.
Fireproofing
1.
Coordinate with other trades, all clips, hangers, clamps, supports, and other attachments to the
fire rated structure in order to avoid any damage to the fireproofing.
2.
D.
Group concealed valves, controls, and equipment requiring access, so as to be freely

accessible through access doors.
Install all items which would interfere with the proper application of fireproofing after the
application of fireproofing work.
Piping supports
1.
Supporting piping is intended to secure piping in place, maintain required pitch, prevent
vibration and provide for expansion and contraction, using hangers, supports and inserts.
2.
Support all piping from structures by providing inserts, beam clamps, and acceptable brackets.
Submit all methods for review.
Page 77/374

3.
Provide trapeze hangers of bolted angles or channels for grouped lines and services.
4.
Provide additional framing where structure is inadequate. Submit the load calculation etc to
structure engineer for review and approval.
5.
Inserts shall be steel, slotted type and factory-painted.
6.
Suspended horizontal piping:
7.
8.
9.
a.
Support all piping independently from structure using heavy iron-hinged type hangers.
b.
Provide electroplated solid-band hangers for 50 mm and smaller pipe.
c.
Provide trapeze hangers of angles, angles bolted back-to-back, or channels to parallel

lines of piping.
d.
Provide wall brackets for wall-supported piping, and provide pipe saddles for floormounted piping.
e.
Provide supports with recommended lining for glass piping.
f.
Provide supports with copper lining for uninsulated copper piping.
g.
Suspend piping from inserts, using beam clamps with retaining clamp or locknut, steel
fish plates, cantilever brackets or other accepted means.
h.
Suspend piping by rods with double nuts.
i.
Provide additional steel framing as required and accepted where overhead construction
does not permit fastening hanger rods in required locations.
j.
Support branch fixture water piping in chases with copper-plated metal brackets,
secured to studs.
Provide 180 degree arc galvanized metal covering shields on hangers for insulated piping with
incompressible insulating block in insulation at hangers.
a.
Up to 75 mm diameter use 1.3 mm (No.18 gauge), 150 mm long.
b.
On 100 mm to 150 mm diameter use 1.6 mm (No.16 gauge), 200 mm long.
c.
On 200 mm and larger shall be 1.6 mm (No.16 gauge), 300 mm long.
Maximum hanger spacing as indicated:

a.
Pipe 25 mm and smaller shall be every 2.5 meters.
b.
Pipe 32 mm and larger shall be every 3.3 meters.
c.
Cast iron shall be every 1.5 meters and at every fitting or joint, except for pipe lengths
exceeding 1.5 meters then at intervals equal to pipe length.
Vertical piping:
a.
Provide extension pipe clamps bolted to bare pipe on each side and bearing equally on
structure or welded to beam.
b.
Provide spacing as indicated:
c.
10.
1)
Threaded piping shall be every other floor level, at a maximum of 7.5 meters on
centers.
2)
Cast iron piping shall be every floor level, maximum 6 meters on centers;
hubless pipe is the exception, requiring a maximum of 3.3 meters on centers.
3)
Tubing shall be every floor level maximum 3.3 meters on enters.
Provide hanger support, at offset from vertical, on the base fitting with support from the
floor or from the structure.
Underground piping:
a.
Support on solid undisturbed ground; or support on concrete, brick piers or cradles

where there is unsuitable ground, at trench crossings, and when crossing excavation
adjacent to building wall or foundations.
Page 78/374

E.
Bottom of trenches shall be tamped hard, graded for required pitch, shaped to give
uniform support to lower third of full length of pipe, and with recesses excavated for
bells and joints.
c.
Support and protect piping so it remains in place without settling or damage during and
from backfilling. Replace any damaged pipe.
Cutting and patching

1.
3.2
b.
Provide all carpentry, cutting and patching required for proper installation of material and
equipment specified. Do not cut or drill structural members without consent of Architect and
Structural Engineer.
TESTS
A.
3.3
Field quality control

1.
Perform tests as noted in the presence of Employers representative.
2.
Test for two-hour duration without any loss of pressure.
3.
Provide required labor, material, equipment, and connections necessary for tests and submit
results for review.
4.
Repair or replace defective work and pay for restoring or replacing damaged work due to tests,
as directed.
PROTECTION OF MATERIALS
A.
Protect from damage, water, dust, etc., material, equipment and apparatus provided under this trade,
both in storage and installed, until Notice of Completion has been filed and accepted.
B.
Provide temporary storage facilities for material and equipment.
C.
Arrange with Employers representative for storage facilities for materials and equipment.
D.
Material, equipment or apparatus damaged because of improper storage or protection will be rejected.
E.
Remove from site and provide new, duplicate, material, equipment, or apparatus in replacement of
that rejected.
F.
Cover motors and other equipment to protect from dirt and water during construction.
G.
Cover fixtures with protective housings.
H.
Protect premise and work or other trades from damage arising out of installation or work of this trade.
3.4
LABELLING
A.
Identification
1.
Provide identification in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI A13.1 and as specified
herein.
2.
Tags:
a.
Provide 50 mm square valve tags on all valves and controls of 1.3 mm (No.18 gauge)
aluminum with stamped numbers and letters filled in with black paint.
b.
Indicate identifying number and system letter on tags, and fasten by heavy aluminum or
brass hooks or chains.
3.
Charts:
a.
Provide valve tag chart indicating valve number, system, type, size, location and
function for all valves.
b.
Mount charts on walnut grained wood plaque with clear plastic laminations covering
diagrams.
Page 79/374

c.
d.
e.
4.
B.
3.5
Mount in aluminum frame and glass.

Letter and number valves and controls to correspond with designations on metal tags.
Fasten charts permanently in locations, as directed, with four brass screws.
Nameplates:
a.
Provide engraved black Lamicoid sheet with white lettering nameplates with
inscriptions, subject to review, indicating equipment and voltage, and fasten with epoxy
cement and chrome plated screws.
b.
Provide nameplates for gauges, meters, valve boxes, instruments, control devices, pilot
lamps, transmitters, motor controllers and panel-mounted equipment.
Piping identification
1.
Stenciling:
a.
Mark piping every 3.3 meters with size, purpose, and direction of flow; clearly stencil
letters and flow arrows with flat black paint, using block letters on a white background.
Sizes of stencil are as follows:
b.
Outside diameter of Pipe Covering Size of Stencil
c.
19 mm - 31 mm 12.5 mm
d.
12.5 mm - 50 mm 19 mm
e.
62.5 mm - 150 mm 31 mm
f.
200 mm - 250 mm 62.5 mm
g.
250 mm or above 87.5 mm
h.
Indicate system, size and direction of flow on piping, using above table.. Supervise
stenciling to assure that it is readable from the floor.
i.
Perform stenciling in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI A13.1.
2.
Pipe Markers:
a.
Provide factory fabricated, snap-on type pipe markers with service legend and flow
arrows. The pipe markers shall be the weather-proof plastic type and shall not be used
where surface temperature exceeds 82 C.
b.
The pipe markers shall be with the following types:
1)
Smaller than 150 mm: completely encircling pipe.
2)
200 mm and larger: stainless steel spring fasteners.
c.
Adhesive type markers will not be permitted.
CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT

A.
Brush and clean work prior to concealing, painting and acceptance. Perform in stages if directed.
B.
Clean and repair painted or exposed work which is soiled or damaged and match adjoining work
before final acceptance.
C.
Remove debris from inside and outside of piping and equipment.
D.
Flush out piping after installation and before final connections are made, at least twice, in a manner as
directed and/or accepted by the Employers representative. Make all temporary connections and
provide all equipment required for the purpose of cleaning at no extra expense to the Employer.
E.
Adjust valves and automatic control devices; leave traps, wastes and supplies unobstructed.
F.
Adjust fixture and equipment stop-valves for proper operation of flow and pressure.
G.
Balance domestic hot water circulation system by adjusting throttling valves for proper temperature at
all fixtures.
Page 80/374

SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
1.2
Piping systems including pipe, fittings, sleeves and all related accessories.
RELATED WORKS AND DOCUMENTS

A.
Related works
1.
B.
1.3
Interfaces: the work in this section shall be interfaced with the flowing systems:
a.
External piping system: the Contract shall have to connect the interior pipes with the
constructed exterior pipes (constructed in package CP04 Depot Infrastructure).
b.
The sewerage and drainage system of each building is connected to the outdoor
sewerage pipeline of the depot via outdoor manholes.
c.
The water supply system of each building is connected to service points of the outdoor
pipeline.
2.
All the pumps shall be supervised by BMS system for status ON/OFF.
3.
All pumps shall be connected to power panel in the related building. This work should be well
interfaced with the low voltage system.
4.
The water pipeline of fire fighting system will be connected to the water supply pipeline via
service point. The Contract shall have to coordinate well for the connection of the 2 systems.
5.
The Contractor shall have to coordinate the water pipeline with other technical piping/cabling
systems and civil works to make sure that there will not be interference between them.
Related documents:
1.
2.
Requirements of Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK
SECTION apply to all work in this Section.
3.
Requirements included in the Contract document Chapter 2: General Requirements shall
apply to all work in this Section.
A.
Published Specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or

governmental organizations apply to work in this Section.
B.
Comply with all applicable local codes and refer to Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR
PLUMBING WORK SECTION for additional Reference Standards.
C.
section.
1.
2.
Page 81/374

1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Each length of pipe, fitting, trap, fixture valve or device used in any piping system shall be stamped or
indelibly marked with weight or quality, and manufacturer's name or mark.
B.
Galvanizing: Provide hot-dip process inside and outside of pipe with zinc coating, conforming to ASTM
B6 as specified in ASTM A-123.
C.
Refer to Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK SECTION for other
Quality Assurance requirements.
1.5
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Submit shop drawings for flashing sleeves, fittings and escutcheons.

A.
B.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
representative.
1.
Pipe and fittings.
2.
Valves.
3.
Unions, Sleeves, Escutcheons, Flashings, Flashing fittings and miscellaneous material.
B.
Common requirements of the plumbing works

1.
Free from any wrap, cracks, blemishes, blisters, uneven glazing and shall be smooth and free
from crazing and deformation.
2.
Rust proofed materials in direct or indirect contact with water shall be compatible to prevent
electrolytic or chemical (bimetallic) corrossion.
3.
Protected against rodents.
Page 82/374

2.2
PIPE
A.
Refer to the related Systems for requirements and applications.
B.
Steel pipe shall be standard weight (Schedule 40), except as noted, seamless or welded mild steel,
ASTM A-120 or A-53. Corrugated, zinc coated pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM-A 760.
Underground gas service piping shall be A-53 only.
C.
Threaded cast iron pipe shall be extra heavy class 22; in accordance with ANSI A-40.5.
D.
Stainless steel: Standard weight except as noted, seamless 18-8 Cr Ni Type 304, ASTM-312.
2.3
FITTINGS
A.
Refer to the related Systems for requirements and applications.
B.
Cast iron threaded drainage shall be recessed pattern, in accordance with ANSI B-16.12.
C.
Cast iron threaded fittings shall be standard weight, except as noted, in accordance with ANSI B-16.4.
D.
Cast iron flanged fittings and flanges shall be standard weight except as noted, in accordance with
ANSI B-16.1.
E.
Steel welding fittings shall be standard weight seamless steel, in accordance with ANSI B-16.9 and
ASTM A-234.
F.
Steel flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI B-16.5. ASTM A-181 Grade I up to 2059 kPa. ASTM
A-105 Grade 1, 2757 kPa and above.
G.
Stainless steel fittings shall be standard weight, cast 18-8 stainless steel. Threaded banded, shall be
in accordance with ASTM A296 and ANSI B-16.3. Flanged shall be in accordance with ANSI B-16.5.
2.4
UNIONS
A.
2.5
Unions shall be ground joint type using brass for brass pipe, and using copper tubing and galvanized
malleable iron with brass seats for iron pipe.
SLEEVES
A.
Extend sleeves through construction, and as noted. For insulated piping, provide sleeves sized to
allow insulation to pass through sleeve. Provide 0.85 mm (No. 22 gauge) galvanized iron sleeves
through all non-fireproof interior walls and partitions.
B.
Provide cast iron or steel pipe sleeves through exterior walls, footings, beams and all fireproof ceilings,
walls, floors and partitions. Extend sleeves two inches above finished floor. Provide continuously
welded center flange in sleeve through exterior walls, interior floors of machine rooms and sprinklered
areas and all fireproof floors.
C.
Provide projecting flashing sleeve through interior membrane waterproofed floors, except as noted.
Provide cast iron sleeve with integral flashing flange for built up membrane with clamping ring. Provide
integral or brazed 100 mm wide flange on sleeve for floors with liquid membrane waterproofing. Adjust
sleeve height to floor construction with galvanized steel pipe nipples top and bottom extending 50 mm
above finished floor.
D.
Provide flush flashing type sleeve for installation through membrane waterproofed walls, floors for floor
outlet fixtures, slabs with earth fill above, and slabs on ground. Provide cast iron sleeve with integral
flashing flange and clamping ring for floors with built up membrane. Provide sleeves with integral or
brazed 100 mm wide flange for floors with liquid membrane. Modify sleeve length for wall or slab
thickness. Seal pipe watertight in sleeve with oakum packing and caulked lead joint.
Page 83/374

E.
Provide galvanized cast iron sleeve with integral bottom flange, through floors with elastomeric type
waterproofing.
F.
Provide 0.85 mm (No. 22 gauge) galvanized iron U-shaped covers over water piping installed in floor
fill. Surround covers and drainage and vent piping with a minimum of 12.5 mm of cement mortar.
2.6
SEALING OF SLEEVES
A.
Seal all sleeves through exterior walls and fire and smoke-rated walls and floors in accordance with
firefighting code.
B.
Fire rated construction: Space between pipe and sleeve shall not exceed 12.5 mm. Provide close
fitting metal escutcheons on both sides of sleeves through fire-rated construction.
1.
Sealant material shall be non-combustible and smoke-tight, using ceramic fiber insulation plus
putty. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
2.
Sealant material shall be non-combustible and smoke-tight.
C.
Exterior walls: Seal watertight with oakum packing and caulked lead.
2.7
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Escutcheons shall be cast iron or cast brass set-screw type.
B.
Escutcheons shall be pressed steel type for exposed piping through floors, ceilings, walls and
partitions.
C.
Provide escutcheons on exposed piping through floors, ceilings, walls and partitions.
D.
Provide chromium plated escutcheons at tile walls and on chromium plated piping.
E.
Provide deep type escutcheons to cover sleeve hubs or fitting projections.
2.8
FLASHING
A.
B.
2.9
For built-up membrane waterproofing, provide flashing that extends at least 250 mm around edge of
penetration.
1.
Roof drains.
2.
Floor drains in membrane-waterproofed floors.
3.
Shower drains in membrane-waterproofed floors.
4.
Cleanout deck plates in membrane-waterproofed floors.
5.
Grease interceptors in membrane-waterproofed floors.
6.
Flashing sleeves in membrane-waterproofing.
Secure flashing with clamping device.
FLASHING FITTINGS
A.
Provide galvanized cast iron fittings with counter flashing recess for pipes through roof.
B.
Extend flashing at least 250 mm around pipe and up as high as other flashing on roof.
2.10
A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Sheet copper shall be in accordance with ASTM B-152.
Page 84/374

B.
Sheet aluminum shall be in accordance with ASTM B-209.
C.
Sheet steel galvanized shall be in accordance with ASTM A525.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install piping approximately as indicated and modify to suit building conditions and to avoid
interferences with other trades. Maintain access to all parts of piping systems that require
maintenance and maintain pitch.
B.
All pipes and fittings shall be able to withstand external and internal stresses, weir, tear and water
hammer.
C.
Pipe couplings shall be included at intervals to enable any part of the system to be dismantled and
replaced without cutting any pipe or carrying out any builders work.
D.
All valves shall be location.
E.
Pipes and fittings shall be arranged to avoid an increase of the total head pressure and the water
velocity over time in the whole system.
F.
Run in chases, recesses, shafts, hung ceilings and beam cuts where applicable. Do not cover before
examination and testing. Do not install piping in floor fill unless noted.
G.
Run parallel with or at right angles to walls and other piping, neatly spaced and with plumb risers.
H.
Maintain a minimum of 25 mm clearance between hubs, coverings and adjoining work.
I.
Support from overhead construction and maintain maximum headroom.
J.
Install piping concealed above ceilings or in walls unless otherwise indicated.
K.
Location and elevations of exterior utilities shall be as indicated or required by existing conditions.
Install piping, as required, to suit project requirements.
L.
Install valves where indicated or required in accessible locations with no valve handles pointed down.
Install butterfly valves with operator on side.
M.
Install chromium plated piping with not more than one thread showing and with no tool marks. Provide
chromium plated finish on fittings, valves, escutcheons and hangers for CP piping.
N.
Provide reducing fittings for changes in pipe size. No bushings will be permitted.
O.
Use extra heavy pipe for nipples where unthreaded portion of pipe is less than 62.5 mm long. Close
nipples are not acceptable.
P.
Connect to risers, bypasses and equipment with unions or flanges.
Q.
Install underground plastic piping in accordance with ASTM 2321 and the manufacturer's
recommendations.
R.
Pipe expansion requirements: Provide elbow swings, expansion loops or expansion joints in vertical
and horizontal piping as required for expansion and contraction, and building expansion joint
crossings. Provide a minimum of three elbow swings for connections to water mains, risers, branches
and equipment.
Page 85/374

3.2
JOINT INSTALLATION
A.
Install joints in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B.
Threaded piping: Provide clean-cut threads of exact length. Ream pipe after cutting and threading and
apply approved compound or Teflon tape on male threads only. Apply graphite on cleanout and drain
plugs.
C.
Cast iron hub less soil piping:

1.
Coupling shall be used 4 mm thick heavyweight corrugated type 304 stainless steel shield and
neoprene gasket;
2.
Refer to Section 221400, FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE for limitations of use.
D.
For ductile iron bell and spigot water piping, acceptable joints are as follows:
1.
2.
E.
Push-on rubber gasket joints in accordance with ANSI A21.11.

Provide electrical bond on all push-on and mechanical joints.
Flanged piping: Provide full-faced rubber gaskets on cold water and spiral-wound gaskets with flexible
graphite filler for hot water. Provide gaskets for special piping systems in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Page 86/374

SECTION 221100 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
1.
Domestic water supply system with valves connections to public mains, meters and storage
tank, house pumps, booster pumps, house tanks, hot water heating equipment, plugged outlets
and required connections to plumbing fixtures and equipment.

A.
Requirements of Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK SECTION apply
to all work in this Section.
B.
Related work in the following Sections:

1.
2.
Section 221400, FACILITY STROM DRAINAGE.
3.
Section 224000, PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION.
C.
Related documents
1.
1.3
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.

D.
Comply with all applicable codes and refer to Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR
E.
In addition, comply with all standards of associations as specified herein including, but not limited to,
the following, as applicable.
F.
1.
American National Standards Institute: ANSI A 112.1.2 Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems.
2.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers: ASHRAE 90-80
Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
3.
National Fire Protection Association: NFPA Standard No. 31 Installation of Oil Burning
Equipment.
4.
TCVN 7305:2008 HDPE pipes for water supply (equivalent to ISO 4427:2007)
section.
1.
Page 87/374

2.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide motor operated pumps in accordance with "Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety Publication UL 778.
B.
Refer to Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK SECTION for Guarantee
and other Quality Assurance requirements.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Manufacturers model numbers, sizes, and types only need to be submitted as Shop Drawings for
items marked with a *, when base specification material and equipment will be provided.
C.
Submit shop drawings for the following:
D.
1.
Pipe and fittings, valves and shock absorbers.
2.
Air gaps*
3.
Wall hydrants*
4.
Hose bibs*
5.
Vacuum breakers*
6.
Backflow preventers*
7.
Trap seal primer valves*
8.
Water meters and strainers*
9.
Pressure reducing valves*
10.
Float valves*
11.
Relief valves*
12.
Thermometers*
13.
Auto air relief valves*
14.
Tempering valves*
15.
Thermostatic valves*
16.
Temperature maintenance heating strip.
17.
Water heaters : manufacturers specifications including materials, construction, capacity rating

and regulating valves.
18.
Time switches*
19.
Drinking water cooler units: manufacturers specifications including materials, construction,

capacity rating, pump curve, controller, controls, piping and line wiring diagrams.
20.
Pumps: manufacturers specifications including cuts of all components, materials, construction,

capacity rating, pump curve, controller, controls and line wiring diagram.
21.
Tanks: manufacturer's specifications including materials, construction, dimensions and

accessories.
Submit shop drawings, manufacturers operating and installation instructions, descriptive literature,
maintenance and repair data, in accordance with Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR
PLUMBING WORK SECTION.
Page 88/374

1.6

A.
B.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for products furnished under this Contract.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which
B.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
representative.
1.
Gate and check valves (inside).
2.
Valves (underground only).
3.
Noiseless Check Valves.
4.
Butterfly Valves.
5.
Ball Valves.
6.
Shock Absorbers.
7.
Water Meters.
8.
Pressure Gauges.
9.
Backflow Preventers.
10.
Master Pressure Reducing Valves.
11.
Branch Pressure Reducing Valves.
12.
Float Valves.
13.
Automatic Air Relief Valves.
14.
Hot Water Heaters.
15.
Regulating Valves.
16.
Relief Valves(PR).
17.
Relief Valves(T&P).
18.
By-pass Relief Valves.
19.
Thermometers.
20.
Thermostatic tempering Valves.
Page 89/374

2.2
21.
Temperature Maintenance Heating Strip.
22.
Pumps : Ritz, Grundfos, ITT Flygt or approved equal
23.
Tank Controls and Alarms.
24.
Float Level Switches.
25.
Pressure Switches.
26.
Time Switches.
27.
Solenoid Valves.
28.
Central Water Coolers.
29.
Grooved MI Fittings and Couplings for Grooved Pipe.
PIPING
A.
2.3
Cold and Hot water supply

All the indoor water supply pipes and fittings shall be HDPE class PN10 as per TCVN 7305:2008
HDPE pipes for water supply
CHECK VALVES
A.
For 65mm and smaller, except as noted, provide bronze swing type, 1380 kPa, except as noted,
threaded ends, and solder joint type ends. For threaded ends (use adapters for tubing), 2760 kPa
wwp.
B.
80mm and larger, except as noted, provide flanged, swing type, 1380 kPa, except as noted. Provide
2760 kPa wwp for unreduced tank pressure piping.
C.
Pump discharge, except circulation pumps, provide silent, double center guided, conical spring type,
flanged 1380 kPa wwp, except as noted; 3450 kPa wwp Check Valve for 75 mm and smaller; and for
100 mm and larger. For pump discharge to fill tank system, provide 3450 kPa.
2.4
SHUT-OFF VALVES
A.
Shut-off valves shall be gate valves or globe valves with threaded ends for connection with pipes.
B.
Valves in DN50 and smaller pipe shall be of brass or bronze construction. Valves DN65 and larger in
the pipe line shall have cast iron body and brass trim. Valves DN75 and larger shall be flanged.
C.
Gate valves shall be of solid wedge disc type and shall have rising stem or non-rising stem.
D.
Globe valves shall have replaceable resilient plugs and shall have rising stem. Globe valves for use in
regulating flow shall have replaceable seats.
E.
All valves throughout this Section shall be of the same manufacture in principle.
2.5
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
2.6
Provide reduced pressure type with bronze or stainless steel trim, two spring-loaded check valves,
differential pressure relief valve, two OS& Y gate valves, two ball valves, and test cocks with bronze
body, flanged cast iron body, galvanized or epoxy coated inside 80mm and larger, low head loss type.
Provide funnel drain and pipe relief to floor drain.
WATER METER ASSEMBLY

A.
Provide compound type with magnetic drive, flanged bronze or cast iron 1035 kPa body, automatic
spring loaded valve, self contained measuring chamber attached to cover.
Page 90/374

2.7
STRAINERS
A.
For strainers 50 mm and smaller, provide threaded bronze body with type 304 stainless steel screen.
B.
For strainers 65mm and larger, provide flanged cast iron body with type 304 stainless steel screen,
862 kPa wsp(working steam pressure), or 1725 kPa wsp.
C.
Provide for master pressure-reducing valves and as noted .
2.8
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A.
Provide an ASME adjustable bronze body diaphragm pressure type with test lever. Locate on cold
water inlet piping of each hot water heater, outlet of piping of each instantaneous hot water heater,
outlet piping of each indirect hot water heater and outlet piping of each steam-water mixing valve.
B.
Provide an adjustable, threaded, bronze spring-actuated pressure valve, with test lever, 2070 kPa
wwp on top of each hot water heater and on top of each pre-heater.
2.9
ELECTRIC WATER HEATER

A.
Refer to Water Heater Schedule on drawings.
B.
Provide a completely factory-assembled package including component piping, supports, relief valve
etc. Manufacturer shall guarantee combination of heater and regulating valve to maintain set outlet
temperature within 1.32 C (2.8 F) under all variations of flow (gradual or sudden).
C.
Fasten the supporting bracket provided to the wall using screws and raw plugs of suitable dimension
for the type of wall.
D.
Water heaters inlet and outlet shall be connected with pipes or fittings which are resistant to the
working pressure as well as the temperature or the hot water that can usually reach and exceed 80
deg C.
E.
The safety valve has a calibration value of about 8 bar.
2.10
PUMPS
A.
Refer to schedule on drawings.
B.
Provide non-overloading characteristics so as not to exceed nominal rating of motor at any point on
curve. Pumps shall be designed for suction pressure of 7 kPa and for maximum wwp (working water
pressure) of 3450 kPa at 66 deg C.
C.
Pumps shall be automatic, duplex, centrifugal type with vertically split cast iron casing, single suction
bronze enclosed impeller and renewable bronze case wearing ring.
D.
Provide a heavy solid stainless steel shaft.
E.
Provide a mechanical seal.
F.
Pumps shall have two heavy duty grease-lubricated ball radial and thrust bearings in cast iron
pedestal housing supporting pump.
G.
Pumps shall be connected with a flexible coupling and be aligned, bolted, and doweled in place on
heavy steel channel base by manufacturer. Provide coupling guard.
H.
Single phase motors shall be capacitor or repulsion induction type with built-in overload protection.
Three-phase motors shall be squirrel cage induction type. Provide grease-lubricated ball bearings,
horizontally mounted and drip-proof.
Page 91/374

I.
Single phase type controllers shall have 2-pole, hp-rated, toggle disconnect switches, heavy duty HOA
selector switches, 4 PDT transfer switch, pre-wired in single NEMA-l enclosure.
J.
Three-phase type controllers shall have combination unfused disconnect switches and across-the-line
magnetic starters with overload protection for each phase leg. Provide the following:
1.
Undervoltage protection.
2.
Provide a 220 volt control circuit transformer fused on primary and grounded on secondary with
automatic transfer between each pumps incoming supply in the event of failure or shut down of
power supply to any pump. Connections to pump incoming supplies shall be made downstream
of controller disconnect devices.
3.
Heavy duty HOA selector switches.
4.
Heavy duty start-stop push buttons.
5.
4 PDT transfer switch.
6.
Automatic electric alternator.
7.
Prewire in a single NEMA-l enclosure.
K.
Manual three-phase type controllers shall have thermal overload protection, in a NEMA-l enclosure.
L.
Low pressure cut-off shall be adjustable heavy duty bronze Bourdon actuated mercury tube pressure
switch with separate external high and low level adjustments. Provide with three-circuit relay.
2.11
A.
CONTROLS (FOR GRAVITY HOUSE TANKS)

Provide each water supply pump with two electrode level control unit in each house tank compartment
into which it pumps, for automatically actuating motor starter. Control unit shall be complete with
relays and accessories, in NEMA-1 cabinet with externally operated heavy duty two-position selector
switch to switch operation from one compartment to other and cut-out relay to shut off pumps on
failure of energizing circuit to electrode relays.
1.
B.
Provide electrodes, brass electrode holders and shielded stainless steel electrode rods (spaced
minimum 300 mm apart).
Pumps shall normally operate singly but operate simultaneously whenever load exceeds capacity of
one pump.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide 0.5M minimum cover for underground piping.
B.
Set steam operated heaters on supports high enough to allow for gravity return of condensate to
condensate pumps.
C.
Connections to existing water mains shall be made with tapping sleeves and tapping valves. New
valves shall be inserting type valves. Minimize shutdowns of existing mains. Provide additional valves,
if necessary. Mains shall be shut down only for work that cannot be done under pressure.
D.
Water supply connections to plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be over-the-rim water supplies
wherever possible.
E.
Provide missing vacuum breakers and/or check valves, or relocate same to required positions.
F.
Connections to equipment shall be made with flanges,or unions and threaded adaptors used for swing
connections.
G.
Provide three-elbow swing connections for all water lines connecting to mains, sub-mains or branch
mains.
Page 92/374

H.
Plugged or capped connections shall terminate in threaded-plug or threaded-nipple and cap, as

required, unless otherwise noted.
I.
Pipe drains from relief valves, drain pans, tanks, and pump bedplates to spill over floor drains or as
noted.
3.2
TESTS
A.
The Contractor shall test all pipe lines as directed by and in the presence of the Engineer. If the pipe
fails in test the Contractor shall repair, replace and retest the piping until accepted by the Engineer.
All piping system shall be flushed clean before testing.
B.
The Contractor shall provide all personnel, water and equipment for testing. The cost for the test shall
be included in the Contract Price
C.
Pipes of each part shall be subject to a hydraulic pressure test as recommended by the manufacturer.
D.
If piping is tested in sections, temporary cap shall be fitted. Each section shall be slowly filled with and
air inside the pipe shall be carefully expelled.
E.
For acceptance, the test pressure shall remain constant for one hour without additional water
F.
Pressure in testing will be 1-1/2 times of normal working pressure of system.
3.3
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A.
Equipment, pipes, valves, fittings and fixtures shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings and sludge
that may have accumulated from operation of the system during the test. Any stoppage, discoloration
or other damage to the finish, furnishings or parts of the building, due to the Contractors failure to
properly clean the piping system, shall be repaired by the Contractor without cost to the Employer,
Flush valves and automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation.
Page 93/374

SECTION 221400 FACILITY DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
1.
Sanitary drainage systems including connections to septic tank, sewage ejectors, sump pumps,
drains, and connections to plumbing fixtures and equipment.
2.
Storm water drainage systems for building and site including connection(s) to grey water
system, sump pumps and drains.

A.
Requirements included in the Contract document Chapter 2: General Requirements shall apply to all
work in this Section
B.
Requirements of Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK SECTION apply
C.

1.
2.
3.
Section 224000, PLUMBING FIXTURES.
1.3
A.
Published Specifications standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or

B.
Comply with all applicable codes and refer to Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR
C.
standards.
D.
Equivalent Vietnamese Standards (VS) can be substituted for Foreign Standards specified in this
section.
1.
2.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide motor operated pumps in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories Standard for Safety Publication UL.
B.
Refer to Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK SECTION for other
Page 94/374

1.5
DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL
A.
Manufacturers model numbers, sizes, and types only need be submitted as Shop Drawings for items
marked with a * when base specification material and equipment will be provided.
B.
C.
1.6
1.
Pipe and fittings *
2.
Valves*
3.
Cleanout*
4.
Drains*
5.
Backwater valves*
6.
Grease interceptors*
7.
Oil separators*
8.
Pumps : manufacturers specification including materials, construction, capacity rating, pump

curve, controller, controls and line wiring diagrams*
maintenance and repair data in accordance with Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR
PLUMBING WORK SECTION.

A.
B.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
The contractor shall submit manufacturers data for following items for Engineers appraisal.
1.
Floor and Roof Drains, CO Deck Plates, Backwater Valves,
2.
Shut-off Valves.
Page 95/374

2.2
PIPING
A.
2.3
The following materials are acceptable for storm water, sanitary pipelines as noted:
1.
Normal Sewage and Drainage
a.
uPVC spigot pipe and fittings PN10 as per TCVN 6151:2002
2.
Rainwater pipe horizontally hung on building frame of workshops

a.
Steel pipe PN10 as per TCVN 2981-79 or AWWA C-202 or equivalent
3.
Vent : Embedded and exposed in whole area : uPVC spigot pipe and fittings
SOLVENT CEMENT
A.
PVC pipe joints shall be solvent welded spigot type except where push fit with rubber ring, flanged or
threaded joint are required. In making solvent welded connections, dirt and moisture shall be removed
from pipe and fittings.
B.
The procedure as set out in ASTM D 2564 " Solvent Cements for PVC Pipe Fittings" or equivalent
shall be followed. Care shall be taken to avoid solvent cement being spilled on valves or allowed to
run from the joints.
2.4
TRAPS
A.
2.5
Provide fixture type as noted under Section 224000, PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION. In other
locations, provide deep seal P-trap or running type as noted. For running traps provide one cleanout;
for house traps provide two cleanouts. Provide traps for floor, area, and funnel drains and connections
to fixtures and equipment.
FRESH AIR INLETS

A.
2.6
Provide heavy perforated brass wall plates without advertisement, held in place with tamper-proof
devices with nickel bronze, bronze, or dark statuary bronze finish. Coordinate location with Employers
representative.
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
2.7
Expansion joints shall be installed where shown on the Drawings. Expansion joints shall be used on
the outside face of structures. Exterior expansion joints shall be installed within an approved sleeve to
keep the joint free from dirt.
ROOF DRAINS
A.
Provide coated cast iron body roof drains with an inside caulked bottom outlet, except as noted.
B.
For liquid membrane roofs, provide a 100 mm wide flange, for built up membrane roofs, provide a
combined flashing flange and gravel stop; and, for steel or precast decks, provide a deck clamp.
C.
Where insulation is applied over a structural roof deck, provide an extension collar with weep holes.
2.8
FLOOR DRAINS
A.
Floor drains shall be with functions as follow or equivalent products:

1.
Body : As poly resin nylon or equivalent material and more, products shall have no problem in
compression impact test of 500 kgf (4900N) and more, and have excellent contacting with
concrete structures.
2.
Drain capacity : 50 lpm and more (based on DN50).
Page 96/374

3.
4.
5.
2.9
Screen : Stainless steel, 1.5t and more, construction that the supporting area of screen shall be
of ABS resin firmly attached to stainless steel plate.
Function : Drain function shall be excellent, and maintain the seal water depth as more than
50mm.
Floor traps for wash machine : As hose connecting type, drain hose shall be inserted into
projected part of screen upper area, and shall be products with construction that the assembly
and disassembly of screen and inserting hole is possible (hose connecting hole: Poly resin
coated with chrome or equivalent material or more).
SEXTIA (Circulation Vent Type)

A.
The material applied to SEXTIA vent type is composed of drain connectors, vent connectors, bend
and piping.
1.
Drain connector
a.
Install at each floor, connect risers to branch of sewage piping in toilets of household or
kitchens.
b.
Device making flow and vent of sewage drainage smooth with guide vane and brake
room.
2.
Vent connector: Device installed at intermediate area of riser on F1 or F2(or F3), connecting
horizontal branch in basement or vent pipe of riser on lower floor to riser on upper floor.
3.
Bend
a.
Device installed at lowest area of riser, venting from sewage drain at connecting area of
riser to horizontal branch.
b.
Make vent smooth by preventing the close.
4.
Rubber ring: Prevent leakage from pipe or connector and bent, but not O-ring for preventing
leakage.
5.
Material
a.
Connector and bend: PVC products.
b.
Rubber ring: Neoprene, EPDM products or equivalent and more.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Slope horizontal drainage piping DN50 and smaller at 2 % minimum.
B.
Slope horizontal drainage piping DN75 and greater at 1 % minimum.
C.
Provide hanger support at starting end of all drainage lines which turn from vertical to horizontal.
D.
Hubless shall be installed so as to create a rigid, linear and plumb system without any deflection at the
joints either horizontally or vertically. The system shall be supported and secured to the building
structure to prevent movement induced by a 30 kPa head of water and its associated thrust forces.
E.
Perform changes in direction of drainage piping by use of 45 degree wyes, long turn tee wyes, long
sweep quarter bends, sixth, eighth or sixteenth bends. Short turn sanitary tees are only permissible on
horizontal to vertical where space conditions require.
F.
Slip joints: Provide on fixture trap inlets or elbows connecting to fixture tailpieces only.
G.
Wastes and vents smaller than 100 mm extending through roof: Increase to 100 mm below roof.
H.
Slope vent piping to drain out condensation and connect at base to prevent accumulation of rust.
I.
Offset vent stack and dry soil or waste stack extension offsets of angle of 45 degrees where possible.
J.
Locate cleanouts as follows:

1.
Every 15 meters on horizontal drainage piping.
2.
Changes in direction, at base of leaders, soil and waste stacks and at exit of building wall for all
house drains.
3.
Extend cleanouts installed on inaccessible piping to floor area above, for access.
Page 97/374

3.2
TESTS
A.
Notify and perform tests in the presence of the Engineer or Employers representative.
B.
Drainage and vent piping inside building and underground metallic piping (including house sewers)
shall be tested as follows:
1.
Water test: If tested in sections, fill each section with water to overflowing, from 3 meters above
or floor-to-floor height, whichever is greater, so that all of each section, except the topmost, is
tested with a head of at least 3 meters. For soil and drain lines located above food storage or
preparation area, perform a minimum 7.6 meters standing water test. Water level shall remain
constant throughout test without adding water for a minimum of two hours.
C.
Test sump pump and ejector discharge piping with water at 300 kPa at base of system.
Page 98/374

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
1.
Plumbing fixtures and trim.

A.
B.
Requirements of Section 220010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK SECTION apply
C.

1.
2.
Section 221400, FACILITY STORM DAINAGE.
3.
1.3
A.
Comply with all applicable national and local codes and refer to Section 220010, GENERAL
PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK SECTION for additional Reference Standards.
B.
standards.
C.
Equivalent Vietnamese Standards can be substituted for American Standards specified in this section.
1.
2.
D.

1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 220010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK SECTION for Guarantee
and other Quality Assurance requirements.
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings for plumbing fixtures and trim.
Page 99/374

1.6

A.
B.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
representative.
1.
Thermostatic Mixing Valves.
2.
Plumbing Fixtures.
3.
Steel Drinking Fountains.
4.
Brassware.
5.
Pressure Balanced Mixing Valves.
6.
Flushometers.
7.
Fixture Carriers.
8.
Toilet Seats.
9.
Mop Receptors.
FIXTURES
A.
2.3
Provide white vitreous china fixtures, except as noted. Provide unfinished surfaces of enameled iron
fixtures with factory coat of paint. Acid resisting (AR) enameled ware shall be labeled by manufacturer.
EXPOSED PIPE AND ACCESSORIES

A.
Provide exposed pipe, fittings, traps, escutcheons, valves, valve handles and accessories, above and
below fixtures with CP. Provide CP cast brass escutcheons with set screws for piping and tubing.
Provide CP cast brass traps with cleanout plugs, unless otherwise noted: CP Type L tubing fixture
supplies may be used. Covering tubes will not be permitted.
Page 100/374

2.4
WATER CLOSETS
A.
Provide modular pre-fabricated and pre-piped water closet unit.
B.
Provide wall hung vitreous china flushometer type 1.6 GPF, color #10 Cotton, Toto CT708V or
approved equal (equivalent conception and type) with seats and electronic flush valve concealed 100
x 100 mm, AC powered, Toto TET3ANSR-33 or approved equal (equivalent conception and type).
2.5
WALL HUNG WATER CLOSETS' SUPPORTS

A.
2.6
Provide concealed adjustable extra heavy cast iron combination drainage fitting and chair carriers with
an adjustable base anchored to slab using all base support holes, rear anchor foot assembly for stud
walls, adjustable cast iron outlet nipple and/or coupling, neoprene gasket and steel supporting bolts
with CP washers and cap nuts.
WATER CLOSET FLUSHOMETERS

A.
Provide quiet flushing, non-hold-open diaphragm type with vacuum breaker, metal halide, 25 mm (1
inch) capped quiet stop and 6 liters (1.6 gallon) flush for water saver type closets.
B.
Provide exposed type with bumper for seat with cover or bumper for seat without cover or check hinge
(Watersaver).
2.7
URINALS
A.
Provide vitreous china wall hung type, Toto UT104V or approved equal (equivalent conception and
type), with top inlet, 50 mm back outlet, cast brass threaded flange, approved gasket, brass holding
bolts, CP washers, cap nuts and concealed wall hangers.
B.
Provide Waterless Urinals for mens toilet in Office Tower, white color, Kohler K-4917 or approved
equal (equivalent conception and type).
2.8
URINAL FLUSHOMETERS
A.
Provide electronic valve concealed 100 x 100 mm, AC powered, Toto TEU3ANSR-11 or approved
equal (equivalent conception and type).
B.
Provide integrated AC power infra-red sensor flush valve assembly.
2.9
LAVATORIES
A.
Provide 32 mm by 38 mm P-traps, except as noted.
B.
Provide 32 mm by 38 mm cast brass adjustable P-trap with cleanout and copper tubing outlet with setscrew cast escutcheon. Connect to concealed piping using cast brass waste connection with brass
compression ring and brass slip unit.
C.
Provide 10 mm lockshield angle type stops with stuffing box and loose key, except as noted. Provide
wall type supply faucets with integral or built-in stops. .
D.
Provide Ladena undercounter vitreous china lavatory, 450 mm x 300 mm, color white, Kohler K-2214
or approved equa (equivalent conception and type)l.
2.10
A.
LAVATORY FAUCETS
Provide stainless steel faucets, Vola HV1 or approved equal (equivalent conception and type)
Page 101/374

1.
2.
B.
2.11
A.
2.12
Manual mixing for Office toilet.

Electronic sensors for Retail toilet.
All faucets shall be corrosion resistant and be maintenance free and protected against electro-galvanic
corrosion.
LAVATORY SUPPORTS
Provide adjustable iron concealed arm wall carriers, CP cast brass threaded escutcheons for slab type
lavatories, mounted on block walls.
MOP SINKS
A.
Provide recast service basin with galvanized steel wall flanges on sides as required , stainless steel or
cast aluminum protective caps on exposed curbs and 80 mm CP brass drain cast integral, Daelim or
approved equal (equivalent conception and type).
B.
Provide a wall-mounted combination with integral stops, wall brace, pail hook, 20 mm hose thread
end, and vacuum breaker, modified with 750 mm plain end rubber hose with wall bracket.
2.13
A.
EYES WASHER
Construction standards: ANSI Z358.1-1998 compliant.
B.
C.
Location:
1.
Install the eyes washer as specified in the drawings.
2.
The location of the eye wash unit shall be in a well-lit area and identified with a sign
3.
Accessible from the hazard workshop (paint, fiber glass, cleaning, battery) in a few seconds.
4.
Path shall be free of obstructions that inhibit the immediate use of the equipment.
5.
Positioned 6" from wall or nearest obstruction.
6.
Must be protected from airborne contaminants
D.
Flow rate = 1.5L.min during at least 15 minutes.
E.
Valves:
1.
Activate in 1 second or less.
2.
Stay-open valve (leaving hands free).
-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
During the course of construction, cover exposed fittings and fixtures with protection housings.
Uncover and thoroughly clean fixtures and fittings when directed and leave fixtures in perfect condition
at completion of project. Fixtures that are not in perfect condition shall be replaced by the Contractor
without additional cost to the Employer.
B.
Lag fixture carrier base plates or feet to slab with lead expansion shields and insert bolts in all bolt
holes.
C.
Where wall hung water closets are supported adjacent to stud walls, provide rear anchor foot
assembly bolted to slab.
D.
Seal all spaces between fixtures, and walls or floors, with a non yellowing or shrinking flexible water
sealant.
Page 102/374

3.2
FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE

A.
Sizes of branch piping shall be not less than listed below. Actual connection sizes shall be as required
by connection on fixtures.
B.
Water closets: Drain: 100 mm, vent: 50 mm, CW: 32 mm, 15 mm.
C.
Urinals (wall type): Drain: 50 mm, vent: 40 mm, CW: 25 mm, CW: 20 mm.
D.
Lavatories: Drain: 40 mm, vent: 40 mm, CW: 15 mm, CW: 10 mm, HW: 15 mm, HW: 10mm.
E.
Sinks: Drain: 50 mm, vent: 40 mm, CW: 15 mm, HW: 15 mm.
F.
Sink and tray: Drain: 50 mm, vent: 40 mm, CW: 15 mm, HW: 15 mm.
G.
Mop sinks: Drain: 80 mm, vent: 40 mm, CW: 20 mm, HW: 20 mm.
Page 103/374

SECTION 230010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC SECTION

PART 4 - GENERAL
4.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Provide piping from plumbing terminations, 3 meters (10 feet) from equipment, for water, gas,
compressed air and as indicated.
B.
Provide drainage from noted equipment to floor drains, roof, sink, or funnel drains.
C.
Provide piping connections to equipment, as required, for kitchens, laboratories, laundries, and as
indicated.
D.
Provide Seismic Restraints for piping and equipment in accordance with the value of Shortening &
Swaying in buildings and Seismic data to be prepared by Building Structural Design.
4.2
RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENT

A.
Related documents
1.
Requirements in the Tender document - Chapter II: Employers requirements shall apply to all
B.
1.
Section 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.
2.
Section 236400 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM SECTION.
3.
Section 237300 AIR HANDLING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SECTION.
4.
Section 230700 HVAC INSULATION.
5.
Section 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT.
6.
Section 230519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING.
7.
Section 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC.
4.3
A.
Published Specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry or

governmental organizations apply to work in all Sections as noted below:
1.
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.
2.
AABC - Associated Air Balance Council.
3.
AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
4.
ADC - Air Diffuser Council.
5.
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
6.
ANSI American National Standards Institute.
7.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
8.
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.
9.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
10.
ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
11.
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
B.
Equivalent Vietnam Standards (VS) can be substituted for foreign Standards specified in this section.
1.
2.
3.
Page 104/374

4.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Definitions
1.
Furnish or provide: to supply, install, and make complete, safe, and operable, the particular
work referred to unless specifically indicated otherwise.
2.
3.
Install:: to erect, mount, and make complete with all related accessories.
4.
5.
Supply: to purchase, procure, acquire, and deliver complete with related accessories.
6.
7.
Work: includes labor, materials, equipment, services, and all related accessories necessary
for the proper and complete installation of complete systems.
8.
9.
Piping: includes pipe, tube, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, strainers, hangers, supports,
unions, traps, drains, insulation, and all related accessories.
10.
11.
Wiring: includes raceway, fittings, wire, boxes, and all related accessories.
12.
13.
Concealed: not in view, installed in masonry or other construction, within furred spaces,
double partitions, hung ceilings, trenches, crawl spaces, or enclosures.
14.
15.
Exposed: in view, not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.
16.
17.
Indicated, shown, or noted: as indicated, shown, or noted on drawings or specifications.
18.
19.
Similar or equal: of base bid manufacturer, equal in quality, materials, weight, size,
performance, design, and efficiency of specified product, conforming with "Base Bid
Manufacturers.
20.
21.
Reviewed, satisfactory, accepted, or directed: as reviewed, satisfactory, accepted, or
directed by or to Employers Representative.
22.
23.
Motor Controllers: includes manual or magnetic starters with or without switches, individual
pushbuttons or hand-off-automatic (HOA) switches controlling the operation of motors.
24.
25.
Control or Actuating Devices: includes automatic sensing and switching devices such as
thermostats, pressure, float, flow, electro-pneumatic switches and electrodes controlling
operation of equipment.
B.
General
1.
All equipment and accessories shall be the product of manufacturers regularly engaged in their
manufacture. All items of a given type shall be the products of the same manufacturer.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Supply all equipment and accessories in complete compliance with and in accordance with the
applicable standards listed in reference standards of this Section and with all applicable codes
C.
Description of bid documents

1.
Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment.
2.
Drawings, in general are diagrammatic and indicate sizes, locations, connections to equipment
and methods of installation. Provide additional offsets, fittings, hangers, supports, valves,
drains as required for construction and coordination with work of other trades.
3.
Scaled and indicated dimensions are approximate and are for estimating purposes only. Before
proceeding with work, check and verify all dimensions.
4.
Make adjustments that may be necessary or requested in order to resolve space problems,
preserve headroom, and avoid architectural openings, structural members and work of other
trades.
5.
Typical details, where shown on the drawings, apply to each and every item of the project
where such items are applicable. Typical details are not repeated in full on the plans, and are
diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be incorporated in full.
Page 105/374

6.
D.
4.5
If any part of Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, consult the Architect
and/or Engineer for interpretation and decision as early as possible during bidding period. Do
not proceed with work without Employers representatives decision.
Job conditions
1.
Inspection of Site Conditions:
2.
Before starting work, visit the site and examine the conditions under which the work has to be
performed. Report in writing any conditions which might adversely affect the work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings, coordination service drawings (CSD), product data, samples and certificates of
compliance required by contract documents.
B.

1.
Provide five sets of manufacturers' equipment brochures and service manuals consisting of the
following:
a.
b.
Model number and performance data..
c.
d.
e.
Recommended spare parts lists.
f.
2.
Assemble manufacturers equipment manuals in chronological order following the
specifications numbering system using heavy duty three ring binders.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Submit three sets of field test reports including instrument set points and normal operating
valves.
4.6

A.
Ship materials and equipment in crated sections of sizes to permit passing through available space,
where required.
B.
Receive and accept materials and equipment at the site, properly handle, house, and protect them
C.
Arrange for and provide storage space or area at the job site for all materials and equipment to be
4.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
4.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
Page 106/374

4.9
UTILITY CONNECTIONS
A.
Arrange for and pay costs for all specified utilities including the following:
1.
Connection to utility company mains.
2.
Payment of service charges.
3.
Provision for temporary utilities.
4.
Connect in accordance with authority having jurisdiction.
PART 5 - PRODUCTS
5.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
5.2
Contractor shall submit the manufacturers data for following items, but not limited to, for approval from
Employers representative.
1.
Access doors.
2.
Inserts.
3.
Hangers and supports.
4.
Paint.
5.
Gratings.
INSERTS AND SUPPORTS

A.
Support all HVAC work from building construction by providing inserts, beam clamps, steel fishplates
(in concrete fill only), and acceptable brackets. Submit all methods for review.
B.
Provide trapeze hangers of bolted angles or channels for grouped lines and services.
C.
Provide additional framing where building construction is inadequate. Submit for review.
D.
Inserts shall be steel, slotted type and factory-painted.

1.
Single rod.
2.
Multi-rod with end caps and closure strips.
3.
Clip form nails flush with inserts.
4.
Maximum loading including pipe, contents and covering shall not exceed 75 percent of rated
insert capability.
E.
Supports from steel decks:

1.
Pipes:
a.
Maximum size: 50 mm (2 inches) diameter
b.
Hanger spacing: maximum 3 M (10 feet) centers.
2.
Ductwork:
a.
Hangers spacing: maximum 2.0 M (6 feet) centers.
5.3
SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNELS AND SUPPORTS

A.
Furnish supplementary steel, channels, and supports required for proper installation, mounting, and
support of HVAC work.
B.
Connect supplementary steel and channels firmly to building construction in an acceptable manner.
C.
Determine type and size of supporting channels and supplementary steel. Supplementary steel and
channels shall be of sufficient strength and size to allow only a minimum deflection in conformance
with manufacturers' requirements of loading.
D.
Install supplementary steel and channels in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to walls, floors,
and ceiling construction.
E.
All supplementary steel, channels, supports shall be submitted to structural Engineer for review.
Page 107/374

5.4
ACCESS DOORS
A.
Access doors will be provided under Contract documents.
B.
Supply access doors for all concealed HVAC items in inaccessible walls and ceilings for complete
access, using a minimum door size of 305 mm(12 inch) x 305 mm (12 inch) for installation under the
Contract documents. Locating and setting shall be performed after review.
C.
Flush type access doors shall be with 2.7 mm (No.13 gauge) steel doors and trim and 1.6 mm (No.16
gauge) steel frame, metal wings for keying into construction, concealed hinges and screwdriver
operated stainless steel cam lock. Provide lift off type access doors where door cannot swing open.
D.
In acoustic tile ceilings, factory finished white access doors shall be with 2.7 mm (No.13 gauge) steel
frame, 1.6 mm (No.16 gauge) steel pan door suitable for receiving tile thickness and hinges that are
not visible when door is closed. Access door shall have screwdriver operated stainless steel cam locks
finishing flush with tile with a minimum of 2 per door.
E.
In plaster ceilings recessed access doors shall be with recess to receive plaster.
F.
In fire rated construction provide fire rated access doors in accordance with applicable code
requirements.
G.
Access doors shall have one coat of shop-painted zinc chromate primer.
5.5
ACCESS TILE IDENTIFICATION

A.
5.6
In removable ceiling tiles, provide buttons, tabs, and markers to identify location of concealed work.
Submit for review.
ACCESS PLATFORMS
A.
Access platforms willl be provided under Contract documents.
B.
Provide access platforms for equipment, where indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction,
and indicate on shop drawings, details of construction and method of attachment.
C.
Provide removable gratings, toeplates, and guard rails suitable for a minimum 149 kg/m floor loading.
D.
Provide supports riveted or welded structural steel cross-braced on four sides and welded to
baseplates for anchor bolting to concrete piers.
5.7
EQUIPMENT PLATFORMS
A.
Equipment platforms willl be provided under Contract documents.
B.
Provide equipment platforms, where indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, and as
indicated. On shop drawings, show details of construction and method of attachment. Submit for
review.
C.
Equipment platform shall be suspended from overhead construction.
D.
Platform shall be riveted or welded structural steel frame with intermediate framing and clip angles to
receive suspension rods. Comers shall be reinforced with gusset plates. Base plate shall be minimum
3.5 mm (No.10 gauge) steel plate riveted or welded to channel iron frame. Where overhead
construction does not permit fastening of rods, provide additional steel members framed to span
structural steel. Submit for review.
E.
Fasten vibration isolation bases as noted. Submit for review.
F.
Submit shop drawings with details of construction and method of attachment.
Page 108/374

5.8
LADDERS
A.
Ladders willl be provided under Contract documents.
B.
Provide 450mm(18 inch) wide properly supported, galvanized structural steel ladders with 65 mm (2
1/2 inch) x 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) side rails and 20 mm (3/4 inch) diameter rungs installed 300 mm (12
inches) on center.
5.9
SHAFT GRATINGS
A.
Shaft gratings willl be provided under Contract documents.
B.
Provide shaft gratings suitable for a minimum of 500 kg/m floor loading.
C.
Support on structural steel members and indicate on shop drawings, details of construction and
method of attachment.
5.10
TRENCH COVERS AND FRAMES
A.
Trench covers and frames willl be provided under Contract documents.
B.
Covers
1.
Provide 0.9 m (3 feet) long, 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick galvanized checkered steel covers with flush
drop-type lift handles and means for securing to frame for easy removal.
2.
Provide 900 mm (3 feet) long), 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick galvanized expanded and perforated steel
covers with flush drop-type lift handles and means for securing to frame for easy removal.
C.
Provide 50 mm (2 inch) x 50 mm (2 inch) x 6 mm (1/4 inch) galvanized welded angle iron frame with
welded stops and lugs for anchoring into concrete.
D.
Supply trench covers and frames for installation under Contract documents.
5.11
GUARDS AND RAILINGS
A.
Guards and railings willl be provided under Contract documents.
B.
Provide guards and railings as indicated and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Provide removable type guards with clearances for motor adjustments, for belt driven and rotating
equipment, with 1.3 mm(No.18 gauge) steel frames and No. 1 mm(No.20 gauge) galvanized
perforated steel fronts with covered test openings to permit rpm readings without removal. Provide
galvanized steel angle or channel supports braced to maintain clearances of moving parts.
D.
Provide removable type railings constructed of 32 mm (1 1/4 inches) pipe and rail fittings.
5.12
TAGS
A.
Provide 50 mm (2 inch) round valve tags on all valves and controls of 1.3 mm (No.18 gauge)
aluminum with stamped numbers and letters filled in with black paint, or similar material and methods.
B.
Indicate identifying number and system letter on tags, and fasten by heavy aluminum or brass hooks
or chains, or similar material and methods.
5.13
A.
CHARTS
Provide valve tag chart indicating valve number, system, type, size, location and function for all valves.
Page 109/374

B.
Mount charts on walnut grained wood plaque, with clear plastic laminations covering diagrams, or
similar material and methods.
C.
Mount in aluminum frame and glass or approved equal.
D.
Letter and number valves and controls to correspond with designations on metal tags.
E.
Fasten charts permanently in locations, as directed, with four brass screws or approved equal.
5.14
NAMEPLATES
A.
Provide nameplates with inscriptions, subject to review, indicating equipment and voltage Fasten with
epoxy cement or chrome plated screws. Nameplate shall be black Lamicoid sheet with white lettering
or approved equal.
B.
Provide nameplates for gauges, meters, instruments, control devices, pilot lamps, transmitters, motor
controllers and panel mounted equipment.
5.15
SPECIAL TOOLS
A.
Provide one(1) set of any special tools required to operate, adjust, dismantle or repair equipment
furnished under this Section for the Employer's use at the completion of work.
B.
Provide one pressure grease gun with adapters for each type of grease required.
C.
Provide one suitable tool case for special tools
PART 6 - EXECUTION
6.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Clearance from electrical equipment

1.
Piping or ductwork is prohibited in electric and telephone rooms and closets, elevator machine
rooms, and for installations over or within 1.5 meters (5 feet) of transformers, substations,
switchboards, motor control centers, standby power plants, and motors.
2.
3.
Branch piping to equipment is acceptable when installed over or within 1.5 meters (5 feet) of
motors.
B.
Accessibility
1.
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair
are readily accessible. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this,
but changes of substantial magnitude shall not be made without written approval.
2.
3.
Group concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access,
so as to be freely accessible through access doors.
C.
Cutting and patching

1.
Provide all carpentry, cutting and patching required for proper installation of material and
equipment specified. Do not cut or drill structural members without review by the Engineer.
6.2
A.
Protect from damage, water, dust, etc., material, equipment and apparatus provided under this trade,
both in storage and installed.
Page 110/374

6.3
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A.
Excavate, backfill and restore surfaces inside building.
B.
Excavate, backfill and restore surfaces inside and outside building.
C.
Excavate, backfill and restore surfaces outside building.
D.
If rock is encountered, excavate to 150 mm (6 inch) below bottom of piping and refill with well tamped
sand and grave1.
E.
Bank: excavated materials adjacent to trench and properly support with sheet piling and braces.
F.
Install and maintain guards and keep excavation free of water with attended pumping equipment.
G.
No extra compensation will be provided for quicksand, hardpan, or other material encountered in
excavating, except rock on unit price basis.
H.
Remove bog or other swampy conditions encountered in excavating to one foot below bottom of
piping and backfill with well tamped sand, finely crushed stone, or gravel.
I.
Immediately after piping is installed, inspected, tested, and accepted, remove sheet piling with special
care and solidly fill voids without damage to piping. Backfill in a manner to prevent future settlement.
Use only good clean loam, clay, sand, or gravel that is free from frozen materials, lumps of clay, rocks,
boulders, cinders, slag ashes, vegetable or organic materials, or building or other debris, or refuse.
1.
Hand fill in 100 mm (4 inch) layers up to 600 mm (2 feet) above pipe and remainder, fill in with
300 mm (l feet) layers.
2.
Tamp and puddle each layer before placing next layer.
3.
Allow no stones larger than 50 mm (2 inch) diameter in fill up to 600 mm (2 feet) above piping
and allow no stones larger than 100 mm (4 inch) diameter in fill over 600 mm (2 feet) above
piping.
4.
Restore surfaces, sidewalks, pavements, curbing, lawns, and shrubs that are disturbed or
damaged.
J.
Dispose of acceptable surplus excavation on site and remove surplus and unsuitable excavated
materials from site as directed.
6.4
PAINTING
A.
General
1.
Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary for field prime painting. Protect flooring and
equipment with drop cloths and store paint and materials in a location where directed. Wire
brush and remove all oil, dirt, rust and grease before applying paint.
2.
Paint all exposed, uninsulated, non-galvanized sheet metal, other than stainless steel and
aluminum, with two coats of aluminum paint or alkyd paint of a color as directed.
3.
Paint all exposed, uninsulated, galvanized, aluminum and stainless steel sheet metal in
finished spaces, including mechanical equipment rooms, with one coat of galvanized iron
primers and two coats of alkyd oil paint.
4.
Paint insulated piping and equipment covering with one coat of primer sealer and two coats of
alkyd oil paint of a color as directed.
5.
Factory or field apply one coat of heat resisting paint for steel pipe and finned tube radiation.
6.
Paint exposed steel and metal work not furnished with factory-painted finish, structural steel
piping support and uninsulated piping with two coats alkyd oil paint of a color as directed.
7.
Paint the following spaces under this contract:
a.
Mechanical Equipment Rooms.
b.
Refrigeration Plant.
c.
Emergency Generator Plant.
8.
Apply zinc chromate primer for black steel piping, cast iron piping (except underground), steel
and iron work and steel tanks before insulation.
9.
Dip in zinc chromate primer, uncoated hangers, supports, rods and inserts.
B.
Supply and deliver, in original sealed containers, paint of the best grade for its purpose of colors, as
selected, and apply in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Page 111/374

C.
Finish painting
1.
Provide finish painting for piping continuously painted in all exposed areas consisting of two
finished coats of high gloss medium or long alkyd paint over prime coat of a color shade as
accepted after submittal.
2.
Utilize color as follows :
a.
Chilled water piping and equipment --- PALE BLUE.
b.
Chemical feed piping and equipment --- DARK BLUE.
c.
Refrigeration Machines and Refrigerant Piping --- BRIGHT BLUE.
d.
Supply ductwork and fans --- SILVER GRAY.
e.
Control panels --- SLATE GRAY.
f.
Exhaust and return ductwork and fans --- STEEL GRAY.
g.
Vent and relief piping --- RICH BROWN.
3.
Place unlisted piping, ductwork or equipment in one of the following classifications and color
coded shades as accepted. This corresponds to colors of ANSI AB.1, (Scheme for
identification of piping systems).
a.
Yellow or Orange for dangerous materials.
b.
Green or Blue for safe materials.
c.
Dark Blue or Purple for extra valuable materials.
d.
Gray for general equipment.
4.
Shades shall be consistent throughout the project.
5.
Coat valve, strainer and other appurtenances operating at over 104 C (220 F) where bare
metal is exposed with Silicone Alkyd Aluminum.
D.
Paint interior of ductwork as far back as visible from outside, flat black.
E.
Apply factory prime coat for pumps, fans, motors, equipment, registers, diffusers, and grilles.
F.
Apply on machinery, one shop coat of metal primer and two finish coats of gray engine enamel.
G.
Apply on control valve handles, one coat of lead and oil paint of color as selected.
H.
Paint fire dampers with prime coat and second coat of corrosion inhibitive paint.
I.
Spot prime coat marred surfaces of prime coated equipment and piping to match adjacent coat.
6.5
PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A.
Stenciling
1.
Mark piping every 3 m (10 feet) with size, purpose, and direction of flow, and clearly stencil
letters and flow arrows with flat black paint, block type letters and white background.
a.
Size of stencil as follows:
1)
Outside dia. of Pipe
Covering (mm) Size of Stencil (mm)
20 (3/4 in.) - 32 (1-1/4 in.) 15 (1/2 in.)
40 (1-1/2 in.) - 50 (2 in.) 20 (3/4 in.)
65 (2-1/2 in.) - 150 (6 in.) 32 (1-1/4 in.)
200 (8 in.) - 250 (10 in.) 65 (2-1/2 in.)
over 259 (10 in.) 90 (3-1/2 in.)
2.
Indicate system, size and direction of flow on piping to be stenciled by Painting Contractor.
Supervise stenciling and make stenciling readable from the floor of point from which ordinarily
read.
3.
Perform stenciling in accordance with the latest edition ANSI A13.l.
B.
Pipe Markers
1.
Provide factory fabricated, snap-on type pipe markers with service legend and flow arrows. The
pipe markers shall be the weather-proof plastic type and shall not be used where surface
temperature exceeds 180 degrees as accepted after submittal.
2.
Adhesive type markers will not be permitted.
6.6
FOUNDATIONS
A.
Foundations and concrete will be provided under Contract documents.
Page 112/374

B.
Provide concrete as specified herein:

1.
One part Portland cement, two parts fine aggregate, and four parts coarse aggregate.
2.
Concrete shall be the same consistency as specified under Contract documents.
3.
Provide concrete, poured in place on roughened concrete floor, cleaned and slushed with coat
of cement grout. Do not pour foundation until concrete has set. Foundation shall be puddled
and finished smooth.
C.
Hold vibration isolation and anchor bolts in position during pour. Set anchor bolts in oversized sleeves
with washers and nuts at bottom. Finish bolts shall be flush with nuts on top. Foundations shall extend
150 mm (6 inches) beyond equipment, except as noted.
D.
Provide a minimum of 100 mm (4 inches) concrete foundations. Provide a minimum as required for
installation of J bolts for foundations under built up air handling units.
E.
Forms: Provide 1.3 mm (No.18 gauge) galvanized steel form with welded seams and joints, cross-strip
bracing welded to top and bottom angle edges and intermediate bracing welded or riveted to sides as
required. Bend top and bottom edges to form 50 mm (2-inch) integral internal angles (bend back
exposed edges).
F.
Forms: Provide moisture-resistant commercial standard fir with non-staining mineral oil interior surface
coating with rounded or chamfered edges.
G.
Forms: Forms will be provided under Contract documents.
H.
Provide foundations for, but not limited to :

1.
Pumps.
2.
Fans.
3.
Air handling units and floor mounted plenums.
4.
Refrigeration equipment.
5.
Floor mounted control panels.
6.
Motor controllers.
7.
Motors.
6.7
WATERPROOFING
A.
Waterproofing will be provided under Contract documents.
B.
Where any work pierces waterproofing, installation shall be subject to review, provide all necessary
sleeves, caulking, flashing and flashing fittings required to make openings absolutely watertight.
6.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Perform tests, as noted, and in the presence of Employers representative and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Provide required labor, material, equipment, and connections necessary for tests and submit results
for review.
C.
Repair or replace defective work and pay for restoring or replacing damaged work due to tests, as
directed.
6.9
CLEANING
A.
Brush and clean work prior to concealing, painting and acceptance. Perform in stages if directed.
B.
Clean and repair painted exposed work, soiled or damaged, to match adjoining work before final
acceptance.
C.
Remove debris from inside and outside of material and equipment.
Page 113/374

PART 7 - Construction work
7.1
Using range
A.
This specifications for construction work is adopted on the ionized water treatment installation work to
remove and prevent of rust and scale in the water pipe. It follows standard specifications except this.
PART 8 - Working range
8.1
The delivery of goods and installation work for the ionized water treatment device to remove and
prevent of rust and scale.
8.2
The subsidiary water pipe work from ionized water treatment device.
PART 9 - Type and specifications of construction work
9.1
Type
A.
9.2
It generate energy by itself by using brass, special zinc and PTFE without supplying chemicals or
external power source.
Material
A.
Outside : Brass with nickle plated
B.
Inside : Zinc anode and PTFE(polytetrafluoroethylene)
9.3
Size
A.
It use same pipe size with installation location pipe it.

1.
Screw type : under 50mm
2.
Flange type : Over 50mm
PART 10 - Construction method
10.1
Installation location
A.
The ionized water treatment device had better to install by vertical direction.
B.
If possible, it has to install on the best location for easy assemble and disassemble.
10.2
Installation method
A.
Install the cutoff valve to inlet and outlet on the ionized water treatment device and do make to easy
assemble and disassemble.
B.
For screw type(Under 50mm)

1.
Connect nut same with pipe size
2.
Install the union to the inlet and outlet on the water treatment device.
Page 114/374

C.
For flange type(Over 50mm) - Connect flange by welding same size with water treatment device on
the both end sides.
10.3
Installation conditions
A.
The temperature for installation location must under 60.
B.
In the result of water analysis, it must suitable for installation conditions.
10.4
Earth connection
A.
Do earth connection to the inlet and outlet on the water treatment device to prevent from flowing extra
electric current from water pipe.
10.5
Heat insulation
A.
Basically the ionized water treatment device does not need heat insulation. But if necessary, you can
do heat insulation with proper materials and do complete with casing.
PART 11 - Test and inspection of construction work
11.1
After installation the device, do inspect external appearance of water pipe whether it used proper
material according to drawing (specifications for construction, drawing and specifications).
11.2
Do water pressure test before heat insulation and do heat insulation after confirmation by beneficiary.
PART 12 - Technical specifications on product of construction work
12.1
Technical specifications
Size
Type
ION D15 ~ H40
ION SB50 ~ SB600
Screw Type
Flange Type
Maximum pressure
10 kg/cm2
Maximum temperature
60
Outside Material
Brass + Nickel plated

Zinc anode
Inside Material
PTFE
Flow direction
12.2
Specifications
Pipe size
Both way
Length
O/D
Weight
Max. flow rate
Effective range
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
(l/h)
(m)
Size
(mm)
Page 115/374

ION H32
32
330
63
4.4
5.79
410
ION H40
40
360
69
5.3
9.04
500
12.3
Flange specifications
Flange specifications
Size
I/D (mm)
O/D (mm)
Pitch (mm)
Hole size (mm)
No. of hole
Bolt size
mm
KS
DIN
KS
DIN
KS
DIN
KS
DIN
KS
DIN
KS
DIN
65
77.1
90
175
185
140
145
19
18
M16
M16
80
90.0
105
185
200
150
160
19
18
M16
M16
100
115.4
125
210
220
175
180
19
18
M16
M16
125
141.2
150
250
250
210
210
23
18
M20
M16
150
166.6
175
280
285
240
240
23
23
12
M20
M20
200
218
232
330
340
290
295
23
23
12
M20
M20
Page 116/374

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
1.
Pipe.
2.
Fittings.
3.
Valves.
4.
Motorized valve operators.
5.
Strainers.
6.
Expansion joints.
7.
Hangers, supports, guides.
8.
Sleeves.
9.
Accessories.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
A.
Requirements in the Contract document - Chapter II: Employers requirements shall apply to all work
in this section
B.
Requirements of Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC SECTON apply to all work in
this Section.
1.3
A.

governmental organizations apply to all work in this Section.
B.
Comply with all applicable codes and refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC
WORK SECTION for additional reference standards.
C.
In addition, comply with all standards or associations as specified herein including, but not limited to,
the following, as applicable.
1.
American Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
2.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
3.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
D.
section.
1.
2.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK SECTION for Guarantee and
other Quality Assurance requirements.
Page 117/374

1.5
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings for piping and all related accessories in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
B.
Prepare general layout drawings, as follows:

1.
Minimum 1 : 50 (6mm) scale piping layout with fittings, valves and equipment, use single line
for below 100 mm(4 inches) and double line for 100 mm (4 inches) and above.
2.
Minimum 1 : 30 (10mm) scale, double line layout and sections where required for coordination
drawings.
3.
Indicate location of hangers, supports, guides and anchors, expansion joints and sleeves.
C.
Submit calculations for anchors and supports for chilled water, hot water services.
D.
Submit catalog cuts for fittings, flanges, unions, bolts, nuts, gaskets, hangers, guides and anchors.
E.
Submit schedule of pipe type and rating for each system.
F.
Submit schedule listing type make and model number, size and service for valves, motorized valve
operators, strainers, flanges, fittings and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
representative.
1.
Pipe and fittings.
2.
Valves.
3.
Motorized valve operators.
4.
Strainers, Expansion joints, unions, hangers and miscellaneous material.
PIPE
A.
Steel pipe shall be black and hot dipped galvanized of weight and wall thickness as noted, in
accordance with ASTM specifications as follows.
1.
A 120: Continuous, butt welded.
2.
A 53: Continuous furnace butt welded, Type F.
3.
A 53 Grades A and B: Type S seamless or Type E electric resistance welded.
4.
A 106 Grades A and B: seamless.
5.
A 134: Electric fusion welded, straight seam.
6.
A 671: Electric fusion welded.
7.
API5L: Line pipe.
B.
Stainless steel: Standard weight except as noted, seamless 18-8 Cr Ni Type 304, ASTM-312.
C.
Red brass: ASTM B 43, seamless, annealed, 85 percent copper.
2.3
FLANGES AND PIPE FITTINGS

A.
2.4
Steel flanges and pipe fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM A 105 and A 216.
SERVICES
A.
The following pipe applies to systems specified except as noted.

1.
Low temperature Water Systems, in excess of 690 kPa (100 psig) 5 to 100 deg C (40 to 220
deg F) supply temperature (chilled water - primary and secondary systems).
Page 118/374

a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
Material shall be steel in accordance with ASTM A 53, seamless, Grades A or B with
wall thickness as follows :
1)
To 50 mm (2 inch): Schedule 80 threaded pipe or Schedule 40 socket
weld end pipe.
2)
65 mm (2-1/2 inch) to 250 mm (10 inch): Schedule 40 welded end pipe.
3)
300 mm (12 inch) and larger: 9.5 mm (.375 inch) wall thickness up to
1270 kPa (250 psig) and 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) wall thickness up to 2758
kPa (400 psig).
Low Temperature Water System, not in excess of 690 kPa (100 psig), -30 to 100 deg C (-20 to
220 deg F) supply temperature (chilled water - primary and secondary systems).
a.
Material shall be steel in accordance with ASTM A 53 or A 120 with wall thickness:
Schedule 40 for up to 250 mm (10 inch), and 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) for 300 mm (12 inch)
and larger.
Atmospheric air vents shall be galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 120 or A 53,
Schedule 40.
Piping under Sheet Metal U-Covers in Floor Fill shall be steel; Schedule 80 in accordance with
ASTM A 53 Grades A or B.
Miscellaneous drains and overflow shall be stainless steel, Type 304, in accordance with
ASTM 312.
Pumping drain system shall be stainless steel, Type 304, in accordance with ASTM 312.
All other piping shall be galvanized steel, Schedule 40 in accordance with ASTM A 53 Grade A
or B.
FITTINGS
A.
For steel pipe:

1.
To 50 mm (2 inch):
a.
Steel fittings shall be socket weld ends in accordance with ANSI B 16.11.
b.
Cast iron threaded fittings shall be in accordance with ANSI B 16.4.
c.
Cast iron flanged fittings shall be in accordance with ANSI B 16.1.
1)
860 kPa (125 lb).
2)
1720 kPa (250 lb) where noted.
d.
Malleable iron fittings shall be in accordance with ANSI B 16.3.
1)
1030 kPa (150 lb), galvanized, for fill and make-up piping.
2)
2070 kPa (300 lb), where noted.
e.
Cast iron drainage fittings shall be in accordance with ANSI B 16.12.
f.
Galvanized fittings for galvanized piping.
g.
Ductile iron shall be in accordance with ASTM A 445. Contractor has option to furnish
2070 kPa (300 lb) ductile iron in lieu of 1720 kPa (250 lb) cast iron or 2070 kPa (300 lb)
malleable iron.
2.
65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger welded:
a.
Butt weld fittings same weight as piping and in accordance with ANSI B 16.9
b.
Branch connections:
1)
Equal to main and to 2 pipe sizes smaller, use weld tees.
2)
Three or more pipe sizes smaller than main, but 65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and
larger, use weldolet.
3)
To 50 mm (2 inch): Weldolets, threadolets, threaded nipolets or steel
couplings or equal.
B.
For lightweight copper pipe:

1.
Fittings shall be standard cast bronze, banded, brazing joint.
C.
For red brass pipe:

1.
Fittings shall be standard cast bronze, banded, threaded in accordance with ANSI B16.15.
D.
Flanges:
1.
For steel pipe flanges shall be of matching quality, grade and thickness.
a.
Welded: Welding neck, slip-on, socket welded in accordance with ANSI B 16.5, slip-on
flanges shall be back welded.
1)
1030 kPa (150 lb) wsp(working steam pressure).
2)
2070 kPa (300 lb) wsp.
2.
Screwed flanges shall be standard cast or extra heavy cast iron in accordance with ANSI B
16.4.
3.
Match connecting flange:
a.
Class.
Page 119/374

b.
Facing.
E.
Flange gaskets shall be one-piece ring type 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) thick (minimum), except as noted,
suitable for temperature, pressure (operating and test) and service of system.
1.
Non-asbestos elastometer for 120 deg C (250 F) and under.
2.
Non-asbestos spiral wound 304 stainless steel for above 120 deg C (250 deg F).
3.
Fuel oil service shall be of neoprene.
4.
For joints of dissimilar metals, provide isolating gaskets, sleeves and washers between flanges,
bolts and nuts. Gaskets shall be similar to duPont Teflon.
F.
Unions
1.
For steel pipe:
a.
Malleable iron 2070 kPa (300 lb) wsp.
1)
Ground jacket seat: brass-to-iron, black or galvanized to match piping.
b.
Malleable iron 2070 kPa (300 lb) wsp.
c.
Forged steel, 2070 kPa (3000 lb) wog(working oil & gas pressure) class, bronze-to-steel
or steel-to-steel seats, where noted or required for service.
2.
For red brass pipe.
a.
All bronze, 1030 kPa (150 lb) wsp, ground joint seat.
b.
Not be used on Medium or High Temperature Water Systems or Oil Systems.
2.6
BOLTS AND NUTS

A.
Bolts shall be chrome-molybdenum bolt stud in accordance with ASTM A 193 Grade B7 with full
length threads in accordance with ANSI B 1.1. Threaded Length shall be sufficient to project beyond
nuts one complete thread when joint is made.
B.
Nuts shall be carbon steel in accordance with ASTM A 194 Grade 2. Nuts shall be hexagon heavy
series type. Threads shall be the same as for bolts.
2.7
VALVES
A.
Valve ends, except as noted, shall be

1.
Screwed ends: Valves 50 mm (2 inch) and smaller in screwed steel piping.
2.
Socket weld ends: Valves 50 mm (2 inch) and smaller in all-welded piping.
3.
Solder ends: Valves 50 mm (2 inch) and smaller in copper tubing.
4.
Socket ends: Valves 50 mm (2 inch) and smaller in copper pipe.
5.
Butt welding ends shall be as noted.
6.
Flanged ends shall be for all other valves.
B.
By-pass globe valves: 20 mm (3/4 inch) for 200 mm (8 inch) gate valves, 25 mm (1 inch) for 250 mm
(10 inch) and larger gate valves. By-pass valves shall be of same pressure rating as gate valves.
C.
The following valves shall be provided with chain operated handwheels, rustproof chain and chain
guide.
1.
Valves located 2.4 M(8 feet) or more above operating floor or platform and as noted.
D.
Pressure class for steam service

1.
Gate, globe and check valves :
a.
To 50mm(2inch):
1)
To 827 kPa(120 psig) maximum system pressure: 1030 kPa(150 lb) wsp,
bronze.
2)
834 to 1650 kPa (121 to 240 psig) maximum pressure: 2070 kPa (300 lb)
wsp, bronze.
b.
65 mm to 400 mm (2-1/2 to 16 inch)
1)
To 827 kPa(120 psig) maximum system pressure: 860 kPa(125 lb) wsp,
cast iron.
2)
834 to 1650 kPa (121 to 240 psig) maximum pressure: 1720 kPa (250 lb)
wsp, cast iron.
E.
Pressure classes for low temperature water systems 4 to 100 (40 to 220 deg F)
1.
Gate, globe and check valves :
Page 120/374

a.
2.
3.
To 50 mm (2 inch) :
1)
To 1650 kPa (240 psig) maximum system pressure: 1030 kPa (150 lb)
wsp (2070 kPa) (300 lb wog), cast bronze.
2)
1720 to 2689 kPa (250 to 390 psig) maximum system pressure: 2070 kPa
(300 lb) wsp (4130 kPa) (600 lb wog), cast bronze.
3)
2760 to 4130 kPa (400 to 600 psig) maximum system pressure: ANSI
800: Forged steel.
b.
65 mm to 300 mm (2-1/2 to 12 inch):
1)
To 1000 kPa (145 psig) maximum system pressure: 860 kPa (125 lb) wsp
(1380 kPa) (200 lb wog), cast iron.
2)
1030 kPa to 1240 kPa (150 to 180 psig) maximum system pressure: 150
ANSI, cast steel.
3)
1270 kPa to 3790 kPa (185 psig to 550 psig) maximum system pressure:
200 ANSI, cast steel.
c.
350 mm and 400 mm (14 and 16 inch):
1)
To 860 kPa (125 psig) maximum system pressure: 860 kPa (125 lb) wog,
cast iron.
d.
450 mm to 600 mm (18 to 24 inch):
1)
wog, cast iron.
Plug valves
a.
To 300 mm (12 inch) :
1)
wog, cast iron.
2)
(400 lb) wog, cast iron.
3)
2100 to 3790 kPa (305 to 550 psig) maximum system pressure: 300
ANSI, cast steel.
b.
350 mm to 500 mm (14 to 20 inch) :
1)
wog, cast iron.
2)
(400 lb) wog, cast iron.
3)
1580 to 3100 kPa (230 to 450 psig) maximum system pressure: 300
ANSI, cast steel.
Other valves shall be the same as for gate valves, unless otherwise noted.
F.
Pressure classes for high and medium temperature water systems above 100 deg C (220 deg F)
1.
Gate, globe and check valves:
a.
To 50 mm (2 inch):
1)
To 5510 kPa (800 psig) maximum system pressure: 800, ANSI, forged
steel, socket weld ends.
b.
65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger :
1)
wsp, cast steel.
2)
1270 to 3100 kPa (185 to 450 psig) maximum system pressure shall be
2070 kPa (300 lb) wsp, cast steel.
G.
Swing check valves

1.
Access to elements :
a.
To 50 mm (2 inch) except as noted: Screwed caps or bonnets.
b.
65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger: Bolted covers.
2.
Water, except at pump discharge and as noted :
a.
To 50 mm (2 inch):
1)
1030 kPa (150 lb) wsp: Cast bronze body, screwed ends regrind bronze
disc.
2)
2070 kPa (300 lb) wsp: Cast bronze body, screwed ends regrind bronze
disc.
3)
Minimum 800, ANSI: Forged steel, screwed and socket weld ends lift
type, bolted bonnet.
4)
2070 kPa (300 lb) wog: Bronze body solder ends, regrind bronze disc, to
be used with copper tubing.
b.
65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger :
1)
860 kPa (125 lb) wsp: Iron body, regrind-renew bronze disc.
2)
1720 kPa (250 lb) wsp: Iron body, regrind-renew bronze disc, flanged.
3)
150 ANSI: Cast steel, swing type, bolted cover, stainless steel trim,
flanged.
Page 121/374

4)
300 ANSI: Cast steel, swing type, bolted cover, stainless steel trim,
flanged.
H.
Silent check valves, spring loaded, globe type, flanged:

1.
To 1720 kPa (250 psig) check valves shall be iron body, bronze trim.
2.
Above 1720 kPa (250 psig) check valves shall be cast steel body, stainless steel trim.
I.
Lubricated plug valves shall be:

1.
Screwed ends up to 50 mm (2 inch), flanged 65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger.
2.
Maximum port opening tapered plug suitable for lubrication under service pressure with plug in
any position.
3.
Lubricating guns shall be:
a.
1 for every 50 valves .
b.
Extra heavy, lever type, hydraulic hand gun.
c.
103,000 kPa (15,000 psig) and 300 mm (12 inch) long connection hose.
4.
Operators:
a.
Up to 150 mm (6 inch) shall be wrench, except as noted.
1)
Provide wrench for every 10 valves, each size.
a)
250 mm (10 inches) and larger shall be gear operated with
permanently installed handwheel. Where noted for inaccessible
overhead valves, provide chain operated handwheel with rustproof
chain and chain guide.
b.
Provide motor operated where noted.
5.
For piping less than 690 kPa (100 psi) valves shall be minimum 1380 kPa (200 lb) wog class,
cast iron body.
a.
To 50 mm (2 inch): Screwed.
b.
65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger: Flanged, 125 ANSI.
6.
For piping 1380 kPa to 1720 kPa (100 psi to 250 psi) valves shall be minimum 2760 kPa (400
lb) wog class, cast iron body.
a.
b.
65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger: Flanged, 250 ANSI.
7.
For piping over 1720 kPa (250 psi) valves shall be 300 ANSI carbon steel body.
a.
b.
65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger shall be flanged, 300 ANSI.
J.
Balancing valves
1.
Flow rate shall be maintained within max. 5% of the specified flow rate set at factory in the
proposed differential pressure range without additional adjusting at field.
2.
The flow cartridge within spring shall be supplied in order to relieve vibration, water hammer
and surging, and it shall be removable from valve body without the using of special tools and
without dismantling the main piping. The cartridge shall be of stainless steel.
3.
Connection :
a.
15 to 50mm(or 40mm): Threaded.
b.
50mm(or 40mm) and larger: Flanged or grooved.
4.
The valve shall be factory tested, and the test certificate shall be provided.
5.
Assembly and disassembly of the valves shall be easy for change-out or maintenance.
K.
Butterfly valves
1.
Valves in insulated piping: Necks shall extend 50 mm (2 inches) above outside diameter of
flanges to accommodate full thickness of insulation.
2.
Operators:
a.
Valves to 200 mm (8 inch): Provide handles with minimum of 10 locking positions and
adjustable memory stop.
b.
250 mm ( 10 inch) and larger: Provide gear operators with adjustable balance return
stops and position indicators.
c.
Operating torque shall not exceed limits set.
3.
For circulating water systems where indicated, provide cast iron body, ductile iron or cast
merchanite iron.
a.
Flanges: Provide bodies suitable for installation between 125 ANSI cast iron screwed
flanges or 150 ANSI steel welding neck, slip on screwed flanges or with flanges
grooved for use with mechanical couplings. Contractor shall verify compatibility of valve
with slip on flanges when provided. Wafer type shall have at least four tapped holes
assuring positive alignment between flanges.
1)
Valves in piping subject to removal: provide bodies flanged or tapped lug
type with flanged spool piece on pipe removal side for supporting seat.
Page 122/374

b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Stems: Provide 304 or 316, stainless steel stem.

Seals : Stem seals shall be accomplished by compression of seat material and disc
ends; additional seal shall be provided by a primary and secondary O ring on each open
shaft end.
Bushings : Provide valve bushings at each end of shaft of permanently lubricated
bronze on Teflon.
Discs shall be bronze, fastened to shaft by means of key or two pins secured by lock
nuts.
Seats shall be rigid, hard backed bonded replaceable EPDM.
Design working pressure shall be 1030 kPa (150 psig).
Factory leakage test shall be bubble tight at 1030 kPa (150 psig) disc differential.
L.
High performance butterfly valves (Trunnion)

1.
Provide lugged type for connection to ANSI flanges.
2.
Body shall be cast steel with neck extended to suit insulation thickness.
3.
Disc shall be cast steel.
4.
Stem shall be 17-4 ph stainless steel.
5.
Wearing ring(seat) shall be :
a.
Teflon or urethane with Buna-N or Viton backup O-ring for 150 ANSI and 300 ANSI
service.
6.
Provide non-asbestos packing material.
7.
Operator:
a.
Valves to 200 mm (8 inch) : Handles with min. of 10 locking positions and adjustable
memory stop.
1)
250 mm (10inch) and larger : Gear operated with adjustable balance
return stops and position indicators.
b.
Motor operated valves where noted.
8.
Factory leakage test shall be bubble tight to ANSI or pressure rating at corresponding service
temperature.
M.
Ball valves
1.
To 50 mm (2 inch):
a.
Provide ball valves with brass body, ball and stem and Teflon seats and stem seals
constructed of Teflon impregnated non-asbestos 2 packing rings or equivalent.
b.
Provide handle for actuating valve through quarter turn stop.
c.
Provide valves with 1030 kPa (150 lb) (2760 kPa) (400 lb) ratings.
N.
Motorized valve operators, provide as follows :

1.
Mount operators on side or top at factory or at site under manufacturer's supervision. Provide
gear operated single or double reduction. For 90 deg C application, adjustable mechanical
stops shall prevent travel of more than 90 deg.
2.
Grease or oil lubricated.
3.
380 volt, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
4.
Control circuit : 24 volt transformer as required.
5.
Assembly:
a.
Motor shall be high speed, high torque, totally enclosed non-ventilated, Class B or F
insulation and operational at up to 10 percent above or below nominal voltage. Motor
shall be pre-lubricated, anti-friction bearing type with thermal overload protection.
b.
Limit switch shall be integral to the unit. Gearing shall be bronze or stainless steel. Steel
switches shall be fully adjustable and shall trip anywhere between full open and full
closed, as required. Switches shall be heavy duty, open contact type with rotary wiping
action. Provide minimum spare contacts : 2 normally open, 2 normally closed.
c.
Torque switches shall have torque protection either direction, fully adjustable and shall
shut off actuator motor when a predetermined amount of torque is reached.
d.
Stem nut shall be high tensile bronze or material compatible to the valve stem and shall
be constructed for easy removal without disassembling gear case.
e.
Handwheel for manual operation : Handwheel shall declutch automatically when motor
is energized.
6.
Open/closed operation : All valves shall have integral control package including control
transformer with fused secondary, motor reversing contactor(mechanically interlocked), limit
switch compartment heater and terminal strip.
a.
Indicating lights shall be:
1)
red light glows when valve closed.
2)
green light glows when valve open.
3)
intermediate position indication.
Page 123/374

b.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.8
Pushbutton station: Provide selector switch if required and momentary or maintained

contacts as required.
Modulating service shall be controlled by analog signal- 4-20 ma DC with momentary
pushbuttons.
a.
Controls shall be mounted inside the actuator.
b.
Provide three phase power supply.
1)
Solid state reversing controller.
2)
Comparator circuit module.
3)
Transformer.
4)
2 position selector switch(auto/manual).
5)
Limit switch compartment heater.
6)
Mechanical dial position indicator with 1,000 ohm potentiometer.
7)
Class F insulation motor.
8)
Mounted and wired.
c.
Provide single phase power supply.
1)
Comparator circuit module.
2)
Mechanical dial position indicator with 1,000 ohm potentiometer feedback.
3)
2 position (auto/manual) selector switch.
4)
Limit switch compartment heater.
5)
Motor: 2100 rpm D.C. in lieu of A.C.;class F insulation; 20 percent run
value duty.
Closing time:
a.
Gate shall be 300 mm (12 inch) per minute, minimum 1 minute.
b.
Globe shall be 100 mm (4 inch) per minute, minimum 1 minute.
c.
Butterfly shall be 1/4 turn per minute.
Provide remote open-close buttons and open-close indicating lights for installation on control
board in Section 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC.
Final field adjustment of valve operation shall be made by manufacturer's representative.
STRAINERS
A.
Provide screwed ends to 50 mm (2 inch) and flanged 65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger with body as
follows :
1.
To 690 kPa (100 psig): 860 kPa (125 lb) wsp class, cast iron.
2.
690 kPa to 1720 kPa (100 psig to 250 psig): 1720 kPa (250 lb wsp)class, cast iron.
3.
Over 1720 kPa (250 psig): 2070 kPa (300 lb) wsp class, forged steel or cast steel.
B.
Screen: Provide 316 stainless steel or monel screens with free area not less than 2-1/2 times inlet
area with perforations as follows :
1.
Water:
a.
to 200 mm (8 inch): 3.2 mm (1/8 inch).
b.
250 mm (10 inch) and larger: 4.0 mm (5/32 inch).
2.
Construction: Provide reinforced screen wire gauge to suit size and service.
3.
Provide magnets except for handwheel operated type. Provide water strainers.
a.
All 200 mm (8 inch) and larger.
b.
Each pump suction.
c.
Provide continuous magnetic field around entire circumference of screen.
d.
Provide removable cast channel magnets or acceptable baskets constructed of
magnetic alloy.
e.
Secure magnets with stainless steel retaining lugs and threaded rods.
C.
Y -type: Provide screwed with faced cap, straight thread and gasket. Provide flanged with bolted
cover.
D.
Provide basket type with bolted cover, bottom drain connection.
2.9
SLEEVES
A.
Provide cast iron or steel with or without welded center flange as noted.
B.
Provide 1 mm (No.20 gauge) galvanized iron.
C.
Provide cast iron flashing, type S with integral center flashing flange, and clamping ring.
Page 124/374

D.
2.10
A.
2.11
Extended sleeves shall be :

1.
Provide galvanized cast iron flashing type waterproofing with integral bottom, flanged.
HANGERS, SUPPORTS, GUIDES AND ANCHORS

Provide as noted in Subsection Installation.
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Provide stamped sheet metal with satin finish chromium plating over copper and deep type to cover
projecting sleeves.
B.
For flush fit, use set screws on bare pipe and internal spring on covered pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Piping: Install piping approximately as indicated and modify to suit building conditions, to avoid
interference with other trades and to maintain access and clearance and to maintain pitch.
1.
Where modifications are required, provide offsets, drains, vents, valves and required pipe and
fittings.
2.
Connect equipment in accordance with each manufacturer's standard details and
recommendations, as approved, except as noted, with accessory piping, vents, drains, reliefs
and by-passes.
3.
Install piping parallel with or at right angle to walls and other piping, neatly spaced and with
plumb risers.
4.
Maintain maximum headroom and ceiling height, offset as necessary and coordinate with work
of other trades.
5.
Maintain minimum 25 mm (1 inch) clearance from adjacent work, including insulation, except
as noted or approved.
6.
Install no piping in elevator machine rooms, electric rooms and closets and telephone rooms
and closets.
7.
Install valves to be accessible, but install no valve handles pointing down below horizontal
position. Install valves to be removable without separating or lifting piping in which installed.
On threaded bodies provide cap screws. Where abutting flanged strainers or similar devices,
position valve with respect to device so as to permit removal of bolts.
8.
Provide reducing fittings for changes in pipe sizes. Bushings will not be permitted.
9.
Provide extra heavy pipe for nipples where unthreaded portions of pipe is less than 40 mm (11/2 inch) long. Close nipples not permitted.
10.
Provide screwed piping with clean threads, cut to exact length and ream after cutting and
threading. Apply acceptable compound or teflon tape thread sealant on male threads only. No
lamp wick in joints.
11.
Pitch, except as noted:
a.
Steam and condensate: 25mm(1 inch) in 13M(40 feet) down in direction of flow.
b.
Steam riser branches and undripped connections: 25 mm (1 inch) in 3M (10 feet), up in
direction of flow.
c.
Water piping:
1)
Up to 25 mm (1 inch) pipe: 25 mm (1 inch) in 13 M (40 feet).
2)
32 mm (1-1/4 inch) and larger: 25 mm (1 inch) in 30 M (100 feet).
d.
Condensation drainage:
1)
8 mm (1/4 inch) per foot preferred.
2)
6 mm (1/8 inch) per foot minimum.
12.
Drain connection at low points in water piping and where noted.
a.
In equipment rooms:
1)
To 80 mm (3inch) pipe : 20 mm (3/4inch) gate valve.
2)
100 mm to 200 mm (4inch to 8inch) : 40 mm (1-1/2inch) gate valve.
3)
250 mm (10inch) and larger : 65 mm (2-1/2inch) gate valve.
b.
Except in equipment rooms: 15 mm (1/2 inch) drain valve with capped hose connection.
13.
Install Manual Air Vents at high points and where water flow direction changes from horizontal
to downward.
Page 125/374

a.
14.
15.
B.
To 80 mm (3 inch) pipe: Line size air chamber, 300 mm (12 inch) long, 15 mm (15 mm
(1/2 inch) globe valve.
b.
100 mm to 200 mm (4 inch to 8 inch): Line size air chamber, 150 mm (6 inch long), 15
mm (1/2 inch) globe valve.
c.
250 mm (10 inch) and larger: Line size pipe cap, 15 mm (1/2 inch) globe valve.
Provide Automatic Air Vents where indicated.
Close open ends of pipes during construction to prevent entry of debris.
Hangers, supports and guides:

1.
Assure adequate support for pipe and contents.
2.
Prevent vibration or swaying.
3.
Provide for expansion and contraction.
4.
Supports of wire, rope, wood, chain, strap perforated bar or any other makeshift device will not
be permitted.
5.
Support piping independently so that equipment is not stressed by piping weight or expansion.
6.
Refer to Section 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT for hangers, guides, anchors and supports requiring vibration isolation units.
7.
For uninsulated copper pipe or tubing, use clamps and supports, with electroplated copper
finish.
8.
Uncoated hangers, rods and supports: dip in zinc chromate primer before installation.
9.
Maximum spacing for horizontal piping:
a.
Steel 25 mm (1 inch) and smaller: 2 M (6 feet).
b.
Steel 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) and larger: 3 M (10 feet).
c.
Brass or copper 80 mm (3 inch) and smaller: 2 M (6 feet).
d.
Brass or copper 100 mm (4 inch) and larger: 3 M (10 feet).
e.
Provide additional supports at changes in direction, branch piping and runouts over 1.5
M (5 feet) and concentrated loads due to valves, strainers and other similar items.
10.
Provide Type for horizontal piping, except as noted.
a.
Provide forged steel adjustable clevis type, rod support for all services except services
operating above 120 deg C (250 deg F).
b.
Rollers or slide based: Provide pipe stand, bracket, trapeze or other equivalent
structural support for the following services for piping 50mm (2 inch) and larger: High
pressure steam and condensate return and medium pressure steam and condensate
return.
c.
For pipe and covering, provide saddles for rollers or slide bases and protective shields
or saddles for all other type supports.
d.
Provide threaded steel rods:
1)
50 mm (2 inch) vertical adjustment with 2 nuts each end for positioning
and locking.
2)
Size to 12 inch:
Pipe, Rod
To 50 mm (2 inch) 10 mm (3/8 inch)
65 mm and 80 mm (2-1/2 inch and 3 inch) 15 mm (1/2 inch)
100 mm (4 inch) 10 mm (5/8 inch
150 mm and 200 mm (6 inch and 8 inch) 20 mm (3/4 inch)
250 mm and 300 mm (10 inch and 12 inch) 25 mm (7/8 inch)
3)
Size above 300 mm (12 inch) and multiple pipe standards: safety factor of
5 on ultimate strength on area.
4)
For double rod hangers use 1 size smaller than above.
5)
Connection to structure for piping to 50 mm (2 inch): use concrete inserts
or expansion shields in shear into sides of beams.
6)
Connection to structure for piping 65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger: use
concrete inserts, beam clamps or suitable bridging.
11.
Vertical piping:
a.
Base elbow support: Provide bearing plate on structural support.
b.
Provide guides at every third floor but not to exceed:
1)
8 M (25 feet) for piping to 50 mm (2inch).
2)
11 M (36 feet) for piping 65 mm to 300 mm (2-1/2 inch to 12 inch).
3)
15 M (50 feet) for piping 350 mm (24 inch) and larger.
c.
Top support: Provide special hanger or saddle in horizontal connection and make
provisions for expansion.
d.
Intermediate supports: Steel pipe clamp at floor. Bolt and weld to pipe with extension
ends bearing on structural steel or bearing plates.
e.
For multiple pipes, coordinate guides, bearing plates and accessory steel.
12.
Insulated piping: Provide horizontal pipe shields at supports.
a.
Minimum 120 deg arc and length equal to diameter of insulation, 300 mm (12 inch)
minimum.
Page 126/374

b.
c.
To 150mm(6 inch) pipe size: 1.3 mm (No.18 gauge) galvanized steel and 200 mm (8
inch) and larger: 1.9 mm (14 gauge) galvanized steel.
Provide vertical pipe shields at guides.
1)
Full 360 deg are, securely banded and length equal to diameter of
insulation, 300 mm (12 inch) minimum.
2)
To 150 mm (6 inch) pipe size: 1.3 mm (No.18 gauge) galvanized steel
and 200 mm (8 inch) and larger: 1.9 mm (No.14 gauge) galvanized steel.
C.
Connections to apparatus:
1.
Final connections to apparatus, equipment, automatic control valves : Provide unions or
flanges between shutoff valve and connection.
a.
Screwed piping to 50 mm (2 inch): Unions.
b.
Other piping: Flanges
2.
Provide flanged connections to heads of heat exchangers, chillers, condensers and locate
flanges adjacent to equipment connections and to clear tube pull to avoid dismantling of
extensive piping for pulling out tube bundle.
D.
Expansion: Install piping to permit free expansion and contraction without damaging piping or
construction.
1.
Provide offsets, expansion loops, anchors, guides and supports to permit expansion, within
stress limits of ANSI Code for Pressure Piping for temperature range of 20 deg C (40 deg F) to
minimum of 10 deg C (20 deg F) above maximum system temperature.
2.
Steam piping shall be cold-sprung:
a.
Piping up to 40mm (1-1/2 inch): Cold-sprung 100 percent of expansion.
b.
Piping 50mm (2 inch) and larger: Cold-sprung 50 percent of expansion.
3.
Where pipe loops or changes in direction of piping cannot be employed to absorb expansion
and contraction, provide expansion joints. Install anchors and guides on both sides of
expansion joint in accordance with manufacturers specification, to provide safe installation and
trouble-free operation.
E.
Fittings: For changes in pipe size, utilize bushings only where noted and specially permitted and utilize
reducers, except as noted, on horizontal and vertical piping.
1.
Horizontal water systems: eccentric, flat on top for venting.
2.
Horizontal steam and condensate system: eccentric, flat on bottom for drainage.
3.
Vertical piping: Concentric, if no more than 2 pipe sizes.
4.
Elbows: Provide long radius elbows, except where space conditions do not permit. At pump
inlet, provide long radius base supported or pump suction diffuser. At pump discharge, provide
long radius base supported elbow.
5.
Screwed joints: Cut pipe ends square and clean and thread to correct length:
a.
To 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) pipe: 1-1/2 exposed threads when made up tight.
b.
50 mm to 150 mm (2 inch to 6 inch): 2 exposed threads.
c.
Ream after threading. Use joint compound or teflon tape thread sealant on male thread
only. Apply graphite to threads of drain plugs.
6.
Nipples: Use close type only where specially permitted and shoulder type of extra heavy pipe
where less than 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) is unthreaded.
F.
Welding: Before proceeding, submit the following for review and approval.
1.
Proposed procedures conforming to latest revision of:
a.
ANSI B31.I, Code for Pressure Piping, Chapter V.
b.
ANSI Z49.1, Safety in Welding and Cutting.
c.
API code for fuel and other API governed piping.
2.
Field procedures: Clean pipe free from rust, scale and oxide. Bevel pipe on each end per
acceptable procedures. Provide backing rings on hot water over 689 kPa (100 psig). Utilize
mitered pipe and field fabricated fittings only where noted and where specially permitted.
Hammer clean and flush out piping after welding to remove scale, welding slag and other
debris.
G.
Valves: Provide valves as noted. Provide shutoff valves on inlets and outlets of equipment, on branch
connections to mains and as noted. Provide silent check valves on pump discharges and provide
other types at locations as noted.
H.
Motorized valve operators: Provide as noted.
I.
Strainers: Provide as noted.

1.
Valved for blow-off with nipple and cap.
2.
Provide line size, except as noted
Page 127/374

3.
Locate upstream of pumps, automatic control valves, drip traps, pressure reducing valves and
other equipment as noted.
J.
Sleeves: Provide for piping through walls, floors and partitions.

1.
Type: Provide cast iron flashing type:
a.
Membrane waterproofed walls and floors.
b.
Adjust to construction with galvanized pipe nipples extending 50 mm (2 inches) above
finished floor and flush with walls and ceilings.
c.
Extend lead flashing extending. 250 mm (10 inches) beyond clamping device.
d.
Provide galvanized steel pipe:
1)
Integral waterproofed walls and floors:
a)
Welded center flange, buried.
b)
Extending 50 mm (2 inch) above finished floor.
c)
15 mm (1/2 inch) projection beyond walls.
d)
Caulked watertight.
2)
Concrete floors and masonry walls:
a)
50 mm (2 inch) above finished floor.
b)
Flush with ceiling.
c)
15 mm (1/2 inch) projection beyond walls.
e.
Provide galvanized sheet metal: For locations except where other type sleeves are
specified shall be not less than 0.85 mm (No.22 gauge) except sleeves for piping 100
mm (4 inch) and larger, use 1.3 mm (No.18 gauge). For piping run in floor fill, provide
0.85 mm (No.22 gauge) galvanized sheet metal, U-shaped covers with clearance for
expansion.
2.
Size: For bare pipe, provide sleeve a minimum 15 mm (1/2 inch) larger than pipe and pass
fittings as required. For insulated pipe, except as noted, provide flashing sleeve the same as
for bare pipe and provide pipe or sheet metal sleeve 15 mm (1/2 inch) larger than covering.
3.
Caulking: Seal openings between sleeves and pipe or pipe insulation. Provide depth of
caulking the full length of sleeve.
a.
Material for fire barrier: provide mineral wool or equivalent non-asbestos, noncombustible material.
b.
Utilize the following for sleeves through waterproofed.
c.
Construction:
1)
Interior: non-asbestos ceramic fiber packing and hot poured mastic.
2)
Exterior: non-asbestos ceramic fiber packing and caulking lead.
K.
Escutcheons: Provide at surfaces where exposed piping penetrates walls, ceilings, floors or partitions
and at fire barrier caulking.
3.2
ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A.
Cleaning
1.
During construction, prevent entry of foreign matter, clean pipe, fittings and valves internally
and hammer welds to remove slag and weld beads. Flush piping system with clear water prior
to connection to coils, control valves, and equipment. Install temporary bypass piping around
coils, control valves and equipment where piping system is hot flushed prior to connection.
2.
After erection, flush with clear water and seal ends after cleaning.
3.
Water systems:
a.
Upon start-up fill with clean water, add alkaline detergent, as follows :
1)
Sodium silicate and/or sodium phosphate with nonfoaming wetting agent.
2)
Phenolphthalein alkalinity to 2000 to 5000 ppm as CaCO3, supplied and
supervised by water treatment company.
b.
Temporary equipment for condenser water system: Remove straightening vanes and
metering orifices from condenser water piping system and replace after cleaning.
1)
Place temporary flat screen type strainer in each cooling tower cell inlet
during cleaning period and remove after cleaning period.
c.
Circulate water of each system at respective design flow rates.
1)
Three 8-hour days.
2)
At end of each 8-hour period, remove and clean strainers and blow off low
points.
d.
After third day of pumping, completely drain out entire systems of cleaning solution and
clean out cooling tower basins and hose down.
e.
Refill systems with clean water and circulate for an additional 8-hour period and at the
end of that interval, completely drain systems.
f.
Drain, refill with clear water and circulate.
Page 128/374

g.
h.
i.
j.
B.
3.3
Test for alkalinity, not more than 200 ppm in excess of alkalinity of rinsing water.
Repeat (Circulation of water of each system at respective design flow rates minimum)
as described above, until 200 ppm or less, are maintained for 10 days.
Protect against damage from freeze up or discharge of water.
Equipment by-passing:
1)
Remove or by-pass control valves, coil and all equipment subject to
damage from high alkalinity.
2)
Provide for all sub mains to by-pass:
a)
Fan coil units.
b)
Unit ventilators.
c)
Cabinet heaters.
3)
Provide by-passing between supply and return risers to avoid flushing
water coils or control valves.
Balancing and adjusting water systems: Refer to Section TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC.
1.
Balance and adjust water systems to provide required quantity to or through each component.
2.
Examine systems and position valves and cocks in open position, as required.
a.
Position automatic control valves for full flow through the heat transfer equipment of the
system during the balancing.
b.
Maintain moving equipment lubricated and strainers clean and perform other
maintenance and inspection tasks for proper system operation.
3.
Make adjustments required to balance systems. Adjust balancing valves and cocks to
satisfaction of Employers representative.
4.
Mark valve tag of each valve or cock used for balancing to indicate position of valve stem.
5.
Pumps: Demonstrate performance as noted.
6.
Test reports: Submit in bound folder with accompanying sketches.
a.
Additional report information: Submit method of balancing and details of instruments
used and submit copies of readings with piping layout showing where readings were
taken.
TESTS
A.
Provide materials, equipment, labor and power as required to perform tests per approved schedule
and project requirements.
B.
Retain the services of an independent qualified inspector to visually inspect welds in conformance with
ANSI B31.
C.
Piping systems: Less than 690 kPa (100 psig) operating pressure, test hydrostatically to 1030 kPa
(150 psig). Over 690 kPa (100 psig) operating pressure, test hydrostatically to 1-1/2 times operating
pressure but never exceed test pressure as per ANSI B16.1 basis.
D.
Duration: Test for 2 hours with system valves capped and pressure apparatus disconnected.
E.
Pressure change: none.
F.
Compensate for temperature change.
G.
Repair or replace leaks and defects as directed without additional cost.
PART 4 - SHEET METAL WORK
4.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
Ductwork.
2.
Supports.
3.
Casings, plenums, and equipment housings.
4.
Dampers.
Page 129/374

5.
B.
4.2
Accessories.
Definitions:
1.
Seam: locks or weld applied longitudinally to close section of duct, e.g.: longitudinal seam,
spiral seam.
2.
Joint: abutting connection between duct sections for continuity of air passage, e.g.: cross joint,
transverse joint, coupling.
3.
Reinforcement: hardware applied to strengthen duct, e.g.: girth angles, tie rods, fasteners (not
connectors), etc.
4.
Stiffening: folding, bending, beading, crossbreaking or corrugating of sheets to achieve
strength through shape, e.g.: pocket lock secures joint and is transverse stiffener, with girth
angle and/or fasteners applied (not connectors), joint or stiffener is reinforced.
5.
Static pressure classifications:
a.
Except as noted:
STATIC PRESSURE
PRESSURE CLASS OPERATING PRESSURE
500 PA (2 IN.) W.G. UP TO 500 PA (2 IN.) W.G.
1500 PA (6 IN.) W.G. OVER 500 PA (2 IN.) UP TO 1500
PA (6 IN. W.G.)
2500 PA (10 IN.) W.G. OVER 1500 PA (6 IN.) UP TO 2500 PA (10 IN.) W.G.
b.
Based on the following:
1)
Single duct systems: static pressure at respective point in ductwork during
normal operation.
2)
Variable air volume systems: static pressure at beginning of fan discharge
duct.
c.
Extent of ductwork above 500 Pa (2 in.) w.g. pressure class and equipment:
1)
Single duct constant air volume systems: as noted.
2)
Variable air volume systems: from fan discharge to variable air volume
units, or as noted.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS

A.
Requirements in the Contract Document - Chapter II: Employers requirements shall apply to all work
in this section
B.
Requirements of Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK SECTION apply to all
work in this Section.
C.

1.
2.
3.
Section 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR
EQUIPMENT.
4.3
HVAC
PIPING
AND
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
All work shall conform with the following:

1.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. manuals (SMACNA)
except where details or notes on drawings indicate otherwise:
a.
HVAC Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.
b.
HVAC Systems Testing Adjusting and Balancing.
B.
The most recent edition of all references shall be used.
C.
The aforementioned references shall be superseded by notes and details on drawings and in the
Specification.
D.
American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
E.
National Fire Protection Association Standards: referred to NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B etc.
F.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard for Safety: referred an UL 181, UL555, etc.
Page 130/374

G.
Underwriter Laboratory (UL) Standard UL 723 (ASTM-E-04): Maximum 25- flamespread rating and
maximum 50 fuel contributed and smoke developed rating.
H.
Published Specifications' standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or

I.
Where two or more references conflict, the most stringent, as determined by Employers
representative, shall take precedence.
J.
Comply with all applicable codes and refer to Section 230010, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC
WORK SECTION for additional Reference Standards.
K.
section.
1.
2.
4.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
4.5
Refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK SECTION for Guarantee and
other Quality Assurance requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit ductwork shop drawings for approval:

1.
Coordinated layout duct drawings that differ from ductwork shown on contract drawings.
2.
Mechanical equipment room plans and sections showing all equipment, curbs, and
accessories.
3.
Minimum 1 : 30 scale, double line, showing sizes, transverse joints, transitions, elevations,
clearances and accessories; sections where required.
B.
Subject shop details and catalog cuts of:

1.
Ductwork construction, including gauge and bracing schedule.
2.
Casing and plenum construction.
3.
Supports.
4.
Dampers.
5.
Turning vanes.
6.
Fire and smoke damper construction and installation.
7.
Access doors.
8.
Louvers.
9.
Hoods.
10.
Flexible connections.
11.
Other accessories.
12.
Submit each set of details and catalog cuts submitted in a binder.
C.
Samples: Submit 300 mm (12 inch) x 300 mm (12 inch) flat piece of sheet metal, showing installation
of acoustical duct lining and nosing.
D.
Submit name and qualifications of proposed test and balance organization and description of system
testing and adjustment procedures.
Page 131/374

PART 5 - SHEET METAL WORK PRODUCTS
5.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
5.2
The contractor shall submit manufacturers data for following items, but not limited to, for approval
from Employers representative.
1.
Flat oval and round duct and fittings.
2.
Flexible ducts.
3.
Fire dampers.
4.
Duct sealants.
5.
Double wall casings.
6.
Louvers.
7.
Air balancing and testing firms.
MATERIAL
A.
5.3
Metal sheets shall be as follows:

1.
Galvanized steel shall be in accordance with ASTM 5261; black or galvanized as herein after
specified.
2.
Aluminum shall be in accordance with ASTM B209-64,2,1.4.
3.
Aluminum commercial sheet shall be 110,000 kPa (16,000 psig) tensile.
4.
Stainless steel sheets shall be in accordance with AISI Types 302, 309 and 315.
DUCTWORK
A.
Ductwork shall be galvanized steel, except as noted, in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standard, 1985, except as noted. Provide gauges, construction and reinforcement as
follows:
1.
Pressure class 500 Pa (2 inch) w.g.
a.
Sheet metal gauge and reinforcement shall be in accordance with SMACNA Table 1-5
and 1-10 thru 1-13 and based on a minimum of 500 Pa (2 inch) w.g. duct pressure class
regardless of possible lower pressures. Round ductwork shall be spiral or longitudinal
seam. Cross breaking shall be as required for rigid support.
2.
Pressure classes 1500 Pa (6 inch) w.g. to 2500 Pa (10 inch) w.g.
a.
Rectangular ductwork: For pressure 500 Pa (2 inch) w.g. to 1500 Pa (6 inch) w.g. Sheet
metal gauges and reinforcement in accordance with Pressure Class 1500 Pa (6 inch)
w.g.-SMACNA - Table 1-8; based on 1500 Pa (6 inch) pressure, regardless of possible
lower pressure. For pressure above 1500 Pa (6 inch) w.g. to 2500 Pa (10 inch) w.g,
sheet metal gauges and requirements shall be in accordance with SMACNA - Table 19; based on 2500 Pa (10 inch) pressure, regardless of possible lower pressures. Ducts
to 1.5 m (60 inch) wide and within 9 m (30 ft) from fan discharge shall be next heavier
listed gauge thickness to that indicated in SMACNA's Duct Construction Standard. Use
Tables 1-10 thru 1-13 for reinforcements.
1)
Joints shall be welded flange, flanged joint and companion angle flanged
joint only. Inside slip (Fig T9), double S slip (Fig T8 & T80), standing seam
(Fig T -15 and T -16) and pocket lock (Figs T17, T18 and T19) will not be
permitted. Fittings and/or joints of two different gauges, connected joint
rating shall meet more stringent conditions.
b.
Round ductwork shall be spiral seam construction only. Gauges shall be in accordance
with SMACNA Duct Construction Standard and fittings in accordance with SMACNA
Duct Construction Standard, except as noted.
1)
Joints: Interior slip coupling beaded at center, fastened to duct with
screws and with sealing compound applied continuously around joint
before assembling and after fastening. Wrap joints with 75 mm (3 inch)
wide duct tape.
B.
Watertight construction where noted with edges bent 13 mm (1/2 inch) for watertight seal. Stiffeners
shall be plug or spot welded. Transverse joints shall be bolted companion angles with 6 mm (1/4 inch)
cadmium plated bolts with 150 mm (6 inch)minimum on centers and gasket.
C.
Airtight construction where noted with longitudinal seams soldered. Stiffeners shall be plug or spot
welded. Transverse joints shall be bolted companion angle with 6 mm (1/4 inch) cadmium plated bolts
Page 132/374

with 150 mm (6 inch) minimum on centers and gasket. Exposed, uninsulated ductwork shall be flush
flat seam. Provide airtight concrete, masonry and other construction materials for plenums and shafts
only where noted.
D.
Ductwork exposed to weather, except as noted shall be as follows:

1.
Stainless steel.
2.
Watertight.
E.
Outside air, exhaust and relief duct shall be as follows:

1.
Stainless steel.
2.
Extent:
a.
Louvers to casings.
3.
Watertight.
F.
Shower exhaust duct for 4.5 m (15 ft) from registers shall be as follows:
1.
Stainless steel.
G.
Kitchen range hood exhaust duct including fan discharge to atmosphere shall be provide as follows:
1.
3.5 mm (No.10 gauge) black steel.
2.
Black steel of following gauges and thicknesses. Inside building shall be 3.5 mm (No.10
gauge). Outdoor ductwork to 0.65 m shall be 3 mm (l/8 inch); above 0.65 m to 1.2 m shall be
4 mm (3/16 inch), and over 1.2 m shall be 6 mm (1/4 inch).
3.
All seams, joints and penetrations shall be liquidtight continuous external arc welded, except
where the duct stub collar of the hood is connected to the exhaust duct. Connection to the
hood shall be continuous liquidtight external arc welded or in accordance with NFPA 96, 1984.
4.
Angle reinforcing shall be minimum 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) x 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) x 4 mm (3/16
inch) at maximum 1.2 M(4 ft) on centers and in accordance with SMACNA Rectangular
Industrial Duct Construction Standards shall be mounted.
5.
Cleanout doors on horizontal ducts shall be mounted maximum 6 m (20 ft) apart and in change
of direction. Cleanout doors on horizontal duct shall be mounted on side of duct. Bottom edge
shall be not less than 50 mm (2 inch) above bottom of duct. Cleanout doors at vertical ducts
shall be mounted at base. Door and frame shall be same gauge as duct. Gaskets shall be
between door and frame. Gaskets shall be 3 mm (1/8 inch) double thickness rated for 1090
deg C (2000 deg F). Cleanout door size shall be maximum 600 mm (24 inch) x 60 mm (24
inch) and minimum shall be 50 mm (24 inch) one side, and other side shall be 50 mm (2 inch)
less than duct height.
H.
Wet exhausts duct from kitchen equipment shall be as follows:

1.
Stainless steel.
2.
Watertight.
I.
Dishwasher exhaust duct shall be as follows:

1.
Stainless steel.
5.4
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A.
Flexible duct shall be constructed in accordance with NFPA 90A; U.L. 18l class 1(maximum flame
spread: 25, maximum smoke developed: 50). Performance and installation shall be in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. Maximum length shall be 50 mm
(18 inch) with no intermediate seams.
B.
Flexible duct for pressure classes 1500 Pa (6 in.) w.g. shall be high temperature copolymer
impregnated glass fabric, locked to cold rolled flat steel spiral.
C.
Insulated type where noted shall be the same as flexible ducts. Duct shall be factory preinsulated with
fiberglass blanket and foil-scrim-kraft or equivalent U.L. Class 1 vapor barrier facing. Thickness and
density shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 230800 HVAC INSULATION.
D.
Flexible duct will be permitted only at connections to:

1.
Terminal boxes at high pressure side and from unit to outlet.
2.
Single linear slot air terminal.
3.
Combination lighting - air distribution units.
4.
Ceiling outlet below supply duct to compensate for misalignment.
Page 133/374

E.
5.5
Flexible duct connections to oval collars shall be with preshaped oval ends. Secure flexible duct with
clamps and sealer or screws, sealer and tape for metal flexible ducting. Attach to rectangular supply
air duct with low entrance loss, bellmouth type connector on air inlet end. Flexible shall not lay across
lighting fixtures or other surfaces; provide hanger supports as required.
CASINGS, HOUSINGS AND PLENUMS

A.
Pressure class 500 Pa (2 inch) w.g, shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise noted.
1.
Single wall, minimum 1.6 mm (No.16 gauge).
2.
Double wall, with insulation core. Outer panel, minimum 1.3 mm (No.18 gauge). Inner panel,
minimum 0.85 mm(No.22 gauge) and:
a.
Solid.
b.
Perforated, except solid for cooling coil section to downstream of coil pans.
c.
Core shall be 50 mm (2 inch) thick, fiberglass or rock mineral wool, 40 kg/m minimum
density.
d.
Refer to Section 231200, Noise Control.
3.
Provide same construction for floor and ceiling of casing.
4.
Provide for outdoor air intake plenums, exhaust plenums open to weather, and blow through
units from fan discharge to leaving side of coil, as follows: .
a.
Aluminum; single wall, watertight.
b.
Stainless steel; single wall, watertight.
B.
Pressure classes 1500 Pa (6 inch) w.g. to 2500 Pa (10 inch) w.g. materials and wall shall be as
specified for pressure class 500 Pa (2 inch) w.g. For galvanized steel cellular deck, provide flat sheet
on one side and where insulated, insulation shall be applied to flat side. Casings shall be as follows:
1.
Pressure classes 750 Pa (3 inch) w.g. to 1500 Pa (6 inch) w.g.
5.6
SOUNDLINED DUCTWORK
A.
Refer to Section 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
B.
Duct dimensions noted on drawings are clear inside dimensions.
5.7
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Fire Dampers shall be UL listed and rated for 1-1/2 hour fire rating and 3 hour ratings where required,
in conformance with NFPA 90A and authorities having jurisdiction. Horizontal ducts shall be gravity
drop type and vertical ducts shall be spring loaded type.
1.
Dampers multibladed, equipped with fusible link with blade housing out of air stream where
noted.
2.
Dampers shall be multi-bladed, with blade housing out of air stream and equipped with fusible
link.
3.
Fusible link shall be UL listed, with temperature rating not greater than 27 deg C (50 deg F)
above highest air temperature in duct.
4.
Stainless steel construction shall be Type 304 where installed in stainless steel ductwork.
B.
Install in accordance with U.L. 555, NFPA 90A and local authority requirements.
1.
Installation details in SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide, 1981, shall apply unless
noted otherwise. Details on drawings are intended to supersede similar details in the Guide.
Breakaway connections permitted shall be in accordance with Schedule 2, SMACNA Fire
Damper and Heat Stop Guide.
C.
Provide fire dampers as noted and in ducts and openings in the following, but not limited to:
1.
Shafts.
2.
Floors.
3.
Fire walls.
4.
Fire-Resistance partitions.
5.
Fire rated ceilings.
6.
Exit corridor walls.
D.
Provide access door adjacent to each fire damper.
Page 134/374

1.
2.
5.8
Fire Dampers in range hood exhaust duct shall confine fire extinguishing gases released into
duct. Connect external cable with fusible link to pressure operated trip provided with self
extinguishing system. Normally open damper shall automatically close on activation of hood
extinguishing system.
Fire dampers shall be located at point of connection of branch duct.
VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
5.9
Volume dampers shall be single and multi-blade as specified. For galvanized steel ductwork, provide
galvanized steel dampers except as noted. For other ductwork, provide dampers same material as
ductwork. Provide single bladed dampers up to 150 mm (6 inch) width and opposed blade multi-blade
dampers above 150 mm (6 inch) width.
1.
Single and multiblade volume dampers shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
construction with blades of the same material as ductwork, end bearings, and dial regulator.
Provide single bladed damper up to 150 mm (6 inch) width and multi-opposed blade above 150
mm (6 inch). For insulated ducts dial regulator with locking device shall be on collar to clear
insulation as required to meet insulation thickness.
2.
For internally lined ductwork: Provide 2 internal saddles to protect lining.
3.
For low pressure duct, provide opposed blade on branch ducts as noted. For high pressure
duct provide opposed blade, factory fabricated. Refer to Section 230610, AIR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. Damper levers shall be accessible.
4.
Provide volume dampers at following locations:
a.
In all duct splits and branch connections of supply, return, and exhaust systems.
b.
At duct splits above 900 mm (36 inch) depth.
c.
Ducts connecting to common plenums.
d.
Ducts serving single outlet.
e.
At open return duct in hung ceiling.
f.
As noted.
SPLITTER DAMPERS
A.
5.10
A.
5.11
A.
5.12
A.
5.13
A.
Splitter dampers constructed of the same material as ductwork shall be provide where noted. Splitter
dampers are an acceptable substitute for volume damper in low pressure, low velocity systems, at
duct splits up to 900 mm (36 inch) depth for branches serving more than one outlet. Damper edges
shall be close-hemmed, but not flattened.
RELIEF DAMPERS
Relief dampers shall be 1.6 mm (No.16 gauge) galvanized steel frames with aluminum blades integral
stiffening ribs, stainless steel ball bearings, adjustable counter weight and concealed linkage.
AUTOMATIC DAMPERS
Install automatic dampers supplied by automatic control system manufacturer. Notch end of rod and
label duct or casing to indicate open and closed position.
GLASS INSPECTION PANELS

Glass Inspection Panel where noted and in access doors at electric coils in air handling units shall be
300 mm (12 inch) x 300 mm (12 inch) panel, except as noted. Panels shall be wireglass, gasketed and
watertight.
ACCESS DOORS
Access doors shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, except as
noted. In ductwork doors shall be insulated or noninsulated the same as duct. Two 50 mm (2 inch) x
50 mm (2 inch) butt hinges, except where sliding or 4 latch removable type is required. Provide 500
mm (20 inch) x 355 mm (14 inch) access doors except for ducts less than 400 mm (16 inch): one
Page 135/374

dimension 500 mm (20 inch) and the other dimension 50 mm (2 inch) less than duct width. Provide
larger sizes where required for access.
1.
Provide access doors in following locations, but not limited to:
a.
Coils in ducts: entering and leaving side.
b.
Electric heaters in ducts: entering and leaving side.
c.
Automatic dampers: linkage side.
d.
Main balancing dampers.
e.
Smoke dampers.
f.
Fire dampers.
g.
Smoke detection heads.
h.
Filter banks.
i.
Fan bearings enclosed in ducts.
j.
Inlet side of each single width centrifugal fan.
k.
Inlet and outlet sides of each tubular centrifugal and axial fan.
l.
On both sides of ducts where necessary to provide maintenance accessibility to
equipment on the other side.
B.
For insulated casings, plenums and equipment housing, provide insulated doors, 500 mm (20 inch) x
1420 mm (56 inch). Doors shall be larger size where required for maintenance, such as filter removal.
Doors shall be complete with latches, and gasket all sides.
1.
Provide disconnect switch to break circuit when door is open for electric heating coils and
electric filter chamber.
2.
Provide access door in each side wall at following locations, but not limited to:
a.
Fan enclosures.
b.
Coil banks.
c.
Eliminators.
d.
Filters.
e.
Dampers.
f.
Humidifiers.
g.
Intake and exhaust plenums.
h.
Enclosed motors and drives.
C.
Provide temporary closures to maintain openings straight and square, and to prevent entry of debris.
5.14
A.
5.15
A.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
Flexible connections for ductwork shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible, except as noted. Flexible connections with metal collars shall be
installed with 50 mm (2 inch) slack in fabric and minimum movement of 25 mm (1 inch). Provide
flexible at connections to fans, building expansion joints, at connection between copper and stainless
steel ductwork and at penetrations of mechanical equipment room walls.
1.
Provide neoprene coated glass fabric, 1020 g/m2 with sewn and cemented seams. For kitchen
exhaust, provide wire imbedded glass cloth with sewn seams.
TURNING VANES
For galvanized steel ductwork, provide galvanized steel or painted black steel, except as noted. For
other ductwork, provide same material as ductwork. Turning vanes shall be in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, except as noted.
1.
5.16
A.
Install at square duct elbows and as noted on drawings. Max unsupported vane length shall not
exceed 1.2 m (48 inches). Provide separate equal size sections for greater lengths. Refer to
turning vane detail. Single vane and short radius vanes are not acceptable.
ACCESSORIES
Provide the following in accordance with SMACNA Duct Manual, except as noted.
1.
Belt guards: Frames shall be minimum 1.3 mm (No.18 gauge) steel with heavy .gauge
expanded metal; painted and shall be in conformance with applicable safety regulations.
Provide openings for tachometer measurements.
2.
Goosenecks: Refer to detail.
3.
Cap flashing shall be the same material as duct; where copper, use 680 g minimum.
Page 136/374

4.
Weather hoods, intake or exhaust: Provide round or rectangular as noted with 180 degree
change in direction and with 13 mm (1/2 inch) wire mesh screen with a free area two times duct
area.
B.
Louvers:
1.
Connect to louvers furnished under General Construction Work.
2.
Provide louvers: Louvers shall be extruded aluminum, 100 mm (4 inch) deep stationary blades
on 45-deg angle.
a.
Provide aluminum wire screen, 1.9 mm (No.14 gauge), 13 mm (1/2 inch) mesh, secured
to removable "U" frame bolted to louver and mount on interior face of exhaust air
discharge louver. Mount on exterior face of outside air intake louver.
b.
Louvers shall be tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.
3.
Provide blank off panels for unused portions of louvers. Panels shall be double wall
construction with 0.8 mm (0.032 inch) aluminum, and 50 mm (2 inch) thick, internal glass fiber
insulation in accordance with SMACNA. HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
C.
Provide minimum 1.6 mm (No.16 gauge) diffuser plates for blow-through air handling units. Material
shall match casing.
D.
Open ducts in hung ceiling: Provide 1.6 mm (No.16 gauge), 19 mm (3/4 inch) square mesh, screen
over each opening; with 25 mm(1 inch) wide galvanized steel enclosing frame and flanged duct
opening to receive frame. In lieu of screen and volume damper, provide register or grille plus opposed
blade volume damper.
E.
Provide duct sleeves. Sleeves shall be minimum 1 mm (No.20 gauge) galvanized sheet steel unless
otherwise indicated. Round sleeves through bearing walls or partitions shall be black steel pipe,
Schedule 30, or 40.
1.
Clearances:
a.
Non-insulated duct: Provide 25 mm (1 inch) between duct and sleeve on all sides.
b.
Insulated duct: Provide 25 mm (1 inch) between insulation and sleeve on all sides.
c.
Grilles, registers and diffusers: Provide no clearance
2.
Provide closure collars for exposed ducts on each side of wall or floor opening. Collars shall be
galvanized sheet metal, minimum 100 mm(4 inch) wide, and fit tight against surface and
around duct or insulation. Install with nails 150 mm (6 inch) on center.
F.
Framed openings: Provide clearances and closure collars the same as for Duct Sleeves.
G.
Duct-mounted automatic controls and monitoring devices: Mount on mechanical equipment all devices
related to automatic controls, monitoring and fire protection work. Coordinate to obtain such devices
from other contractors when they are not provided under Mechanical Work. Devices shall include, but
not be limited to:
1.
Automatic dampers.
2.
Fire dampers.
3.
Duct-mounted smoke detectors.
4.
All equipment in Section 230900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS.
H.
Angles, tie rods and shapes for reinforcing joints shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, except for the following:
1.
Reinforcing angle spacing shall not exceed 600 mm (24 inch) spacing and applied to four sides
for following distances from fan inlet and outlet for each system.
a.
3 m (10 feet) for fans with wheel diameter to 680 mm (27 inches).
b.
6 m (20 feet) for fans with wheel diameters exceeding 680 mm (27 inches).
2.
Galvanized and aluminum sheets: Provide galvanized steel.
3.
Stainless steel sheets: Provide stainless steel.
4.
Copper sheets: Provide stainless steel, brass or bronze.
I.
Screws and rivets: Provide the same material as sheet, except as noted. On aluminum sheets, provide
cadmium plated or stainless steel. Zinc or cadmium plated will be permitted on galvanized sheets.
Minimum screw size shall be No. 10; maximum spacing shall be 250 mm (10 inch). Minimum rivet size
shall be 1.8 kg (4 lb); maximum spacing shall be 150 mm (6 inch).
J.
Duct sealants:
1.
Provide sealing compound for brush applications and other applications. Provide tape.. For
gaskets, provide continuous, reinforced, inert self-conforming type, 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick and
width to match angle connection.
Page 137/374

K.
Refer to Installation for supports, hangers, inserts and attachments and the following special
construction.
1.
Stainless steel ductwork.
2.
Aluminized steel.
3.
Spiral seam round or flat oval ductwork.
4.
Lead shielding for ductwork.
PART 6 - SHEET METAL WORK EXECUTION
6.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with SMANCA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, except as noted. Unequal
elbows are not permitted. Rectangular duct sections may be joined by use of acceptable mechanical
coupling systems and installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,
except use metal clips only (PVC will not be permitted).
1.
Sealing:
a.
Pressure class 50 mm (2 inch) w.g. shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards except that tape shall not be used.
b.
Pressure class 50 mm (2 inch) w.g.: Seal all longitudinal seams, transverse joints,
fastener penetrations and fitting connections. Tape shall not be used.
c.
Pressure class 1500 Pa (6 inch) w.g. to 2500 pa (10 inch) w.g.: Seal all longitudinal
seams, transverse joints, fastener penetrations, fitting connections and duct wall
penetrations.
d.
The installer shall verify in writing that the shelf life of all sealants products have not
been exceeded.
2.
3.
4.
Inserts and attachments:

a.
Locate and set inserts prior to the pouring of concrete floor slab. Subsequent
attachments to concrete floor slabs and beams shall be made with expansion shields
with a safety factor of four, based on manufacturers listed capacities.
b.
Overhead supports shall be from bottom flanges of steel beams and sides of concrete
beams, with bolts in shear rather than in tension. Attachment of hangers to bottom of
overhead slab shall be limited to ducts with a maximum side dimension of 450 mm (18
inches).
c.
Beam clamps shall be used on exposed steel beam construction.
Hangers, horizontal ducts:
a.
To 0.2 m in area: provide galvanized steel strap hangers, minimum 25 mm (1 inch) x
1.6 mm (1/16 inch), maximum 2.4 m spacing.
b.
0.2 m to 0.4 m2 in area: galvanized steel strap hangers, minimum 25 mm (1 inch) x 3
mm (1/8 inch), maximum 2.4 m spacing.
c.
Strap hangers shall be bent 50 mm (2 inch) under the bottom corner of rectangular
ducts. One screw shall secure 50 mm (2 inch) portion of hanger to bottom of duct.
Straps shall be secured to side of duct with a minimum of two screws and more, as
necessary, to provide a maximum screw spacing of 300 mm. Side-of-duct screws shall
be located not more than 50 mm (2 inch) from top and bottom of duct.
d.
0.4 to 1 m in area: provide galvanized steel trapeze angles from steel threaded rods
with a maximum 1.8 m spacing.
e.
Over 1 m in area: provide galvanized steel trapeze angles from steel threaded rods
with a maximum 1.2 m spacing.
f.
Provide stronger supports to match larger and heavier ducts; provide cross-bracing,
angle iron hangers, as required for rigid and adequate supports.
g.
In mechanical rooms: provide black steel painted or galvanized, vertical angles or rods
and horizontal angles across ductwork.
Hangers:
a.
Vertical ducts: At each floor, provide minimum 2 supports per duct fastened to duct and
spanning shaft opening. Fasten supports to floor or structural construction. Maximum
screw spacing shall be 1300 mm (52 inch) on center and maximum shall be four screws
per riser.
b.
Angles and channels: Provide painted black steel or galvanized. Where angles are
specified, channels of equivalent strength, material and protective coating will be
permitted. Where more than one duct is supported by a common set of angles, support
size shall be determined by sum of width dimensions.
c.
Supports: Provide as follows, except increase supports as required for load and span
where span of angles exceed 1.8 m (6 ft) or floor-to-floor height exceeds 4.2 m (14 ft).
Page 138/374

1)
5.
Duct width to 760 mm (30 inch): Provide angle size: 32 x 32 x 3 mm(1-1/4

inch x 1-1/4 inch x 1/8 inch).
2)
Duct width, 965 mm (31 inch) to 1370 mm (54 inch): Angle size shall be
50 mm (2 inch) x 50 mm (2 inch) x 4.8 mm (3/16 inch).
3)
Duct width, 1375 mm (55 inch) to 2280 mm (90 inch): Angle size shall be
50 mm (2 inch) x 50 mm (2 inch) x 6.3 mm (1/4 inch).
Vertical kitchen exhaust, fireproofed and plastered ducts: Provide minimum 75 mm (3 inch), 6
kg/m, steel channels fastened to slab, welded to building structural steel or as acceptable.
Supports shall be bolted or welded to ducts.
B.
Support of casings, equipment housings and plenums: Bottom angle of casing to rest on continuous
gasket on concrete foundation and structural platform. Caulk all seams and joints. Wrap casing sheets
around comers. Provide stays and bracing as required. Casing shall form complete enclosure.
1.
Where insulated, provide:
a.
Single wall, with internal insulation.
b.
Double wall.
c.
For insulation, refer to Section Insulation.
2.
Drain pans, cooling coil condensate:
a.
Refer to Section 230700, HVAC INSULATION for insulation under drain pans.
b.
Pitch to galvanized steel drain connection.
c.
Pipe to drain through water seal, minimum 130 mm (5inch).
3.
Seal openings around ducts through partitions, walls and floors (not in shafts) with mineral wool
or other non-combustible material.
C.
Special materials and construction

1.
Flush flat seam ductwork: Provide for all exposed uninsulated ducts and transverse joint detail
shall be as indicated. Provide sheet metal 2 gauge numbers heavier than required for pressure
classification with normal (standing) seam construction. Provide all joints and seams, smooth
and aligned with no projections. For internal reinforcing, at transverse joints and on 600 mm (2
ft) centers, provide on ducts 780 mm (31 inch) to 1520 mm (60 inch wide), single vertical stay
at duct midpoint, on ducts 1550 mm (61 inch) to 2280 mm (90 inch) wide provide 2 vertical
stays at duct third (1/3) points and for ducts over 2280 mm (90 inch) wide provide 3 vertical
stays at ducts quarter (1/4) points. For vertical stays: provide 3.5 mm (No.10 gauge) galvanized
steel, free of burrs and rough edges with both ends bent and fastened to top and bottom of
duct.
2.
Double wall rectangular ductwork: For all ductwork in fan rooms, except exhaust and relief air
ducts, provide ductwork made up of insulated panels, as follows:
a.
Outside sheet shall be the same gauge as single wall ductwork. Inside sheet shall be 2
gauge numbers lighter than outside sheet. Sections over 600 mm (24 inch) long:
provide internally braced with Z-bars, pop riveted, 150 mm (6 inch) on centers to inside
and outside sheets. Panels shall be assembled with slide locks. Seams shall be brazed
at comers and spot brazed on 300 mm (12 inch) centers.
b.
Transverse joint connections: Provide continuous 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick neoprene
gaskets, full thickness of insulated panel and between butted sections of ducts.
Covering strips, shall be 1.3 mm (No.18 gauge), 60 mm (2-1/2 inch) wide strips
completely around ducts, covering transverse joints and with edges slightly broken for
stiffening. Strips shall be fastened to duct with sheet metal screws, 200 mm (8 inch) on
centers. Screws shall penetrate outer sheet of panels only.
c.
Solder shall be 50-50 hard bar type. Caulking shall be polysulphide rubber, caulking
compound.
3.
Stainless steel ductwork: Provide the following as specified for respective pressure
classification.
a.
Sheet metal gauge, except minimum 1.6 mm (No.16 gauge) where welded. Where
watertight is noted, joints and seams may be brazed with low temperature alloy wire.
b.
Joints, seams and stiffening.
c.
For stiffening angles, rivets and hardware, provide stainless steel. Provide welded or
brazed watertight joints and seams in sections where moisture may collect with welding
or brazing ground smooth and pitch ductwork and provide drains as specified herein for
watertight ductwork. Provide connections between stainless steel and other materials
made with insulating fabric gaskets. Exposed ductwork in finished spaces shall be
polished to match finish of equipment.
4.
Aluminized steel: Provide sheet metal gauge and joints, seams and stiffening as specified for
respective pressure classification.
Page 139/374

a.
5.
6.
6.2
Stiffening angles: For ductwork exposed to weather, provide galvanized steel, riveted or
bolted with gasket separator under angles. Paint cut edges with primer and final costs.
b.
Provide cadmium plated steel or stainless steel rivets, bolts and hardware. Make
watertight joints and seams in sections where moisture may collect, and pitch ductwork
and provide drains as specified herein for watertight ductwork. Where ductwork is
exposed to weather, apply sealing compound to all joints and seams.
Spiral seam flat oval ductwork: For ductwork, provide spiral seam construction, galvanized
steel of gauges as recommended by SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, except as
noted. For joints, provide interior slip coupling beaded at center, fastened to duct with screws
and with sealing compound applied continuously around joint assembling and after fastening.
Wrap joints with 75 mm duct tape. Provide stiffening with full width reinforcement of both flat,
major axis surfaces. Stiffeners on both flat surfaces extending beyond major axis shall be
secured with threaded rods.
a.
For pressure class 500 Pa (2 inch) w.g. stiffening shall be as follows:
1)
680 mm (27 inch) to 860 mm (34 inch): 25 mm(1 inch) x 25 mm (1 inch) x
3 mm (1/8 inch) angle, maximum 1.8 m (6 ft.) centers.
2)
880 mm (35 inch) to 1320 mm (52 inch) wide: 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) x 38
mm (1-1/2 inch) x 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) angles, maximum 1.6 m (6 ft)
centers.
3)
mm (1-1/2 inch) x 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) angle, maximum 1.2 m (4 ft)
centers.
4)
1540 mm (61 inch) wide and larger: 50 mm (2 inch) x 50 mm (2 inch) x
4.8 mm (3/16 inch) angle, maximum 600 mm (2 ft) centers.
b.
For pressure class 750 Pa (3 inch) to 1500 Pa (6 inch) w.g. stiffening shall be as
follows:
1)
Up to 860 mm (34 inch) wide: 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) x 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) x
3.2 mm (1/8 inch angle, maximum 1.8 m (6 ft) centers.
2)
mm (1-1/2 inch) x 3/16 inch angle, maximum 1.8 mm (6 ft) centers.
3)
1040 mm (41 inch) to 1140 mm (45 inch) wide: 50 mm (2 inch) x 50 mm
(2 inch) x 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) angle, maximum 1.8 (6 ft) centers.
4)
(2 inch) x 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) angle, maximum 1.2 m (4 ft) centers.
5)
1540 mm (61 inch) wide and larger: 50 mm (2 inch) x 50 mm (2 inch) x
4.8 mm (3/16) inch angle, maximum 600 mm (2 ft) centers.
c.
For pressure class 2500 Pa (10 inch) w.g. stiffening shall be as follows:
1)
Up to 660 mm (26 inch) wide: 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) x 38 mm (1-1/2) inch x 3
mm (1/8 inch) angle, maximum 1.8 m (6 ft) centers.
2)
mm (1-1/2 inch) x 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) angle, maximum 1.8 m (6 ft)
centers.
3)
(2 inch) x 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) angle, maximum 1.2 m (4 ft) centers.
4)
1340 mm (53 inch) wide and larger: 63 mm (2-1/2 inch) x 63 mm (2-1/2
inch) x 4.8 mm (3/16 inch), maximum 600 mm (2 ft) centers.
d.
Within 9 m (30 ft) of fan: Provide stiffeners of sizes specified, maximum 600 mm (2 ft)
centers.
e.
Provide fittings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards,
except as noted. Fittings shall be continuous weld, beaded end connections designed
for flat oval ductwork. Provide radius type elbows with centerline radius.
Lead shielded ductwork: Provide lead shielded ductwork in and around x-ray room, as noted.
Sheet lead in contact with concrete, mortar or plaster shall have surfaces coated with heavy
bituminous or latex material. Joints shall be lapped minimum of 25 mm and soldered to form
complete continuous seal. Provide shielding construction, materials and equipment. Shielding
shall be installed in such manner that X-ray absorption at any point is not less than above
requirements or adjacent lead protection. Lead lining shall be securely installed, free of waves,
lumps or wrinkles and with as few joints as possible.

A.
Testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) shall be performed by an approved independent TAB
Contractor. Qualifications of the firm, persons responsible for supervising and performing the work,
and the Registered Professional Engineer who will certify the report, shall be submitted for approval.
Refer to Section 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.
Page 140/374

B.
Procedure shall be in accordance with the AABC (Associated Air Balance Council) or equal for Total
System Balance. Work shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
Balance and adjustment of air distribution systems.
2.
Test of systems to certify compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
ventilation and proper functioning of operating devices.
C.
Before testing examine air handling systems: For filters, provide clean filters, free of air bypass and
functioning as specified. Lubricate moving equipment.
D.
Other inspection and maintenance items for proper system operation.

1.
Air handling equipment: Demonstrate equipment performs as noted. Adjust variable type
pulleys, variable inlet vanes and volume and control dampers. Replace fixed pitch pulleys as
required to balance systems. Pulleys shall be supplied as specified in Section 237300 Air
Handling System Equipment SECTION.
2.
Air distribution: Adjust dampers and registers to deliver or remove indicated air quantities for
registers, diffusers and terminal units within plus or minus 10 percent in proper pattern so that
there are no drafts. Take Pitot readings in main trunk ducts in conjunction with inlet and outlet
readings.
E.
Leakage testing shall be in accordance with AABC or equal.
F.
Test reports: Submit six (6) copies in bound folders with accompanying sketches.
1.
Report forms shall be:
a.
SMACNA, AABC type.
b.
Apparatus test reports.
c.
Outlet test reports.
2.
Additional report information: Submit method of balancing and details of instruments used,
including serial numbers and last date of calibration. Submit copies of air velocity and pressure
readings with duct layout showing where readings were taken. Submit minimum and maximum
air flow readings as measured for:
a.
Outside air.
b.
Return air.
c.
Relief air.
d.
Exhaust air.
e.
Each terminal unit.
3.
Submit Pitot readings.
G.
Certification: Report shall be certified by an independent Registered Professional Engineer not

affiliated with construction phase of the project. Certification shall include checking of air measurement
calculations, factors, and procedures.
Page 141/374

SECTION 230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Related documents
1.
Requirements in the Contract Document - Chapter II: Employers requirements shall
apply to all work in this Section.
B.
Work in this Section includes the providing of labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary for a complete and safe installation in accordance with the contract documents
and all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction for the following:
1.
Thermometers.
2.
Thermometer wells.
3.
Direct connected pressure gauges.
4.
Pneumatic temperature and pressure receiver gauges and transmitters.
5.
Electronic temperature, pressure, and flow receiver gauges and transmitters.
6.
Valved outlets for pressure gauges.
7.
Manometers. .
8.
Liquid flow measuring instruments.
1.2

A.
Related documents
B.
Requirements in the Contract Document - Chapter II: Employers requirements shall apply
to all work in this section
C.
Requirements of Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HEATING,

VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING WORK apply to all work in this Section.
D.

1.
Section 236400 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM.
2.
Section 237300 AIR HANDLING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT.
3.
Section 230900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS.
1.3
A.

B.
Comply with all applicable codes and refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS
FOR HVAC WORK for additional Reference Standards.
C.
Equivalent Vietnam Standards (VS) can be substituted for American Standards specified in
this section.
1.
The contractor shall be in compliance with all applicable statutes, laws, orders,
judgments and decrees of Vietnam and any government authority having jurisdiction
over the contractors business or property (the Laws).
2.
Page 142/374

3.
1.4
specification, the contractor shall be deemed to provide with services least
substantially equivalent in quality to the said required standard or reference.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings, Coordination Service Drawings (CSD), product data, samples and
certificates of compliance required by contract documents.
B.
Submit shop drawings and product data for thermometers, pressure gauges, manometers,
steam pressure and flow recording instruments and liquid flow measuring instruments.
1.5

A.
Receive and accept materials and equipment at the site; properly handle, house, and protect
them from damage and the weather until installation. Replace equipment damaged in the
course of handling without additional charge.
B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for products furnished under this
Contract. However, such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other
liabilities which manufacturers and the Contractor may have by law or by other provisions
of the Contract Documents (Defect Notification Period).
B.
Guarantee all materials, equipment, apparatus and workmanship to be free of defective

materials and faulty workmanship for at least the Defect Notification Period defined in the
Contract documents.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
The contractor shall submit manufacturers data for following items for approval from
1.
Direct connected pressure gauges.
2.
Pneumatic temperature and pressure gauges and transmitters.
3.
Electronic temperature pressure and flow receiver gauges and transmitters.
4.
Thermometers.
5.
Venturi flowmeters.
6.
Pitot insert type flow meters.
7.
Differential pressure indicators.
8.
Manometers.
Page 143/374

9.
2.2
Fuel oil flow meters.
THERMOMETERS
A.
For industrial case type thermometers, provide adjustable angle type brass stem with Vshaped brass or cast aluminum case and glass front, mercury filled.
1.
Stem Length for Nominal Pipe Sizes:
a.
Below 100 mm (4 inches) shall be 89 mm (3-112 inch) stem, elbow mounted.
b.
100 mm - 200 mm (4-8 inches) shall be 89 mm (3-1/2 inch) stem.
c.
250 mm - 355 mm (10-14 inches) shall be 150 mm (6 inch) stem.
d.
e.
600 mm (24 inches) shall be 300 mm (12 inch) stem.
f.
760 mm (30 inches) shall be 380 mm (15 inch) stem.
g.
h.
Over 1040 mm (43 inches) shall be 610 mm (24 inch) stem.
2.
Thermometer temperature ranges:
a.
Hot water system: 0 deg C ~ 150 deg C (30~300 deg F), 2 deg increment.
b.
Chilled water system: -20 deg C ~ 40 deg C (0~100 deg F), 1 deg increments.
c.
Condenser water system: 0 deg C ~ 100 deg C (30~180 deg F), 2 deg
increments.
d.
Fuel oil system: 0 deg C ~ 150 deg c (30~300 deg F), 2 deg increments.
3.
Provide well with separable brass socket connection for locations within 1.5 M (5
feet) of viewing position.
B.
Provide vapor actuated dial type thermometers for installation in cabinets, panels and
locations where temperature sensing bulb is installed more than 1.5 M (5 feet) from viewing
position. Case and ring shall be stainless steel. Movement shall be brass, bronze bushed,
recalibrator type. Connecting tubing shall be plotted double braided bronze armor over
copper capillary. Bulbs shall be copper, brass separable socket on piping. Provide flush
type, back outlet, except as noted.
1.
Provide insertion stem length the same as for Industrial Case Type.
2.3
PRESSURE GAUGES
A.
Provide gauge for pipe or equipment mounted type, with black finished cast aluminum with
flangeless back, and threaded black enamel cast aluminum ring with gasketed glass face.
Provide Type 316 stainless steel spring tube, stainless steel bushed precision movement and
micrometer adjustment on needle. Accuracy shall be 1/2 of 1 percent full scale range.
Provide bar stock needle valve cock. Steam gauges shall be steel coil syphon, Provide
pulsation dampers, for use with positive displacement pumps.
B.
Provide direct connected gauge cabinet or panel mounted type, except as noted. Case and
ring shall be aluminum alloy with black enamel coating and steel hinge. Movement shall be
stainless steel bushed type 316, micrometer adjustment. Steam gauges shall be with steel
coil syphon, and solid fronts. Accuracy shall be 1/2 of 1 percent of full scale range. Provide
flush type, except as noted, for use with sensing lines up to 8 M (25 feet) in length.
C.
Provide gauges cabinet or panel mounted type, pneumatically operated, except as noted.
Case shall be aluminum alloy black enamel, flush. Ring shall be black plastic. Movement
shall be brass, bronze bushed, recalibrator type. Provide steam gauges with chrome plated
steel coil syphon. Accuracy shall be 1/2 of 1 percent of full scale range. Scales and
graduations shall be as required; submit for review. Provide indicating pressure transmitter
Page 144/374

with each panel gauge including tubing, connections, valves and accessories for use with
sensing lines up to 45 M (150 feet).
D.
2.4
Provide electronically operated cabinet or panel mounted temperature, flow or pressure

gauges, with electric receiver type variable process indicator. Gauges shall be designed for
operation from 220 volt nominal, 60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz power source. Signals shall be
received from transmitters up to 800 M away. Receiver accuracy shall not be affected by
variations in transmission line impedance, voltage fluctuations or induced effects of nearby
power line. Flush mounted case shall be rectangular steel with gasketed die cast aluminum
door with gray vinyl finish. Chassis shall be slide out type with plug in connector to inside
rear of case. Input shall be 3-12 second pulse duration signal on a 15 second cycle.
Calibrated accuracy shall be plus or minus 1/2 percent of span.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE INDICATORS
A.
2.5
Provide differential Pressure Indicators with die cast aluminum case and elastomer ring.
Movement shall be stainless steel bellows and copper torque tube; self draining. Indicating
movement shall be jeweled rotary type with zero and range adjustment screws. Scales shall
be uniform. Accuracy shall be 1/2 of 1 percent full scale range. Manifold shall be stainless
steel with carbon steel tubing.
MANOMETERS
A.
2.6
Provide U-tube type, manometers with straight pyrex tubes with bottom metal connecting
base. Mercury filled. Graduations shall be mm, external micrometer scale adjustment, zero
check cock. Provide by-pass valves and connecting tubing, shut-off valve, and drain valve.
Housing shall be aluminum case with glass front.
LIQUID FLOW MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
A.
Venturi flowmeters: Provide coordinated system, including Venturi flowmeters and portable
dry-type master meter complete with pressure taps, quick connect and bar stock needle
valves. Venturi accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 percent uncalibrated. Venturi accuracy,
laboratory calibrated shall be plus or minus 1/4 of 1 percent. Minimum upstream straight
pipe diameters shall be 5, downstream, shall be 2, regardless of upstream piping condition.
Permanent pressure drop shall be 1 percent of 300 mm (1 ft) head.
B.
Annular self averaging flow meters: Provide coordinated system, including annular selfaveraging flow meters with pitot insert and portable dry-type master meter complete with
hoses, disconnect valves.
1.
Pitot insert shall include metal tag and chain giving location, flow rate and
differential pressure for meter reading.. Pitot insert accuracy shall be plus or minus 1
percent of actual flow and repeatability plus or minus 0.1 percent of actual value.
2.
Minimum upstream and downstream straight pipe-diameters shall be as per
manufacturer's published recommendations. If required straight pipe diameters are
not available, straightening vanes shall be used. Hot tap pitot insert shall be used
where installation or removal of element while in service is required.
Page 145/374

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide mercury type thermometers at inlets and outlets of bank of cooling coils, bank of
heating coils, chiller, condenser, heat exchanger, each circuit, in chilled water flow and
return at entry to equipment rooms and return main. For absorption refrigeration, provide
mercury type thermometers in condenser water line from condenser generator after by-pass.
For condensate cooler, provide mercury type thermometers in condensate discharge line.
B.
Provide thermometer wells at outlet of individual water coils and adjacent to each bulb for
controllers, remote temperature indication, recording thermometers and where noted. Supply
6 spare industrial case type thermometers for use in wells.
C.
Provide pressure gauges in water piping inlets and outlets of chiller, condenser and heat
exchanger circuits and circulating pumps at suction and discharge, between shut-off valves
and pump, condenser water inlet to cooling tower, at city water inlet to equipment or tanks,
at discharge of condensate pump and boiler feed pump and as noted. At condenser water.
pump inlet, provide compound type pressure gauges.
D.
Provide valved outlets for pressure gauges in supply and return of water coil assemblies and
as noted. Supply 6 spare gauges for use at valved outlets.
Page 146/374

SECTION 230548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
1.
Vibration isolators
2.
Foundations and supports.
3.
Seismic restraints.
4.
Sound attenuating units.
5.
Sound-linings.
6.
Soundproofing of construction.
7.
External soundproofing.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Requirements of Section GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK SECTION apply

B.

1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.

B.
Comply with all applicable, codes and refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS
FOR HVAC WORK SECTION for additional Reference Standards.
C.
Equivalent Vietnamese Standards (VS) can be substituted for American Standards specified
in this section.
1.
2.
Page 147/374

1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The manufacturer shall determine vibration isolation sizes and locations and provide piping
and equipment isolation systems as scheduled or specified.
B.
The manufacturer shall also guarantee specified isolation system deflection, provide
installation instructions and drawings and provide approved resilient restraining devices as
required to limit equipment and piping motion in excess of 6 mm (1/4 inch).
C.
Refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK SECTION for
Guarantee and other Quality Assurance requirements.
D.
Acoustical Criteria
1.
Noise levels due to equipment and ductwork shall permit attaining sound pressure
levels in all 8 octave bands in occupied spaces conforming to NC-35 in all spaces,
except the following :
a.
General Office : NC 35 40.
b.
Space adjacent to Fan rooms and Toilets : NC 40.
E.
Mechanical performance
1.
Air distribution system equipment, terminal device noise : the maximum permissible
sound-power levels in octave bands of airborne transmissions through the
combination or grilles, registers, diffusers and terminal units, or related pressure
reducing devices, when operated in installed condition per plans and specifications,
shall be as follows :
Maximum PWL (re 10 to the minus 12 Watts)
Octave Bands NC 30 NC 35 NC 40 NC 45 NC - 50
1
60
62
66
68
70
2
53
56
60
63
66
3
45
49
54
58
62
4
41
46
51
56
61
5
38
43
48
53
58
6
37
42
47
52
57
7
36
41
46
51
56
8
37
42
47
52
57
2.
Pressure reducing boxes above ceiling ; radiated noise : the maximum permissible
radiated sound-power levels in octave bands, when operated in an installed condition
over occupied spaces, shall be as follows :
Maximum PWL (re 10 to the minus 12 Watts)
Octave Bands NC 30 NC 35 NC 40 NC 45 NC - 50
1
68
72
76
79
82
2
66
70
74
77
80
3
59
64
68
71
74
4
57
61
65
69
73
5
53
57
62
67
72
Page 148/374

6
7
8
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
52
62
60
56
66
65
60
70
70
65
75
75
70
80
80
Acoustic performance within equipment spaces:

a.
Equipment room noise levels and noise transmissions to adjacent buildings
shall comply with all federal, state and local noise ordinances.
Refrigeration machine gear train acoustical performance:
a.
The gear train assembly (between drive and compressor) when operating at the
machine's rated capacity per plans and specifications and tested, shall have
noise levels not exceeding 90 dBA.
Refrigeration machine acoustical performance:
a.
The maximum permissible noise levels under design operating conditions,
when measured in accordance with ARI Standard 575-73 specified methods
and qualifications shall not exceed 90 dBA.
Motor acoustical performance:
a.
Motor drives for pumps and refrigeration machines when installed per plans
and specifications shall operate with noise levels not exceeding 90 dBA.
b.
Noise levels shall be determined in accordance with IEEE Standard 85 test
procedure for airborne noise measurements on rotating electrical equipment.
DOCUMENTS SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittal material shall include copies of descriptive data for all products and materials
including but not limited to the following:
1.
Descriptive data
a.
Catalog cuts and data sheets in specific vibration isolators and seismic
restraints to be utilized showing compliance with the specification.
b.
An itemized list showing items of equipment or piping to be isolated, isolator
types, loading and deflection with reference to specific drawings.
2.
Shop drawings:
a.
Drawing showing equipment base constructions for each equipment, including
dimensions, structural number sizes and support point locations.
b.
Drawings showing methods of suspension, support guides for piping and
ductwork.
c.
Drawing showing methods for isolation of pipes and ductwork penetrating
walls and slabs.
d.
Anchor bolt locations.
e.
Reinforcing and template steels.
f.
Number and location of anchors for each equipment with specific details of
restraints including maximum loading at each bolt location.
g.
Number and location of Seismic restraints for piping and equipment.
3.
Submit shop drawings and product data for the following:
a.
Sound attenuators, including certified test data.
b.
Soundlining.
c.
Certification that sound lining meets erosion test method described in UL
Publication No. 181.
d.
Nonhardening caulking.
Page 149/374

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Employers representative:
1.
Vibration isolators.
2.
Seismic restraints for piping and equipment.
3.
Equipment bases.
4.
Sound attenuators.
5.
Soundlinings.
VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT
A.
2.3
Where exposed to atmosphere, all steel shall be hot dipped galvanized and hardware and
springs shall be epoxy powder. Where exposed to corrosive elements, products shall be
corrosion protected.
VIBRATION ISOLATORS:
A.
Spring type:
1.
Spring isolators shall incorporate the following:
a.
Minimum diameter of not less than 80 percent of the compressed spring height
at rated load.
b.
Corrosion resistance where exposed to corrosive environment with springs
shall be epoxy powder and neoprene coated, hardware shall be cadmium plated
and all other metal parts shall be hot dip galvanized.
c.
Reserve deflection (from loaded to solid height) of 50 percent of rated
deflection.
d.
Leveling device.
e.
6 mm (1/4 inch) thick neoprene acoustical base pad.
f.
Designed and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel.
g.
Adequate operating clearance.
h.
Non-resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support structure natural
frequencies.
2.
Type "A" spring isolators
a.
Isolators shall be consisted of a top and bottom plate with an adjustment bolt
for leveling. Springs shall be designed with a horizontal stiffness at least of
75% of the vertical stiffness to assure stability, 50% travel beyond rated load
and safe solid stresses.
b.
Isolators shall have a rubber acoustical barrier to prevent transmission of very
high frequency vibration and noise.
c.
Isolators shall be corrosion-protected if installed outdoors or in a corrosive
environment.
3.
Type "B" spring isolators shall be same as Type "A" except.
a.
Provide built-in resilient vertical limit stops. Provide two layers of 6 mm(1/4
inch) neoprene base pad separated by 1.5 mm(1/16 inch) sheet steel. Tapped
holes shall be in top plate for bolting to equipment. Isolators shall be capable of
supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment erection.
4.
Where operating weight differs from installed weight, provide built-in adjustable
limit stops to prevent equipment from rising when weight is removed. Stops shall not
be in contact during normal operation.
Page 150/374

5.
B.
2.4
a.
Spring isolators shall incorporate seismic restraint.
Spring Hanger rod isolators shall incorporate the following:
a.
Spring element shall be seated on a steel washer within a neoprene cup, steel
retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene cup, minimum 12 mm (1/2 inch)
clearance between retainer box and spring hanger rod and factory preloading to
75 percent of rated load.
Elastomer mounting types:

1.
Elastomer Isolators shall incorporate bolt holes for bolting to equipment base, bottom
steel plates for bolting to sub-base as required and unit type design molded in black
oil-resistant neoprene. Neoprene shall be compounded to be not greater than 70
durometer, minimum tensile strength 13,790 kPa (2000 psig), minimum elongation
300 percent and maximum compression set at 25 percent of the original deflection.
2.
Elastomer Hanger rod isolators shall incorporate a molded unit type neoprene
element, with compounding as described in Type "D" above, steel retainer box
encasing neoprene mounting and clearance between mounting hanger rod and steel
retainer box.
3.
Pad type elastomer mountings shall incorporate a 8 mm (5/16 inch) minimum
thickness, 350 kPa (50 psig) maximum loading, ribbed or waffled design, 1.5 mm
(1/16 inch) deflection per pad thickness, 1.5 mm (1/16 inch) galvanized steel plate
between multiple layers of pad thickness and suitable bearing plate to distribute load.
4.
Pad type elastomer mountings shall incorporate a laminated canvas duck and
neoprene pad with maximum loading 1 000 psig, suitable bearing plate to distribute
load and minimum thickness one inch.
5.
Combination spring/elastomer hanger rod isolators shall incorporate spring and
neoprene isolator elements in a steel box retainer and characteristics of spring and
neoprene.
SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A.
2.5
Provide seismic restraints for piping in accordance with the value of Shortening & Swaying
in building, and seismic data to be prepared by Building Structural Design.
EQUIPMENT BASES:
A.
Integral structural steel bases: Provide steel base, reinforced as required to prevent base
flexure at startup and misalignment of drive and driven units with fan bases complete with
motor slide rails and drilled for drive and driven unit mounting template.
B.
Concrete inertia base: provide inertia base made of a structural steel frame with structural
base reinforced as required to prevent flexure, misalignment of drive and driven unit or
stress transferal into equipment Thickness per the following schedule:
Motor Sizes (HP) Thickness mm Min. Thickness inch.
5 - 20 150 mm 6
25 - 50 200 mm 8
60 - 100 250 mm 10
125 - 250 300 mm 12
Page 151/374

300 - 500 450 mm 18
1.
2.6
Fan bases shall be complete with motor slide rails. Pump bases shall provide base
elbow supports. Bases shall be complete with height saving brackets, reinforcing
equipment, bolting provisions and isolators shall be provided by vibration control
supplier. Base shall be ready for concrete pour.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS:
A.
Neoprene: provide type manufactured of nylon tire cord and neoprene both molded and
cured with hydraulic presses. Straight connectors shall have two spheres. Elbow shall have
single sphere forming the comer of joint. Type shall be rated 1035 kPa at 104 deg C (150
psig at 220 deg F). Size 300 mm (12 inch) and larger to employ control cables with end
fittings isolated from anchor plates by means of 12 mm (1/2 inch) bridge bearing. Provide
neoprene washer bushings.
B.
Flexible stainless hose: provide braided flexible metal hose 50 mm (2 inch) pipe size and
smaller with male nipple fittings and 65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger pipe size with fixed
steel flanges suitable for operating pressure with 4:1 minimum safety factor. Length shall be
as shown on drawings.
2.7
SOUND ATTENUATORS AND SOUND LININGS

A.
Sound attenuators shall be factory prefabricated with galvanized steel shell of a minimum
0.85 mm (No. 22 gauge) and leak-proof at a pressure differential of 200 mm (8 inches) wg.
1.
Acoustic fill shall be glass or mineral fiber with a minimum density of 72 Kg/M3
packed under 5 percent compression. The flamespread shall be a maximum of 25 and
the fuel contributed and smoke developed shall be a maximum of 30. The fill shall
meet the erosion test method described in UL Publication No. 181. The filler shall be
inert, vermin and moisture proof.
2.
Provide minimum 0.7 mm (No.24 gauge) galvanized perforated steel baffles.
3.
The net insertion ratings shall be determined by the duct-to-reverberant room test
method at the design airflow.
4.
Submit certified test data from an approved laboratory for pressure drop and insertion
loss ratings. as follows:
a.
For square or rectangular attenuators, provide 600 mm x 600 mm (24 inches x
24 inches) cross-section attenuator.
b.
For round attenuators, provide 600 mm (24 inches) diameter conical attenuator.
c.
Certification data for pressure drop and net insertion loss shall be based on
tests of same attenuator.
d.
Attenuators and tests shall be subject to inspection upon request.
B.
Soundlinings shall be fibrous glass, minimum 0.019 Kg/cu.M.). Flamespread shall be a

maximum of 25 and fuel contributed and smoke developed shall be a maximum of 30.
Lining shall be suitable for a duct velocities up to 1200 M/min. Lining shall meet erosion
test method described in UL Publication No. 181. The dynamic loss co-efficient shall be a
maximum of 1.2. The K factor shall be a maximum of .036 W/M.K. The noise reduction
coefficient for 25 mm (l inch) thick lining shall be a minimum of 0.70.
1.
The facing for low pressure duct liner shall have a neoprene coated finish and
stenciled in accordance with NFPA 90.
2.
The facing for circular medium and high pressure duct liner shall be perforated, 28
percent minimum open area, and 0.7 mm (No.24 gauge) galvanized steel.
Page 152/374

3.
C.
In ductwork, provide a minimum thickness of 25 mm (1 inch). In plenums, provide a

minimum thickness of 50 mm (2 inches). For soundlining used as thermal insulation,
the minimum thickness shall conform to the requirements as specified in Section
INSULATION.
Provide adhesive and sealer in conformance with NFP A 90A with ma specified in Section
230700 HVAC INSULATION. Nonhardening caulking shall be designed to be permanently
elastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Concrete shall be as per

specifications describing requirements. For floor mounted equipment, provide 100 mm (4
inch) thick concrete housekeeping pads over entire floor area of floor supported equipment,
supporting all vibration isolation devices and bases and keyed with hair pins as required to
be integral with structural slab.
1.
Pads shall incorporate approved seismic restraint anchor plates flush with top of
housekeeping pad. Pads shall be increased to 200 mm (8 inch) for chillers and boilers.
B.
Equipment isolation: provide 50 mm (2 inch) operating clearance between concrete inertia

bases and housekeeping pad and 25 mm (1 inch) clearance between equipment or structural
bases and housekeeping pad. Isolation mounting deflection (minimum) shall be as specified
or scheduled on drawings. Position equipment, structural base and concrete bases on blocks
or wedges at proper operating height. Provide operation load conditions prior to transferring
base isolator loads to spring and removing wedges.
1.
Install equipment with flexibility in wiring connection. Verify all installed isolators
and mounting systems permit equipment motion in all directions. Adjust or provide
additional resilient restraints to flexibly limit startup equipment lateral motion to 6
mm (1/4 inch). Prior to startup, clean out all foreign matter between bases and
equipment. Verify that there are no isolation short circuits in the base, isolators or
seismic restraints.
C.
For piping Isolation, isolate piping outside of shafts as follows:

1.
All water piping in machine rooms.
2.
Piping where exposed on roof.
3.
Water piping within 15 M (50 feet) of connected rotating equipment and pressure
reducing stations.
4.
Compressed air piping from compressor discharge to receiver.
D.
Position isolators close to building structure and between building structure and
supplementary steel if required. Suspend isolators from rigid and massive support points.
Supplementary steel shall be sized for a maximum deflection of 2.0 mm (0.08 inches) at
center span. Vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment or
piping resulting in piping stresses or misalignment.
1.
Support water piping in shafts and floor supports entering shaft with isolators (2
layers) or pad depending on piping loads and support point space conditions within
shafts. Provide guide and anchor piping in shafts as required with approved mounting
designs incorporating pad to prevent direct contact of piping with building structure.
2.
For water piping, provide hanger rod isolators with a minimum static deflection of 25
mm (1 inch) and factory preloading for piping greater than 150 mm (6 inches)
diameter. Provide isolators with 25 mm (1 inch) static deflection. Adjust, as required,
Page 153/374

3.
all isolators to eliminate all contact of the isolated rod with the hanger rod box
retainer or short circuiting of the spring.
For Control Air Piping, provide two flexible connectors 90 deg to each other in the
compressor discharge piping to the receiver. When receiver is remote form
compressor isolate piping between the compressor discharge and receiver with
isolator having 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) deflection. When receiver is remote from
compressor, support receiver on isolators having 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) deflection.
E.
Install all isolated piping and ductwork so that they freely pass through walls and floors
without rigid contacts. Penetration paints shall be sleeved and maintain 25 mm (1 in.)
clearance around to be packed tightly with fiberglass and caulking after installation of
piping and ductwork.
1.
The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping or conduit which make rigid
contact with the building constructions which include, but not limited to, slabs,
beams, columns, studs and walls.
2.
Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact. Inform other trades, such as
plastering or electrical to avoid any short circuiting which would reduce vibration
isolation.
3.
Obtain inspection and approval of any installation to be covered or enclosed, prior to
such closure.
4.
Provide suitable and adequate flanged spool pieces between suction and discharge
valves and the pump to permit future installation of flexible neoprene pipe connectors
capable of accepting the operating working pressure.
5.
Diagonal thrust restraints shall consist of hanger with the same deflection as specified
for the supporting spring mounts. The sprig element shall be designed so it can be
preset for thrust and adjusted to allow a maximum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) movement at
start-up and shut-down of equipment.
F.
Install sound attenuators in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to obtain

noted performance. For maximum allowable static pressure loss, refer to tests in this Section
allowable.
G.
Adhere soundlining with 150 mm (6 inches) wide strips of adhesive. 300 mm (12 inches) on
centers and at joints in lining. In addition. secure with weld pins and 50 mm (2 inch)
diameter washers on maximum 400 mm (16 inch) centers. Coat all edges with sealer.
Provide continuous sheet metal edge protectors at entering and leaving edges of all lined
duct sections and all joints. Dimensions of lined ductwork are clear inside dimensions after
lining has been installed .
1.
The extent of ductwork soundlining for air-conditioning systems shall be as follows:
a.
All supply ductwork within mechanical equipment rooms. but not less than a
distance of 7.5 M (25 ft) from each fan.
b.
All return ductwork within mechanical equipment rooms. but not less than a
distance of 6 M (20 ft) from each fan.
c.
In low-velocity ductwork at air distribution system equipment. provide
soundlined boots at the return and exhaust registers connected to duct risers.
Provide lining at other locations as noted on the drawings.
d.
In ventilation and exhaust systems. provide as indicated on the drawings.
e.
In ductwork downstream of terminal units. provide a minimum of 3 M (10 ft)
or as per the manufacturer's recommendations. At air valves. provide a
minimum 3 M (10 ft) or as per manufacturer's recommendations.
f.
The lengths shown are minimum. Provide additional acoustical treatment as
required to meet maximum permissible sound-power levels scheduled for
equipment.
g.
Provide soundlined plenums as indicated on the drawings.
Page 154/374

H.
Soundproofing shall be installed in openings between ductwork and equipment room walls
and floors, except in shafts and sound barrier ceilings. Fill openings with fibrous-glass
blanket or board for full depth of penetration. Caulk each side of each opening with
nonhardening, non-aging caulking compound.
I.
Ductwall external soundproofing shall be installed at the inlet and discharge transitions of
vane-axial fans and their sound attenuators and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings.
1.
Soundproofing material shall be 48 Kg/M (4 lb) density fibrous glass board. The
thickness shall be 12 mm (1/2 inch) greater than the height of the ductwork angles.
The thickness shall be a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches).
a.
The external jacket shall be lead sheet, overlapped 50 mm (2 inches) and
secured with tape. The weight shall be 4.88 Kg/Sq. M.
3.2
TESTS
A.
On completion of installation of all noise, vibration and seismic control devices herein
specified, the Contractor shall inspect the completed systems and report in writing any
installation error, improperly selected isolation devices, or other faults that could affect
performance. Contractor shall submit a report indicating steps taken to properly complete
the isolation work. Both of these reports shall be reviewed by the Engineer for Employers
representative final approval.
B.
Tests: after installation, measure the total system pressure before and after each attenuator.
If the pressure loss at any attenuator exceeds the maximum static pressure scheduled on the
drawings, replace the attenuator(s) at no charge, and/or modify entrance and/or discharge
aerodynamic flow to obtain the specified performance.
Page 155/374

SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
1.
Operational testing of central station and air handling equipment.
2.
Balancing of air distribution systems.
3.
Adjustment of air terminal devices for HVAC systems.
4.
Flow testing and balancing of hydronic systems.
5.
Furnishing instruments required for testing, adjusting and balancing operations and making
instruments available to Architect Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. Retain
possession of instruments and remove from site at completion of services.
6.
Recording flow of existing air and water systems which are to remain and rebalancing of these
systems.

A.
Related documents
1.
Requirements in the Contract Document - Chapter II: Employers requirements shall apply to all
B.
Requirements of Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR
CONDITIONING WORK apply to all work in this Section.
C.

1.
Section 236400 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM.
2.
Section 237300 AIR HANDLING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT.
3.
Section 233000 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT.
4.
Section 230519 THERMOMETERS, GAUGES AND RECORDING INSTRUMENTS.
5.
Section 230900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS.
1.3
A.

B.
Comply with appropriate codes and refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HEATING,
VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING WORK for additional Reference Standards.
C.
Equivalent Vietnam Standards (VS) can be substituted for foreign standards specified in this section.
1.
2.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Prior to start of testing, adjusting and balancing, verify that the systems installation is complete and in
full operation. Verify that outside conditions are within reasonable range relative to design conditions
and that doors and windows are in place or under normal traffic conditions. Ensure that lights are
turned "on" for cooling load checks and are turned "off" for heating load checks.
Page 156/374

1.
Ensure that special equipment such as computers, laboratory equipment, and electronic
equipment are in full operation.
2.
Dummy loads: When operation testing is performed before final computer, laboratory and other
equipment are installed, provide temporary electric heat loads in rooms, at no extra cost to
Employer. Capacity of heating devices shall be such as to equal full heat gain in rooms, with
exact capacity and location as directed by Employers representative. Provide heating devices,
wiring, connecting fittings compatible with electric circuits, operating and safety controls and
other devices, as required. Other heating mediums than electrical may be proposed for
approval by Employers representative.
B.
Verify that requirements for preparation for testing and balancing have been met for elements of each
of the systems which require testing.
C.
End result of balancing of air systems shall be satisfactory relationship of air pressures, flow
directions, room temperatures, etc., whether quantitative data on drawings result in these conditions or
not. Make measurements and adjustments in addition to drawing indications if necessary to result in
satisfactory air balance. Building air balance shall comprehend overall balance between all systems,
whether or not drawing figures may have to be modified to achieve overall balance.
D.
Make air balance measurements and adjustments for multiple operating conditions where areas are
subject to variety of circumstances (doors open and/or shut, etc.).
E.
Project review
1.
Perform detailed pre-construction plan check and construction review.
2.
Pre-Construction Review.
a.
Review Contract Documents (drawings, specifications, bulletin, addenda), submittal
data, shop drawings and automatic temperature control drawings.
b.
Assure that design intent is clearly understood. Identify potential problems from
standpoint of total system balance.
c.
Review specifications for scope of work, special requirements and items that will make
balancing difficult or impossible.
d.
Review drawings for potential problems for total system balance, including location of
balancing devices, lack of balancing devices, general system layout, architectural
features and accessibility. Determine the most effective system balancing procedures
and determine scheduling and coordination requirements.
e.
Review submittal data for completeness of data, conformity with Contract Documents,
special instructions for use of balancing devices, factors for flow meters, limitations
affecting accuracy of measurements and equipment performance data and curves.
f.
Review shop drawings for potential problems for total system balance, as specified
above for review of Contract Drawings.
g.
Review automatic temperature control drawings for thorough understanding of system
functions and determining the most effective total system balancing procedure for
minimum control manipulation. Avoid disturbing calibration of control devices and
coordinate required control manipulation with Control Contractor.
h.
Submit report recommending addition and/or relocation of balancing devices, including,
but not limited to, volume dampers, balancing valves, flow metering devices for air and
water, and pressure and temperature measuring points.
3.
Construction Review: make on-site visits during progress of construction. Number of visits shall
be as required to perform the functions specified below.
a.
The purpose of the review is to identify potential problems for performing total system
balance. Identify modification which will affect total system balance. Schedule and
coordinate total system balance with other work. Identify conditions that could create
hazardous environment for building occupants.
b.
Typical activities: check that necessary balancing and measuring hardware are located
properly, are accessible and installed correctly. Identify and evaluate variations from
system design. Record data from equipment nameplates. Identify and report possible
restrictions in systems, such as closed fire dampers, long runs of flexible duct, poorly
designed duct fittings, questionable piping connections arid others. Verify that
construction progress will not delay total system balance. Identify best location for duct
pitot tube traverses. Identify scaffolding needs.
Page 157/374

1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
of compliance required by Contract documents.
B.
Furnish to Employers representative documentation that the Air Balance Company has satisfactorily
balanced at least three systems of comparable type and size. Include list of such projects. Sample
forms for use in compiling and recording test and balance data shall also be submitted.
C.
Final submission shall include records and tabulations required hereinafter and certified by a
registered professional mechanical engineer experienced in balancing HVAC systems.
D.
Within the time defined in the Contract documents, submit three (3) copies of report forms filled out,
including design flow values, installed equipment pressure drops and required CMH for air terminals.
Submit a complete list of instruments proposed to be used, organize in appropriate categories and
include data sheets for each. Indicate each manufacturer and model number, description and use
when needed to further identify instrument, size or capacity range and latest calibration date.
1.
Employers representative will review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents, and
will return one set marked to indicate discrepancies noted between data shown and Contract
Documents, additional, or more accurate, instruments required and requests for re-calibration
of specific instruments.
2.
E.
Submit proposed method of balancing variable air volume systems to account for system
diversity.
Within the time defined in the Contract documents, submit three (3) copies of final reports, on
applicable reporting forms, to Engineer for review:
1.
Schedule testing and balancing of parts of systems which are delayed due to seasonal,
climatic, occupancy, or other conditions beyond control of Contractor, as early as proper
conditions will allow, after consultation with Employers representative.
2.
Submit reports of delayed testing promptly after execution of those services,
3.
Each individual final reporting form must bear the signature of the person who recorded data
and the signature of the Registered Professional Engineer Supervising air balance of the
reporting organization.
a.
When more than one certified organization performs total air balance services, the firm
having managerial responsibility shall make submittals.
b.
Identify the instruments of all types which were used, and the last date of calibration of
each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
AIR SYSTEM BALANCING

A.
Check that filters are installed clean and free of bypass, and are the type as specified. Make
allowance for air filter resistance at time of tests. At design air quantity, the pressure drop across filter
banks should be midway between the drops for clean and dirty filters. Submit written report that above
was done.
B.
In cooperation with the automatic control manufacturer, set adjustments of automatically operated
dampers and air terminal boxes to operate as indicated. In cooperation with the automatic control
manufacturer and the terminal box manufacturer, verify factory setting of air terminal boxes. Make
adjustments required to produce design conditions. Submit written verification that all items listed
above have been completed.
C.
Fan testing: test and adjust fans speed to design requirements and test and record motors full load
amperes.
Page 158/374

D.
Duct testing: make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design air quantities M/Hr at
fans. Adjust main supply, return, and exhaust air ducts to proper design M/Hr. Adjust each zone
supply, return and exhaust to proper design M/Hr. Test and adjust recirculated air systems for design
M/Hr. Test and adjust outside air systems for design M/Hr. Test and record suction and discharge
systems' static pressures.
E.
Air outlet balancing: test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 5 percent of design
requirements. Identify each grille, diffuser and register as to location size, type and manufacturer and
submit in recorded tabulation with floor plan. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers shall
include required velocity (M/sec.), test resultant velocity, required M/hr, test resultant M/Hr after
adjustments; all in accordance with manufacturers' ratings. Adjust diffusers, throw pattern, grilles and
registers to minimize drafts. When balancing return air slots in lights, start with all slots open, and
close down dampers as required nearest to return/exhaust air intakes above ceiling.
F.
Record in tabulated form balance data by clearly identifying floors, zones, rooms and air outlet/inlet
locations to correspond to those in the Contract Documents.
G.
Temperature conditions; read and record the following:

1.
Outside climatic conditions at time of testing, including DB(dry bulb) and WB (wet
bulb)temperatures and whether it is sunny, cloudy, windy, etc.
2.
Entering DB heating and cooling temperature.
3.
Entering WB cooling temperature.
4.
Leaving DB heating and cooling temperature.
5.
Leaving WB cooling temperature.
6.
DB temperature and velocity in occupied zones.
H.
Sound level readings: take sound level readings at one or more diffusers in each zone approximately
1.5 M (5 feet) above the floor. The allowable room sound-pressure level shall fall within range of
specified allowable sound power level in the area. See Section Noise Control for the requirements.
1.
33 to 37 db.
2.
(Specify other range, with list of rooms.)
I.
Belt drive changes: make all changes in belts and sheaves required to obtain proper air balance.
1.
At no extra cost to Employer.
3.2
WATER SYSTEMS BALANCING:

A.
Provide the following instruments for field use:

1.
One set of pressure gauges and fittings.
2.
Dry bulb thermometer.
3.
Wet bulb thermometer.
4.
Thermocouple unit and thermocouples.
5.
Set of balancing cock adjustment wrenches.
6.
Portable field flowmeter; deliver to Employer at completion of work.
B.
Prepare water systems for balancing in the following manner and verify that the following conditions.
1.
Piping systems
a.
Strainers have been cleaned.
b.
Insides of traps, reducer and regulating valves have been cleaned.
c.
Expansion tanks are not air bound.
d.
Piping systems are completely full of water.
e.
Water systems are not air bound and that air vents are installed and operating properly.
2.
Open normally open valves to full-open position. Verify that normally closed valves are closed.
3.
Check pumps' rotations and check operation of automatic valves.
4.
Set automatic controls so all coils are calling for:
a.
Full cooling: when balancing chilled water coils.
b.
Full heating: when balancing hot water coils.
c.
When balancing heat recovery coils, set for either heating or cooling or make settings
for both conditions.
5.
Check and set operating temperatures to design requirements for boilers, heat exchangers,
chillers, cooling towers (and others as required).
6.
Check and set operating temperatures of secondary and primary systems. Accomplish
complete air balance before actual water balance begins.
7.
Submit written verification that items listed above have been completed.
Page 159/374

C.
Initial adjustments: Set chilled water, condenser water and hot water pumps to proper lpm (liter/min)
delivery. Adjust water flow through boilers, heat exchangers, chillers, cooling towers (and others as
required).
1.
Check leaving water temperatures and return water temperatures through chillers, boilers, heat
exchangers, cooling towers (and others as required).
2.
Check water temperature at inlet side of cooling and heating coils. Note rise or drop of
temperature from source.
3.
Proceed to balance each chilled and hot water coil. Upon completion of flow reading and
adjustments at coils, mark all settings and record all data.
4.
Proceed in same way to balance run-around heat recovery system.
D.
Refrigeration machines:
1.
Verify flow rates through chiller and condenser using metering device compatible with venturi
flow units provided. Take the following readings for each machine.
a.
Inlet and outlet chilled and condenser water temperatures.
b.
Inlet and outlet chilled and condenser water pressures.
c.
Chilled and condenser water L/S.
d.
Evaporator temperature and pressure.
e.
Condensing temperature and pressure.
E.
Provide detailed balance upon completion of preparation and adjustments and proceed as follows:
after adjustments to coils are made, recheck and readjust as required settings at pumps, boilers, heat
exchangers and chillers.
1.
Record and check the following items:
a.
Inlet water temperature to coils.
b.
Leaving water temperature
c.
Pressure drop (each coil in multiple coil banks).
d.
Each pump operating suction and discharge head.
e.
List mechanical specifications of pumps.
f.
Rated and actual running amperage of pump motor.
F.
Final tabulation: perform operational test including all component quantities (L/S), systems of air
conditioning system in the presence of Employers representative. After balancing air conditioning
components, put entire system into operation. Record all pressures, temperatures, water flows,
velocities, etc. Check recorded data against design schedules. Include approved test reports in
"Operating Instructions" and submit as specified under Section GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING WORK.
3.3
CONTROL COORDINATION
A.
Cooperate with automatic control installer and equipment installer in making adjustments to following
items as required to accomplish indicated performance, including terminal air boxes, air valves, fan
inlet vanes and adjustable and controllable pitch fan blades.
Page 160/374

SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
Piping.
2.
Ductwork, casings, plenums and housing.
3.
Equipment.
B.
Non-insulated piping, ductwork and equipment are listed under Applications.
C.
Definitions:
1.
Exposed: indoor ducts, piping or equipment located in mechanical equipment rooms and in
areas which will be visible without removing ceilings or opening access panels.
2.
Concealed: indoor ducts, piping or equipment which is not exposed.
3.
Outdoor: ducts, piping or equipment which is exposed to the weather.
4.
Underground: ducts, piping or equipment which are buried, whereas ducts, piping or equipment
located in a trench below grade is considered concealed.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Requirements of Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK SECTION apply to all
B.

1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.

B.
Comply with all applicable codes and refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC
WORK for additional Reference Standards.
C.
section.
1.
2.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All insulation materials, including jackets, facings, adhesives, coatings, and accessories, shall be fire
hazard. Flameproofing treatments which are subject to deterioration from moisture or humidity are not
acceptable.
Page 161/374

B.
1.5
Refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK for Guarantee and other
A.
Submit shop drawings for insulation materials, vapor barrier materials, adhesives, fastening devices
and finishes and jacketing.
B.
Submit a schedule listing the work that will be insulated and a description of insulation materials and
finishing procedures and a certificate indicating compliance with code.
1.6

A.
B.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
representative.
1.
Foamed Rubber.
2.
Fiberglass insulation.
3.
Finishes, adhesive and sealants.
4.
Weld pins.
5.
Weatherproof aluminum jacket.
6.
Insulating & finishing cement.
7.
Insulating tapes.
PIPE INSULATION
A.
2.3
Chilled water : Foamed rubber insulation, thickness 25t
DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A.
Foamed rubber insulation, thickness 19t.
Page 162/374

2.4
WIRE, BANDING AND FASTENING DEVICES

A.
The wire shall be a minimum 1.6 mm (No.16 gauge) copper clad annealed steel wire. The bands shall
be 19 mm (3/4 inch) nominal width with wing seals, of minimum thickness as follows:
1.
Aluminum: 0.18mm ( where exposed to weather, 0.5 mm).
2.
Galvanized steel: 0.13 mm.
3.
Stainless steel: 0.13 mm.
B.
The staples shall be the outward clinching type of corrosion resistant steel. The weld pins which
support and fasten the duct insulation shall be a minimum 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter with speed
washer or integral flange of minimum 35 mm (1-3/8 inch) diameter. The metal lathe shall consist of
galvanized steel.
C.
Insulation tape: the tape shall be UL rated with all service or foil-scrim jacket to match insulation and of
width as noted.
2.5
PIPING, VALVES AND FITTING

A.
Insulation schedule: for foamed rubber cellular insulation.
B.
Non-insulated piping shall be gas, non-heated fuel oil, condenser water, except as noted otherwise,
and pneumatic control air.
2.6
DUCTWORK
A.
Insulate ductwork in the following systems:

1.
All air conditioning supply.
2.
Air conditioning return, except ductwork exposed in airconditioned spaces, and ductwork
installed in hung ceiling where spaces immediately above and below are both air-conditioned.
3.
Heating and ventilation system supply, except ductwork exposed in heated spaces.
4.
Outdoor heating and ventilating system return.
5.
Exhaust air ductwork between automatic dampers and louvers, outdoor air intake duct from
louvers to air-handling unit, outside air-intake duct from plenum to air-handling unit, kitchen
range hood exhaust systems, exhaust duct passing through airconditioned spaces, wet
exhaust duct passing through airconditioned space, and any system when temperature may
exceed 29 deg C (85 deg F).
B.
Thickness shall be 19 mm. Insulation is not required where sound-lining is of minimum thickness
specified for insulation.
2.7
PLENUMS, HOUSINGS AND CASINGS

A.
Insulate plenums, housings and casings in the following systems:

1.
Air-conditioning systems supply and return.
2.
Heating and ventilation system supply.
3.
Outside air intake: all systems.
4.
Mixing plenums: all systems.
5.
Exhaust ductwork between dampers and louvers.
6.
All humidifier housings.
B.
Insulation is not required where sound-lining is of minimum thickness specified for insulation.
2.8
FIREPROOF DUCTWORK
A.
Systems: ductwork acting as an integral part of two (2) hour rated fire partition, and duct sleeve
connecting two (2) hour fire rated partition and fire damper, where fire damper cannot be mounted on
wall and ductwork as noted.
Page 163/374

2.9
FANS
A.
2.10
A.
Insulate air-conditioning supply and return fans located in non-airconditioned spaces, except nonducted double width, double inlet fans and fans located inside insulated casings, kitchen range hood
exhaust fans and fans handling unheated outdoor air.
EQUIPMENT - CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS

Insulate chilled water pumps, chilled water heat exchangers, water chillers, portions of refrigeration
unit recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: before applying insulation, complete and approve the required pressure and leakage tests of
joints and connections. In addition, clean surfaces of dust, grease and foreign matter and dry before
application of insulation. Insulation shall not be installed on pipe and black metal until the surface has
received a prime coat of paint. All insulation joints shall be butted firmly together and all jackets shall
be smoothly and securely installed. Insulate each pipe and duct individually. Do not use scrap pieces
of insulation where a full length section will fit. Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified
equipment, piping and duct systems.
Page 164/374

SECTION 230900- INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work in this Section includes the providing of labor, materials, equipment and
services necessary for a complete and safe installation in accordance with the contract
documents and all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction for the
following:
1.
Instrumentation.
2.
Controls.
B.
Contractor shall provide.

1.
A fully integrated HVAC control system, incorporating direct digital control
(DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring, and HVAC control.
2.
Electronic sensors.
3.
Actuators of terminal equipment valves and dampers shall be electric. All

sensors shall be electric/electronic.
4.
Actuators for valves and dampers located within the MFRs shall be electric.
5.
All line voltage and low voltage wiring, conduit, panels, and accessories for a
complete operational system. All final electrical connections to each standalone DDC controller.
6.
Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical work associated with the
HVAC control system and as shown in the contract documents.
7.
Contractor shall furnish all wells for water monitoring devices, flow switches,
and alarms.
8.
A complete operational system including all work required for a completely

operational system as defined in the entire set of drawings and specifications,
including but not limited to associated specifications for mechanical and
electrical work, all contract drawings, HVAC control system Point List, and
remote function schedule.
9.
The HVAC control system as a whole shall have the capability to be easily
expanded through the addition of point modules and/or controllers. No
equipment shall be installed which cannot, as installed, accommodate an
upgrade the entire system by at least 20%. A 20% system upgrade shall include
20% more points (of each type) either via point modules or controllers and 20%
more memory capacity for future connections.
10.
Provide appropriate labor jurisdiction to mount, wire and pipe airflow

measuring stations in the field. Provide manpower as required to meet project
schedule
Page 165/374

1.2
C.
The work of this Section shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the
associated work of other trades.
D.
The work of this Section shall be as required by the Specifications, Point Schedules
and Drawings.
E.
If the Contractor believes there are conflicts or missing information in the project
documents, the Contractor shall promptly request clarification and instruction from
the design team.

A.
1.3
1.4
Related documents
1.
Requirements in the Contract Document - Chapter II: Employers requirements
shall apply to all work in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS.

A.
Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment.
B.
Typical details, where shown on the drawings, apply to each and every item of the
project where such items are applicable. Typical details are not repeated in full on the
plans, and are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be
incorporated in full.
C.
If any part of Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, consult the

Engineer for interpretation and decision as early as possible during bidding period. Do
not proceed with work without Employers representatives decision.
A.
Equivalent Vietnam Standards (VS) can be substituted for foreign standards specified
in this section.
1.
judgments and decrees of Vietnam and any government authority having
jurisdiction over the contractors business or property (the Laws).
2.
B.
1.5
In case that any standard or reference not applicable in the Laws is required by
the specification, the contractor shall be deemed to provide with services least
All supplies and services offered in response to this specification shall be based on the
latest standards.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General
1.
All equipment and accessories shall be the product of manufacturers regularly
engaged in their manufacture. All items of a given type shall be the products of
the same manufacturer.
2.
Page 166/374

B.
3.
All electrical equipment shall be compliant with applicable standards.
4.
Supply all equipment and accessories in complete compliance with and in

accordance with the applicable standards listed in reference standards of this
Section and with all applicable codes.
Definitions
1.
Furnish or provide: to supply, install, and make complete, safe, and
operable, the particular work referred to unless specifically indicated otherwise.
Furnish or provide: to supply, install, and make complete, safe, and
operable, the particular work referred to unless specifically indicated otherwise.
2.
Install: to erect, mount, and make complete with all related accessories.
3.
Supply: to purchase, procure, acquire, and deliver complete with related

accessories.
4.
Work: includes labor, materials, equipment, services, and all related

accessories necessary for the proper and complete installation of complete
systems.
5.
Wiring: includes raceway, fittings, wire, boxes, and all related accessories.
6.
Concealed: not in view, installed in masonry or other construction, within

furred spaces, double partitions, hung ceilings, trenches, crawl spaces, or
enclosures.
7.
Exposed: in view, not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.
8.
Indicated, shown, or noted : as indicated, shown, or noted on drawings or

specifications.
9.
Similar or equal : of base bid manufacturer, equal in quality, materials,

weight, size, performance, design, and efficiency of specified product,
conforming with "Base Bid Manufacturers.
10.
Reviewed, satisfactory, accepted, or directed : as reviewed, satisfactory,

accepted, or directed by or to Employers Representative.
11.
Provide: The term Provide and its derivatives when used in this Section shall
mean to furnish, install in place, connect, calibrate, test, commission, warrant,
document and supply the associated required services ready for operation.
12.
Analog : A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels.

Typically exists within a defined range of limiting values.
13.
Binary : A two-state system where an ON condition is represented by one

discrete signal level and an OFF condition is represented by a second discrete
signal level.
14.
Contractor : The single Contractor to provide the work of this Section. This
Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer, installer, commissioner and
ongoing service provider for the HVAC control work.
Page 167/374

15.
Control Sequence : An pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms,

logical computation, target values and limits as required to attain the defined
operational HVAC control objectives.
16.
Direct Digital Control : The digital algorithms and pre-defined arrangements

included in the HVAC control software to provide direct closed-loop control
for the designated equipment and controlled variables. Inclusive of
Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms together with target
values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values, timing
considerations and the like.
17.
Network : The total digital on-line real-time interconnected configuration of

digital processing units, workstations, panels, sub-panels, controllers, devices
and associated elements individually known as network nodes. May exist as
one or more fully interfaced and integrated sub-networks, LAN, WAN or the
like.
18.
Node : A digitally programmable entity existing on the network.
19.
Integration : The complete functional and operational interconnection and

interfacing of all control work elements and nodes in compliance with all
applicable codes, standards and ordinances so as to provide a single coherent
control system as required by this Section.
20.
PC : IBM-compatible Personal Computer from a recognized major

manufacturer
21.
Protocol : The term protocol and its derivatives when used in this Section
shall mean a defined set of rules and standards governing the on-line exchange
of data between network nodes.
22.
Software : The term software and its derivatives when used in this Section
shall mean all of programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed
firmware and project specific digital process programming and database entries
and definitions as generally understood.
23.
The use of words in the singular in these Section documents shall not be
considered as limiting when other indications in these documents denote that
more than one such item is being referenced.
24.
Headings, paragraph numbers, titles, shading, bolding, underscores, clouds and

other symbolic interpretation aids included in the Section documents are for
general information only and are to assist in the reading and interpretation of
these Documents.
25.
The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work
of this Section:
a.
AI - Analog Input
b.
AN - Application Node
c.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
d.
AO - Analog Output
e.
ASCII - American Standard Code for Information interchange
f.
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers
g.
AWG - American Wire Gauge
Page 168/374

h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
CPU - Central Processing Unit

DDC - Direct Digital Control
DI - Digital Input
DO - Digital Output
EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory
m.
EMI - Electromagnetic Interference
n.
FAS - Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation
System
o.
GUI - Graphical User Interface
p.
HOA - Hand-Off-Auto
q.
ID - Identification
r.
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
s.
I/O - Input/Output
t.
LAN - Local Area Network
u.
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
v.
LED - Light Emitting Diode
w.
MCC - Motor Control Center
x.
NC - Normally Closed
y.
NO - Normally Open
z.
OWS - Operator Workstation
aa. PC - Personal Computer
bb. RAM - Random Access Memory
cc. RH - Relative Humidity
dd. ROM - Read Only Memory
ee. RTD - Resistance Temperature Device
ff.
SPDT - Single Pole Double Throw
gg. SPST - Single Pole Single Throw
hh. XVGA - Extended Video Graphics Adapter
ii.
TCP/IP - Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
jj.
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply
kk. VAC - Volts, Alternating Current
ll.
VDC - Volts, Direct Current
mm. WAN - Wide Area Network
C.
1.6
Job conditions
1.
Inspection of Site Conditions:
Before starting work, visit the site and examine the conditions under which the
work has to be performed. Report in writing any conditions which might
adversely affect the work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings, coordination service drawings (CSD), product data, samples
and certificates of compliance required by contract documents.
B.

1.
Provide five sets of manufacturers' equipment brochures and service manuals
consisting of the following:
a.
b.
Model number and performance data..
c.
d.
e.
Recommended spare parts lists.
Page 169/374

2.
3.
4.
C.
1.7
Assemble manufacturers equipment manuals in chronological order following

the specifications numbering system using heavy duty three ring binders.
Submit three sets of field test reports including instrument set points and
normal operating valves.
At a minimum, submit the following:

1.
HVAC control system network architecture diagrams.
2.
Systems schematics, sequences and flow diagrams.
3.
Points schedule for each point in the HVAC control system.
4.
Samples of Graphic Display screen types and associated menus.
5.
Detailed Bill of Material list for each system or application, identifying
quantities, part numbers, descriptions, and optional features.
6.
Control Valve Schedules including a separate line for each valve provided
under this section and a column for each of the valve attributes: Code Number,
Pipe Size, Valve Size and Valve CV.
7.
Product data sheets or marked catalog pages including part number, photo and
description for all products including software.
1.8
A.
Ship materials and equipment in crated sections of sizes to permit passing through
available space, where required.
B.
Receive and accept materials and equipment at the site, properly handle, house, and
protect them from damage and the weather until installation. Replace equipment
damaged in the course of handling without additional charge.
C.
Arrange for and provide storage space or area at the job site for all materials and
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Contract documents.
1.9
SPARE PARTS
A.
Page 170/374

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer-owned branch office that is

regularly engaged in the engineering, programming, installation and service of total
integrated HVAC systems.
B.
The Contractor shall be a recognized national manufacturer, installer and service

provider of HVAC control system.
C.
As evidence and assurance of the contractors ability to support the Employer's

system with service and parts, the contractor must have been in the HVAC control
system business in the interface region for at least the last ten (10) years and have
successfully completed total projects of at least 10 times the value of this contract in
each of the preceding five years.
D.
The HVAC control system architecture shall consist of the products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the production of HVAC control systems, and shall be the
manufacturers latest standard of design at the time of bid.
HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A.
Automation Network
1.
The automation network shall be based on a PC industry standard of Ethernet
TCP/IP. Where used, LAN controller cards shall be standard off the shelf
products available through normal PC vendor channels.
2.
The HVAC control system shall network multiple user interface clients,
automation engines, system controllers and application-specific controllers.
Provide application and data server as required for systems operation.
3.
The automation network shall be capable of operating at a communication
speed of 100 Mbps, with full peer-to-peer network communication.
4.
MEGA-B CPU shall reside on the automation network.
5.
The automation network will be compatible with other enterprise-wide
networks. Where indicated, the automation network shall be connected to the
enterprise network and share resources with it by way of standard networking
devices and practices.
B.
Control Network
1.
MEGA-B CPU module shall provide supervisory control over the control
network and shall support of the following communication protocols:
a.
BACnet/IP Protocol ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004 ANNEX J
1)
MEGA-B CPU module shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL)
certified and carry the BTL Label.
2)
BACnet/IP shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Advanced
Application Controller(B-AAC).
b.
I/O module control network Local Bus.
2.
I/O control networks shall provide Master-Slave, communications, and shall
operate at a minimum communication speed of 62500 baud.
3.
DDC Controllers shall reside on the control network.
4.
CPU control network communication protocol shall be BACnet/IP Protocol
ANSI/ASHRAE135-2004, ANNEX J.
Page 171/374

C.
2.3
Integration
1.
Hardwired
a.
Analog and digital signal values shall be passed from one system to
another via hardwired connections.
b.
There will be one separate physical point on each system for each point
to be integrated between the systems.
INPUT DEVICES
A.
General Information
1.
Optimal temperature and humidity levels are a basic requirement for creating a
pleasant indoor environment. This adds vitality and contributes greatly to
productivity and work efficiency.
2.
In congested urban cities, it is reported that about 80% of diseases are caused
by viruses and fungi inhaled while breathing. (Optimal indoor humidity - 40 ~
50% RH). As demands to maintain optimal temperature and humidity in the
office, dwelling area, workshops increase, higher quality products are being
produced. Our temperature and humidity sensors and controllers provide the
most accurate temperature and humidity control since they are directly
connected to the DDC. These controllers are extremely reliable and of the
highest quality. They have passed tests set by official authorization agencies.
3.
These products provide flexibility that allows you to control a wide range of
environments such as office buildings, factories and air handling equipments.
The controller is an economical and high-tech product developed and
manufactured through internal technology.
B.
Temperature Sensor
1.
Provides you with a wide range of functions according to the installation
environment - indoor type, outdoor type, duct type and pipe type.
2.
All sensors are equipped with the Pt100/Pt1000 - high-quality RTD. They
detect indoor / outdoor temperature a fluid temperature in pipe or container
quickly and accurately, while providing reliability in the long run. Temperature
sensors developed with outstanding engineering technology provide excellent
processing time and accuracy. It takes 10.7 seconds to detect air temperature
within 0.2 (allowable error range), and 4 to 6 seconds for duct and pipe
sensors.
3.
They fit easily into any location owing to their simple and neat appearance
allowing ordinary users to easily attach and detach the sensors.
a.
Range of the temperature sensor
1)
Indoor type
:
-30 ~ 130
2)
Outdoor type
:
-50 ~ 150
3)
Duct type
:
-30 ~ 120
4)
General piping type :
-30 ~ 120
C.
Temperature and Humidity Transmitter

1.
Transmits the control information detected by the sensor to the DDC promptly
in a standard currency value.
2.
Energy saving products : The Temperature and Humidity Transmitter saves
energy by detecting and adjusting the temperature and humidity quickly and
accurately. Additionally, the temperature range can be adjusted according to the
installation environment.
a.
Indoor type : 0 ~ 50
b.
Outdoor type : -30 ~ 70
c.
Duct type : 0 ~ 100
Page 172/374

3.
4.
2.4
Comprehensive compatibility : The transmitter is designed to output

temperature and relative humidity values detected by resistance temperature
detector element (Pt100/Pt1000) and capacitive relative humidity detector (Gcap/Minicap2) as 4~20mA standard current. Relative humidity can be detected
between 0 - 100%. The outdoor and duct type transmitters automatically
recovers their function even when dew forms.
Cost-effectiveness : The transmitter can be installed and operated economically
since the temperature transmitter and humidity transmitter can be detached
according to their required purpose. Installation is simple enough, just refer to
the instruction manual.
OUTPUT DEVICES
A.
Actuators
1.
General Requirements
a.
Damper and valve actuators shall be electronic, as specified in the
System Description section.
2.
Electronic Damper Actuators

a.
Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount.
b.
Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by
the sequence of operations. Damper sections shall be sized Based on
actuator manufacturers recommendations for face velocity, differential
pressure and damper type. The actuator mounting arrangement feature
shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers,
as required. All actuators shall have a gear release to allow manual
positioning.
c.
Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC power supply, consume no
more than 5 VA. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC and the actuator
shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 4-20mA. The feedback
signal shall be independent of the input signal and may be used to
parallel other actuators and provide true position indication.
d.
Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 VAC power
supply. Isolation, smoke, exhaust fan, and other dampers, as specified in
the sequence of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end
switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop
associated fan.
3.
Electronic Valve Actuators

a.
Electronic valve actuators shall be manufactured by the valve
manufacturer.
b.
Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry incorporated in its
design to prevent damage to the actuator.
c.
Modulating actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence of
operations. Actuators shall provide the minimum torque required for
proper valve close-off against the system pressure for the required
application. The valve actuator shall be sized Based on valve
manufacturers recommendations for flow and pressure differential.
d.
Modulating Actuators shall accept 24 VAC power supply. The control
signal shall be 2-10 VDC and the actuator shall provide a clamp position
feedback signal of 4-20 mA. The feedback signal shall be independent of
the input signal, and may be used to parallel other actuators and provide
true position indication. The feedback signal of each valve actuator
Page 173/374

(except terminal valves) shall be wired back to a terminal strip in the
control panel for trouble-shooting purposes.
B.
2.5
Control Valves
1.
All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning and provide near
linear heat transfer control. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe
open, closed, or in their last position. All valves shall operate in sequence with
another valve when required by the sequence of operations. All control valves
shall be sized by the control manufacturer, and shall be guaranteed to meet the
heating and cooling loads, as specified. All control valves shall be suitable for
the system flow conditions and close against the differential pressures involved.
Body pressure rating and connection type (screwed, or flanged) shall conform
to the pipe schedule elsewhere in this Specification.
2.
Chilled water control valves shall be modulating plug, as required by the

specific application. Modulating water valves shall be sized per manufacturers
recommendations for the given application. In general, valves (2 or 3-way)
serving variable flow air handling unit coils shall be sized for a pressure drop
equal to the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 2 PSI. Valves (3-way)
serving constant flow air handling unit coils with secondary circuit pumps shall
be sized for a pressure drop equal to 25% the actual coil pressure drop, but no
less than 2 PSI. Mixing valves (3-way) serving secondary water circuits shall
be sized for a pressure drop of no less than 2 PSI.
3.
Modulating plug water valves of the single-seat type with equal percentage
flow or linear flow characteristics shall be used for all special applications as
indicated on the valve schedule. Valve stems shall be stainless steel.
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A.
B.
Local Control Panels

1.
All control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the HVAC control
system manufacturers standard designs and layouts. Control panels shall be
fully enclosed, with perforated sub-panel, hinged door, and slotted flush latch.
2.
In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display
module as specified and indicated on the plans, and I/O devicessuch as
relays, transducers, and so forththat are not required to be located external to
the control panel due to function. Where specified the display module shall be
flush mounted in the panel face unless otherwise noted.
3.
All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or
fixed screw terminals.
4.
Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. 300-volt service and provide
adequate clearance for field wiring.
5.
All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped.
6.
A convenience 20 VAC duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure,

fused on/off power switch, and required transformers.
Power Supplies
Page 174/374

2.6
1.
DC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total rated
load shall not exceed 75% of the rated capacity of the power supply.
2.
Input: 220 VAC +10%, 50Hz.
3.
Output: 24 VDC.
4.
Line Regulation: +0.05% for 10% line change.
5.
Load Regulation: +0.05% for 50% load change.
6.
Ripple and Noise: 1 mV rms, 5 mV peak to peak.
7.
An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next
to the power supply.
8.
A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply.
SPECIAL TOOLS
A.
Provide one(1) set of any special tools required to operate, adjust, dismantle or repair
equipment furnished under this Section for the Employer's use at the completion of
work. (If required).
B.
Provide one suitable tool case for special tools. (If required)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
GENERAL
A.
Accessibility
1.
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,
maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Minor deviations from the
drawings may be made to accomplish this, but changes of substantial
magnitude shall not be made without written approval.
B.
Field quality control

1.
Perform tests, as noted, and in the presence of Employers representative and
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Provide required labor, material, equipment, and connections necessary for

tests and submit results for review.
3.
Repair or replace defective work and pay for restoring or replacing damaged
work due to tests, as directed. Installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
HVAC control system Wiring

1.
All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the
installation of the HVAC control system, as herein specified, shall be provided
Page 175/374

by the HVAC control system Contractor unless specifically shown on the
Electrical Drawings under Division 16 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with
the requirements of applicable portions of Division 16 and all local and national
electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.
B.
2.
All HVAC control system wiring materials and installation methods shall
comply with HVAC control system manufacturer recommendations.
3.
The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall
be the design responsibility of the HVAC control system Contractor. If
complications arise, however, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable
trays, raceways and/or conduit by the HVAC control system Contractor, the
Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected
components.
4.
Class 2 Wiring
a.
All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless
otherwise specified.
b.
Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible
locations. Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every
5 from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this
application. Wiring shall be installed parallel to the building structural
lines. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local code
requirements.
5.
Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power
wiring 220VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal
wiring.
6.
Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications

cables, panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation.
Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.
HVAC control system Line Voltage Power Source

1.
220-volt AC circuits used for the HVAC control system shall be taken from
panel boards and circuit breakers provided by Division 16.
2.
C.
Circuits used for the HVAC control system shall be dedicated to the HVAC
control system and shall not be used for any other purposes.
HVAC control system Raceway

1.
All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in
this specification.
2.
Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface

raceway (Wire mold) may be used as approved by the Engineer.
3.
All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the
building lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are
attached.
4.
Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited
to 3 feet in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal
Conduit may be used within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be
compliant with appropriate standards.
Page 176/374

D.
Penetrations
1.
Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated HVAC control
system conduits and raceways.
2.
All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by

using approved fire resistive sealant.
3.
All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or

enclosed raceway.
4.
Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be

plumb, true, and square. .
E.
HVAC control system Identification Standards

1.
Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label
fastened to the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location. Cable
types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and
troubleshooting.
F.
HVAC control system Panel Installation

1.
The HVAC control system panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at
an elevation of not less than 2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the
finished floor. Each cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturers
recommendations.
2.
G.
H.
The HVAC control system contractor shall be responsible for coordinating

panel locations with other trades and electrical and mechanical contractors.
HVAC Input Devices

1.
Genera1
a.
All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer
recommendation.
b.
The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as
temperature wells, pressure taps, airflow stations, etc.
c.
Input Flow Measuring Devices shall be installed in strict compliance
with ASME guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions.
2.
Duct Temperature Sensors:

a.
Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the
duct and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or
replacement.
b.
The sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete
assembly including lock nut and mounting plate.
c.
For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches or where air
temperature stratification exists such as a mixed air plenum, utilize an
averaging sensor.
d.
The sensor shall be mounted to suitable supports using factory approved
element holders.
3.
Air Differential Pressure Status Switches:

a.
Switches install with static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air filter.
HVAC Output Devices

1.
General
Page 177/374

a.
3.3
3.4
2.
Actuators
a.
All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the
maximum system shut-off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a
smooth fashion through the entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator
is sequenced with another device, pilot positioners shall be installed to
allow for proper sequencing.
3.
Control Valves
a.
Valve shall be sized for proper flow control with equal percentage valve
plugs. The maximum pressure drop for water applications shall be 5
PSI. The maximum pressure drop for steam applications shall be 7 PSI.
TEST AND COMMISSIONING

A.
Fully commission all aspects of the HVAC control system work.
B.
Acceptance Check Sheet

1.
Prepare a check sheet that includes all points for all functions of the HVAC
control system as indicated on the point list included in this specification.
2.
Submit the check sheet to the Engineer for approval
3.
The Engineer will use the check sheet as the basis for acceptance with the
HVAC control system Contractor.
A.
3.5
All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturers

recommendation. The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line
devices such as control valves, dampers, airflow stations, pressure wells,
etc.
Protect from damage, water, dust, etc., material, equipment and apparatus provided
under this trade, both in storage and installed.
CLEANING
A.
Brush and clean work prior to concealing, painting and acceptance. Perform in stages
if directed.
B.
Clean and repair painted exposed work, soiled or damaged, to match adjoining work
before final acceptance.
C.
Remove debris from inside and outside of material and equipment.
Page 178/374

SECTION 231900 SYSTEM AC

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Specifications here with apply to Variable Refrigerant Volum Air Conditioner

System.
B.
OUTLINE
1.
Unit shall be air-cooled, multi split type air-conditioner consisting of one
outdoor and multiple indoor units, each having capability of working
independently.
2.
In case of Ceiling concealed Duct type is consist of several capacity.
3.
The units shall be factory assembled and charged with R-410a. Both Indoor and
Outdoor units to be manufactured in the factory and tested under strict quality
control to ensure compatibility of indoor with outdoor unit, reliability of
operation and performance as stated in the manufacturers catalogue.
C.
SCOPE OF SUPPLY
1.
Equipment installation work : Indoor and Outdoor units delivery and
installation
2.
Work of Outdoor unit room
a.
Outdoor unit and air guide installation
b.
Outdoor units foundation frame installation with lubber type antivibration pad.
c.
Covering exposed air conditioners pipe.(Including of the refrigeration,
condensate pipe and wiring of the conduit pipe)
3.
Piping work : Refrigerant pipe and Condensate pipe
4.
Ceiling mounted ductwork and diffuser installation
5.
Power and control piping and wiring work
a.
Telecommunication piping and wring work from outdoor unit to indoor
unit
b.
Wire Remote Controller unit piping and wring work
c.
Including Wireless remote controller For Residence
6.
Miscellaneous
a.
Items which are mentioned on special condition of estimation should be
included.
b.
If cost effects such as factory inspection, test, report permission and so
on are occur, the costs should be included.
7.
Testing, Adjusting and Balance
a.
After all testing, adjusting and evaluating, overall report should be
submitted, and approved from Employer.
b.
If design and construction are inadequate, it should be notified to
Employer in advance and followed to the policy.
8.
Simulation
a.
After contract, CFD report submission within 2month
b.
Solving problems by CFD analysis
c.
Comments related to other parts
9.
OPERATING RANGE
Page 179/374

10.
1.2
1.3
The air conditioner shall be operated continuously at the ambient temperature

of :
-5C~+43C in cooling & heating mode.
A.
Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry

or governmental organizations apply to applicable work in all sections as noted
below.
B.
Standard of production, installation and safety of Air Conditioner should be

conformed to KS, JIS, UL, ASTM, ARI or equivalent.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All equipment and accessories shall be the product of manufacturers regularly

engaged in their manufacture.
B.
C.
Supply all equipment and accessories in accordance with the applicable standards
listed in Article 1.2 of this Section and with all applicable building codes.
D.
Inspection of Site Conditions

1.
Before starting work, visit the site and examine the conditions under which the
work has to be performed. Report in writing any conditions which might
adversely affect the work and do not proceed with the work until defects have
been corrected and conditions are satisfactory.
E.
Special Traffic Requirements:

1.
Maintain emergency and service entrances so they are usable for pedestrian,
truck, and ambulance traffic at all times.
2.
Where trenches are cut, provide adequate bridging for abovementioned traffic.
F.
Coordinate with other trades, all clips, hangers, clamps, supports, and other
attachments to the fire rated structure in order to avoid any damage to the
fireproofing.
G.
Install all items which would interfere with the proper application of fireproofing after
the application of fireproofing work.
H.
Provide all carpentry, cutting and patching required for proper installation of material
and equipment specified. Do not cut or drill structural members without consent of
Architect and Structural Engineer.
I.
Arrange work to conform to schedule of construction established or required to

comply with contract documents.
J.
In scheduling, anticipate means of installing equipment through available openings in

structure.
K.
Work delays: If work interferes with Employers operations, Employer may require
work to be stopped and performed at some other time, or after normal working hours.
But Lost time and overtime should worked on full responsibility by subtract.
Page 180/374

1.4
1.5
L.
Work may be reviewed at any time by Employers representative.
M.
Advise Employers representative that work is ready for review at the following
times:
1.
Prior to backfilling buried work.
2.
Prior to concealment of work in walls and above ceilings.
3.
When all requirements of Contract have been completed.
N.
Do not backfill or conceal work without consent from Employers representative.
O.
Maintain on site, one set of Specifications and Drawings for use by Employers
representative.
P.
Refrigerant pipe in public facilities needs to install name tags on the important parts
for maintenance.
A.
Submit shop drawings, Coordination Service Drawings (CSD), product data, samples
and certificates of compliance required by contract documents.
B.

1.
Before requesting acceptance of work, submit one set for review by Employers
representative.
2.
After review provide five sets of manufacturers' equipment brochures and
service manuals consisting of the following:
a.
b.
Model number and performance data.
c.
d.
e.
Recommended spare parts.
3.
Assemble manufacturers equipment manuals in chronological order following
the specifications numbering system using heavy duty, three ring binders.
4.
5.
Submit sets of field test reports.

A.
Ship materials and equipment in crated sections, and in sizes that are sufficiently
small to permit passing through available space, where required.
B.
Receive and accept materials and equipment at the site; properly handle, house, and
protect them from damage and the weather until installation. Replace equipment
damaged in the course of handling without additional charge.
C.
D.
Protect from damage, water, dust, etc., material, equipment and apparatus provided
under this trade, both in storage and installed, until Notice of Completion has been
filed and accepted.
Page 181/374

E.
Provide temporary storage facilities for material and equipment.
F.
Arrange with Employers representative for storage facilities for materials and
equipment.
G.
Material, equipment or apparatus damaged because of improper storage or protection

will be rejected.
H.
Remove from site and provide new, duplicate, material, equipment, or apparatus in
replacement of that rejected.
I.
Cover motors and other equipment to protect from dirt and water during construction.
J.
Cover fixtures with protective housings.
K.
Protect premise and work or other trades from damage arising out of installation or
work of this trade.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance,
and repair are readily accessible. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to
accomplish this, but changes of substantial magnitude shall not be made without
written approval.
B.
Group concealed valves, controls, and equipment requiring access, so as to be freely

accessible through access doors.
OUTDOOR UNIT
A.
General
1.
Module Multi Air Conditioner
2.
Shall various number and type of indoor units can access to outdoor units with
independent capacity control. (Valid access of indoor units can be differed by
outdoor unit types)
Variable capacity control
3.
Capacity shall be adjusted by compressor to control an optimum amount of

refrigerant to the number of operating indoor units and indoor temperature.
Free joint function
4.
Capacity selection of indoor units shall be flexible to each of outdoor unit type,
quantities and to the outdoor units capacity.
Single piping system
5.
Refrigerant piping shall be single piping connection between outdoor and

indoor unit with various number of indoor unit connection with Y branch
method.
Refrigerant balancing function
Page 182/374

6.
Electric expansion valve shall be installed inside the indoor unit or located in
between of indoor unit and outdoor unit, to control the amount of refrigerant to
keep each indoor units capacity equalized while a difference of pipe length.
Oil balancing function
7.
Oil balancing function shall be operate between each compressor and each
module outdoor units to guarantee outdoor units reliability while there are
elevation differences between outdoor units.
Pipe Length Extension
Following piping length extension is required to minimize decrease of outdoor
units capacity:
a.
Ceiling cassette type(In unit area)
1)
Total piping length: 180m or above
2)
Outdoor unit to the last indoor unit: 100m or above
3)
Elevation between indoor units: 15m or above
b.
Ceiling concealed Duct type & others(In common area)
1)
Total piping length: 1,000m or above
2)
Elevation between outdoor and indoor units: 50m or above
3)
Outdoor unit to the last indoor unit: 200m or above
8.
9.
10.
11.
Side discharge type shall be a side discharge type to prevent any decrease of
outdoor units capacity in case of adverse wind. But common area will be able
to install the top discharge type.
Indoor units shall be consisted of reusable filter with detachable interior panel.
Outdoor unit shall be capable of connecting to various types of indoor units.
Control System
Air Conditioning unit (Outdoor & Indoor) shall be capable of independent and
centralized control.
B.
Component Constitution
1.
Shall consist of heat exchanger, compressor, fan, PCB, receiver, accumulator,
valve, sensors and etc.
2.
Shall be completely factory manufactured, piped, wired and run tested before
delivery.
3.
Main Component Material and Performance
a.
Cabinet: shall be pressed material, least thickness of 0.6 ~ 2.0 mm of
SECCP (zinc electrolytic coated iron plate), are anti-corrosive and round
shape/size/thickness standard are as per KSD3512 or equivalent
b.
Heat Exchanger:
1)
Pipe shall be phosphorus deoxidized copper pipe (KSD 5301)
more than purity 99.9% and tolerance of size and tension standard
as per KSD 5522 or equivalent
2)
Fin shall be antibacterial fin with thickness of 0.11 or above and
silver purity must be over 99.5%.
3)
Pitch of fin shall be evenly located in between of 1.4~2.0 mm.
4)
Must endure internal pressure of 63 kg-f/cm2 G and external
pressure of 42 kg-f/cm2 G for to prevent deformation and leakage.
c.
Fan & motor
1)
Shall be a propeller type, capable to supply enough air volume
with 3~4 blade propeller fan with high air-volume and low noise
level.
Page 183/374

2)
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.3
Shall be robust designed to hold enough strength and

statically/dynamically balanced in full range when 0~100% speed
rotation.
3)
Motor shall be equipped with inverter motor; capable of varying
speed as per required load and drive train shall be motor - fan
direct-coupled
Compressor
1)
Compressor range from 6% ~ 130%.
2)
Compressor shall be self protected from over current and over load
or capacity.
3)
Compressor to be covered with an acoustic lining jacket to further
reduce noise level as per manufacturer standards. Each compressor
shall have reverse phase and phase failure protection.
Noise Level
1)
Noise level shall not be more than 55dB(A) for all capacity
outdoor units at normal operation condition. (Noise level
measured data should be 1 m away from certain measurement
point).
2)
Common area shall not be more than 65dB(A) for all capacity
outdoor units at normal operation condition.
Refrigerating circuit
1)
The refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with hot gas bypass
system to safeguard the compressor in case of condenser blockage
and extreme conditions.
2)
Each compressor shall have check valve to isolate the compressor
and to avoid transfer of refrigerant and carbon entering in another
compressor in case of motor burn out.
3)
Outdoor unit shall have accumulator to avoid liquid refrigerant
entering the compressor and also act as an equalizer.
4)
The main EEV in outdoor shall be controlled by main Control
PCB located inside the outdoor unit.
Outdoor unit shall have SCI circuit after condenser outlet to improve
cooling efficiency.
Safety Devices
1)
The following safety devices shall be part of the Outdoor unit;
Discharge temperature sensor, Overload protector, Hot gas bypass
cycle, Evaporator inlet piping sensor for anti freeze protection,
Evaporator outlet piping sensor, Return air temperature sensor,
Time delay relay, reverse phase protection and phase failure
protection.
Oil Recovery System : Unit shall be equipped with 3 types of oil
recovery procedures.
1)
Oil separator for every compressor
2)
Oil recovery logic in PCB with the help of which the EEV and the
compressor operation is controlled for 3 minutes to recover the oil
back to compressor at an interval of every 6 hours of partial
compressor working to ensure stable operation with long
refrigerant piping.
INDOOR UNITS
A.
General
1.
Ceiling cassette type 4 way
Page 184/374

a.
B.
2.4
The Ceiling Cassette shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested.
The unit shall have a self diagnostic function, 3 minute time delay relay,
auto restart function, an emergency operation function and test run
switch. Four way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing, two
or four way blow.
Component Constitution
1.
Shall consist of heat exchanger, cross flow fan, Air path, Drain pump, PCB,
receiver, valve, sensors and etc.
2.
Shall be completely factory manufactured, piped, wired and run tested before
delivery.
3.
Main Component Material and Performance
a.
Cabinet: shall be pressed material, least thickness of 0.6 ~ 2.0 mm of
SECCP (zinc electrolytic coated iron plate), are anti-corrosive and round
shape/size/thickness standard are as per KSD3512 or equivalent
b.
Heat Exchanger:
1)
Pipe shall be phosphorus deoxidized copper pipe (KSD 5301)
more than purity 99.9% and tolerance of size and tension standard
as per KSD 5522.
2)
Fin shall be antibacterial fin with thickness of 0.11 or above and
silver purity must be over 99.5%.
3)
Pitch of fin shall be evenly located in between of1.2~1.7 mm.
4)
Copper pipe and fin shall be connected after being enlarged for
enhancing thermal effect.
5)
Must endure internal pressure of 63 kg-f/cm2 G and external
pressure of 42 kg-f/cm2 G for to prevent deformation and leakage.
c.
Fan
1)
The evaporator fan shall be an assembly with a cross flow fan & a
turbo fan direct driven by a single motor.
2)
The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a
motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall
have three or above speeds; High, Medium and Low.
3)
The controller shall have a selector switch to increase the rpm of
the motor in case of the height of ceiling is increased.
d.
Air Distribution
1)
Auto Air Swing shall be equipped and located at each of cassette
type of 4 way, 2 way and 1 way.
2)
Auto air swing must enhance uniform air distribution by
automatically swinging upside down.
e.
Filter
1)
Return air shall be filtered by means of a long life permanent
filter.
2)
Filter shall be anti-bacterial washable and reusable.
f.
Drain Pump
1)
Condensate pump shall be capable to raise condensed water
600mm above from condensate pan.
2)
Prevention of overflow of water on drain plate, drain pump shall
be interlocked with float switch.
CONTROL
A.
Individual Control
The units shall be wired or wireless remote controller having features as following.
Page 185/374

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Centralized Group Control

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
2.5
Temperature Setting
Air Volume : High/Medium/Low
Flap control
Weekly schedule setting
Self-diagnosis
Control & Monitoring of up to All units & Extra-units

Schedule Control
Zone management
Power distribution management
History management
Cycle monitoring
The wireless remote control should be adapt as an basic control in Residence Units.
(But, except for the Ceiling concealed Duct type.)
CEILING CONCEALED DUCT TYPE

A.
Ceiling concealed duct type indoor unit shall be two pipe.
B.
Basic unit shall be single skinned construction from high quality 1.0mm thick
galvanized steel with 5.0mm PU foam.
C.
Unit to be equipped with factory installed brackets for hanging. Control box to be
easy for replacement with an option of fixing on both side of the unit at site.
1.
Indoor air quality :
a.
Units are to have accessible filters designed for obtaining optimum air
quality.
b.
Standard filter : units shall have antibacterial and washable permanent
filter.
c.
To remove all the microscopic contaminants, dust, odor molecules etc. to
maintain high level of indoor air quality in areas as specified in the
schedule.
2.
Coils
a.
Coils will be ARI rated at least 7mm O.D. size copper tube with
aluminum fins.
b.
Aluminum fins should be coated with special plasma coating to avoid
formation of condensate water droplets and thereby ensure dry coil
conditions.
c.
This will prevent corrosion and reduce resistance to airflow. Coils shall
be made of staggered heavy wall seamless copper tubing mechanically
bonded to 0.12 mm aluminum fins. The evaporator coil shall be
minimum two rows deep.
3.
Motors
a.
The motors shall be DC motor & have thermal overload protection. The
motors shall be single phase and permanent split capacitor type.
b.
Further linear electronic adjustment of motor speed through remote
controller.
c.
It should be available to precisely balance airflow as per actual external
static pressures.
4.
Controls
Page 186/374

a.
5.
The units shall be equipped with Auto Restart function, which allows the
unit to start in the same mode prior to the power failure.
Smart controls
a.
The units shall have the following state of the art features.
b.
Two thermistor sensor to sense temperature in the room and in the return
air with an option of selecting one or both depending on the application
for uniform and precise temperature control.
c.
Group control to control up to 16 units from single LCD wired remote
controller.
d.
Deluxe central control to control up to 256 units from a central location.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1
3.2
GENERAL
A.
Installation should be done by authorized expert installer.
B.
Installation should be according to the enclosed or submitted manual.
C.
Use materials and accessories and tools guaranteed by supplier.
INSTALL OUTDOOR UNIT

A.
B.
Choose the place for outdoor unit

1.
Choose suitable place for outdoor unit. Refer to below prohibited area. If it is
needed to install at prohibited area due unavoidable reasons, please ask advice
of expert.
a.
Prohibited area: Where the place flammable, viscosity and corrosiveness
gas are injected
2.
Check construction structure enough to support outdoor units weight and
vibration.
a.
Check its ground is flat or not.
b.
It is needed anti-vibration frame to prevent affections of noise and
vibration to the residence area.
3.
Check if hot discharge wind and noise are affects to the neighbor.
4.
Check roof tops structure enough to support outdoor units.
5.
Remove stopper at the bottom of compressor after complete of installation.
Outdoor Units foundation and anti-vibration (General)

1.
Do not install outdoor unit on the wooden support.
2.
Fasten outdoor unit on the concrete foundation using anchor bolt.
a.
Foundation should be more than 200mm to protect from rainwater, and
make hole for drainage.
b.
Use strong material enough to support outdoor units weight and
vibration. And make its surface flat.
c.
Foundation area should be 1.5 times bigger than outdoor unit.
d.
Fasten outdoor unit to the foundation enough to stand against 30m/s of
wind.
e.
Using reinforce rod to make concrete foundation stronger.
Page 187/374

3.3
3.4
INSTALL INDOOR UNIT

A.
Select indoor units location

1.
Choose suitable place for indoor units air flow
2.
Structure is strong enough to support indoor units weight.
3.
Easy to pump out drainage.
4.
Enough service space
5.
Indoor units power and communication cable should be far from the other
electric material.
B.
It is necessary to have 5mm of gap between indoor unit and ceiling, and please make
inspection hole where easy to access for service.
C.
Install indoor units horizontally - If not, drain water can be spilled
REFRIGERANT PIPING
A.
General piping specification

1.
Choose suitable copper pipe according to the technical and installation manual.
2.
Copper pipe specification
B.
Welding
1.
Use welding rod (which is contained silver) to make sure piping air tightness.
2.
Piping means liquid pipes, gas pipes and refnet joint.
3.
Nitrogen blowing is necessary. Its supply pressure is around 1~2 kg/cm2 G.
Page 188/374

C.
Flushing pipes
1.
Piping means liquid pipes, gas pipes and refnet joint.
2.
Flushing pipes to remove dust and water inside of pipes.
3.
Flushing high pressure pipe with 30kg/cm2 G Nitrogen.
4.
Flushing low pressure pipe with 30kg/cm2 G Nitrogen.
D.
Air tightness test

1.
Do air tightness test after welding and flushing pipes.
a.
Connect nitrogen tank and pressure gauge to the pipe.
b.
Add pressure with nitrogen gas.
1)
STEP 1: 3.0 kg/cm2 G, More than 3 min. No leakage.
2)
STEP 2: 15.0 kg/cm2 G More than 3 min. No leakage.
During STEP 1, 2, a big size crack is can be founded.
3)
STEP 3: 41.0 kg/cm2 G, 24 hrs. No leakage.
Do step 3 more than 24 hours to find small size crack.
2.
After air tightness test, keep its pressure to 10.0 kg/cm2 G to keep clean.
E.
Vacuuming and charging refrigerant

1.
Vacuuming process is needed to remove dust and moisture inside of pipes and
make sure its air tightness.
2.
Connect indoor and outdoor unit with copper pipes.
3.
Connect manifold gauge and vacuuming pump to the outdoor units service
valve.
4.
Decompress pipes inside pressure to less than -755mmHg.
Page 189/374

5.
6.
7.
F.
After 1 hour check its pressure keep under -755mmHg.

Charging additional refrigerant calculated based on additional pipe length.
Open outdoor units service valve.
Insulation pipes
1.
Insulate pipe by EPDM insulator to prevent dew on the surface of pipe.(Detail
EPDM specifications: Refer to the installation manual)
2.
Insulation thickness
Pipe size(mm)
6.35~12.7
15~41
above
G.
3.5
Minimum thickness of
insulation(mm)
EPDM foam
13
19
25
Remarks
If you install the pipe underground, at
the seaside, a spa or on the lake, use
thicker one according to the pipe size.
Insulation ducts.
1.
Insulation ducts shall be installed 50mm glasswool and need to be satisfied
insulation efficiency.
2.
Flexible ducts shall be satisfied efficiency which 25 mm thickness insulating
material has.
DRAIN PIPE
A.
General
1.
Use PVC pipe for drain pipes.
2.
Keep clean PVC pipe using cap or taping at the both tip.
3.
Water leakage test is necessary after complete of installation.
B.
Install outdoor units drain pipe

1.
Open its top to prevent a back flow caused by internal pressure.
2.
Keep its slope at least 1/50.
3.
Insulate using more than 10mm of insulator.
4.
If there is a fear for freezing of drain water because of cold weather, use selfregulating heat cable to prevent damage.
C.
Install indoor units drain pipe

1.
General
a.
Keep its slope at least 1/100.
b.
Up to 2 indoor units, diameter of main drain pipe is same as indoor units
drain pipe diameter. If the number of indoor units is more than 3, choose
1 step bigger PVC pipe. Maximum limit of indoor units for 1 main drain
pipe is 6 indoor units.
c.
Insulate drainpipe to prevent condensing water on the surface.
d.
Use EPDM foam insulator more than 13mm thickness.
e.
Support every 1.5~2.0 meter (under VP40: 1.5m, over VP40: 2.0m).
Page 190/374

2.
f.
Install air-vent to prevent a back flow. (Necessary)
CASSETTE Type indoor unit
a.
Single drain pipe
1)
b.
Drain pipe should be located in 300mm of distance and

300~550mm of height differences.
2)
Horizontal pipes slope should be more than 1/100, and support
drain pipe every 1~1.5 meter with hanger.
3)
Install air vent to prevent water back flow.
4)
Keep flexible hose horizontally - If indoor unit stops working,
water can flow back to the indoor unit.
5)
To prevent inlet of bad smell to inside of indoor units, use U-trap
or do indirect drainage.
Multiple drain pipes
1)
2)
Main air-vent must be installed in front of last indoor unit if

therere more than 3 indoor units.
Other air-vent can be installed on the top of each indoor units
drain pipe. (See upper picture)
Page 191/374

3.
DUCT Type indoor unit

a.
Single drain pipe (Without drain pump)
1)
2)
3)
4)

Install U-shape piping for big size of duct - Clean-out hole is
necessary.
To prevent inlet of bad smell to inside of indoor units, use U-trap
or do non-direct drainage for small size of duct.
Keep flexible hose horizontally.
Page 192/374

b.
Single drain pipe (with the drain pump)
1)
c.
Drain pipe should be located in 300mm of distance and

300~550mm of height differences.
2)
3)
Install air-vent to prevent a water back flow.
4)
Keep flexible hose horizontally - If indoor unit stops working,
water can flow back to the indoor unit.
5)
To prevent inlet of bad smells to inside of indoor units, use U-trap
or do non-direct drainage.
Multiple drain pipes (Without drain pump)
1)
2)
3)

Install U-shape piping for big size of duct - Cap for clean is
necessary.
To prevent inlet of bad smells to inside of indoor units, use U-trap
or do non-direct drainage for small size of duct.
Page 193/374

d.
For numbers of indoor units (Use drain pump)
1)
2)
3.6

Other air-vent can be installed on the top of each indoor units
drain pipe. (See upper picture)
PIPE SHAFT
A.
Pipe Shaft condition for system A/C refrigerant piping

1.
Make certain of enough space for piping as below type.
2.
Sleeve type
Install metal plate to fasten pipes securely.
3.
Fasten with U-bolt.
More than 50mm is needed

between each piping
More than 200mm
Page 194/374

4.
B.
Shot urethane foam to the remaining space.
How to support long piping

1.
Concept: As building size is getting bigger and bigger, the demand of long
piping is also increased. So it is needed technique to support that long and
heavy piping.
[ Down stopper installation ]
3.7
Drain Pipe installation

A.
Drain Pipe installation

1.
Indoor unit ~ Horizontal pipe
a.
Connect indoor unit and PVC pipe using enclosed flexible hose.
b.
Use 3 elbows and 1 tee between flexible hose and horizontal pipe.
Page 195/374

2.
Horizontal pipe ~ Vertical pipe

a.
Use U-trap to prevent inlet of bad smell (Not necessary)
b.
Use 2 elbows and 1 tee to drain well.
3.
Install Air-Vent - Install air-vent to drain well using 2 tee or 1tee and 1elbow.
Install Air-vent in front of last indoor unit
when 3 or more indoor units are installed
4.
Clean-out hole - Clean-out hole is needed at the tip of drain main pipe.
Page 196/374

Page 197/374

SECTION 233000 - AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
Work included in this Section includes the providing of labor, materials, equipment and
documents and all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction for the following:
1.
Air distribution systems complete with diffusers, registers, grilles, and accessories,
terminal units, air pressure reducing valves, humidifiers and the installation of air
boots for air handling type light fixtures.
A.
Related documents
1.
apply to all work in this section.
B.
Requirements of Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK

C.

1.
2.
Section 237300 AIR HANDLING SYSTEM EQUIPMENTSECTION.
3.
EQUIPMENT.
4.
Section 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.
1.3
A.

B.
FOR HVAC WORK for additional Reference Standards.
C.
Equivalent Vietnam Standards(VS) can be substituted for American Standards specified in

this section.
1.
over the contractors business or property(the Laws).
2.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Page 198/374

B.
Submit manufacturers' assurances that they have examined application of each outlet and
guarantee that the outlets have been selected for and are capable of comfortable and
draftless air diffusion, and are appropriate for the design intended.
C.

1.
Submit catalog cuts and Schedules of air diffusers, registers, grilles and accessories.
a.
Each type, model number, size, service, blade setting angle and cmh.
b.
Sound power levels at noted capacities, and room sound absorption rating
based on NC values.
c.
Throw and drop at noted capacities.
d.
Material of unit, finish and mounting details.
e.
2.
Terminal units:
a.
Submit catalog cuts and Schedules of units, attenuators and heat transfer coils.
1)
Each unit size, service and model type with capacity performance
including pressure drops.
2)
Sound power levels at noted capacities (air stream and radiated).
3)
Length and thickness of soundlining downstream of each terminal
unit to obtain noise criteria level.
b.
Submit certification that sound lining meets requirements of UL Publication
No. 181 and that the type, length and thickness comply with noise level criteria
specified in Section 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
c.
Submit wiring diagrams for electric reheat coils.
d.
3.
Submit catalog cuts and Schedules of air pressure reducing valves.
a.
Each size, service and model type with capacity performance including
pressure drops.
b.
Sound power levels at noted capacities (air stream and radiated).
c.
Length and thickness of soundlining to obtain noise criteria level.
d.
Submit certification that sound lining meets requirements of UL Publication
No. 181 and that type, length and thickness comply with noise level criteria
specified in Section 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR
e.
4.
Submit catalog cuts and Schedules of air boots:
a.
Information necessary for interfacing with air handling type light fixtures.
Submit type of air pattern and volume control.
b.
Performance rating with cu M/hr (cfm), service, throw at rated capacity, sound
power level, and pressure drop.
c.
5.
VAV Diffuser
a.
Full product data to include specified type of products, inlet diameter,
operating pressure range, air volumes, throw, sound, and change-over range.
b.
Product test report on air flow, spread, throw pattern, static pressure, and
discharge sound power level tested and reported by 3rd party independent test
and certification organization. Product shall be tested IAW Air Diffusion
Council Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers No. ADC 1062: GRD84.
c.
Maintenance instructions for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
d.
Product sample.
e.
Start-up operation report.
Page 199/374

1.5

A.
Receive and accept materials and equipment at the site; properly handle, house, and protect
them from damage and the weather until installation. Replace equipment damaged in the
course of handling without additional charge.
B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Contract documents.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
1.
Diffusers, registers and grilles.
2.
Perforated laminar flow diffusers.
3.
Terminal units.
4.
Air pressure reducing valves.
5.
VAV diffuser
AIR DIFFUSERS
A.
Diffusers shall be with volume damper adjustable from diffuser face except as noted,
without removal of face louvers or panel. Provide supply . air diffusers with air-equalizing
deflectors. Diffusers in same room shall be the same size and type, except as otherwise
approved. Diffusers shall have removable core, unless otherwise noted. Supply plaster
frames for diffusers without removable cores installed in plaster for setting under General
Construction Work.
1.
Provide diffusers suitable for the following ceiling construction, as required.
a.
Metal pan ceilings shall have snap-in frame to match approved type ceiling
suspension system.
b.
Concealed spline type acoustical tile ceiling shall be flanged for surface
mounting.
c.
Lay-in acoustical tile ceiling with inverted tee-bar shall have lay-in type frame
for setting on tee-bars.
Page 200/374

d.
2.
Plaster ceilings shall be flanged for surface mounting, or plaster frames as

indicated.
e.
Noise level at noted capacities shall not exceed criteria specified in Section 230548,
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC. Diffusers shall be suitable
for operation at 5 percent excess and 25 percent less than noted capacity. Provide
blanking for proper coverage and blow without producing objectionable noise or air
motion at occupied level. Finish shall match color sample as approved.
a.
Baked enamel.
b.
Anodized.
c.
Duranodic.
d.
Aluminum lacquer.
B.
Square and rectangular diffusers with removable core and air discharge shall be in one to
four directions, as noted. Provide with minimum of 3 flaring removable members within
each other.
1.
Diffusers shall be constructed to coordinate with lighting fixtures. Flanges shall be on
2 sides. Match lighting fixtures flanges for continuous frame around diffusers and
fixtures. Coordinate with Electrical Work to insure perfect match of design, finish
and alignment.
2.
Types: for exposed duct installation, diffusers shall be used with constant air volume
systems only.
C.
Circular diffusers, adjustable pattern: provide with minimum of 3 flaring, conical shaped
members. At least 1 member shall be adjustable to permit horizontal or vertical air
discharge.
D.
Circular diffusers: provide with minimum of 3 flaring, conical shaped members.
E.
Provide perforated diffusers:

1.
Square type.
2.
Square and rectangular.
3.
Supply air diffusers: with air pattern adjustment.
4.
Faceplates: with concealed hinges and catches. Exposed screws not permitted.
F.
Linear diffusers: diffusers and frames shall be extruded aluminum. Frame types shall mate
with ceilings. Provide means to neatly butt and align units to give continuous appearance
without butting flanges. No screw holes or welded corners visible on diffusers or frames
will be permitted. Air volume shall be adjustable through air supply face without requiring
removal of face panel. Provide blanked sections for inactive lengths. Provide plaster frames
and opposed blade volume dampers where noted. Refer to Architectural Drawings for
mounting details and overall lengths. Finish shall match color sample as approved.
1.
Baked enamel.
2.
Anodized.
3.
Duranodic.
4.
Aluminum lacquer.
5.
Continuous slot type: slots with pattern and directional control blades, surface
mounted type.
6.
Continuous narrow-slot type with opposed acting damper or directional vanes.
7.
Combination terminal unit and slotted diffuser: refer to Terminal Units.
8.
Light troffer supply: Coordinate with lighting fixture manufacturer.
9.
Perimeter window plenums/slot diffusers with insulated plenum and 1 or 2 slots.
Page 201/374

2.3
REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A.
The manufacturer shall be responsible for examining the application of each outlet and shall
guarantee that each outlet will provide comfort space conditions at noted capacity without
drafts. Noise level at noted capacities shall not exceed criteria specified in Section 230548,
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC. Provide registers with keyoperated, opposed-blade volume control. Refer to Architectural Drawings for mounting
details. Finish shall match color sample as approved.
1.
Prime coat.
2.
Baked enamel.
3.
Supply plaster frames for grilles and registers without removable cores installed in
plaster for setting under General Construction Work. Grilles and registers in
aluminum ductwork or plenums shall be anodized aluminum. Grilles and registers in
stainless steel ductwork or plenums shall be stainless steel.
4.
Curved registers or grilles: provide registers, grilles and frames factory-fabricated to
required diameters.
B.
Supply registers: provide adjustable, double-deflection, formed bar type.

1.
Face bars shall be vertical, 19 mm (3/4 inch) bar spacing.
2.
Face bars shall be horizontal, 19 mm (3/4 inch) bar spacing.
3.
Behind registers installed on side of duct, provide air-equalizing deflector.
C.
Return and exhaust registers:

1.
Fixed curved or tilted blades between 30 and 45 deg for return high on wall or
ceiling, 30 deg for returns below 1.2 M (4 ft) and depth shall be 25 mm (1 inch).
Blades spacing shall be 19 mm (3/4 inch) and parallel to long dimension. Net
effective free area shall be not less than 75 percent.
D.
Linear registers: provide continuous multiple-bar design, extruded aluminum construction.

1.
Deflection: 0 deg.
2.
Deflection: 15 deg.
3.
Deflection: 25 to 30 deg.
4.
For continuous runs provide extruded aluminum snap-in mounting frame and sections
butted without breaks or flanges at joints. Provide blanked sections for inactive
lengths. Refer to Architectural Drawings for mounting details and overall lengths.
5.
Finish shall match color sample as approved:
a.
Baked enamel.
b.
Anodized.
c.
Duranodic.
d.
Aluminum lacquer.
6.
For registers in enclosures, coordinate registers with enclosure construction for proper
fit and performance. Enclosures will be under General Construction Work.
E.
Transfer grilles: as specified for return registers except omit volume control.
F.
Lightproof transfer grilles: fixed horizontal deflection, 3 bends and lightproof. Finish shall
be dull-black lacquer or as approved.
2.4
RETURN AIR SCREENS

A.
19 mm (3/4 inch) square pattern mesh, constructed of interwoven 1.6 mm(No.16

gauge)galvanized wire and welded or secured to frame. Frame shall be 25 mm x 25 mm x 3
mm (1 inch x 1 inch x 1/8 inch) galvanized steel angles frames, continuous around
perimeter of screen.
Page 202/374

2.5
TERMINAL UNITS
A.
Casings shall be minimum 0.85 mm(No.22 gauge) steel, galvanized steel or 1 mm thick
aluminum.
B.
Acoustic lining shall be 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick neoprene coated 0.5 Kg (1-1/21b) density
fiberglass. Lining shall meet erosion test method described in UL Publication No. 181, and
smoke developed and flame spread rating requirements of NFPA-90A. No cut edges of
fiberglass shall be exposed to air stream.
C.
Control motors shall be factory-installed on units by unit manufacturer. Motors shall be

supplied by unit manufacturer or approved automatic control system manufacturer.
D.
Controllers shall be factory calibrated and preset for minimum and maximum air volumes
noted. Air quantities shall be clearly indicated with pressure taps to permit field change of
air quantities without special tools or replacement components. Units shall maintain
pressure independence within plus or minus 5 percent, up to 150 mm (6 inch) w.g. inlet air
pressure. Maximum static differential pressure 3.8 mm (0.15 inch) w.g. at inlet air velocity
of 10M/Sec. Damper blades shall be aluminum set in self lubricating bearings. Leakage
shall be 2 percent of maximum flow against 3.8 mm (6 in.) w.g. static pressure. For units
with reheat coils, regulators shall be sequenced with reheat controls.
E.
Noise level at noted capacities shall not exceed criteria specified in Section 230548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
Provide sound absorbers for units where noted or to conform with requirements of Section
230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT. Units shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 36-72 or ADC
Code 1062R4, with ratings tabulated for upstream pressure of 100 mm(4 inch) w.g, 77 mm
(3 inch) w.g. and minimum static pressure.
1.
Noise level test results are subject to be checked in approved independent laboratory
in accordance with approved test procedure.
F.
Depth of units shall not exceed allowable space allocation. Moving parts shall be suitable
for minimum of 300,000 cycles. Units shall be in compliance with U.L. 181 and NFPA
90A.
G.
Fan powered recirculating fan units:
2.6
VAV Diffuser
A.
VAV primary air and constant volume total air, pressure independent unit and low inlet
pressure, with direct drive fan in unit casing, motor with overload protection, and integral
controls. Supply one replacement motor for every 20 units installed.
B.
Each module shall be a complete VAV terminal and thermostat self-contained in a diffuser.
External wiring or pneumatics shall not be allowed. The modules shall vary the supply air
volume to provide both VAV heating and VAV cooling. They shall be thermally powered
using two room temperature sensing thermostats and one changeover thermostat.
C.
The room temperature settings for heating and cooling shall be separately adjusting each of
the two room thermostats. One room temperature sensing thermostat shall sense room
temperature and vary the supply air when cooling. The other room temperature sensing
thermostat shall sense room temperature and vary the supply air when heating. Each room
sensing thermostat shall have a micrometer type temperature set point adjustment with an
Page 203/374

indicator that moves along a 70 degrees F/21 degrees C to 78 degrees F/26 degrees C
temperature scale.
D.
Initial set point shall be factory set at 74 degrees F/23 degrees C. The changeover
thermostat shall be factory installed and adjusted to engage the heating mode when the
supply air temperature rises above 80 degrees F/27 degrees C and return to the cooling
mode when the supply air temperature falls below 68 degrees F/20 degrees C. The
changeover mechanism shall not extend above the neck of the diffuser.
E.
Each unit shall have four perimeter dampers to provide variable discharge area at the
perimeter of the diffuser for maximum Coanda effect and to avoid dumping. Each module
shall be factory tested. The manufacturer shall warrant that the module shall be free from
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten years from the date of shipment.
Each module shall have a hinged appearance panel that can be unlatched and folded down to
hang allowing hands to be free for adjusting set points.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Return and exhaust registers: for wall installations, mount on upper portion of wall with
upward deflection. Mount on lower portion of wall with downward deflection .
B.
Transfer grilles: for wall installations, provide 2 grilles, 1 on each side of wall, with
connecting sheet metal collar. For transfer ducts, provide 2 grilles, 1 at each end of duct.
C.
Return air screens: mount at terminations of return air ducts in hung ceilings. Provide
flanged connections in ceiling return air ducts at terminations. Bolt screens to flanged
connections.
D.
Terminal units: provide sound linings downstream of units with lengths as noted or
recommended by unit manufacturer (whichever is greater) to conform with noise-criteria
levels specified in 230548 Section VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. Provide sound traps where noted. For sound linings, provide
types as specified in Section 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR
E.
Air valves in ducts: provide soundlining downstream of units with lengths as noted or
recommended by unit manufacturer (whichever is greater) to conform with noise-criteria
levels specified in Section 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. For soundlinings, provide type as specified in Section
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
Page 204/374

SECTION 233400 MECHANICAL VENTILATING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
Work included in this Section includes the providing of labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for a
complete and safe installation in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable codes and authorities
having jurisdiction for the following:
1.
Ventilation supply and exhaust fans.
2.
Smoke exhaust fans.
3.
Ventilation untis.
4.
Accessories.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Requirements of Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK SECTION apply to all work in
this Section.
B.

1.
Section 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
Published Specifications standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or governmental

organizations apply to work in this Section.
B.
Comply with all applicable codes and refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK
for additional Reference Standards.
C.
Equivalent Vietnamese Standards can be substituted for American Standards specified in this section.
1.
The contractor shall be in compliance with all applicable statutes, laws, orders, judgments and decrees of
Vietnam and any government authority having jurisdiction over the contractors business or property
(the Laws).
2.
In case that any standard or reference not applicable in the Laws is required by the specification, the
contractor shall be deemed to provide with services least substantially equivalent in quality to the said
required standard or reference.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK for Guarantee and other Quality
Assurance requirements.
A.

1.
Submit catalog cuts and Schedules of fans.
a.
Each type, model number, size, service, blade setting angle and cmh.
b.
Sound power levels at noted capacities, and room sound absorption rating based on NC values.
c.
Throw and drop at noted capacities.
d.
Material of unit, finish and mounting details.
Page 205/374

1.6

A.
Receive and accept materials and equipment at the site; properly handle, house, and protect them from damage
and the weather until installation. Replace equipment damaged in the course of handling without additional
charge.
B.
Arrange for and provide storage space in an area at the job site for all materials and equipment to be received
and/or installed in this project.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for products furnished under this Contract. However, such
warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturers and the Contractor
may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents (Defect Notification Period).
B.
Guarantee all materials, equipment, apparatus and workmanship to be free of defective materials and faulty
workmanship for at least the Defect Notification Period defined in the Contract documents.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FANS
A.
Provide centrifugal type, non-overloading design, except as noted with minimum capacities as noted. Where
variable inlet vanes are used, complete assembly shall be factory installed by the fan manufacturer. The fan
horsepower performance characteristics shall be within 5 percent of published catalog rating data of the standard
fan without the variable inlet vanes, where no data is available for the fan with inlet vanes. Inlet vanes shall be
capable of reducing flow to 20 percent of design cu. M/hr. (cfm) at 38 mm (1-1/2inch) w.g. static pressure and
maintain stable performance. Inlet vanes and all operating linkages shall be provided and assembled by fan
manufacturer prior to shipment to job site.
1.
Wheel shall be factory balanced statically and dynamically. Brake horsepower ratings shall be 5 percent
maximum above those noted and published for a minimum of two (2) years. Drives shall be matched,
multiple V -belt drive, unless otherwise noted with minimum capacity of 1.4 times rated motor hp.
Pulleys shall be cast iron.
a.
Motor pulley shall be variable pitch diameter, for fans up to 25 hp and 1000 rpm, except fans
with variable inlet vanes and fixed pitch diameter, over 25 hp or 1000 rpm. Supply and install
one fixed pitch pulley change, as required, per fan to balance systems. Companion sheaves shall
maintain belts parallel. Belt guards shall be in compliance with applicable safety requirements
and with tachometer opening for fan speed measurements. Manufacturer shall provide
replacement fixed pitched sheaves where needed to balance system.
2.
Provide removable flanged screens at inlets or outlets where no connecting ductwork is indicated,
including inlets to fans in field erected casings.
3.
Bearings shall be lubrication free type ball, roller or taper.
4.
Provide spark resistant construction fans: all where noted, parts in contact with air shall be non-ferrous.
Motor shall be explosion proof, Class I, Group D, Division 2. Belt drive shall be non-sparking.
B.
Centrifugal fans: Provide full housed, steel housing, with single or double inlet, as noted. Class III fans shall be
all welded. Fan wheels shall be steel. 685 mm (27 inch) diameter and larger wheels shall be backward curved air
foil blade with arrangement 3, except as noted. Under 685 mm (27 inch) diameter wheels shall be backward
curved blade.
1.
Provide arrangement one (1) for SWSI or arrangement three (3) for DWDI fans, except as noted.
a.
Provide arrangement 1 or 9 for Kitchen exhaust:
Page 206/374

2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide cleanout doors for kitchen exhaust fans in scroll with wedge type latches on fans 600 mm (24
inch) diameter and larger and kitchen exhaust fans. Insulated fans; doors shall be raised to thickness of
covering.
Discharge shall be as noted and submit for review. For adjustable rotatable scroll discharge, provide
Class I and Class II, construction for all sizes or provide for fixed scroll discharge for all sizes.
Provide scroll drains for all fans and plug, where not used.
Split construction: Provide split construction for fans too large for available doorways or passageways.
Split in half along center of shaft with angles, etc., to allow removal of section without disturbing inlet
and discharge connection; arranged for bolting. Provide bolts with lock washers and nuts. Construction
shall be inspected by manufacturer after field assembly and certified that they have been properly
assembled and ready for proper operation.
C.
In-line centrifugal fans, shall be full housed, with motor base, centrifugal wheels, non-overloading design and
inlet and outlet flanges. The following shall be as specified for centrifugal fans: belt drives, bearings (isolated
from air stream) removable flanged screens, c1eanout doors and variable inlet vanes. Provide diffuser vanes.
D.
For utility sets, provide as noted above for centrifugal fans. Centrifugal fan and motor shall be mounted on
common base and drive shall be adjustable V -belt type except as noted. Provide backward curved blade for
wheels 300 mm (12 inches) and larger or forward and backward curved blade for wheels under 300 mm (12
inches), as noted. Provide variable inlet vanes, where noted. Where fans are exposed to weather, provide with
combination weatherproof cover, belt guard and drain.
E.
Provide propeller fans with belt drive, unless noted otherwise and mounted on steel frame. Motors shall be
constant speed, totally enclosed, fan cooled. Provide motor operated discharge damper or self-acting louvers,
where noted. Bearings shall be nylon or ball. Provide wire safety guard, at inlet. Motor and fan assembly shall be
mounted on vibration isolators.
F.
Vane-axial flow fans: Fans shall be full housed. Steel housing shall be minimum 4.7 mm (3/16 inch) thick for
tube size to 900mm (36 inch) and 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) steel for larger tube sizes. Fan blades and hub shall be cast
aluminum. Bearings shall be as specified for centrifugal fans. Provide inlet and outlet flanges.
1.
Fan blades shall be air foil type with manually adjustable blades. For automatically adjustable blades
while fan is in operation, refer to Section INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC.
2.
For accessories, provide inlet bell where indicated, approved type transition inlet duct and discharge
cone. Provide 19 mm (3/4 inch) mesh galvanized steel wire guard for inlet bell and discharge cone.
3.
Provide belt drive, rated at 1.4 times motor horsepower.
4.
Fan rotor shall be factory tested for static and dynamic balance. Manufacturer shall certify performance
and sound data.
Page 207/374

SECTION 236400 - CHILLED WATER SYSTEM SECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
1.
Piping.
2.
Pumps.
3.
Expansion Air and Water Separation Tank.
4.
Heat Exchanger.
5.
Dirt Separator.
A.
Related documents
1.
apply to all work in this section.
B.
Requirements of Section 230500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC apply to all
C.
Related work in the following Sections.

1.
2.
3.
EQUIPMENT.
4.
Section 230519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING.
5.
6.
1.3
A.
Comply with all applicable national, state and local codes and refer to Section GENERAL
PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK for additional reference standards.
B.
Equivalent Vietnam Standards (VS) can be substituted for American Standards specified in
this section.
1.
2.
C.
standards.
Page 208/374

1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.

1.
Pumps, pump motors, pump curves, BHP, pump efficiency and MHP.
2.
Expansion air and water separation tank, including pump, piping, control unit and
wiring diagrams.
3.
Heat exchangers.
4.
Dirt separator.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BASE BID MANUFACTURERS

A.
Pumps : Salson (France), Grundfos, Wilo or approved equal.
B.
Heat Exchangers : ALFA LAVAL or approved equal.
C.
The contractor shall submit manufacturers data for the items for approval from Employers
representative.
1.
Expansion Air and Water Separation Tanks.
2.
Dirt Separator.
2.2
PIPING AND ACCESSORIES

A.
Refer to Section COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC for supply and return, fill
and make-up water and runouts from risers to units, for exposed piping use black steel pipe
in Hotel, Service Residence, and galvanized steel pipe for office and Department store.
B.
Runouts, as follows:
1.
Wrought copper fittings.
2.
Soldered joints.
3.
Silver brazed joints.
4.
Connections to steel pipe shall be insulating coupling with steel jacket and threaded
epoxy impregnated nylon insert.
C.
Valves, fittings, flanges, joints and accessories as follows:

1.
Minimum 860 kPa (125 lb) or 1380 kPa (200 lb) except cast iron 1030 kPa (150) and
welded fittings as specified under Section 230100, PIPING.
a.
See riser diagram for pressure ratings.
2.3
PUMPS
A.
Except where noted otherwise, pumps shall be single stage centrifugal pumps with flexible
motor coupling, pump motor and enclosed bronze impeller. Pump and motor assembly shall
be mounted on cast iron or rolled steel baseplate with raised lip rim and drain tapings. Motor
shall be non-overloading over the entire range. Seals shall be as follows:
1.
Packed stuffing boxes with split bronze glands and brass studs, or with cast iron
glands and stainless steel studs.
Page 209/374

2.
Single, inside mounted, wave spring type mechanical seal with stainless steel springs,
brass or stainless steel seal heads, babbitt filled carbon rotating washer and silicaon
carbide stationary seat. Glands shall be bronze or stainless steel, water flush design to
provide flush across face of mechanical seal. Provide by-pass line from pump
discharge to flush gland.
a.
For suction pressures less than 1030 kPa (150 psig), provide seals.
b.
For suction pressures 1030 kPa (150 psig) or greater, provide balanced
construction seals.
B.
Pump and Motor capacities shall be minimum as noted, suitable for parallel operation and
with motor designed to operate over entire capacity range of pump without exceeding
horsepower rating. Pump shall be designed to operate at 25 percent beyond design capacity
without exceeding break-off point. Impellor diameter shall be maximum of 90 percent
difference between maximum and minimum of published impellor diameter.
C.
Pump Characteristics: pump curve shall be continuous rise from maximum capacity to
shutoff. Shutoff head approximately 10 percent greater than design head and operating at or
near peak efficiency.
D.
Alignment shall be by pump manufacturer at start-up, with dial indicator of plus or minus
0.05 mm (0.002 inch) accuracy. Certify in writing that alignment work has been performed
by manufacturer's personnel and that pumps are operating in accordance with design
requirements.
E.
Pumps shall be tested and designed to withstand 1-1/2 times specified working pressure.
F.
Horizontal split case double suction pump as follows:

1.
Pump and flanges shall be 850 kPa (125 psig) working pressure.
2.
3.
4.
Shaft shall be 416 stainless steel.
5.
Renewable shaft sleeves shall be 17 percent chrome stainless steel, heat treated and
hardened or ceramic coated stainless steel. Hardness shall be minimum 600 Brinell.
6.
Renewable shaft sleeves shall be unhardened 416 stainless steel.
7.
Trim, shaft nut and stuffing box bushing shall be bronze. Casing and impeller
wearing rings shall be renewable, dissimilar bronze of hardness to protect against
galling.
8.
Flanged suction and discharge connection.
9.
Bearings shall be ball, oil lubricated with oiler with rated life of 20,000 hours.
10. Bearings shall be ball, grease lubricated in moisture and dustproof housings with
rated life of 20,000 hours. Cartridge bearings which cannot be lubricated will not be
acceptable.
11. Bearing brackets shall be provided with overflow holes to prevent flooding. Bearing
housings shall be bolted and dowelled to bearing brackets. All metal flexible
couplings, self-aligning type, guard with removable sheet metal coupling guard.
2.4
IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
A.
In-line, flanged, cast iron bronze fitted, pumps with enclosed centrifugal type bronze
impeller rated for 1570 kPa (125 psig) working pressure.
B.
Mechanical seals: as to manufacturers standard.
C.
Circulators with coupling connected and bolted to oil lubricated sleeve bearing motor.
Page 210/374

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Expansion Air and Water Separation Tank: Make-up water connections from pump outlet
provided by tank manufacturer.
B.
Pipe relief valve to spill over floor drain.
C.
Provide 3 elbow type swing joints on supply and return connection to equipment, piping
systems and all risers.
D.
Dirt pocket and draining systems. Provide full size of riser and 300 mm (12 inches) long at
bottom of each riser and where noted.
1.
Piping over 690 kPa (100 psig): provide 20 mm (3/4 inch) bronze globe valve, 1720
kPa (250 lb) or 2760 kPa (400 lb), or ,20 mm (3/4 inch) ball valve 3450 kPa (500 lb),
or 20 mm (3/4 inch) globe (plug disc) valve 4130 kPa (600 lb) ANSI, piped to drain
or slop sink.
2.
Provide shutoff valves in each riser runout.
SECTION 237300 - AIR HANDLING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK DESCRIPTION
A.
Work included in this Section includes the providing of labor, materials, equipment and
documents and all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction for the following:
B.
The technical specification should be applied to construction and installation works of

emitting system(deordorizing system) and materials for kitchen exhaust and waster water
treatment exhaust.(Refer to equipment schedule and drawing documents of deordorizing
system.)
1.
Fans.
2.
Air conditioners.
3.
Air handling units.
4.
Heating and ventilating units.
5.
Cooling coils.
6.
Air filters.
7.
Activity carbon filter.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Requirements of Section 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK

Page 211/374

B.
1.3
Related work in the following Sections

1.
2.
3.
Section 233000 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SECTION.
4.
5.
EQUIPMENT.
6.
7.
A.

B.
FOR HVAC WORK SECTION for additional Reference Standards.
C.
Equivalent Vietnamese Standards (VS) can be substituted for American Standards specified
in this section.
1.
2.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ASHRAE Standard 52-76, "Methods for Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used
in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter", including:
1.
Weight Arrest Test, using synthetic test dust.
2.
Dust Spot Efficiency Test, using untreated atmospheric dust.
3.
Dust-Holding Capacity Test, using synthetic test dust.
B.
Comply with ANSI/UL Standard 586-1977, "Test Performance of High Efficiency Air Filter
Units", and with ANSI/UL Standard 900-1977, "Safety for Air Filter Units".
C.
Certify and comply with ARI Standard 410-81 "Forced-Circulations Air-Cooling and AirHeating Coils.
1.5
A.
Submit shop drawings and product data for the following:

1.
Fans: catalog cuts and schedules.
a.
Performance operating curves certified by manufacturer for pressure-volume
relation for each fan, drive and motor system from zero to 100 percent flow.
b.
Inlet vanes pressure drop and performance of fan at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent
with fully open vanes.
c.
Sound power levels at specified rating.
d.
Fan construction: materials and gauges.
e.
Motor manufacturer and electrical operating data.
Page 212/374

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
f.
Drive construction and rating.
g.
Inlet vane construction with operating linkage.
Air conditioners:
a.
Site erected: Fabrication drawings for casings and catalog cuts, performance
and construction schedules for equipment.
b.
Factory fabricated: Catalog cuts, dimensioned drawings and performance and
construction schedules.
c.
Miscellaneous accessories: Static pressure plate, coil supports, automatic
dampers and access doors.
Heating and ventilating units:
a.
Site erected: Fabrication drawings for casings and catalog cuts, performance
and construction schedules for equipment.
b.
Factory fabricated: Catalog cuts, dimension drawings, performance and
construction schedules.
Cooling coils: Catalog cuts, performance and construction schedules.
Heating coils: Catalog cuts, performance and construction schedules.
Air filters: Catalog cuts, performance and construction schedules.
Factory fabricated outside air intake hoods: Fabrication drawings.
Factory fabricated louver penthouses: Fabrication drawings.
Roof type ventilators: Catalog cuts, performance and construction schedules.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
1.
Fans.
a.
Centrifugal.
b.
Tubular centrifugal.
c.
Propeller type.
d.
Roof type.
e.
Vane-axial type.
2.
Air conditioners.
3.
Heating and ventilating units, factory fabricated.
4.
Heating coils. (See if it is applied)
5.
Cooling coils.
6.
Air filters.
7.
Factory-fabricated louver penthouses.
8.
Roof type gravity ventilators.
AIR HANDLING UNITS
A.
General
1.
Configuration : Fabricate with fan and coil section plus accessories, including :
a.
Heating coil.
b.
Mixing box section.
c.
Combination filter / mixing box section.
d.
Filter section.
e.
Face and bypass damper section.
f.
Multi-zone damper section.
g.
Spray coil dehumidifier section.
Page 213/374

2.
3.
B.
2.3
h.
Cooling coil.
Performance Base : Sea level conditions.
Fabrication : Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430.
Construction
1.
The construction of air handling units shall be extruded, aluminum profile jointed by
3D plastic rounded corners, forming the structural frame to house all internal
components, and double skin construction provided by sandwich type panel thicker
than 1inch comprising 0.5mm thick galvanized steel internal skin with color bond
external skin and injected with polyurethane foam of 40 kg/cu.cm density, providing
an overall thermal transmission coefficient of K= 0.68 W/M deg K for 25mm and
50mm thick panel.
2.
Panels shall be removable from the frame by means of a locking system made out of
an extruded aluminum profile, held in place with one locking strip to ensure air
tightness.
3.
Unit sections shall be mounted on a thick galvanized steel bolted base frame to ensure
stability and permit easy lifting, handling and positioning on site. Unit with sectional
split(s) shall be provided with gaskets and sealing material as well as connection
clamps to permit quick and air tight site assembly.
FANS
A.
Provide centrifugal type, non-overloading design, except as noted with minimum capacities
as noted. Where variable inlet vanes are used, complete assembly shall be factory installed
by the fan manufacturer. The fan horsepower performance characteristics shall be within 5
percent of published catalog rating data of the standard fan without the variable inlet vanes,
where no data is available for the fan with inlet vanes. Inlet vanes shall be capable of
reducing flow to 20 percent of design cu. M/hr. (cfm) at 38 mm (1-1/2inch) w.g. static
pressure and maintain stable performance. Inlet vanes and all operating linkages shall be
provided and assembled by fan manufacturer prior to shipment to job site.
1.
Wheel shall be factory balanced statically and dynamically. Brake horsepower ratings
shall be 5 percent maximum above those noted and published for a minimum of two
(2) years. Drives shall be matched, multiple V -belt drive, unless otherwise noted
with minimum capacity of 1.4 times rated motor hp. Pulleys shall be cast iron.
a.
Motor pulley shall be variable pitch diameter, for fans up to 25 hp arid 1000
rpm, except fans with variable inlet vanes and fixed pitch diameter, over 25 hp
or 1000 rpm. Supply and install one fixed pitch pulley change, as required, per
fan to balance systems. Companion sheaves shall maintain belts parallel. Belt
guards shall be in compliance with applicable safety requirements and with
tachometer opening for fan speed measurements. Manufacturer shall provide
replacement fixed pitched sheaves where needed to balance system.
2.
Provide removable flanged screens at inlets or outlets where no connecting ductwork
is indicated, including inlets to fans in field erected casings.
3.
Bearings shall be lubrication free type ball, roller or taper.
4.
Provide spark resistant construction fans: all where noted, parts in contact with air
shall be non-ferrous. Motor shall be explosion proof, Class I, Group D, Division 2.
Belt drive shall be non-sparking.
B.
Centrifugal fans: Provide full housed, steel housing, with single or double inlet, as noted.
Class III fans shall be all welded. Fan wheels shall be steel. 685 mm (27 inch) diameter and
larger wheels shall be backward curved air foil blade with arrangement 3, except as noted.
Under 685 mm (27 inch) diameter wheels shall be backward curved blade.
1.
Provide arrangement one (1) for SWSI or arrangement three (3) for DWDI fans,
except as noted.
Page 214/374

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
a.
Provide arrangement 1 or 9 for Kitchen exhaust:
Provide cleanout doors for kitchen exhaust fans in scroll with wedge type latches on
fans 600 mm (24 inch) diameter and larger and kitchen exhaust fans. Insulated fans;
doors shall be raised to thickness of covering.
Discharge shall be as noted and submit for review. For adjustable rotatable scroll
discharge, provide Class I and Class II, construction for all sizes or provide for fixed
scroll discharge for all sizes.
Provide scroll drains for all fans and plug, where not used.
Split construction: Provide split construction for fans too large for available doorways
or passageways. Split in half along center of shaft with angles, etc., to allow removal
of section without disturbing inlet and discharge connection; arranged for bolting.
Provide bolts with lock washers and nuts. Construction shall be inspected by
manufacturer after field assembly and certified that they have been properly
assembled and ready for proper operation.
In-line centrifugal fans, shall be full housed, with motor base, centrifugal wheels,
non-overloading design and inlet and outlet flanges. The following shall be as
specified for centrifugal fans: belt drives, bearings (isolated from air stream)
removable flanged screens, c1eanout doors and variable inlet vanes. Provide diffuser
vanes.
C.
For utility sets, provide as noted above for centrifugal fans. Centrifugal fan and motor shall
be mounted on common base and drive shall be adjustable V -belt type except as noted.
Provide backward curved blade for wheels 300 mm (12 inches) and larger or forward and
backward curved blade for wheels under 300 mm (12 inches), as noted. Provide variable
inlet vanes, where noted. Where fans are exposed to weather, provide with combination
weatherproof cover, belt guard and drain.
D.
Provide propeller fans with belt drive, unless noted otherwise and mounted on steel frame.
Motors shall be constant speed, totally enclosed, fan cooled. Provide motor operated
discharge damper or self-acting louvers, where noted. Bearings shall be nylon or ball.
Provide wire safety guard, at inlet. Motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on vibration
isolators.
E.
Vane-axial flow fans: Fans shall be full housed. Steel housing shall be minimum 4.7 mm
(3/16 inch) thick for tube size to 900mm (36 inch) and 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) steel for larger
tube sizes. Fan blades and hub shall be cast aluminum. Bearings shall be as specified for
centrifugal fans. Provide inlet and outlet flanges.
1.
Fan blades shall be air foil type with manually adjustable blades. For automatically
adjustable blades while fan is in operation, refer to Section INSTRUMENTATION
AND CONTROL FOR HVAC.
2.
For accessories, provide inlet bell where indicated, approved type transition inlet duct
and discharge cone. Provide 19 mm (3/4 inch) mesh galvanized steel wire guard for
inlet bell and discharge cone.
3.
Provide belt drive, rated at 1.4 times motor horsepower.
4.
Fan rotor shall be factory tested for static and dynamic balance. Manufacturer shall
certify performance and sound data.
F.
Provide centrifugal fan kitchen range hood exhauster in accordance with details indicated.
2.4
AIR CONDITIONERS
A.
Construction shall be suitable for operation with fan class as noted. Factory assembled units
shall be performance tested and certified per ARI Standard 430-78. Provide centrifugal type
Page 215/374

fans with belt guards for drive external to casing, cooling coils, heating coils and filters. All
sections in casing assembly shall be the same height.
B.
2.5
Factory fabricated type: Provide factory fabricated air conditioner unit complete with fans,
cooling coils, heating coils, filters, by-pass dampers, casings with internal insulation, access
sections, humidifier section, automatic dampers, vibration isolating units, after filter section,
and mixed air section.
1.
Fans shall be centrifugal type with requirements as noted above for Centrifugal Fans.
Fans shall be forward inclined, airfoil, or backward inclined, as scheduled and
mounted on common shaft and secured with keyways and/or set-screws on solid steel
shaft, or secured with taper lock hubs on tubular steel shaft. V -belt drive and belt
guard shall be as noted for centrifugal fans. Adjustable motor base mounted on
extended base frame. Mounting of adjustable motor base on unit casing (top, front or
sides) shall be structurally reinforced and rigid for all ranges of operation. Bearings
shall be self-aligning ball or roller type with Lubricating requirements and minimum
life as noted for Centrifugal Fans. Variable inlet vanes, as noted for Centrifugal Fans.
Fan section shall be isolated from remainder of unit components by flexible
connectors. Ratings shall be certified per current ARI standard 430, and published in
catalog. Unit casing pressure loss shall be clearly indicated.
2.
Casing shall be galvanized or phosphatized cold rolled steel casings, reinforced and
braced with structural members having the same corrosion coating as the panels.
Provide access sections with hinged gasketed doors on opposite sides of casing and at
air inlet and discharge of each coil and at air inlet and discharge of filter section. The
access section shall be minimum 300 mm (12 inch) long in direction of air flow and
full height of unit, less framing. Provide quick opening non-ferrous or stainless steel
handles. Direction of door opening shall be inward on pressure side and outward on
suction side. Provide removable panels on both sides of all coils, filters, and fans.
Provide insulated casings with a minimum 2S mm (1 inch) thick, 48 Kg/M density,
neoprene coated fiberglass board, NFPA-90 approved. All raw edges shall be coated
and protected from air stream. Provide perforated metal liner coated same as casing.
a.
All non-galvanized casing parts shall be factory painted internally and
externally with zinc chromate, iron oxide phenolic paint.
3.
Provide drain pans under cooling coil and extending under fan section.
a.
Drain pans shall be galvanized steel with Type 304 stainless steel inner pan or
liner, turned up 50 mm (2 inches) at edges.
b.
Corners shall be soldered or welded or brazed.
c.
Pitch drain pans to drain outlets. For each drain pan, drain outlet shall be a
minimum 32 mm (1 1/4 inch), galvanized steel flange or pipe nipple and
welded or soldered into bottom of pan. Provide intermediate drain pans at
bottom of each section of cooling coils in banks above the lower coil and pipe
to lowest drain pan, minimum 32 mm (1 1/4 inch) OD copper. Drain pans shall
be accessible for cleaning. Provide molded flexible elastomeric cellular
insulation not in contact with condensate. Intermediate drain pans shall not be
insulated.
4.
Provide filter section and outdoor air and recirculated air mixing section. Provide
eliminators when necessary to prevent moisture carryover. Refer to Section 230500,
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. For vibration isolation, refer to Section
230548, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT.
HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS
A.
Provide factory fabricated type as specified for factory fabricated type air conditioning
units, except omit cooling coils, drain pan and eliminators.
Page 216/374

B.
2.6
Provide site erected type as specified for site erected air conditioning units, except omit
cooling coils, eliminators and drain pan.
COOLING COILS
A.
Provide chilled water cooling coils with minimum rows as noted; but not less than six (6)
rows. Coils shall be factory tested with 2240 kPa (325 psig) compressed air under water.
Provide removable headers at both ends, constructed of steel, cast iron, or copper with male
supply, return, vent and drain connections.
1.
Install coils level.
B.
Construction: Provide copper tubes, 15.9 mm (5/8 inch) brazed into headers with minimum
0.64 mm (0.025 inch) wall thickness and with aluminum fins. Headers shall be seamless
copper with minimum 1.65 mm (0.065 inch) wall thickness. Casings and tube support sheets
shall be as follows:
1.
Type 304 stainless steel.
2.7
HEATING COILS
A.
Provide coils with performance as noted. Maximum temperature variation in air streams 450
mm (18 inch) downstream of coil shall not exceed 1 deg C (2 deg F) under any load
variation. Pitch tubes to header end. Heating coils shall be factory tested at 1724 kPa (250
psig) air pressure under water and with minimum rows as noted. Provide relief caps at every
U-bends to prevent any damages caused by freezing.
B.
Provide copper tubes with minimum tube wall thickness after fin attachment 0.05 mm (.02
inch). Provide stainless steel casing.
1.
Provide aluminum fins.
2.8
AIR FILTERS
A.
All outside air and recirculated air shall be filtered, except as noted. Filters shall be
underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. listed filters. Air flow shall not exceed rated capacity at
specified efficiency. Performance shall be tested per ASHRAE Standard 52-76.
B.
Definitions:
1.
Efficiency: as measured by the Dust Spot Method on Atmospheric Air, per ASHRAE
Test Standard 52-76, unless otherwise noted.
2.
Arrestance: per ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76.
3.
Dust holding capacity: per ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76.
C.
Filter types, provide as follows:

1.
Flat panel, replaceable.
2.
Extended surface, cartridge.
D.
Replaceable flat panel: Media shall be 50 mm (2 inch) thick glass fiber (UL Class II), placed
in fiberboard casing between metal grids, front and rear. Filter frames shall be metal with
holding latches. Average efficiency shall be 15-20 percent. Average arrestance shall be
minimum 70 percent.
1.
Initial resistance at 2.54 M/s face velocity shall be maximum 4.3 mm (0.17 inch) wg
for 50 mm (2 inch) thick unit.
Page 217/374

E.
Replaceable flat panel: media shall be ultra-fine glass fibers, pleated, UL Class I. Casing
shall be aluminized steel U-channel with expanded aluminized steel faceguard on air leaving
side. Thickness shall be 50 mm (2 inches).
1.
Filter frames shall be metal holding latches. Efficiency shall be average, 25 to 30
percent. Initial resistance at 2.54 M/s face velocity shall be maximum 8.9 mm (0.35
inch) w.g. for 50 mm (2 inch) thick unit.
F.
Filter mounting section shall be fully factory-assembled and dimensionally compatible with
factory air handling units, or as shown on plans.
1.
Provide housings with maximum of 178 mm (7 in.) depth in direction of air flow,
constructed of 1.6 mm(No.16 gauge) galvanized steel, and having 100 mm(4-inch)
wide turned-in flanges for a flush exterior.
2.
Flanges shall be pre-drilled for attachment to adjacent equipment or to ductwork.
Both ends of housing shall be provided with rubber gasketing with a double lip seal
and hollow-core design to prevent permanent gasket set.
3.
Housings shall be furnished with two high-pressure access doors rated for 76 mm (3.0
in.) w.g. positive or 100 mm (4.0 in.) w.g. negative pressure. Access doors shall be
mounted on pivot hinges, and shall have variable pressure knob latches. Housing
shall be factory-insulated internally with 25 mm (l in.) thick, 48 Kg/M3 density,
neoprene-coated fiberglass.
4.
Housing shall be of the Universal design and shall accept (1) 100 mm (4 in.), (2) 50
mm (2 in.), (4) 25 mm (1 in.), (1) 50 mm (2 in.) or (2) 25 mm (l in.) filter cells of
throwaway, washable or replaceable media type.
G.
Cleanable type : Provide washable, adhesive coated viscous type, UL Class II metal media,
encased in metal frame and mounted in holding frames and secured with latches. Provide
cells 625 mm (25 inch) x 500 mm (20 inch) x 50 mm (2 inch) deep, except as noted with
rated capacity 2960 M3/hr and initial resistance of 4.6 mm(0.18 inch) w.g. at rated capacity.
Average arrestance at rated capacity shall be minimum 70 percent by ASHRAE Test
Standard 52-76.
1.
Side access housings (for low and medium efficiency filters): Filter mounting section
shall be fully factory assembled and dimensionally compatible with factory fabricated
air handling units, or as shown on plans.
a.
Provide hinged and recessed access doors on both sides of each housing with
hinged cast aluminum spring loaded latches on opposite sides of each door and
closed cell neoprene rubber perimeter gasketing. Hinges shall be zinc plated.
b.
Provide molded polyvinyl chloride flexible filter sealing gaskets with extruded
aluminum retainers. Sealing pressure shall be applied against entering air face
of filter header. Seal adjacent filters by vertical gasket strips attached to filter
header.
c.
Housing shall be minimum 1.6 mm (No.16 gauge) galvanized steel
construction with 100 mm (4 inch) turned-in flanges for attachment to adjacent
equipment. Predrilled attachment holes shall be on not more than 300 mm (12
inch) centers. Provide integral track, for 50 mm (2 inch) thick pre-filters.
d.
Insulate internally the same as air handling unit casing.
2.
Side access housings (for high efficiency filters greater than 60%): Filter mounting
section shall be fully factory assembled and dimensionally compatible with factory
fabricated air handling units, or as shown on plans. Section shall be cataloged for up
to 76 mm (3 inch) w.g. internal positive pressure, and 127 mm (5 inch) w.g. negative
internal pressure.
a.
Provide hinged and recessed double wall access doors on both sides of each
housing with hinged variable pressure knob type latches on opposite sides of
each door, and minimum 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide closed cell neoprene rubber
perimeter gasketing.
Page 218/374

b.
c.
d.
H.
Provide clamping mechanism to individually seal the entire perimeter of each

filter header. Lever arms of "fail safe" design shall be in position before access
doors can be closed. Provide 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide hollow core neoprene
rubber gaskets and extruded aluminum gasket retainers.
construction with 100 mm (4 inch) wide turned-in flanges for attachment to
adjacent equipment and predrilled attachment holes on not more than 200 mm
(12 inch) centers.
Insulate internally the same as air handling unit casing and provide door
insulation inside double wall construction.
Extended surface, supported pleat, cartridge filter: Provide replaceable cartridge type with
media constructed of moisture resistant glass fiber arranged in a deep pleated pattern with
alternating layers of crimped aluminum separators. Media pack inserted into galvanized
steel cell sides with galvanized steel headers on air entering side and crossed wire bracing
on air leaving side. Media shall be in accordance with UL Class I. Rated capacity shall be
3400 M/hr.
1.
Types:
a.
Average efficiency shall be 80-85 percent. Net effective area shall be minimum
4.8 M per 1700 M3/hr of rated capacity. Initial resistance at rated capacity
shall be 15 mm (0.55 inch) w.g. Minimum dust holding capacity shall be 38.9
grams/m media area, at final resistance of 30 mm (1.2 inch) w.g.
2.
Side access housings (for low and medium efficiency filters): Filter mounting section
shall be fully factory assembled and dimensionally compatible with factory fabricated
air handling units, or as shown on plans.
a.
Provide hinged and recessed access doors on both sides of each housing with
hinged cast aluminum spring loaded latches on opposite sides of each door and
closed cell neoprene rubber perimeter gasketing. Hinges shall be zinc plated.
b.
Provide molded polyvinyl chloride flexible filter sealing gaskets with extruded
aluminum retainers. Sealing pressure shall be applied against entering air face
of filter header. Adjacent filters shall be sealed by vertical gasket strips
attached to filter header.
c.
construction with 100 mm (4 inch) turned-in flanges for attachment to adjacent
equipment and predrilled attachment holes shall be on not more than 300 mm
(12 inch) centers. Provide Integral track, for 50 mm (2 inch) thick pre-filters.
d.
Insulate internally the same as air handling unit casing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Propeller fans: Connect to outdoor discharge louver frame and support from overhead
construction by steel rods and inserts, or from wall or partition as noted.
B.
Air Conditioners: Provide drain piping to floor drain with minimum 32 mm (1-1/4 inch)
galvanized steel with drainage type fittings. Reassemble factory fabricated components in
field, at no additional cost, when units are shipped in sections.
C.
Cooling coils: Provide air and water counterflow coils with stainless steel supports. On each
bank, provide 3 pieces of 76 mm (3 inch) channel, length equal to coil depth in direction of
air flow, flanges downward resting in drain pan. Locate for equal loading. Over channels,
Page 219/374

provide 0.85 mm(No. 22 USSG) sheet with edges turned downward to form safing between
coils and drain pan, notched to permit water drainage.
D.
Filters: Joints between holding frames of filters and enclosing ductwork shall be gasketed,
caulked or sealed against air leakage. Holding frame to holding frame joints likewise shall
be sealed against air leakage.
1.
Provide access doors 500 mm (20 inch) wide by 1420 mm (56 inch) high in ductwork
or casings for servicing and removal of filters. Smaller size will be permitted if
suitable for reaching to all parts of filter installation. Refer to Section 230500, Sheet
Metal Work.
2.
Filter chamber shall be sized for operator to conveniently perform all operations.
3.
Temporary filters and replacement filters:
a.
Temporary filters: Prior to operation of systems with filters, provide all
necessary temporary filters of types.
1)
Prior to system balancing provide all temporary filters and clean or
replace filters when dust loading exceeds manufacturer's
recommendations and/or efficiency of filters of system is
impaired.
b.
Replacement filters: Prior to final acceptance of systems or operation of
systems by Employers representative, replace temporary filters.
1)
Notify Employers representative in writing no less than 7 days
before systems are operated for beneficial use of Employer and
temporary filters and/or filter media used during balancing period
are replaced. In absence of such notice, filters or filter media shall
not be replaced on or after starting date of guarantee period.
Page 220/374

SECTION 251300 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL AND MONITORING

NETWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ABBREVIATION LIST

No.
Abbreviation
Description
ACB
Air Circuit Breaker
AI
Analogue Input
ANSI/IEC
American National Standards Institute/International Electro technical

Commission
AO
Analogue Output
BACnet
Building Automation and Control Networking Protocol
BOQ
Bill Of Quantity
CE
European Community/ European Conformity - The initials "CE" do not stand for
any specific words but are a declaration by the manufacturer that his product
meets the requirements of the applicable European Directive(s).
DDC
Direct Digital Controller
DI
Digital Input
10
DIN
Ditches Institute for Normal
11
DO
Digital Output
12
EN
European Standard
13
EU
European Union
15
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
16
HMI
Human Machine Interface
17
HTML
Hyper Text Markup Language
18
HVAC
Heating and Ventilation Air Conditioning
20
HRB
Hanoi Metropolitan Rail Transport Project Board
21
iBMS
Integrated Building Management System
22
IEC
International Efficiency Consortium
23
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
14
19
Page 221/374

24
I/O Module
Input/Output module
25
IP
Internet Protocol
26
LAN
Local Area Network
27
LCD
Liquid-Crystal Display
28
LED
Light-Emitting Diode
29
MCCB
Moduled Case Circuit Breaker
30
OCC
Operation Control Center
31
ODBC
Open Data Base Connectivity
32
OPC
OLE for Process Control OLE: Object Linking and Embedding
33
PC
Personal Computer
34
PIC
Project Implementation Consultant (SYSTRA)
35
RAM
performance
Reliability, Availability and Maintainability performance
36
SDRAM
Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
37
TCN
Technical Standard
38
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol
39
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
40
UPS
Uninterrupted Power Supply
41
USB
Universal Serial Bus
42
VAC
Volts Alternating Current
43
VCC
Vietnam Engineering Consultants JSC
44
VDC
Volts Direct Current
45
VRV
Variable Refrigeration Volume
46
WAN
Wide Area Network
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK
A.
BMSs main function

1. Ensure monitoring, local/remote control and real time operation of the various technical
equipments of following system (in case of being allowed):
a. Elevators,
b. HVAC,
c. Ventilation system,
d. Water supply and drainage system,
Page 222/374

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
e. Fire alarm and fire fighting system,

f. Power distribution system,
g. Lighting system,
h. Access control system,
i. CCTV system,
j. Public area system,
k. Future systems,
l. BMS own equipment.
Allow a simple programming of the parameters and a complete view by means of a comprehensive
operating system with friendly user interface.
Manage all points (remote alarm, remote signalling, remote metering, remote controlling and
remote measuring ). The management of the information shall integrate at least the hereafter
described functions.
Memorise and build up history of events, the history events are available when user requires.
Communicate between sub-systems that connect to the BMS.
BMS workstations shall be located in the master control room or other places that BMS connect to
via LAN. There are very workstations which be connected at the same time. Workstations
accesses are locked according to the user profiles (includes Name of user, password and access
level). When the Operators take the access and control in the BMS server, the BMS will make a
report time by time. There are many level of access to limit the users access.
The system shall be capable of controlling via Internet Explorer with user name and password
supplied by the authorised partner for access the system. All login and logout must be reported.
Automatically logout in case of login for a long time without operating.
The system shall be open ended, it means that the system will be possible to connect points or
equipments of BMS network without any replacement of the controllers already installed.
BMSs components:
The BMS includes 3 levels:

1.
Management level: Includes servers (main server and redundant server) and workstations and the
controlling software
2. Automatic level: Includes DDC with I/O Module.
3. Field level: Includes field devices (sensor, touch-screen, )
Central servers shall be located in the OCC technical room;
BMS workstations shall be located in the Depot master control room or other places that central servers
connect to via LAN. There are very workstations which can be connected at the same time.
C.
Scope of the BMS Contractor

1. Managing the BMS project and coordinating its interfaces
2. Designing the building management system
3. Supplying and installing the devices (includes wiring from DDC Panel to control Panel of the other
systems). Name and the quantity of the devices will be shown on the BOQ table. Places of the
installing will be shown on the attached layouts.
4. Programing the system following the main contractors requirement.
5. Testing & commissioning, training, maintenance in warranty stage.
6. Training (operating and maintenance)
7. Maintenance in warranty stage
8. Writing project documentation
Page 223/374

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements included in the Contract Document Chapter 2: Technical Requirements shall apply to all
work in this section
1.4 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
No.
A.
section.
B.
standards.
Design standards
EU standard about open data communication in building automation.
Standards about performances checking for electric devices in industry

and commerce
Code
EN 14908
FCC Part 15
(TCN 68-161: 1996)
(Avoiding influences of electric power line to telecom system Technical

requirements)
3
Working Group develops standards for Ethernet based LANs (Integrated

interface Technical requirements)
IEEE 802.3
(TCN68-172:1998)
IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC

Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41
(TCN68-135:2001)
(Surge Voltages that protect telecom system Technical requirements)

(TCN 68-174: 2006)
(Standards about surge voltages and earthing for telecom systems)
Basic environmental testing procedures
IEC 68, IEC 68-2-6,
(Telecom devices General requirements about environment and

climate)
(TCN 68-149:1995)
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions
IEC 60332-1
Optical cable Technical requirements
(TCN68-160:1996)
The CE marking certifies that a product has met EU consumer safety,

health or environmental requirements.
CE
UL916 is the UL standard for safety for energy management equipment.
UL-916
The UL safety standard for industrial control equipment
UL-508,
(Telecom terminal Electrical Safety requirements)
(TCN68-190:2003)
Page 224/374

10
Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)/
ANSI/IEC 60529-2004
11
The European Unions EMC standard for electrical equipment for

measurement, control.
EN 61326
12
EU specification for low voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial

use mounting rails.
EN 50022
13
Specification for low voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use
mounting rails.
BS5584:1978
1.5 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

A.
Submit shop drawings, Coordination Service Drawings (CSD), product data, samples and certificates of
compliance required by contract documents.
E.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
F.
G.
1.7 WARRANTY
H.
I.
1.8 SPARE PARTS

J.

K.
1.9 FUNCTIONS OF THE BMS SYSTEMS

A.
FUNCTIONS OF HVAC SYSTEM
1.
The data is displayed on the BMS servers graphic display to make users easily observe the
working status, activity status, and recognizing systems faults so that the users could quickly
fix systems fault and enhance systems productivity.
2.
The BMS has the following functions:

a. Supervising On/off status of the conditioning devices.
b. Supervising Cooling and Heating status.
c. Supervising and displaying temperature in the rooms.
Page 225/374

d. Supervising air compressor.
e. Supervising Indoors Fan status.
f. Supervising Chiller status.
3.
B.
After installing, server BMS will scan automatically whole data of the chillers and VRV system,
so the systems faults is found and fixed on time.
FUNCTIONS OF VENTILATION FAN

1.
The Ventilation system includes: Fresh supplying Fan, Exhausted Fan, staircase Pressurizing
Fan, Toilet Exhausted Fan.
2.
In this project, BMS has the following functions:

a.
b.
a.
C.
Fans for basement floors:

i.
Supervising On/off status.
ii.
Supervising Trip status.
Exhaust Air extract Fans for WC:

i.
ii.
Staircase Pressurizing Fan:

i.
ii.
FUNCTION FOR WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE SYSTEM:

BMS shall monitor the following status:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Domestic Water supply

a.
Supervising On/off status of pumps.
b.
Supervising Trip status of pumps.
Pressure pumps:
a.
b.
Supervising Trip status of pumps.
Drainage pumps:
a.
b.
Supervising trip status of pumps.
FUNCTION FOR FIRE ALARMING AND FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM:

1.
Fire Alarm system:

a.
The fire alarm system includes main panels for zones. This main panels control all
security equipments
b.
i.
Smoke and heat detectors.
ii.
Fire dampers and smoke dampers
BMS Functions: Supervising zone by zone via dry contacts in control panel
Inputs (depend on vendor ability of the system)
i.
General failure( connecting fault)
ii.
Fire Alarm area
iii.
Area fault
Page 226/374

iv.
Detector in alarm
v.
Detector fault
Outputs
There are no remote controls from BMS concerning the fire alarm.
2.
Fire Fighting system:

a. The fire fighting pump system includes:
i.
Fire fighting pumps
ii.
Jockey pump
iii.
Water fighting tank
iv.
..
b. In this project, BMS system will supervise the following signals:

i.
Supervising all pump status: On/off, Trip,
ii.
Supervising pressure in the fire pipe (Pressure sensor will be supplied by

BMS contractor)
iii.
All necessary information need to be transmitted to BMS
Inputs Status signal:

Fire fighting pumps status:
i.
On/off pumps status
ii.
Pump Fault
iii.
Pipe pressure
Outputs
i.
E.
There are no remote controls from BMS concerning the fire protection
FUNCTIONS OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM:

1.
The BMS system will be adapted to the existing power distribution system
a. The Power Distribution system mainly includes:
2.
i.
Low voltage switchboards
ii.
Emergency power supply: 1 generator sets with fittings and utilities
Transformers and protections equipments status:

a.
There are 2 transformers. Each one is protected by one circuit breaker up stream cell.
i.
Control functions:
ii.
iii.
Inputs (depend on vendor ability of the system):
Monitoring MCCB on/off status
Monitoring MCCB trip status
Transformers status (Run/Stop, Trip, ...)
Outputs
3.
Supervising Transformmaters and protection equipmentss status
There are no remote controls from the BMS concerning the

transformers and protections
Emergency supply
a.
Control functions: There are no control function from BMS system
Page 227/374

i.
Inputs:
a) Measuring voltage and current.
b) Measuring duty
c) Measuring frequency
ii.
Outputs:
a) There are no output signals from BMS system.
4.
Power Panel:
a.
b.
F.
Inputs For each PP:

i.
Status of each MCCB and ACB: On/of, Trip
i.
There is no output signal from BMS server.
Outputs
FUNCTION FOR LIGHTING SYSTEM:

1.
The lighting control panel and push buttons in each floor make handily turning on/off ability at
this one floor. The lighting lines are connected through control panel at each floor. In this
panel, the relay is connected to the others and connected to the BMS server to control
correlative lighting zone.
2.
The BMS system will control some lighting lines (at zone 6 and External area) and supervise
all remain lighting lines.
3.
Supervising and controlling via BMS server or wall mounted Operator.
4.
Only BMS system can control these lighting lines.
5.
There are 2 types of lighting controls in terms of depot lighting areas:

a.

i. On/off status of lighting lines.
ii. Fault status of lighting lines
b.
Outputs
i. Controlling lighting lines at zone 6 and external lines.
G. FUNCTIONS OF ELEVATOR SYSTEM:

a.

i. Floor levels of each elevator.
ii. Operating status
iii. Normally operating
b.
Outputs
i.
H.
There is no output signal from BMS server.
FUNCTIONS OF ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

a. Supervising these status following (depend on vendor ability of the system):
i. On/off status.
ii. Trip status.
iii. Access control fault
b.
Controlling: door opening/closing

i.
The Access control system is provided by the telecom contractor. The telecom
contractor shall provide dry contacts for depot access control supervision.
Page 228/374

Alternatively, the contractor shall provide connection via high level protocol
(BACnet IP or Modbus or OPC) to connect to BMS system, in this case BMS
system is available to supervise information of accessor
I.
FUNCTIONS OF CLOCK SYSTEM:

a. Supervise these status following:
i.
Trip status of each clock.
ii.
Time status of each clock.
iii.
Control: there is no control signal from BMS.
b.
J.
The Clock system is provided by the telecom contractor. The telecom contractor shall provide
dry contacts for depot access control supervision.
MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS:

a.
Alarm management. The method works as follow:

i.
ii.
b.
Historic consulting:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
K.
When operators acknowledge an alarm, an alarm instruction display is displayed.

Each alarm instruction display contains instructions specific to the point in alarm.
After carrying out the instructions, operators must select a predefined response or
enter a description of their actions in an alarm response display. This response is
recorded in the journal, which provides an audit trail for future analysis and troubleshooting.
The server can be configured to keep a historical record of acquired data. This
historical information can be shown in Station using the standard trend displays or
custom charts.
Standard history allows the recording of a snapshot value every minute, and
calculated averages at six minute, one hour, eight hour, twenty four hour intervals.
Fast history allows the recording of a snapshot value at regular intervals (configurable
between 1 and 30 seconds).
Extended history allows the recording of snapshot values at one hour, eight hour and
twenty four hour intervals.
c.
Administration configuration and authority management: There are 6 level of

administration: View only, acknowledge only, operator, supervisor, engineer, manager.
Each level has its own access level (shown on 6.2 Software technical specification)
d.
Supervision of BMS components
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS

a.
b.
c.
d.
Data acquisition and control: The server acquires data by polling devices for individual point
data, and exceptions. This acquired data is processed and stored in the database as point
parameter values. Status point parameters are used for all point status. Status points have
various parameters that can be used for storing status values in the range 0-7. These
parameters are PV and OP. Typically PV should be used for point values digital points. OP
should be used for values to be sent to I9000 points, namely output points, area control etc.
Each point parameter, except PV, has a source address to nominate the source of the value in
the device, and a destination address to nominate the address in the device that should be
controlled. The server acquires point values from the I9000 by Exception reporting. Every 2
seconds the server sends a short form poll request to each I9000. The I9000 replies with any
points that have changed state.
Clock management
Printing and exporting data
Page 229/374

L.
GENERAL LIST OF THE COMPONENTS THAT ARE SUPPERVISED BY BMS

Equipment
Qty
Unit
HVAC
set
Lighting line
60
line
Elevator
piece
Low voltage switchboard
piece
Fire alarm panel (for each

fire zone)
set
Lighting line
line
piece
Lighting line
line
HVAC
set
Drainage pump
piece
piece
Lighting line
line
piece
Lighting line
56
line
Operator interface module
piece
piece
Note
Scope of work
Administrative Building (for

areas No 1, 2, 14, 31(A))
Car Parking Roofs (for area

No 3)
Works Train Workshop (for

area No 4)
Washing Machine Area and

Technical Room (for area No
5)
Stabling Area (for area No 6)
Page 230/374

Pit Wheel Lathe Building (for

area No 7)
Light, Heavy and Bogie

Overhaul Maintenance
Workshop (for areas No 8, 9,
10, 11)
Overhaul Maintenance
Workshop (for area No 12)
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
piece
Drainage pump
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
91
line
piece
Drainage pump
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
42
line
piece
Drainage pump
piece
Lighting line
line
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
piece
Drainage pump
piece
Traction Sectioning Technical

Room (for area No 13)
Track Maintenance Workshop

(for area No 15)
Page 231/374

Wayside Equipments
Maintenance Workshop and
General Material Store (for
areas No 17, 19)
Hazardous Product Storage

(for area No 20)
HVAC
set
Lighting line
51
line
piece
Lighting line
line
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
piece
Generator
piece
Lighting line
line
Drainage pump
piece
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
Lighting & Power Substation

(for area No 21 (A))
Lighting & Power Substation

and Traction Rectifier
Substation (for area No 21(B),
22, 24)
Signaling Equipments Room

and Industrial Water
Treatment Plant (for areas No
23, 27)
Drivers and Cleaners Staff

Rooms (for areas No 28, 29)
Page 232/374

piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
piece
Lighting line
line
piece
Water supply pump
piece
Pump for Chlorine mixing
piece
Backwash water pump
piece
Fighting pump
piece
Primary pump
piece
Pressure transmitter for fire

fighting water pipe
piece
Deep well pump
piece
Rain-water pump
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
piece
Staff Canteen (for area No 31

(B))
External Lighting
Water Supply Plant (Area 25)
Guard house
Page 233/374

Access system (at each

secure area, each building
access and at each depot
access)
Will be provided by the

telecom contractor
set
Clock system
Will be provided by the

telecom contractor
set
1.10 GENERAL BMS ARCHITECTURE

A.
BMSs general architecture will be shown on the drawing BMSs schematic diagram and BMSs
functional block diagram (reference - PIC-TEC-GPV-BMS-D00-63502-B)
B.
The following table shows the main components of the BMS system and their location in this project:
No
Equipment
Unit
Quantity
Server
Min Intel Xeon dual core running at a minimum of 3.0
GHz
Min 2 GB of RAM
A graphic card capable of 1280x1024 pixel
resolution and 65K colors
A 12 function-key keyboard
Mouse pointing device
Min 100GB Hard disk drive
A DVD ROM drive
TCP/IP adaptor
LCD 24 inches
Power supply 750W
Set
Station
Min Pentium 4 running at a minimum of 3.0 GHz
Min 1 GB of RAM
A graphic card capable of 1280x1024 pixel
resolution and 65K colors
Min 80 GB Hard disk drive
A DVD ROM drive
TCP/IP adaptor
LCD 24 inches
Power supply 750W
Set
BMS software
Set
Lonworks interface
Bacnet interface
Modbus interface
OPC interface
Note
Page 234/374

8
Point total
3,000
Dot Printer (80 column)
piece
10
Laser Printer A4
piece
11
Switch 24 ports 10/100 Mbps
piece
12
UPS 6kVA
piece
13
UPS 2kVA
piece
14
DDC controller at Administrative Building
14.1
DDC controller with 104 physical points
Set
14.2
DI module 12 inputs (includes module & socket)
Set
15
14.3
DO module 6 outputs (includes module & socket)
Set
14.5
DDC panel's cover (1200x800x250) &

accessories (power supply, terminal, ventilator,
alarm lamp, signal cable,...)
Set
14.6
UPS 1kVA
Set
15
DDC controller at area No 6
15.1
Set
15.2
Set
15.3
Set
16
15.4
Set
11
15.5

Set
15.6
UPS 1kVA
Set
16
16.1
Set
16.2
Set
16.3
Set
20
16.4
Set
16.5

Set
16.6
UPS 1kVA
Set
17
Page 235/374

17.1
Set
17.2
Set
17.3
Set
21
17.4
Set
17.5
AI module 8 inputs (includes module & socket)
Set
17.6

Set
17.7
UPS 1kVA
Set
Field devices & accessories
18
18.2
Pressure transmitter for fire fighting water pipe
piece
18.3
piece
18.4
PVC D20
18.5
Signal cable STP-18AWG 1P
18.6
Signal cable 2x1.5mm2 Cu/PVC
18.7
Signal cable CAT6
18.8
Labour cost for installing, testing and commissioning
set
1.11 INTERNAL INTERFACES
A. Interface with HVAC system

a.
BMS supervises the HVAC system via modules integrating with BACnet, OPC protocol. HVAC
providers have to supply devices which can connect with other systems via BACnet IP.
Page 236/374

b.
VRV system is integrated into BMS system via BACnet IP protocol by BACnet gateway (be
provided by VRV contractor) to convert local protocol into BACnet IP protocol. The conditioner
system and Chiller system are integrated into BMS by high level interface. The conditioner system
have to make the point matrix to deliver to BMS.
B. Interface with Ventilation Fan

a.
Ventilation system is integrated into BMS system by low interface (Dry contacts) via DDC
Panel.
Server BMS
SWitch
BAC Net/IP
DDC Panel
Ventilation
system
C. Interface with water supply and drainage system

a.
D.
Water Supply and Drainage system is integrated into BMS system via low interface ( dry
contacts) via DDC Panel
Interface with Fire Alarming and Fire Fighting system:
Page 237/374

1.
Interface with Fire Alarm:
2.
a.
Input
Output
a. Fire Alarm system is integrated into BMS system via low interface ( dry contacts) via DDC
Panel
Interface with Fire Fighting:

Fire Fighting system is integrated into BMS system via low interface ( dry contacts) via DDC
Panel
E.
Interface with Power distribution system:

1.
The Power Distribution system mainly includes:

a. Transformers: 2 transformer 22KV/380V
b. Low voltage switchboards
c. Emergency power supply: 1 generator sets with fittings and utilities
Page 238/374

2.
Interface with transformers and protections:

a. There are 2 transformers. Each one is protected by one circuit breaker up stream cell.
b. Transformers and Protections monitoring system is integrated into BMS system via low
interface ( dry contacts) via DDC Panel
3.
Interface with power emergency supply:

a. Interfacing with Generator: The BMS interface with Generator system via Modbus
protocol:
4.
Interface with Floor Power Panel:

a. Floor Power Panel monitoring system is integrated into BMS system via low interface ( dry
contacts) via DDC Panel
Ethernet TCP/IP
Server BMS
SWitch
Output
Power Panel
Input
DDC Panel
F. Interface with Lighting system:
Page 239/374

a.
Lighting system is integrated into BMS system via low interface ( dry contacts) via DDC Panel
Page 240/374

G. Interface with Elevator system:
1.
Elevators are connected to BMS via high level interface as Bacnet, Modbus,...protocol:
1.12 EXTERNAL INTERFACE:
A.
Interface with Access Control system:

1.
The Access control system is provided by the telecom contractor. The telecom contractor shall
provide dry contacts for depot access control supervision.
2.
Access Control system shall have own Control Panel, and the BMS connect to this panel to
supervise and control open/close door and trip status.
B.
Interface with Clock system:

1.
C.
Interface with Clock system will be shown later by the Clock system contractor.
Interface with LAN system:
1.
Interface with LAN system will be shown later by the LAN system contractor.
Page 241/374

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Simplifying operation: repetitive procedures and functions are programmed to operate

automatically.
B.
Decreasing operation cost, energy cost and operating human ressource.
C.
Supplying the fast reaction with the customers demands and failures.
D.
Decreasing energys charge: centralized control management and energy management.
E.
The better management of equipments in project: by the storage data system, the maintenance
program and automatically warning report system.
F.
Flexibility in program pursuant to claim, size, operation and open requirement.
G. Improving the operating system by integrating software and hardware system of many different
subsystems: Fire Detection, Safety, Access Control, Lighting Control, ...
H.
Time life is approximately 40 years, the first investment cost of modern building shall become
small in comparison with total building operating cost: the operating cost approximately occupies
75% of total cost, while project building investment cost only occupies 11%.
I.
J.
The modern building is equipped with many expensive service systems to satisfy more and more
demand of user following:
a.
Ensuring the quality
b.
Dependable activity
c.
Efficiency
d.
Extending the working life
Applying the building integrated solution makes it to be centralized and simplified in the building
operating, monitoring and management and to be better management and monitoring of
equipments in building via historic data, maintenance programs, warning system, since then
decrease the probability failure in the system.
Scope of work
Equipment
Administrative Building (for areas

No 1, 2, 14, 31(A))
Qty
Unit
HVAC
set
Lighting line
60
line
Elevator
piece
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Note
Page 242/374

Car Parking Roofs (for area No 3)
Works Train Workshop (for area

No 4)
Fire alarm panel (for

each fire zone)
set
Lighting line
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Lighting line
line
HVAC
set
Drainage pump
piece
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Lighting line
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Lighting line
56
line
Operator interface
module
piece
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Drainage pump
piece
HVAC
set
Washing Machine Area and

Technical Room (for area No 5)
Stabling Area (for area No 6)
Pit Wheel Lathe Building (for area

No 7)
Light, Heavy and Bogie Overhaul

Maintenance Workshop (for areas
Page 243/374

No 8, 9, 10, 11)
Overhaul Maintenance Workshop

(for area No 12)
Traction Sectioning Technical

Room (for area No 13)
Track Maintenance Workshop (for

area No 15)
Wayside Equipments
Maintenance Workshop and
General Material Store (for areas
No 17, 19)
Hazardous Product Storage (for
Lighting line
91
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Drainage pump
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
42
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Drainage pump
piece
Lighting line
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Drainage pump
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
51
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Lighting line
line
Page 244/374

area No 20)
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Generator
piece
Lighting line
line
Drainage pump
piece
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Lighting & Power Substation (for

area No 21 (A))
Lighting & Power Substation and

Traction Rectifier Substation (for
area No 21(B), 22, 24)
Signaling Equipments Room and

Industrial Water Treatment Plant
(for areas No 23, 27)
Drivers and Cleaners Staff Rooms

(for areas No 28, 29)
Staff Canteen (for area No 31 (B))
Page 245/374

Lighting line
line
Operator interface
module
piece
Water supply pump
piece
Pump for Chlorine

mixing
piece
Backwash water
pump
piece
Fighting pump
piece
Primary pump
piece
Pressure transmitter
for fire fighting water
pipe
piece
Deep well pump
piece
Rain-water pump
piece
HVAC
set
Lighting line
line
Low voltage
switchboard
piece
Access system (at each secure

area, each building access and at
each depot access)
Will be provided by
the telecom contractor
set
Clock system
Will be provided by
the telecom contractor
set
External Lighting
Water Supply Plant (Area 25)
Guard house
Page 246/374

2.2. OPERATIONNAL PERFORMANCES

A.
The operational performance of the Building Management System shall enable the
operators to supervise the depot under satisfactory conditions.
B.
Response Time
Type of Response Time

Execution time of remote controls from system or operator consoles
Performance
< 2s
Display time of remote Indications and states on the operator consoles
< 2s
Periodicity of screen view refresh on the operator consoles

This requirement is concerning information developed by the system and
displayed to the operator. This requirement is not concerning information
from the line (remote indications).
< 0,5s
Elapsed time between elementary key-boarding action and its feedback on

the operator consoles
< 0,1s
Display time of a new screen window on the operator consoles
< 2s
Opening time of a dialogue box on the operator consoles
< 0,3s
Display time of data retrieval results on the operator consoles

Beyond this time, the estimation of time left shall be indicated to the
operator.
Elapsed time between an alarm acknowledgement request from an console
and the update of the list of alarms on all system consoles
< 2s per storage period of 6

hours
< 0,5s
Starting time of BMS application at initialization (cold start) of the operator

consoles
< 1min
Starting time of BMS application at initialization (cold start) of the central

servers
< 5min
Fail over time of central servers

Inside this time, central servers shall be again efficient and permit the use of
BMS functions in a normal mode.
< 30s
C.
Chronological analysis
In order to analyze afterwards a sequence of events with an acceptable accuracy the
number of data samples must be sufficient. Therefore, every alarm or event shall be dated
with a precision of 10 ms by the Controller that receives it from equipment. This date is
called the origin date of the alarm or event.
D.
Uninterrupted Power Supply
1.
The BMS equipment in the depot technical rooms shall integrate backup power supply 1 hour
at least.
Page 247/374

2.
At BMS central room: UPS used for 2 servers (1 main server and 1 redundant server), 1
workstation and other equipments (print, switch) must be at least capacity 6KVA.
3.
At other place that has workstation (01 in the OCC operation room, 01 in the building 4 and 02
at both guard houses): UPS used for each workstation with capacity of 1KW must be at least
capacity 2KVA.
4.
At DDC panel: UPS used for Direct Digital Controller with its I/O modules and other equipments
(sensor etc.) must be at least 1KVA of capacity
E.
Expandability
5.
The various extensions will be as much as possible performed by simple addition of racks or
boards on a modular basis.
6.
It must be possible to make extension to the BMS in the future to add new equipment to
supervise without need to replace BMS equipment.
7.
Hardware expandability:
8.
a.
Connectors to be linked to additional modules.
b.
Spare space in shelves to accommodate new boards.
Software expandability:
a.
Addition of new items managed by the software shall carry out by modifications of
parameters tables. The size of the tables shall not be an obstacle.
b.
Various elementary configurations of the ultimate line shall be incorporated in the

initial software.
2.3. HARDWARE DEVICES

A.
BMS equipments shall be located in air-conditioned environment and protected against water and
Dust. And the equipments of BMS system must be the professional equipment. The contractor shall
propose the latest equipment / software in market corresponding to the performance required.
2.4. CONTROL DEVICES

A.
BMS server:
9.
The BMS servers are placed in the center control room.
10. Centre BMS servers shall be integrated in a 19 inch standard rack cabinets with its
administration console. This cabinet shall be installed on support because of the false floor.
This cabinet shall be protected against water and dust, and have easy access for maintenance
team. It shall contain a cooling system if the technical room is not air-conditioned.
11. 02 units with following minimum configuration: (01 main server and 01 redundancy server)
a.
Min Intel Xeon dual-core running at a minimum of 3.0 GHz. The server must be
professional equipment. The network firewall must be available for all servers.
b.
Min 2 GB of RAM
c.
A graphic card capable of 1280x1024 pixel resolution and 65K colors
Page 248/374

B.
e.
f.
g.
Min 320GB Hard disk drive
h.
A DVD ROM drive
i.
TCP/IP adaptor
j.
Power supply 750W
There are 4 BMS stations (one at the OCC, one in the DCC (building 4) and 02 at 02 guard
house) for building operators with following minimum configuration:
a.
Min Pentium 4 running at 3.0 GHz. The workstation must be a professional equipment.
The network firewallmust be available for all workstation.
b.
Min 1 GB RAM
c.
A graphics card capable of 1280x1024 pixel resolution and 65K colors
d.
LCD 24 inch
e.
80 GB Hard disk drive
f.
g.
A mouse pointing device
h.
TCP/IP adaptor
i.
Power supply 230V
OCC technical cabinet

1.
D.
LCD 24 inches.
BMS station:
1.
C.
d.
01 technical cabinet for 02 central servers, 01 switches, firewall and 01 UPS at the OCC.
a.
19 inch standard rack
b.
Protected against water and dust (IP 51 minimum)
c.
Easy access for maintenance team
d.
Protected power supply with maintenance electrical socket
e.
Installed on support because of the false floor
Switchs
1.
04 switch 24 ports
2.
The 10/100/1000 Switch shall provide non-blocking, wire speed switching for 10, 100 and 1000
megabit network-client. It supports upgrading high requirement workstations for full speeds as
necessary while continuing to service other clients at their current speeds.
Page 249/374

3.
E.
F.
Characteristics:
a.
Standard: IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x, 802.3ab
b.
Ports: 24 RJ-45 10/100/1000
c.
Cable type: Category 5e or better
d.
LEDs: system, 1 through 24
e.
Power Input: 110-120VAC, 100W
Firewall
1.
The soft firewall must be available for all servers.
2.
The Network Firewall between the whole system (includes BMS, CCTV, HVAC, ) and
Internet shall be provided and configured by telecom contractor.
Printers
1.
2.
01 matric printer shall be located in the OCC technical room for maintenance and
administration.
01 lazer printer shall be located in the OCC operating room for BMS operators. This printer
shall be shared between the different BMS users (on shared network).
3.
Characteristics of matric printer:

a.
Number of pins: 24 pins
b.
Column: 80 columns
c.
Print direction: Bi-direction with logic seeking
d.
Interface: USB, Serial I/F
4. Chareacteristics of lazer printers:

e.
Color laser printer allowing edition of reports and graphical displays
f.
Paper size supported: minimum A4/A3
g.
Color print Resolution: 600*600 dpi
h.
Connectivity: Ethernet, USB
i.
Color print speed 20 PPM (color)
j.
Duty cycle 80000 pages
G. UPS
1.
2.
01 UPS 6KVA-220VAC for 02 servers and 01 workstation at the OCC. The UPS shall be
integrated in BMS server via RS232 interface (recommend Modbus protocol) to supervise
working status.
03 UPS 1KVA-220VAC for 03 workstations at the DCC and 02 guard houses The UPSs are
located at building 4 and 02 guard houses (where the workstations are located).
Page 250/374

3.
H.
04 UPS 1KVA-220VAC for 04 DDC Panels (include 09 DDCs, and location of the DDC Panels
is shown on the drawing BMSs schematic diagram and BMSs functional block diagram reference PIC-TEC-GPV-BMS-D00-63502-B) The UPSs shall be rackable and located in the
DDC protected Panels.
Direct Digital Controller (DDC):

1.
The DDC is an Ethernet-based, freely programmable building automation controller. It

incorporates the two major open standards in building automation: BACnet/IP and
LONWORKS
2.
The DDC can host a huge variety of building management applications, be it traditional heating,
ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) applications, energy management functions, including
optimum start/stop, night purge, and maximum load demand, supervisory functions for lighting,
sunblind, heat and energy metering and many other applications.
3.
By virtue of its "peer-to-peer" concept, DDC is not dependent upon the availability of super
ordinate centrals or application network controllers.
4.
Main require features of the DDC:

a.
Universal operation: Operate the DDC from any place, from any integrated PC! An
integrated web-server allows local and remote operation by standard browsers.
b.
Expandable trend buffer: The onboard trend buffer can store minimum 64,000 trend
entries, and can be expanded using standard Compact Flash Cards (type 1 or 2).
c.
Fast application control: Four selectable control loop priorities (multitasking), selectable
control loop cycle times, and event-driven switching tables allow for tailored and highly
effective applications control.
d.
Reliable control performance: Embedded LINUX ensures reliable, independent, and

secure operation, especially for systems with Internet access.
e.
Network security: Based on its design as an IP device, it can easily be integrated into any
existing network security mechanism.
f.
5.
Flexible mounting options: DIN-rail, wall, or panel front door mounting.
Operator interface
a.
The DDC is operated via a standard browser. By default, an integrated web-server provides
all operation pages for a full browser-based operation. Through the consequent use of
software standards, any PC platform can be used as an operator interface (client). In
addition to laptops, desktop PCs, or industrial PCs, panel PCs or touch screen PCs can
also be used for direct flush mounting into cabinet doors (IP65). Other than the operating
system and Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox, no software needs to be installed on the
client PCs.
b.
Specifications:
i.
Communication Protocols: BACnet/IP, LonTalk, HTTP, FTP
ii.
Hardware Interfaces
Ethernet
Page 251/374

10/100 Mbit/s, RJ45, 1 LED link, 1 LED activity LONWORKS interface
78 Kbit/s, FTT10A, FT-X1
RJ45 interface
LONWORKS Service button
RS232C
Service interface (root terminal = LINUX console)
data transmission rate: 9.6, 19.2, 76.8, or 115.2 Kbaud (depending upon
configuration)
9-pin Sub-D
Modem Interface for analogue modems, ISDN Adapters, or GSM Adapters
USB
USB Spec. 2.0, full-speed (12 Mbit/s)
Reset button
iii.
Electrical Data
Operating Voltage
24 Vac 20% or 24...38 Vdc, electrically isolated
Power Consumption: Max. 8 VA
Overvoltage Protection: The binary input is protected against 24 Vac and 40 Vdc
overvoltage as well as against short-circuiting.
iv.
Mechanical Data
Protection Class: IP 20
Mounting
DIN rail
Wall mounting
Cabinet front-door mounting
CPU
Processor
Performance equivalent to the process below:
32-Bit Motorola Power PC MPC 855T
32-Bit Motorola Power PC MPC 859
Watchdog
Page 252/374

Alarm relay indicates watchdog (SPDT, normally closed, 24 Vac 20%, max. 2 A
permanent loads)
"watchdog" LED
Operating System: LINUX or similar
Memory
128 MB or 64 MB SDRAM
128 kB RAM, buffered 72 h by gold capacitor
2 MB Boot Flash Memory
64 MB or 256 MB Flash Memory (application)
Onboard trend memory: 64,000 trend entries
Real-Time Clock
accuracy: 20 ppm
v.
Environmental
Temperature
operation: 0...50 C; storage: -20...+70 C
Ambient Humidity (operation and storage)
5 to 93% relative humidity, non-condensing
vi.
Certifications
CE
Meets FCC Part 15, Subpart J for Class A equipment
BTL (BACnet Testing Laboratories)
LonMark compliant under preparation
UL 916
DIN EN60730-1:2005-12, DIN EN60730-2-9:2005-10
vii.
Programming
The DDC is freely programmable using the graphic programming tools that provided
by the provider.
viii.
Password Protection
DDC allows the definition of up to 6 user levels. Each user level can be assigned
different read and write rights. Several users with individual passwords can be
defined for each user level.
I.
I/O Modules:
Page 253/374

1.
General:
2.
a.
Overpressure protect: 24VAC, 40 VDC and short circuit
b.
Processor : each processor have a separated processor
c.
Interface: I/O module integrates with other modules and controller via Lonworks protocol
Environmental
a.
Temperature: Operation: 0...50 C; storage: -20...+70 C
b. Ambient Humidity (operation and storage): 5 to 93% relative humidity, non-condensing

3.
Mechanical
a.
4.
Mounting Methods: DIN-rail mounting
Analog Input Modules features

a.
8 Lonworks bus analog input ports
b.
010 Vdc, 210 Vdc without pull-up
c.
010 Vdc with pull-up (linear graph, e.g. used for wall module connection)
d.
0/420 mA, needs 499 resistor in parallel
e.
Binary input
f.
16-bit resolution
g.
Configurable offset per input
h.
Auxiliary voltage: 10 Vdc, IMAX = 5 mA
5.
Digital Input Modules features (DI)

a.
12 Lonwokrs bus Binary Inputs
b.
Static binary input (dry contact)
c.
Totalizer for up to 20 Hz
d.
LEDs per binary input supporting alarm display mode (red/green) or status mode (off/yellow).
e.
Color mode of each LED can be set to OFF/yellow or green/red in CARE.
6.
Digital Output Modules features (DO)

a.
Cross-Connecter
b.
Feedback on manual override signal
c.
Configurable safety position for outputs in case of communications problems
d.
Permissible Load per Relay Output Module (Total)
Page 254/374

e.
Max. load:
i.
19250 Vac: 12 A
ii.
124 Vdc: 12 A resistive, 3 A inductive
f.
- Permissible Load per Normally-Open Contact:
g.
Able to be replaced by equivalent Relay output Modules
2.5. FIELD DEVICES

A. Electronic Pressure Transmitters
1.
Electronic Pressure Transmitters are microprocessor-controlled pressure measurement devices for

relative pressure ranges of -1+1 bar and 040 bar. They have to be suitable for an extremely
wide range of applications, including the precision recording and monitoring of system pressures.
They come complete with an angled M12x1 plug and are screwed (G1/2) directly into the line /
vessel to be monitored. 2-wire or 3-wire versions are also available.
2.
The output can be configurable as 0..10V or 4..20mA. The sensor have adjustable attenuation filter
and can be added a LCD graphical display.
3.
Specification:
a.
Power supply
i. 18 ~ 35VDC
ii. 24VAC +10%/-20%, max.50mA
b.
Output
i. 0/210V, 0/420mA
ii. 4 ~ 20mA
c.
Transient response
i. 200ms
d.
Ambient temperature
i.
e.
Ambient humidity
i.
f.
PN25
Max pressure
i.
h.
0 ~ 95%rh
Nominal pressure
i.
g.
-20C ~ +80C (-20 +70 C HMI type)
50 bars
Protection class
Page 255/374

i.
IP67
B. Space-Temperature Sensor
1.
The sensor have to be able directly wire to the controllers.
2.
Feature:
a.
Mountable directly on the wall;
b.
Operating range in 6 - 40 C
c.
IP30 housing
d.
Compact
e.
Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing.
f.
Accuracy: t = 0.3 K +1% _ |t - 25 C| (t in C)
g.
Safety: terminal box
2.6. SOFTWARE
1.
Main key of the management software include:

a.
b.
The system software: total integration of Access Control, Security, Monitoring, Heating
Ventilation and Air Conditioning, Energy Management and Life safety system.
Integration with devices in diverse ranges, enterprise system, Internet and Intranet sources
allowing intelligent management.
c.
Using industrial standard hardware and Windows server 2003 or higher operating system.
d.
Supporting the leading industrial standard at the present: BACnet, LonMark, ODBC, OPC,
AdvanceDDE and Modbus.
e.
UL listed to standard UL864 (Fire), UL2017 (Signalling system), UL916 (Energy management
system), UL1017 (Security), UL1610 (Central Station) and UL294 (Access Control).
f.
Be suitable for using in a restricted Pharmaceutical environment requiring conformance to CFR

11 for electronic records and electronic signatures.
g.
Designed and developed to International Standards ISO 9001 for quality.
h.
The software has a client/server architecture. It provides a scalable system that accommodates
configurations ranging from a small single-node system to an extended system with multiple
servers and Stations connected across LANs or WANs.
i.
The Server software runs on the multi-user, multi-tasking, industry-standard Windows XP,
Windows 2003 and higher operating system. The server runs on application software that
communicates with controllers and updates both a real time and relation database.
j.
The server software also acts as the file server for display and images. The Stations software
has high resolution, color graphical Human-machine Interface to the server software. Up to 40
simultaneous stations connections are available on a single server. An operator may use station
or a standard Web browser to perform a range of management tasks such as:
Page 256/374

k.
i.
Viewing and responding alarms
ii.
Scheduling equipment operation
iii.
Configuring hardware and software points on system database for each Controller
iv.
Viewing, manipulating and analyzing acquired data from various controllers
The comprehensive networking capacity of software based on third industry standard TCP/IP
protocol shall allow communicating to enterprise systems via local and wide area networks.
Page 257/374

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. SYSTEM INTEGRATION

A.
The software provides an open system architecture which combines a variety of controllers, standard
devices and communication interface into one integrated central that maximizes the performance of your
building
Page 258/374

B.
OPEN SYSTEM
C.
The management software shall support a wide variety of open system standards for integrating other
system. The Open system standards are listed in the following sections: HTML, LonWorks, BACnet,
OPC, Advance DE, MODBUS, ODBC
D.
Operator Security
a.
The BMS software shall allow 10 or more Operators in the system to connect to. The operators with
different missions are supplied for access, supervision and control at different levels for each
application with its devices.
b.
When the Operators take the access and control in the BMS server, the BMS will make a report
time by time.
c.
d.
e.
There are many level of access to limit the users access.

Each user have to have these informations: Name (min. 12 characters), Password (min. 12
characters), and the access level (from 1 to 6). Only the user at the level 1 could change the
password.
There are 6 access levels following:
Level 6:
View only Only allow viewing. This level is only available with operator-based security
Level 5:
Acknowledge Only - Allows viewing and alarm acknowledgement. This level is only
available with operator-based security
Level 4:
Operator - The standard operator level that allows alarm acknowledgement and routine
control.
Level 3:
Supervisor - Provides access supervisor-level functions.
Level 2:
Engineering - Provides access to engineer-level functions
Level 1:
Management - Provides unrestricted access to all functions.
Page 259/374

E.
Network architecture:
a.
The drawing BMSs schematic diagram and BMSs functional block diagram (reference - PICTEC-GPV-BMS-D00-63502-B) shows the BMSs schematic diagram and the BMS network
construct. There are 3 level of network:
i.
Management level network: connect the devices in the management level and server
BMS with the other system servers. Type of the network usually is Ethernet LAN using
TCP/IP protocol. Otherwise could use BacNET/IP or LON Talk/IP
ii.
Automation level network: to connect the DDC to the others, type of the network
usually be Lonworks network because of the stability, high transmit speed, simplify of
configuration. DDCs directly connect to management system via BacNET/IP protocols
through switches, and the DDCs must have BacNet/IP interface. The DDC connect to
the I/O module also via Lonworks protocol.
iii.
Field level network: this is the secondary network used to connect secondary control
units, network-connectable sensor,
Page 260/374

SECTION 260010 - GENERAL PROVISION FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
General Extent of Contract Works

1.
B.
The Electrical Installation Contractor, herein referred to as the 'Contractor' within this section
and all other Sections of these specifications shall carry out all electrical works complete in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Scope of Work
1.
The Electrical drawings are designed based upon IBC Standard specification and regulation
such as NFPA, ICC, NEC, IEC and BS etc.
However the Contractor should study and review all the design documents to ensure that the
design is as per local rules and regulation.
The Contractor should include in his price regarding any discrepancies/issues that he feels is
not according to IBC regulation/specification for Electrical design drawings before submitting
his tender.
The Contractors price would be assumed to include for such discrepancies.
C.
2.
The supply and installation of all services, equipment, components, accessories and fittings
required for the operation of the building to the extent specified and detailed on the Drawings
and Specifications including after provisional handover as detailed in the Contract document.
3.
Builder's work in connection with the Electrical Installations, including supply, and install
necessary inserts and sleeves.
4.
Any work which can be reasonably inferred as necessary for the safe, satisfactory operation of
each system, whether such work is specified or shown on drawings or not.
5.
The supply and installation of cables, conduits, boxes and termination points, for the motors,
starters, controls and the like for the Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning and Plumbing
services.
6.
Execute the work for the substation as approved by Electricity Company. The contractor and
electrical subcontractor to co-ordinate for the same with Electricity Company Civil Engineer and
get it finally approved by him after completion of work.
7.
Arranging for installation of permanent supply by the Electricity Company including submission
of all necessary documents to the Ministry, and carrying all necessary approvals.
8.
Attending upon the supply authority installing mains power supply and carrying out primary and
secondary inspection tests.
9.
Arranging and carrying all necessary approvals with the Ministry of Communication (Telephone
Company) for the Telephone System.
10.
The contractor is in charge to retrieve all needed power information of all other system
contractors, to size his system.
11.
The contractor is in charge to supply all needed power information to the CP6 contractor.
Climatic Conditions
1.
Refer to the Contract document
Page 261/374

D.
Electricity Supply
1.
CP6 will make available, at the output of transformers, a 3 phases, 4 wires, 230-410V, 50 Hz
supply of adequate capacity and having the following tolerances:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Voltage + or 2.5%
Frequency + or - 4%
Phase rotation of supply to IEC 60038.

Neutral: Solidly earthed, TN system. (TN-S)
Obtain fault level and fault duration time from the CP6 contractor.

A.
List and Related Works Specified Elsewhere

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
B.
1.3
Section 260010: General Provision for Electrical Installation

Section 260500: Basic Materials and Methods
Section 260519: Low voltage cable
Section 260526: Earthling System (Grounding & Bonding)
Section 260533: Conduits (Raceway & Boxes)
Section 260534: Trunking
Section 260536: Cable Trays
Section 260553: Electrical Identification
Section 262413: Switchboards
Section 262416: Distribution Boards
Section 262713: Electricity Metering
Section 262726: Wiring Devices
Section 262813: Fuses
Section 263353: Uninterruptible Power System
Section 264113: Lightning Protection System
Section 265100: Lighting
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Documentation
1.
The indication and/or description of any item on the Drawings or in the Specification, unless
otherwise specifically stated, implies an instruction to supply and fix such items.
2.
Notes on Drawings referring to individual items of work take precedence over the Specification.
3.
Drawings show the general run of cables, raceways, etc. and the approximate location of
equipment and utilities symbols and schematic diagrams have no dimensional significance.
1.
If dimensions are not shown, or cannot be determined from Drawings then the
Contractor is required to get them from the Engineer. Do not scale schematic or
diagram drawings to obtain locations.
INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
1.
2.
C.
Electricity installer should have building construction experiences.

Testing and commissioning of equipment and services of specialized nature shall be
supervised by the manufacturer technical representative(s) and by the Engineer.
JOB CONDITIONS
1.
Sequencing
Page 262/374

2.
a.
Before retaining requirement that warranty begins on date of Substantial

Completion, verify available warranties and warranty periods with manufacturers
listed in Part 2 articles. Manufacturers offer standard warranties for mirrors that
begin on date of manufacture, which is typically stamped on back of mirror.
b.
Lay electrical works in advance of pouring concrete slabs and construction of

walls. Obtain Engineers approval before commencing builders work in
connection with electrical installation. Related shop drawings, coordination
drawings and materials should be approved prior to the work commencement.
c.
Before the project be electrically energized, all type of electrical installations must
be tested and approved by the Engineer and Electricity / Communication /
Firefighting and Prevention Police department. The Contractor shall submit
related as-built drawings to Electricity / Communication / Firefighting and
prevention police department and obtain their approval before testing the
installations.
Coordination
a.
Check with other trades to ensure equipment and material can be installed in
space provided.
b.
Provide other trades with information necessary for them to execute their work.
c.
Details on drawings which are specific regarding dimensions and locations, are
for information purposes. Coordinate with other trades to ensure work can be installed
as indicated.
D.
SEGREGATION OF SERVICES
1.
When warranties are required, verify with Employer's counsel that special warranties stated in
this article are not less than remedies available to Employer under prevailing local laws.
2.
Electrical services shall be segregated as specified throughout the installation to obviate the
following:
a.
Electrical interference from one circuit to another.
b.
A fault on one circuit affecting another.
c.
Unnecessary fire damage.
d.
Difficulties in circuit identification.
e.
Voltage limits for general safety.
All conduits and trunking shall be kept clear of other services except where intentionally
earthed or bonded. Generally, conduits and trunking shall be kept 150 mm away from hot
water system and 75 mm away from other services.
Unless specifically indicated otherwise, normal, emergency, low voltage cables and wiring shall
be segregated throughout the installation generally in the following manner :
3.
4.
a.
b.
E.
Armoured and Sheathed Cables : Where more than one tray has been
specified or is necessary to accommodate the number of cables on a
run, the practical segregation shall be achieved by dedicating separate
tray for normal and emergency services. Where normal and emergency
cables have to run together in trays, ducts or trenches, they shall be
formed in two groups, one normal and other one emergency.
Insulated Conductors: Insulated conductor circuits shall, where
possible, be segregated throughout by enclosing in separate conduits
or trunking compartments.
LAYOUT OF WORK
1.
The electrical drawings show the general arrangement of the work and the approximate
locations of equipment. Refer to all other drawings to verify all spaces and conditions affecting
work of this section.
2.
Notify the Engineer about conflicting requirements. Where deviation from the drawings are
deemed necessary, details of such deviations with reasons shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval.
3.
No such deviations shall be made without prior written approval of the Engineer.
4.
Conduit and ducts shall be run in wall chase, recesses, pipe shafts and ceilings except where
indicated otherwise. Arrange work accordingly.
5.
All equipment and apparatus such as motors, switchgear panels, controls etc., shall be
installed as to be readily accessible for operation and maintenance.
Page 263/374

6.
1.4
A.
standards.
B.
The design, equipment and installation requirements will generally comply with the standards and
recommendations laid down by the following :
1.
International Building Code 2006 (IBC)
2.
International Code Council (ICC)
3.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
4.
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
5.
British Standards Institute (BSI).
6.
Regulations for Telephone System Installation as issued by the American National
Standards Institute (ANSI)
7.
National Electrical Code (NEC)
8.
Electronic Industries Association (EIA)
9.
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)
10.
Institution of Electric Engineers (IEE)
11.
Other regulation approved.
1.5
DOCUMENT SUBMISSIONS
A.
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

1.
The term 'shop drawings' includes fabrication, erection, layout and setting out drawings;
manufacturer's standard drawings, schedules; descriptive literature, illustrations, catalogues
and brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control circuit diagrams and other
drawings and descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment, duct and conduit systems,
control systems and methods of construction as required to show that materials, equipment or
systems and position thereof, conform to the Contract Documents. The term 'manufactured'
applies to standard units usually mass produced. The term 'fabricated' means items
specifically assembled or made out of selected materials to meet individual design
requirements. Shop drawings shall establish actual detail of all manufactured or fabricated
items, indicate proper relation to adjoining work, amplify design details of electrical equipment
in proper relation to physical spaces in the structure, and incorporate minor changes of design
or construction to suit actual conditions. The Contractor shall submit, all shop and installation
drawings based on the design drawings and obtain their approval within the period confirms to
the contract program.
2.
The Contractor, immediately after signing this Contract, shall submit shop drawings, materials,
equipments and samples. So as to cause no delay in his own work or the work of other
services. No extensions of time will be granted for submission of shop drawings and samples.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for any delay in this regard.
3.
Provide shop drawings, to a scale not smaller than the corresponding layout drawings, showing
the following and obtain approval before commencing work:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Exact runs and sizes of conduits, cables, cable trays and trunking.
Layout drawings for each separate electrical installation showing the actual locations of
points (suitably identified) the locations of switchboards and distribution boards, details
and types of fittings.
Schedules of points, indicating how the various outlets are connected to the distribution
boards, size of circuit wiring, the rating of the protective devices and the type and
ratings of appliances or fittings.
Schematic diagram for connections of distribution boards, and equipments to main
switchboards showing sizes of feeders, etc.
Underground cable layout for the different services, showing routes, sizes and types of
cables.
Identification of all interfaces with other works under the scope of other contractors and
detail drawings to explain how to avoid conflicts.
Any other data necessary for the proper maintenance of the installations.
Page 264/374

4.
Drawings shall be standard size. Lettering shall be stenciled. Shop drawings and samples
shall be properly identified with the name of Project, Contractor, Sub-Contractor and date, as
required by the Engineer.
5.
Coordination of electrical works with mechanical, structural and architectural work shall be
carried out for shop drawings and sufficient time shall be allowed for coordination and checking
and approval of shop drawings and calculations by the Engineer.
6.
Individual shop drawings shall be submitted following the approved coordination drawings and
shall be stamped indicating that the work has been coordinated with other trades.
7.
The term 'samples' includes natural materials, fabricated items, equipment, devices,
appliances, as specified and may be required to determine the compliance of the type, quality,
construction, workmanship, finish, colour and other characteristics of materials with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Samples shall establish kind, quality and other
required characteristics of various parts of related installation. Indicate details of construction,
dimensions, capacities, weights and electrical performance characteristic of equipment or
material. Samples and sample board should be prepared and identified by the manufacturer.
Stamp/engrave the samples for their make, type, Cat No. and size. Marking should be
indelible and legible.
8.
Except for finish, colour and other aesthetic matters left to the Engineer's decision by the
Contract Documents, the Engineer's review and approval of shop drawings and samples
submitted by the Contractor is for general compliance with the design concept and information
given in the Contract Documents and is only for the convenience of the Engineer for following
the work and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any deviations from the
requirements of the Contract Documents. The Engineer's review and approval shall neither be
construed as a complete check nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors
in shop drawings, or from the necessity of furnishing any work required by the Contract
Documents which might have been omitted on the shop drawings. The Engineer's review and
approval of a separate item shall not indicate review and approval of the complete assembly in
which it functions.
9.
In case the contractor wants to submit material as a substitute, alternative or equivalent he can
do so if the proposed material is out of production or is not available. Substitute material in
order to save the money is not acceptable.
10.
B.
Progress Drawings
1.
2.
C.
As-built Drawings
1.
2.
D.
Provide and keep on the job at all times, one complete and separate set of blackline prints of
the electrical work on which all architectural and electrical changes, revisions and additions to
the work shall be clearly, neatly, accurately and promptly noted, as the work progresses,.
Whatever work is installed other than as shown on the Contract Drawings, shall be noted.
Indicate daily progress on these prints with various colors including conduit routes, cable
routes, fixtures, apparatus and associated installation works.
After the completion of work, prepare and submit complete 1 set of CD and five white paper
print of 'As-built Drawings'.
These drawings shall be titled "As-built Drawings" and shall be prepared from the final progress
drawings. Submit "As-built Drawings" to the Engineer for review and approval.
Operation and Maintenance Data

1.
2.
The Contractor shall provide operation and maintenance data along with maintenance manual.
Include the following operations and maintenance data :
a.
b.
Details of design elements, construction features, component function and maintenance

requirements, to permit effective start-up, operation, maintenance, repair, modification,
extension and expansion of any portion or feature of installation.
Technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins, component illustrations and
exploded views, technical descriptions of items and parts listed.
Page 265/374

c.
d.
e.
1.6
Wiring and schematic diagrams and performance data.

Names and addresses of local suppliers for items included in maintenance manuals.
Operating manuals shall include full details of all normal engineering and maintenance
switching operations.
PRODUCT DELIVERY
A.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS APPROVAL

1.
Approval of materials and equipment shall be based on latest manufacturer's published data.
2.
At the request of the Engineer, submit a sample of any equipment or material for further study
before approval. Where samples are required by the Engineer, the period required to obtain
the sample will be taken into account while scheduling the approvals.
3.
Only approved materials shall be employed at the site. All materials installed which are not of
approved type, shall be removed and reinstated by approved ones.
B.
DELIVERY AND PACKING

1.
2.
The Contractor shall include for packing, shipment and delivery to site of all equipment and
materials necessary for the completion and satisfactory working of the installation.
3.
Each item shall be adequately protected and packed and be clearly marked to ensure the safe
conveyance and delivery to site.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
manufacturers and the Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents.
B.
All materials, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under this Contract shall carry standard
warranty against all defects in materials and workmanship.
C.
The Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the systems are of sufficient capacity to meet the
specified performance requirements as set forth herein or as indicated.
D.
Upon receipt of notice from the Engineer for the failure of any part of system or equipment during the
period of maintenance, the affected parts shall be replaced.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
Provide Spare Parts as shown in the B.O.Q. or as mentioned in the specification, always with a
minimum of 20%.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LABELS
A.
For substations, switchboards and panel boards :

1.
2.
B.
Engraved lamacoid black name plates, with 6 mm high white lettering.

The circuit schedules and schematic diagrams shall be mounted with plastic covers in metal
frames.
For Distribution Boards and Circuit Breakers :

1.
2.
Engraved lamacoid black nameplates, with 3mm high white lettering.

The circuit schedule shall be mounted with transparent plastic covers in metal frames on the
back side of the doors.
Page 266/374

C.
Wiring Identification
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Conduit and Cable Identification

1.
2.
3.
E.
Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, either numbered or coloured
plastic tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.
Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
Colour code standards for above as specified elsewhere.
Use same colour coded wires in communication cables, throughout the system.
Colour code the conduits and metallic sheathed cables.

Code with plastic tape or paint the conduits or cables at 15m intervals and where they enter
wall, ceiling or floor.
Colour marking shall be of 25mm wide prime colour and 20mm wide auxiliary colour as per the
standards.
Switch Plates
Labels shall be provided for Device Plates of local toggle switches, toggle switch type motor starters,
pilot lights and similar devices.
1.
F.
For Busbars
1.
2.
G.
Switchboard rooms, electric closets, metal screened spaces and similar enclosures assigned to
electrical equipment, shall have enameled sheet metal, labels with red letters on white
background, reading "Electrical Equipment Room - No Storage Permitted".
Languages
1.
2.2
Switchboard rooms, cable chambers, metal screened spaces and similar enclosures contain
electric power cables, bus bars or equipment operating at voltages exceeding 600 V shall have
on the door enameled sheet metal, labels with red letters on white background reading
"Danger - High Voltage".
For Rooms
1.
I.
Phase identification letters shall be stamped on the busbars of each switchboard and panel
board.
Letters shall be visible without disassembling current carrying or supporting components
For Doors
1.
H.
Plates shall be engraved with 3mm high letters describing equipment controlled.
Nameplates with directional, operational or warning labels shall be in Vietnamese language

and English.
FABRICATION
A.
Steel Frames
1.
2.3
Steel frames and like components shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all scale, rust, oil and
grease, treated with an approved rust inhibiting solution and painted with two undercoats and
one coat gloss finish before leaving the factory. Supply an adequate quantity of paint for final
touching up at site.
STANDARD PRODUCTS
A.
The materials and equipment shall be the standard range of products of the manufacturers regularly
engaged in manufacturing these products confirming to the specifications.
Page 267/374

B.
2.4
Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be product of
a single manufacturer.
MOUNTING HEIGHT OF ACCESSORIES

A.
Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings and Specification Sections, the mounting height of
accessories shall be as indicated here in the Schedule of Mounting Heights.
B.
Mounting heights shall be measured between the centreline of the item concerned and the finished
floor level.
C.
The following is the schedule of mounting height except underfloor system :
2.5
1.
Lighting switches, èquipment and appliance control switches', regulators, manual controls of
heating and ventilation systems, pushbuttons, and any other manual controls for the operation
or regulation of any system or facility, shall be mounted at 1200 mm above finished floor level,
unless indicated otherwise.
2.
Socket outlets shall be mounted at 300mm except in kitchens, plant rooms, workshops and
electrical rooms they shall be mounted at 1200 above finished floor level.
3.
Access Floor area uses floor System Box or Floor Box type.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Accessories installed throughout in the project shall, unless indicated otherwise, match in colour, style.
Where this is impracticable, it shall be brought to the Engineer's attention prior to execution of work.
B.
The cover plates of flush-mounted accessories shall be fixed square and flush with the building
surface.
2.6
FINISHES
A.
Metal enclosure surfaces shall be cleaned with removal of rust and scale. Rust resistant primer shall
be applied inside and outside and at least two coats of finish enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Setting Out
1.
2.
Obtain from the Engineer details of final position of all equipment and accessories before
commencing installation.
Set out the work to conform to :
a.
b.
3.2
The diagrammatic intent of the drawings

Dimensions indicated on approved shop drawings
LABELLING
A.
For switchboards and panel boards

1.
B.
Fix on front, externally by rivetting.
For distribution switches and circuit breakers
Page 268/374

1.
2.
C.
"Danger - High Voltage" Signs

1.
D.
Fix a stenciled "mimic bus" diagram on front face.

Diagram shall show schematically the primary bussing and switching arrangement.
Primary gear containing switching equipment whose blades are alive when open shall have
warning signs to that effect.
Outlet boxes, junction boxes and cabinets

1.
3.3
Fix on external face of doors of switchboard room, cable chambers, metal screened spaces,
and the like containing electric power cabling.
Primary Gear
1.
2.
3.
E.
Nameplates on individually enclosed units and units in power centres, switchboards and panel
boards without doors : fix on front externally.
Directories in panel boards with doors : fix on inside frame of door.
When used in conjunction with empty raceways for wires of a future system : mark indelibly on
the inside denoting the system.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate with civil work for the shape, size and position of all openings required for apparatus and
give full information sufficiently in advance of the work so that all openings may be built in advance.
Provide and install all sleeves, supports, etc., specified or required.
B.
Obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of apparatus for the proper method of installation
and connection. Obtain all information from other services which may be necessary to facilitate work
and the completion of the whole project.
C.
Provide the services of an experienced foreman, who shall be continuously in charge of the erection of
the electrical work, together with all necessary skilled workmen, helpers and labourers, required to
properly unload, transfer, erect, connect, adjust, start, operate and test the installations.
D.
Before installing any work, verify that it does not interfere with clearance required for other work.
Notice of adverse conditions shall be forwarded in writing to the Engineer before any work in question
is installed. If notification is not made, and work installed causes interference with the contemplated
design, then the Contractor shall make necessary changes in his work and as directed by the
Engineer to permit the installation of all work of the project, at no additional cost to the Employer.
E.
Conduit and ducts shall be run as straight and direct as possible. In general they shall run right angles
or parallel with walls or piping and neatly spaced, with risers erected plumb and true. Maintain a
clearance of at least 25mm between finished coverings and adjoining work. Approved ceiling height
shall be obtained from Architectural Drawings.
F.
All equipment and accessories shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration. If operation of
any of the equipment or systems produces noise or vibration which (in the opinion of the Engineer) is
objectionable, then make the necessary changes and do all work necessary to eliminate the
objectionable noise or vibration at no additional cost.
G.
Wherever possible services shall not cross expansion joints. Where this is unavoidable the services
shall accommodate the design movement with the use of approved expansion/flexible coupling
arrangement.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for his work and equipment until final handing over of the project.
Carefully store materials and equipment which are not immediately installed after delivery to site.
Protect open ends of pipes with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of
obstructing material.
Page 269/374

B.
The Contractor shall protect work and material of other trades from damage that might be caused by
his work or workmen and shall repair all such damages on his cost.
C.
Protect exposed live equipment during construction for personnel safety.
D.
Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 240 VOLTS" or with appropriate voltage in English and Vietnam
language.
E.
Arrange for installation of doors for room containing electrical distribution equipment. Keep these
doors locked except when it is under direct supervision of an electrical foreman.
3.5

A.
B.
General
1.
The Engineer shall be authorised to inspect, examine and test at any reasonable time and in
the premises of the manufacturer the quality of the material used for the equipment to be
supplied. These work inspections shall be limited to the following equipment : Emergency
power equipment and power switchgear. He shall also be authorised to verify the qualifications
of the staff employed by the manufacturer.
2.
Should part of the equipment be subcontracted to another manufacturer, the Contractor shall
ensure that the Engineer is authorised to inspect, examine and test the equipment in the
premises of the Sub-Contractor.
3.
These inspection, examinations and tests shall not relieve the Contractor in any case, from this
contractual responsibility and commitments.
4.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing at least 15 days beforehand for the date and
place at which the equipment shall be available for tests. The test shall be made according to
the provisions of the Contract. If the Engineer does not appear at the place indicated within ten
days following the date indicated by the Contractor, the later shall proceed with the tests and it
shall be deemed that they had been witnessed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall send the
Engineer duly certified copies of the results of the tests.
5.
The Engineer shall notify the Contractor of his intentions to attend the test at least 24 hours
beforehand.
6.
If the Contract provide for tests to be made in the premises of the Contractor or any SubContractors or suppliers then the Contractor shall afford all the assistance, labour, materials,
electricity, fuel supplies, equipment and instrument required to conduct these tests.
Testing
1.
On completion of the entire electrical installation work or any separate or distinct part thereof,
notify the Engineer, in writing, that the complete part of the electrical work is ready for
inspection.
Before doing so the Contractor shall perform initial trial tests and
correct/adjust/balance/regulate, the installation concerned as necessary until required
conditions are obtained.
2.
The inspection of the Contractors work shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer and
in accordance with the requirements of Section 'E' of the IEE 'Regulations for Electrical
Equipment of Buildings' and shall comprise of but not limited to :
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Verification of polarity
Effectiveness of earthing
Insulation resistance test
Test of ring circuit continuity
Phase rotation
Operation tests of relays, interlocks and any other protective and control device to
ensure correct functioning.
Page 270/374

The results and readings obtained shall be equal or better than the requirements of the IEE
and the Vietnam Authorities Regulations and these shall be recorded on forms similar to the
ones described in the IEE Regulations.
3.
The Contractor shall supply all material, instruments and tools required for carrying out the
tests.
4.
In case of the above mentioned tests are found satisfactory and no errors or faults appeared in
the installation, the Contractor shall submit the necessary test forms, duly filled, to the Ministry
of Electricity and Water and repeat, the tests in the presence of Electricity Authorities Inspector
to his satisfaction.
Page 271/374

SECTION 260500 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.1
MATERIALS
A.
All equipment and materials used in the electrical installation work shall be new and of the best quality.
All materials shall be approved types, supplied by approved manufacturers and shall be fully suitable
for use in the climatic conditions stated and on mains power supply of Vietnam.
B.
All electrical materials and equipment shall comply in all respects (design, properties, qualities, testing,
etc.) as a minimum with the latest Vietnam Authorities Specification, International Electrotechnical
Commission (I.E.C.) recommendations and the latest British Standards (B.S.)
C.
Should there be any different between the IEC/BS and this Specification, then the requirements of this
Specification shall prevail.
D.
The Engineer reserves the right to inspect materials on site at reasonable times and reject any
materials not comply with the specifications.
E.
Dismantling and re-erection of installation occurred due to removal of rejected materials, shall be at
the Contractor's expense.
F.
Component parts of similar use and rating shall be interchangeable with each other.
G.
All manufactured items shall be the product of manufacturers regularly engaged in producing the types
specified. These items shall be constructed and finished by the same manufacturer.
H.
All manufactured items shall be free from imperfections and defects which affect their appearance or
may impair their durability or serviceability.
1.2
ORDERING OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall submit the details of equipment and materials to Engineer for approval before
placing order.
A.
The detail of equipment and materials shall include the following :

1.
2.
3.
4.
Full Technical Specifications of equipment including construction, materials, degree of

protection, characteristics, curves, diagrams, ratings, dimensions, fixing details, etc.
Relevant sheets of manufacturer's catalogues, specifications, technical data, etc.
Confirmation that equipment and materials offered complies fully with relevant Clauses of the
Specification and, in case of deviation from the Specification, a schedule of deviations listing all
points not conforming to the Specification shall be submitted for Engineer's approval.
Short circuit study including all components shown on the Schematic Diagrams.
B.
Submit, on the request of the Engineer, a sample of any equipment or material for further study before
approval.
C.
Manufacturers specified by name do not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for meeting
Specification requirements and submittal for approval.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1
FIXING
A.
Out Unless indicated elsewhere in the Specification or on the drawings, the Contractor shall provide
and make all fixing to the building for all services included in this Contract.
Page 272/374

B.
Rawl bolts or similar approved fixings shall be used for heavy loads. Plastic or fibre plugs shall be
used for light loads. Other proprietary methods may be specified later in this Specification. The
Contractor may offer alternative methods to those specified but the Engineer reserves the right to
reject such alternative and call for the use of the specified methods only.
C.
All metal fixing devices shall be zinc or cadmium plated, sheradized or hot dipped galvanised including
any expansion shields, plugs, nuts, washers, etc., associated with the fixing devices.
D.
The Contractor shall carry out drilling and plugging for screw fixings of pipework, raceways, cable
trunking, ducting, wiring, conduit fittings, accessories and finishing trims supplied under this Contract.
E.
Generally equipment and supports shall be fastened to :

1.
2.
3.
Solid masonry or plastered surfaces by suitable anchors and screws/bolts.

Poured concrete by expandable inserts.
Hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings by patent retention type fastenings. The
Contractor shall establish that there is adequate strength in such hollow material before fixing
to same.
F.
Supports or equipment installed by other trades shall not be used except with the permission of the
other trades and approval of the Engineer.
G.
Purpose made fixing clips and brackets may be necessary in certain areas and the Contractor shall be
deemed to be aware of this at the time of tendering and to have included for the supply and fixing of
same in this Tender Bid.
H.
Details of proposed clips and/or brackets shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, prior to the
manufacture of same being commenced.
I.
Holes shall not be drilled in any structural steelwork or prestressed concrete without first obtaining the
approval of the Engineer.
J.
Where it is proposed to use cartridge fired bolts for fixing to blockwork or concrete, approval shall first
be obtained from the Engineer. The ruling also applies to stud welded fixing on steel structures.
K.
All supports or mountings described above, shall be steel, hot dipped galvanised after fabrication
wherever practicable. In cases where the Engineer agrees that it is not practical to provide galvanised
steel, supports and mountings shall have two coats of rust resistant paint applied.
Page 273/374

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
This Section to include all labour, materials and accessories for the complete performance of all wires
and cables system in accordance with the Specification and Drawings.

A.
Section 260010:
General Provisions for Electrical Installation
B.
Section 260500:
Basic Materials and Methods
C.
Section 260533:
Raceway & Boxes for electrical systems
D.
Section 260536:
Cable Trays
E.
Section 262416:
Distribution Panel Boards
F.
1.3
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.
Cables and wires shall comply with the following standards as appropriate.
D.
1.
IEC 227 / BS 6004

and
PVC insulated cables (non-armoured) for Electrical Power
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
IEC 502 / BS 5467

IEC 502 / BS 5468
IEC 227 / BS 6500
IEC 245 / BS 6207
BS 6346
BS 6746
BS 6360
BS 6234
BS 2897
BS 1442
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Lighting.
Armoured Cables with thermosetting Insulation.
Cross linked polyethylene Insulation.
Insulated Flexible Cords.
Part 1 - Mineral Insulated Cables.
PVC insulated cables for Electrical Supply.
PVC Insulation and Sheaths.
Copper Conductors for Cables.
Polyethelene Insulation and Sheath for Cables.
Aluminium Strip Armour for Cables.
Galvanized Mild Steel wire for Armouring Cables.
Cable termination shall comply with the following specifications :

1.
2.
3.
4.
BS 4121
BS 4579
BS 6081
BS 6121
Cables.
:
:
:
:
Mechanical Cable Glands.
Performance of Mechanical and Compression Joints for Cables.
Termination of M.I.C.C. Cables.
Mechanical Cable Glands for Elastomer and Plastic Insulated
Page 274/374

1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Contractor shall be determined the correct size based on current rating and/or voltage drop, as
relevant, after taking into consideration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Type of Cable and Wire

Ambient Conditions
Method of Installation
The disposition of each cable relative to other cables.
B.
Calculate voltage drop and current ratings based on information given in Electricity Authorities
Regulations or IEE Regulations, whichever is more stringent.
C.
All cables and wires shall be suitable for installation and continuous services in the ambient conditions
described in Section 260010.
D.
Unless otherwise specified, cables and wires of the following specified voltage ratings shall be used as
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
600/1000V rated cables

250V rated cables
:
:
:
Main and sub-main distribution panels.

Final sub-circuit supplies from lighting, socket outlets, etc.
Extra low voltage wiring, communication circuits where the
maximum voltage is 50V.
All multicore cables shall be 600/1000V rated.
:
Clock system cables.
Special screened and
:
Music/paging system and Fire Alarm twisted pair
conductors cable system cables.
Co-axial cable
:
CATV system cable
M.I.C.C.
:
For Shelter and Hazardous Areas.
Flame Proof Wire
:
For Fire Alarm System
E.
Earth core shall have the same size than phases and neutral core size.
F.
Multicore cable shall be used for 3P+N+E if the needed size is up to 95 sq.mm (5G95sq.mm), and for
P+N+E if the needed size is up to 25 sq.mm (3G25sq.mm).
Refer to relevant sections of the Specification for details of cable types.
1.5
DOCUMENT SUBMISSION
A.
Shop Drawings and Product Data

1.
2.
3.
1.6
Submit full technical details of each type of cable or wire proposed.

Submit copy of test certificates from the manufacturer or an independent testing authority
confirming that cables comply with the Specifications.
Submit exact route of the cable run and relevant Sections in the shop drawings
PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Reference Section 260010.
B.
Each drum length of cable shall be allotted a distinct and separate reference number. This number
shall appear on the test certificates covering the respective length of cable and shall also be clearly
marked on the cable drum.
C.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer upon delivery to site of each drum length, quoting the
reference number. The test certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
D.
All cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturers seals, labels or other proof of origin intact.
These labels and seals shall not be removed until the cable is required for use and shall be retained
for inspection by the Engineer.
Page 275/374

E.
1.7
The Contractor shall be responsible for the off-loading and handling of the cables on site, and shall
ensure that cables are delivered to site on drums and properly protected against mechanical damage.
Where lengths are cut from cables, the open cable ends shall be sealed.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A.
The Contractor shall be aware of the need to supply and install all wire and cables for this Contract
which is most suitable for the special environmental conditions prevailing in Vietnam.
B.
All conductors shall have good fatigue resistance and not subject to breaks due to nicks or cuts when
terminating.
2.2
CABLES
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
PVC Insulated, Single Wire layer Armoured and PVC Oversheathed (Cu/PVC/SWA/PVC) Cable
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Conductors shall be high conductivity copper, to BS 6360 unless otherwise indicate.

Copper conductors shall be stranded for Section 2.5 sq.mm and over.
Signal control cables shall have solid conductors.
Flexible cords shall have fine stranded conductors.
Conductors sizes shall be metric. Conductors with cross sectional areas smaller than those
specified will not be accepted.
Insulation for each conductor shall be colour coded or otherwise identified as required by the
Regulations. Colour coding shall be maintained throughout the installation.
The current carrying capacity of conductors has been determined in accordance with the
specified Regulations, the specified type of insulation and the expected conditions of
installation.
All cables shall be, as far as practicable, of one manufacturer only. All cables shall comply with
the relevant IEC/BS.
Multicore Cu/PVC/SWA/PVC cable : 600/1000V grade, to IEC 60332-2-2 or BS 6346.

Conductor : Annealed high conductivity copper, stranded, shaped and laid in an approved
manner.
Armour : single layer of galvanized steel wires for multicore cables and aluminium wire or tape
for single core cables.
Insulation : colour coded to IEC 227 or BS 6746C.
PVC for sheath and insulation : to IEC 227 or BS 6746.
PVC Insulated PVC Sheathed (Cu/PVC/PVC) Cable

1.
To IEC 60332-2-2 or BS 6346, 600/1000V Grade.
Page 276/374

2.
3.
4.
D.
Conductor : annealed high conductivity copper, stranded, shaped and laid in an approved
manner.
Insulation : Colour coded to IEC 227 or BS 6746C.
PVC for sheath and insulation : to IEC 227 or BS 6746.
PVC Insulated Wires

1.
Single core and multicore cables shall comply to IEC 227 or BS 6004, rated 450/750V, with
high conductivity copper conductors and PVC compound insulation. Colour coding shall be :
Red
Yellow
Blue
Black
Green/Yellow
2.
E.
Mineral Insulated Cable for Shelter and Hazardous Area and as shown on Drawing.
1.
To IEC 245 or BS 6207 : Part 1, rated 600/1000V.
2.
Cable shall comprise a pressure packed magnesium oxide insulation contained within a
continuous soft ductile copper sheath and copper conductors embedded in the dielectric in
standard formation.
3.
Conductor insulation : neoprene sleeving retained by cone shaped beads beneath a fibre
sealing disc. Each conductor shall be identified with regard to phase etc., by means of
sleeving placed over the neoprene insulation.
4.
Cable seals : seal cable with screw-in-pot type seals, with brass ring glands designed to
accommodate the pot seal.
5.
Terminals
Tinned copper conductors insulated with silicone base rubber compound.
Flexible Cable
1.
2.
H.
For cables up to 6 sq.mm : two screw pinching type.

For cables over 6 sq.mm : grip lug type cable sockets.
Saddles : brass, purpose made, two fixing screw type.
Heat Resistant Cable

1.
G.
:
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
Neutral
Wires shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splice shall be made except within outlet
and junction boxes. A separate neutral wire shall be provided for each circuit. Wires shall be
left sufficiently long enough to permit making final connections.
a.
b.
c.
F.
:
:
:
Earth
To IEC 227 or BS 6004, rated in accordance with manufacturer's tables.

Flexible cables subject to excessive heat shall be insulated with silicone base rubber
compound with an overall varnished glass fibre braiding.
XLPE Insulated Cable

1.
Single To IEC 60502-1 or BS 5468, 1000V grade.
2.
Conductors : plain annealed copper to IEC 228 or BS 6360.
3.
Cables shall comprise plain copper, stranded circular conductors insulated with an adequate
thickness of Extruded cross linked polythene (XLPE).
4.
Conductors shall be laid up together and warmed circular with suitable preformed fillers and
warmings, bound with polythene terephthalate (PTP) tape and covered with an extruded PVC
sheath minimum 1.4mm thick.
Page 277/374

5.
Multicore cables shall have steel wire or tape armouring extruded sheath of black PVC.
6.
Single core cables shall have aluminium wire or tape armouring.
7.
Outer sheath of single and multicore shall be at least 2.5mm thick.
8.
Design electrical stress at any point in the insulation shall not exceed 3KV per mm.
9.
Conductor screen : non-metallic comprising either :

a.
b.
2.3
Semi-conducting tape ; or
A layer of extruded semi-conducting material.
10.
The electro-static screen over insulation shall comprise a nonmetallic layer of semi-conducting
material applied over the insulation and in direct contact with it, followed by a layer of copper
tape applied helically over the semi-conducting layer to ensure close contact throughout.
11.
To prevent void formation in insulation the cable shall be carefully passed through controlled
temperature graded water baths.
SUNDRIES
A.
Joints
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
For internal use intermediate joints are necessary on MICC mains cable : to be suitably sized
galvanized malleable iron adaptable box with glands and fixed base mechanical clamping
connectors of approved design. For external use the jointing box shall be enclosed in a second
galvanized box with glands.
For use on plastics and elastometer insulated cables : type recommended by cable
manufacturers having an inner box with provision for making a watertight seal into inner
sheaths of cables, on an outer cast iron box with provision for making a watertight seal to cable
outer sheaths, clamping cable armour and bending the armour across the joint.
Compression Glands
1.
C.
For conductors up to 16 sq.mm barrel type connectors with pinching screws and shielded in
porcelain or hard resistant materials are permitted.
For conductors exceeding 16 sq.mm : to be made with bakelite shrouds.
For terminating plastic or synthetic cables to switchgear and other equipment : to BS 6121 and
to approval.
Termination Boxes
1.
For terminating paper insulated cable suitable cast iron or welded steel termination box, with :
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Cable Terminations
1.
2.
E.
Cast or pressed brass coned wiping glands ;

Substantial armour Clamps ;
Compound filling point ;
Air vent for enclosed boxes.
For plastics or synthetic rubber insulated cable : suitable brass compression glands, unless
otherwise recommended by cable manufacturer. Glands for armoured or screened cables
shall have suitable clamps therefore.
External compression glands shall have close fitting PVC shrouds.
Cable Sockets
1.
2.
3.
To be correct size for type of cable.

To be sweating type, or an approved crimping type used with an approved crimping tool.
Sweating sockets for conductors 70 sq.mm and over : machined cast brass.
Page 278/374

F.
Fire Barriers
1.
2.
G.
Cable Covers
1.
2.
H.
To be PVC or asbestos cement, as indicated.
Solder
1.
J.
To BS 2484.
Concrete covers exceeding 300mm wide shall be reinforced.
Pipe Ducts
1.
I.
To be purpose made, comprising a rigid fixed frame with adjustable seals and a suitable
clamping device.
In fire compartment separation walls and floors : to be same standard of fire resistance as wall
or floor.
An alloy of lead and tin to BS 219 grade F or H, unless otherwise recommended by cable
manufacturer.
Cable Sealing Compounds

1.
To be :
a.
b.
2.
3.
K.
To BS 1858 and
Approved by cable manufacturer.
o
To be tropical grade in location where normal ambient temperature is likely to exceed 30 C.

To be an oil-resisting compound where the difference in level between cable ends exceeds 6m.
Cleats
1.
To be cast aluminium, gunmetal or brass of approved type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION GENERALLY
A.
Installation Cables Generally

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Bending Radius
1.
C.
Pull cable into position by hand, where possible using an adequate number of operatives
suitably positioned along cable length.
Obtain approval of pulling cables by winch or similar appliance.
When pulling by winch or the like, fit a suitable tension gauge into the haulage line between
winch and cable. Pulling tension shall not exceed the limit recommended by the cable
manufacturer.
Do not allow cable to twist or rotate about its longitudinal axis.
Lay 3-phase groups of single core cables in trefoil formation. If this is not possible obtain
instructions.
Install cables to allow any one cable to be subsequently removed without disturbing the
remainder.
Keep as large as possible and do not allow cable to bend to a radius less than that specified in
NEC 330-12 Regulations or relevant BS.
Underground Cables
1.
Lay in pipe ducts, or direct in the ground, as indicated.
Page 279/374

2.
Obtain approval of trenches before laying cable.
3.
Do not lay cables direct into ground if a corrosive agent is present.
4.
Run cables at least 30mm clear of other services, whether the later run parallel or transversely
to cable trench.
5.
Run cables below intersecting piped services, unless the cable would be at a depth exceeding
2m, in which case seek instructions.
6.
Cables shall not cross in trenches.
7.
Protect cables with a continuous layer interlocking concrete or earthenware covers.
8.
Width of covers :
a.
b.
9.
Draw cable into pipe ducts where they :

a.
b.
c.
D.
Cross roads and paved areas ; except under removable tiling finish
Pass through corrosive soils ;
Enter buildings.
Above Ground Cables

1.
2.
3.
E.
For single cables : 100mm (minimum) greater than cable diameter

For multiple cables : 100mm (minimum) greater than cable aggregates of cable
diameters.
Protect exposed cables where they are likely to be damaged.

Run cables at least 50mm from each other.
Run cables at least 150mm from piped services.
Jointing
1.
Joints in wires and cables shall be avoided wherever possible. Joints in flexible cables and
cords are not permitted. Where joints are unavoidable they shall be permanently accessible
and made only in junction boxes.
2.
Leave at least 150mm of free conductor at each outlet, switch point and pull box for the making
up of joints or the connecting of fixtures and devices, except where conductors are intended to
loop without joints through lamp holders, socket outlets and the like.
3.
Complete joints and termination in the shortest time without interruption.
4.
Do not commence jointing and terminations without approval, except where the work is in a
dry, weather-proof places.
5.
Do not make joints in wet or dirty conditions.
6.
Make outdoor joints under a suitable tend or shelter.
7.
Fill joints with compound filling in stages to allow the material to flow. Do not allow compound
to cool to the point where re-heating is necessary.
8.
Ensure sealing compounds are pouring at the correct temperature check compound level and
top up if necessary, after cooling.
9.
Make intermediate joints on plastics and elastomer insulated cables in a joint box. Arrange to
have each joint inspected by the Engineer before closing and filling.
10.
External joints on MICC cable : fill other box with jointing compound.
Page 280/374

11.
F.
G.
Joint cable in straight through joints and main cables in tees and other branching joints core to
core.
Terminations
1.
Take cable cores through the termination box directly to equipment terminals, without crosses,
unless impracticable and make off with sweated cast brass or hydraulically crimped sockets.
2.
Sweet cable core solid 25mm on each side of compound level and over-tape the exposed core
insulation with two layers of PVC or other approved tape in appropriate phase colour, halflapping the tape.
3.
Plumb the cable sheath to the brass wiping gland, neatly lay back the armour wires over the
gland and fix with an armour clamp effectively bonded to earth.
4.
Cut back tape of tape armoured cables neatly below the wiped gland, thoroughly clean, secure
with a suitable armour clamp and bond to the body of the terminating box with two soft copper
tapes at least 70 sq.mm aggregate cross section.
5.
Equipment to which cables are connected will have blank, undrilled gland plates. Drill holes
necessary for fitting glands.
Cable Support
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Run single core cables used to make up 3 phase circuits in trefoil formation, unless otherwise
indicated, and support in cleats.
Adjust spacing of cable supports and fixing devices below the specified maximum as
necessary to prevent cables sagging and where cables must deviate to pass obstructions.
Cu/PVC/SWA/PVC cables or Cu/XLPE/SWA/PVC cables : run on cable trays as indicated.
Cu/PVC/PVC cables or Cu/XLPE/PVC cables : run on cable trays.
MICC Cables :
a.
b.
c.
H.
Heat Resistant Cables

1.
2.
I.
Keep flexible to a minimum.

Install out of sight.
Mechanical retainment shall not depend on electrical connections.
Sealing Cables
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.2
In areas where a constant ambient temperature exceeding 55 C. will occur, run all final subcircuits in heat resistant cable.
Make conversion from PVC cable to heat resistant cable with a fixed block connector housed
and fixed into a conduit box or equal, except where the conversion of cable types emanate
from a switch, ceiling rose or similar fixed connector accessory.
Flexible Cables
1.
2.
3.
J.
Run on surface of walls and ceilings. Where embedded, run in as sheet steel trough or
conduit.
Run cables in square symmetrical lines where single core cables are run in groups,
bend the sheaths at maximum 5cm centres.
Fix surface run cables with saddles at maximum 300mm centres.
Seal both ends of cables immediately after tests.

Seal MICC cables immediately after cutting to prevent hygroscopic action by the dielectric.
Seal lead, lead alloy and aluminium sheathed cables with a metal cap plumbed to the sheath.
Seal plastic sheathed cables with a plastic cap embracing the wires and outer sheath.
Mark cable ends in accordance with the relevant IEC, NEC or BS.
INSTALLING CABLE IN CABLE TRAYS

A.
Generally
Page 281/374

1.
2.
3.
4.
Install cables on trays in a single layer, unless otherwise specified.

Use purpose made straps or saddles to maintain cables in a neat regular disposition.
Secure cables with load bearing cleats securely fixed to the tray, where trays do not directly
support the cables.
Duct Diameter:
a.
b.
Cable dia up to 65mm : OD = 130mm & ID = 100mm

Cable dia above 65mm : OD = 160mm & ID = 125mm
Page 282/374

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The Contractor shall supply and install earthing, bonding and protection systems as indicated on the
drawings and detailed in the Specification.
B.
All systems shall fully comply with the relevant IEC/BS and Vietnam Electricity Company Standards.
C.
The earthing and bonding systems shall be arranged to provide:

1.
2.
3.
1.2
A low earth path resistance to ensure operation of protective devices.

Good operating condition for sensitive electronic equipment.
Full safety to personnel by limiting the contact voltage.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section 260010:
General Provisions for Electrical Installations
B.
Section 260500:
C.
Section 260519:
Wires and Cables
D.
Section 260533:
E.
Section 260536:
Cable Tray
F.
Section 262726:
Wiring Devices
1.3
QUALITITY ASSURANCE
A.
Final details of installation must be approved by the Engineer. The actual No. shall be determined at
site and be subject to Engineer's approval.
B.
Earthing networks shall be provided for General electrical equipment, electronic equipment and for
lightning system. In order to protect these equipment, respective resistances shall be R = 1, R = 10
, R=15 .
C.
The Earthing and Bonding networks shall generally meet the 50 V maximum continuous contact
voltage limitations for protection against indirect contact resulting in automatic disconnection of supply
as detailed in the relevant IEC Standards.
D.
Transformer neutral points shall be connected to the substation main earth bar.
E.
The Electrical Contractor shall provide earthing system for 22 KV. 22 KV equipments shall be
connected to earthing system by the CP6 contractor. Proper coordination shall be done by the
Contractor with CP6 contractor regarding 22 KV system earthing.
1.4
SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS
A.
Product Data
1.
B.
At the time of submitting samples submit manufacturer's details, catalogues etc.
Shop Drawing
Page 283/374

1.
1.5
Submit drawings showing route of trunking system and obtain approval before commencing
work.

A.
B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General
1.
2.
B.
Earth Continuity Conductors/Earthing Leads

1.
C.
Sizes and types shall be as specified by IEC/BS Standards.
Main Earth Loops

1.
D.
The main earth bars shall be constructed of high conductivity copper, drilled, mounted on
insulators and fixed as required.
All main earth connections shall be completed using the copper weld technique.
Refer to drawing reference PIC-TEC-GBL-HBE-D00-65694-B
Earth Electrodes (Copper Cladded Steel Rod)

1.
2.
Each earth electrodes shall be made in three sections of high tensile strength low carbon steel
core molecularly bonded with 99.9% pure min. 0.25 thick electrolytic copper covering. Each
section shall be of 16mm diameter and 1 meter min. length.
Ends of the rod shall be threaded rolled keeping one end head conical and other end head flat.
The sectional rods shall be coupled with strong bronze couplers. The coupler shall be
threaded to fit the rod section. For driving the rod into the ground, threaded high strength steel
stud shall be used.
Page 284/374

E.
Earth Connections
1.
F.
BONDING
1.
G.
Comprise of a bolted copper link fixed on porcelain insulators and complete with studs, nuts
and washers to take the earth tape and a bolted lug adequately sized for the final connection of
the earth electrode.
Bolts, Washers and Nuts in Bolted Connections

1.
I.
Equipotential bonding and bonding conductors shall be provided as required to ensure

electrical continuity between exposed conductive parts and restrict contact voltage.
Removable Earth Links

1.
H.
High copper content alloy clamp with phosphor bronze bolt shall be used to connect earthing
leads to related earth electrode.
Shall be made of high copper alloy or phosphor bronze. Ferrous hardware is not acceptable.
Tape clips and Junction Clamps

1.
Brass clips and clamps shall be used for fixation of copper earthing leads/conductors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
2.
B.
Circuit Wiring
1.
C.
2.
3.
4.
Fix in the areas indicated on the drawings, in convenient locations, allowing two return paths to
earth.
Fix copper tape to structure with copper or brass saddles and/or screws. Make tees and
straight joints with thermic welding or brazing or pressure clamps. Copper tape contact
surfaces in side pressure clamp shall be tin coated.
Make branch connection between main loop and major equipment, such as switchboards, large
motors and motor control boards, with copper tape of same size as main loop tape.
Equipotential bonding shall also be provided between the building conductive parts, including
steel reinforcement and earth electrodes, thereby ensuring a complete equipotential system.
Removable Earth Links

1.
2.
E.
To have a green/yellow colored insulated earth continuity cable connecting the earth bus or
earth terminal in panel boards to the outlet or device earthing plugs.
Main Earth Loops

1.
D.
All 22 KV Equipment, transformer earthing cable tails and protective conductors shall be
connected to the substation main earth bar as indicated and required.
Low voltage installation in buildings not incorporating earth electrodes shall be provided with a
suitable earth path by means of supply cable protective conductor. These installations shall not
be accessible in public areas.
Fix in every main earth lead to enable the electrode system to be disconnected for testing.
Install in an accessible position, above ground as close as possible to the earth electrode.
Exposed Earth Cables
Page 285/374

1.
F.
Bolted Connections
1.
2.
G.
Multiple bolt type.

Where bare copper is bolted in connections contact surfaces shall be silver electroplated.
Brazed Connections
1.
H.
Install and locate to provide maximum mechanical protection, utilizing ceiling corners,
suspended ceiling and webs of beams as much as possible.
Where earthing terminal connections are to be brazed to equipment, thoroughly clean metal
prior to brazing and repaint impaired surfaces to prevent corrosion.
Connections between Dissimilar Metals

1.
Protected by :
a.
b.
I.
Equipment Earthing
1.
2.
Connect all non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical/mechanical installation to the
earthing system.
Non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical installation include :
a.
b.
c.
3.
J.
2.
Connect the earthing busbars inside the LPS to the main earth copper tape.
Connect all metal parts of the switchboard, other than "live" parts, to the earth bar in the board
in an approved manner.
Connect an earthing conductor from the main distribution earth busbar to an earth connector
welded to the cabinet and earthing bushings of the metallic conducting of feeders.
Cable Armour Earthing

1.
O.
Connect the motor terminal box to the relative earth loop. The earth terminal must be
mechanically connected to the motor enclosure.
Extend the earthing conductor through an insulated bushed opening in the connection box and
connect to the frame.
Distribution Boards Earthing

1.
N.
Earth on a separate ring system.
Main Switchboards Earthing

1.
2.
M.
Series earthing of one piece of equipment to another is not acceptable.
Motors Earthing
1.
L.
Metal conduits, cable armour (steel or aluminium), cable trays, outlet boxes, cabinets,
and the like.
Exposed metal parts of apparatus.
Enclosures, doors, grilles, barriers and the like protecting or shielding electrical
equipment from direct access.
Fire Fighting Equipment

1.
K.
Painting with a moisture resistant bituminous paint or compound, or

Wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
Connect steel and aluminium armour to the earthing system.
Earth Electrodes (Rod)
Page 286/374

1.
2.
3.2
Drive extensible rods of the same diameter into the ground either manually or by power driven
hammer, to a minimum depth of 3 meters obtain low resistivity in the particular soil. Pour
Marconite Concrete around a conventional earth rod.
Fix earth connector on the top of the rod to connect earth conductor. This connection shall be
protected with tin coating.
SITE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Testing
1.
2.
3.
4.
Test earthing systems with the megger and Wheatstone Bridge.

Where the earth continuity conductor is composed entirely of copper than the said resistance
shall not exceed 1.0 Ohm. (General electrical installation earth loop)
Install additional earth electrodes if these results are not met.
Submit the copies of all tests and measurements to the Engineer for approval.
Page 287/374

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This Section to include the supply, installation and commissioning of all conduit works in accordance
with the Specifications and Drawings.
B.
General
1.2
1.
Light and power circuits, fire alarm, telephone, signal and other low current system wiring and
cables feeding equipment and distribution boards shall be drawn in conduits unless otherwise
indicated.
2.
Conduit system shall generally be concealed and installed as indicated, unless otherwise
indicated. For the park building all the conduits shall be PVC and preferred not exposed.
3.
Normal light and power circuits, emergency light and power circuits, fire alarm wiring,
telephone wiring, signal wiring and low current system wiring shall each be run in separate
conduit and wireway.
4.
Cable insulated for two different categories of circuit shall be segregated irrespective of
service.
5.
Conduit and fittings used shall be installed:

a.
Where installed in flame proof and hazardous areas: M.I.C.C., wire/cable.
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.
Applicable Standards referred to in this Section :

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
BS 731 : Part 1 Flexible steel conduits and adaptors for the protection of electric
cable.
BS 4607 : Part 1 Non-metallic conduits and fittings for electrical installations : Rigid
PVC conduits and conduit fittings, metric units.
BS - 31 Class B : Steel Conduits and fittings, metric units
BS 2782 : Method of Testing Plastics
IEC 423-A, BS 6053 : Conduit diameters and threads for conduit and fittings
DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES SUBMISSION

A.
Samples
1.
B.
Product Data
1.
C.
Cut-away samples of all sizes of conduits, conduit boxes and fittings of each type shall be fixed
to a board and submitted to the Engineer.
At the time of submitting samples submit manufacturer's details, catalogues and copies of test
certificates confirming that offered types comply with the Specification.
Shop Drawings
Page 288/374

1.
1.4
Submit drawings of proposed conduit layout and obtain approval from Engineer and Employer
representatives before commencing work.

A.
B.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.6
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RIGID PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A.
Physical Properties
1.
PVC Conduit shall be high impact, non-hygroscopic, rigid PVC, unthreaded push type. Conduit
and conduit fittings shall be in accordance with BS 4607 and CEE Publication 26. The conduit
and conduit fittings shall be suitable for installation at temperature -5C to +85C and they shall
not soften or suffer any degradation at these temperatures, conduit and conduit fittings shall be
self extinguishing type.
2.
All joints shall be made with proper fittings and by using sealing cement (Vinyl Solvent Paint) to
ensure a watertight joint. The cement shall be of a type that remains in a sticky condition.
3.
Rigid PVC Conduit and conduit fittings shall be fully suitable for installation, storage or
transport temperatures encountered in Vietnam and at this temperature the material shall not
soften or suffer any structural degradation.
4.
All PVC Conduit and conduit fittings shall be suitably marked and identified by the
Manufacturer. Conduits used throughout the Project shall be of one manufacturer and marking
on the conduit shall include the nominal size. All markings shall be indelible and easily legible.
5.
The inside and outside surfaces of conduits shall be smooth and free from burrs, flash and
other similar defects.
6.
The interior and ends of conduit fittings shall have no sharp edges and surfaces and corners
over which the cables are likely to be drawn shall be smooth and well rounded.
Page 289/374

7.
B.
C.
2.2
The conduit entries of fittings shall be so designed that reliable water tight joint can be made
between the conduit and fitting. It shall be constructed in such a way that it will be possible to
bend the conduit easily with the aid of a simple tool e.g. bending spring.
Nominal sizes and dimensions

1.
Rigid PVC Conduits shall be of one of the following nominal sizes. 20, 25, 32, 38 and 50mm
dia. rigid PVC slip type coupler and coupling bends shall be of the same nominal sizes as the
conduits and shall fit to the conduits properly.
2.
Where size is not indicated, select in accordance with the Regulations and as a function of the
number and size of conductors.
PVC Conduit Boxes

1.
PVC Conduit Boxes can be used through PVC Conduit raceway system and shall comply with
BS 4607.
2.
Metallic conduit boxes as specified elsewhere in this section can be used alternatively if
required for PVC conduit raceway system.
3.
All boxes shall be provided with tapped brass inserts for fixing the screws.
4.
All boxes for switches, sockets, outlets, etc., shall be rigid PVC or metallic type and their
dimensions shall be suitable for fixing the switches, sockets and other accessories.
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND CONNECTIONS

A.
B.
Flexible Conduit
1.
Flexible conduit shall be to BS 731, Part 1, watertight, PVC sheathed, spiraled metal type. The
conduit shall be terminated at boxes and equipment by means of approved compression
glands.
2.
Flexible conduit shall be of the unpacked type for normal atmospheric conditions and asbestos
packed for damp situations. Adaptors shall be of the solid type.
3.
Flexible conduit shall be used for the final connection of rigid conduit to the terminal boxes of
machines fitted with a means of drive adjustment and/or where vibrations is likely to occur.
Flexible Connections
1.
Where connections to electrical machines are to be by multicore glands, the final termination
shall be by ring type universal glands and locknuts, and adequate slack cable in the form of a
loop or spiral being left to allow for the movement of motors necessitated by belt retensioning,
vibration, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Sets and Bends

1.
Conduits up to 32mm diameter : form on site with the bending machines using proper formers,
guides, springs, etc., taking care not to deform conduit.
2.
Conduits over 32mm diameter : use coupling fittings
Page 290/374

3.2
INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT
A.
B.
General
1.
Run conduit in square, symmetrical lines, parallel to or at right angles to walls and in
accordance with the accepted practice.
2.
Conduit system shall be mechanically continuous and watertight after installation. All conduit
system shall be arranged wherever possible to be self draining.
3.
Installation shall permit easy drawing in of cables.
4.
Keep conduits at least 1000 mm from pipes and other non-electrical services.
5.
Where conduit runs are to be concealed in the structure or are to pass through floor slabs, the
Contractor shall be responsible for marking the accurate positions of all chases and holes on
site. The Contractor shall arrange the conduit routing to make maximum use of any performed
conduit holes and slots provided in structural beams. Conduit installation on shear walls shall
be kept to a minimum. All routings necessary on shear walls shall be agreed with the Engineer
before work is put in hand.
6.
Install conduits so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or ventilation outlets.
Runs in Reinforced Concrete

1.
2.
3.
C.
Horizontal or Cross Runs

1.
D.
To be avoided in partitions and side walls.
Surface Mounted Conduit (including conduit installed above false ceiling)

1.
E.
Obtain approval for placing steel sleeves before pouring concrete.

Run conduits in concrete slabs parallel to main reinforcing steel.
Additional openings in finished slabs, where approved, shall be made by drilling, not by
breaking.
Fix with distance spacing saddles to allow conduits to be taken directly into accessories without
bends or sets.
Concealed Conduit
1.
Fix securely to prevent movement before casting of concrete and screeds, application of
plaster and the like.
2.
Spacing of clips shall be not greater than as follows :

Conduit Size
Upto 25 mm
32 - 38 mm
50 mm
3.
F.
Fix in conduit wherever it crosses an expansion joint in the structure to which it is fixed.
Terminations
1.
H.
Supports for exposed conduit shall be fixed at each side of bends.
Expansion Fittings
1.
G.
Spacing
600 mm
900 mm
1000 mm
Make with a flanged coupling, lead washer and hexagonal male brass bush, where conduit
runs terminate in cable trunking, distribution boards or any sheet metal structure.
Conduit Boxes
Page 291/374

1.
3.3
Fix at all outlet points
INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

A.
All conduits must be secured to outlet boxes, junction boxes or cabinets by placing locknuts on outside
of box and locknuts and bushings on the inside of box.
B.
Conduits connecting recessed fixtures and their adjacent junction boxes must be flexible metallic
conduit 20mm minimum size and shall be of sufficient length to permit dropping of and shall be of the
fixture below the ceiling to gain access to the junction box.
C.
Conduit to motors shall be terminated in the conduit fittings on the motors, the final connection being
made with liquid tight flexible conduit and suitable liquid tight connectors.
D.
A green yellow insulated 2.5 sq.mm (minimum) tinned copper earth connection shall be made
between the solid conduit or cable sheath and the equipment, the copper cable being run inside the
flexible conduit. Couplings fitted to removable covers or non-metallic equipment etc., shall be bonded
to the earthing terminal of the equipment etc. Where changes to flexible conduits occur, a watertight
outlet box with threaded entries shall be inserted and the earth connection made to an internal
terminal. The cover screws shall not be used for earthing connections.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
The conduit outlets when installed and before wiring shall be temporarily closed by means of well
fitting wooden plugs, and immediately before cables are drawn in, conduit systems shall be thoroughly
swabbed out until they are dry and clean.
Page 292/374

SECTION 260534 - TRUNKING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
The Contractor shall supply, install and complete trunking system as indicated on the drawings and
specified in this Section and in the General Requirements.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section 260010 :
General Provisions for Electrical Installations
B.
Section 260500 :
C.
Section 260519 :
Wires and Cables
D.
Section 260533 :
E.
Section 260536 :
Cable Trays
F.
Section 262726 :
Wiring Devices
1.3
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.
BS 729
Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles.
D.
BS 2989
Hot dip zinc coated sheet steel and coil
E.
BS 3382
Part 2 - Zinc or steel components
F.
BS 4678
Part 1 - Steel surface trunking
1.4
DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES SUBMITTAL

A.
Samples
1.
B.
Product Data
1.
C.
Submit samples of trunking and accessories to the Engineer.
At the time of submitting samples submit manufacturer's details, catalogues etc.
Shop Drawing
1.
Submit drawings showing route of trunking system and obtain approval before commencing
work.
Page 293/374

1.5

A.
B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TRUNKING
A.
B.
General
1.
Trunking, associated parts and accessories shall be fabricated from hot dipped galvanised
sheet steel not less than 16 SWG ( 1.6 mm).
2.
Trunking shall be supplied in 3m lengths, each length complete with lid, coupler and coupler
screws and shall provide adequate earth continuity throughout the whole trunking run.
3.
To be complete with necessary fittings and accessories. All fixing materials shall also be of
galvanized sheet steel of 1mm thickness.
4.
Trunking shall not be smaller than the minimum size stated on the drawings or specified later
and shall be so sized that a space factor of 35% is not exceeded. The Contractor shall check
the minimum size of trunking specified is large enough for his requirements without exceeding
this space factor
Trunking and Connectors

1.
To be as per BS 4678 : Part 1, but thicknesses of metal for body and cover material may
exceed those in Table 1.
2.
Metal thickness for trunking and connectors exceeding 150 x 150mm external dimensions shall
be subject to approval and shall not be less than that specified in BS 4678 : Part 1 for the
largest trunking detailed.
3.
Finish
a.
b.
For internal use: Class 3 heavy protection internally and externally (e.g.) galvanized
steel to BS 2989 Class 2A or 2B protection to BS 4678: Part 1).
For external use: Class 3 protection.
Page 294/374

C.
4.
Lids shall be lipped and fixed at regular intervals not exceeding 2m on straight runs, by quick
release cam type fasteners.
5.
Metal partitions shall be at least 1mm thick, finished to same standard as trunking. The means
of fixing partitions shall prevent them being misplaced and shall not cause long term corrosion
or electrolytic action.
6.
Connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the trunking. Trunking sections shall
have butt joints.
Bonding links and fastenings

1.
2.
D.
Braided Copper Tape

1.
E.
F.
To be 15 x 2mm having a resistance from fixing to fixing equal to or less than the links used in
standard trunking joints.
Steel Screws and Fasteners

1.
To have a zinc coating finish to BS 729 or BS 3382: Part 2, or equivalent.
2.
Fixings used for securing or fitting shall not cause long term corrosion or electrolytic action.
Black screws are not acceptable.
3.
Brackets: mild steel angle or channel finished to same standard as trunking.
Vertical Trunking
1.
G.
To satisfy continuity conditions of BS 4678.

Shall not cause electrolytic corrosion.
To have cable support units with insulated pins at not exceeding 3m spacing.
Horizontal Trunking
1.
Sizes exceeding 100 x 50mm shall have cable separators with insulated pins at not exceeding
2m centers.
Page 295/374

SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
Provide all labour, materials, equipment, services and accessories necessary to furnish and install the
work of this Section, complete and functional, as indicated in the Contract Documents and as specified
herein.
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.
The installations shall comply with the following:
D.
1.3
1.
2.
NEC 318-9
BS 729
:
:
3.
4.
5.
6.
BS
BS
BS
BS
:
:
:
:
7.
8.
BS EN 1461
BS EN 1042 & 3
articles.
1449
7613
7671
EN 10143-1993
:
:
Calculation of cable tray

Specification for Hot-Dipped Galvanized
Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles
Steel Plate, Sheet and Stirp
Specification for Weldable Structural Steels
Requirements for Electrical Installations
Continuously Hot-dip Metal Coated Steel
Sheet and Strip. Tolerances on imensions and
Shape
Hot Dip Galvanized after Manufacture
Hot dip galvanised coating on iron and steel
Reference standards as detailed under Section 260010.
DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL
A.
Shop Drawing
1.
1.4
Submit drawings showing the cable tray system and obtain approval before commencing work.
PRODUCT DELIVERY
A.
Delivery, store and handle materials and products in a manner to prevent damage.
B.
Reference Section 260010
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other services.
WARRANTY
A.
Page 296/374

B.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
The cable tray system shall be of one manufacturer and shall include factory-made trays, tray fittings,
connectors and necessary accessories and supports to form a complete cable tray support system.
B.
The cable tray system shall include the following factory-made tray elements :
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.2
Straight cable trays and ladders.

Fittings as horizontal and vertical bends of various angles, crosses, tees, wyes, reducers,
vertical riser elements.
Connectors
All necessary fixing accessories.
Manufacturer's standard accessories shall be used and site fabrication shall only be allowed where
special sections are required subject to the approval of the Engineer.
CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS

A.
General
1.
B.
Provide complete cable tray system including all necessary fittings, supports, accessories and
hardware, whether or not indicated on the drawings or defined in detail in these specifications.
Perforated Trays
1.
Cable trays shall be heavy duty, return flange, perforated type formed from sheet steel to BS
1449 Part 1 and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with BS EN 1461.
2.
Cable trays shall have a minimum thickness of 1.6mm fro trays up to 300mm and 2mm for
wider trays.
3.
Cable trays shall be assembled complete with couplers, bends, tees, risers, reducers
and
all other accessories as required and these accessories shall be of the same material,
thickness and finish as the trays. Manufacturers standard accessories shall be used and site
fabrication shall only be allowed where special sections are required subject to the approval for
the Engineer.
4.
Mushroom head steel roofing bolts and nuts to BS 1494 Part 1 shall be used to fix adjacent
sections of cable trays and/or accessories. Holes cut in trays for passage of cables shall be
provided with grommets otherwise they shall be bushed or lined.
5.
All hangers, bracket and supports shall be hot-dip galvanized.
6.
All horizontal cable tray run shall be of Perforated Type.
Page 297/374

7.
C.
Cable trays shall be provided with a canopy cover when run exposed to open atmospheric
conditions i.e. especially sun radiation and rain. This cover shall be fabricated from higher
gauge galvanized sheet steel for sound mechanical endurance.
Ladder Racks
1.
2.
Cable ladders shall be H-type made from 2mm mild steel with 3mm coupling plates. Side
channels shall be strengthened by reinforcing inserts or other means to increase torsional
rigidity. Rungs shall be slotted type and spaced at maximum 300 mm. Cable ladders shall be
hot-dip galvanized and shall be complete with coupling pieces, bends, tees, reducers, risers,
drop-outs, intersections and all other accessories as required and these shall be of the same
material, thickness and finish as the ladders.
All vertical cable trays run shall be of Ladder Type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
General
1.
Drilling, machining or cutting shall not be carried out after application of protective coat, unless
previously agreed by the Engineer. If cutting or drilling is necessary, edges shall be cleaned up
and painted with zinc based paint before erection.
2.
Installation of vertical runs of tray along the line of vertical expansion joints in structure of the
building shall not be allowed.
3.
Cables shall be fixed to the trays by means of PVC covered saddles or straps secured with
brass or cadmium plated bolts, nuts and washers.
ERECTION
A.
Cable trays arranged one above the other shall have spacing in relation to their width not exceeding a
ratio of 1:2 with a minimum distance of 150mm.
B.
Supports
Install fixings and supports :
1.
2.
3.
4.
At 1000 cm centres
150mm from bends, tees, intersections and riser
As close as practicable to joints
Each side of expansion joints
C.
The cable trays shall be fixed in accordance with site conditions and manufacturer's
recommendations.
D.
Join cable tray and accessories with manufacturer's recommendations.
E.
Avoid mid-span joints
F.
The Contractor shall submit, as required, all calculations relating to traywork and tray supports
demonstrating acceptable mechanical stresses and sag.
3.3
EARTHING
A.
Refer to requirements given in section 260526
B.
Cable trays and accessories shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout their length.
Page 298/374

C.
The entire cable tray system shall be bonded. 12mm x 2.5mm tinned copper or brass links shall be
bolted across each joint in the system by means of brass nut and bolts, complete with flat and spring
washers.
D.
All cable trays shall be provided with earth continuity copper tape along the whole route of cable trays
and to be bonded to the main earthing system of the building. The earth continuity copper tape shall
be fixed on cable tray with PVC covered saddles or other approved means as per approval of the
Engineer.
Page 299/374

SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This section includes the following work:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
Identification for raceways.

Identification of power and control cables.
Identification for conductors.
Warning labels and signs.
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Technical Requirements of the Contract, including Drawings.
B.
General Provision for Electrical
1.3
DOCUMENT SUBMISSION
A.
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions,
and graphic features of identification products.
C.
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components

used in identification signs and labels.
1.4
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
F.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
G.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by
label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces
where devices are to be applied.
Page 300/374

B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
1.6

A.
B.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field
for each raceway size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1.
2.
Black letters on an orange field.

Legend: Indicate voltage.
C.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label
laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive
tape for securing ends of legend label.
D.
Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible,
preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it
identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,
pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 50mm long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of
raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F.
Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 100mm wide black stripes on
250mm centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is
300mm wide. Stop stripes at legends.
Page 301/374

G.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 50 by 50 by 1.3 mm, with stamped legend, punched for use with selflocking cable tie fastener.
H.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.25 mm thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for
attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
2.
2.2
Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by
printer manufacturer.
ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A.
for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1.
Black letters on an orange field 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.
C.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemicalresistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
D.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 50 mm wide; compounded
for outdoor use.
2.3
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A.
for each raceway and cable size.
B.
C.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 50 by 50 by 1.3 mm, with stamped legend, punched for use with selflocking cable tie fastener.
D.
1.
2.
E.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter
sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 50 mm

long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by
gripping action.
2.4
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A.
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 0.08 mm thick by 25 to
50 mm wide.
B.
C.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter
sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
Page 302/374

D.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 50 mm

long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by
gripping action.
E.
Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend
machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
F.
1.
2.
2.5
FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A.
2.6
50mm wide, 0.125mm pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl
overlay.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A.
Comply with NFPA 170 and NFPA 70.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,

configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1.
2.
3.
D.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
2.7
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT

HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum
letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
B.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or
equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
C.
Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters
on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
D.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters
on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
E.
Stenciled Legend: In non-fading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch
(25 mm).
2.8
CABLE TIES
A.
General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
Page 303/374

1.
2.
B.
Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self- extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.

1.
2.
3.
2.9
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
Color: Black.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws
with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to
the location and substrate.
F.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at
a location with high visibility and accessibility.
G.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1.
2.
H.
3.2
Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line

warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple
tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16
inches (400 mm) overall
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4- inch- (100mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that extends full length
of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH
VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop
stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1.
2.
Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of a floor
that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
Page 304/374

3.
Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the
building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B.
Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels.
Install labels at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.
C.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits
More Then 30A, and 120V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 10-foot (3m) maximum intervals.
D.
Install instructional sign including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using
adhesive-film-type labels.
E.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.
F.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal
connections.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull
points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,
communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1.
2.
Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
H.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access
to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at
flush-mounted panel boards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
I.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self adhesive
warning labels.
1.
2.
3.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment
including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
J.
Controls with external control power connections.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is
consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels
to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control
stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control,
communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own
identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line
of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where
two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
Equipment to Be Labeled:
Page 305/374

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
Panel boards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panel board
manufacturer. Panel board identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated
acrylic or melamine label.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
Switchgear.
Switchboards.
Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panel boards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
Substations.
Enclosed switches.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Enclosed controllers.
Variable-speed controllers.
Push-button stations.
Contactors.
Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
Monitoring and control equipment.
Page 306/374

SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
This Section includes all labour, materials and accessories for the complete performance of all Main
Low Tension Switchboard, Main Switchboards and submain Switchboards in accordance with the
Specifications and Drawings.

A.

1.
Section 260010 :
2.
Section 260500 :
3.
Section 260526 :
Grounding and bonding for electrical system
4.
Section 260519 :
Low-voltage electrical power conductors and cables
5.
Section 260533 :
Electrical identification
6.
Section 260536 :
Cable Trays
B.
Related documents
1.
1.3
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.
Standards applicable to this section/
D.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
1.4
IEC 185, BS 3938

:
Current Transformers.
IEC 337-2, BS 4794
:
Control Devices.
IEC 51, BS 89
:
Direct Acting Indicating Elect. Measuring
Instruments.
IEC 521, BS 5685
:
Electric Meters.
IEC 144, BS 5420
:
Degree of Protection of Enclosures.
IEC 947-2, BS EN 60947-2
:
Air and Molded Case Circuit Breakers
IEC 408, BS 5419
:
Air Break Switches.
IEC 158-1&1A, BS 5424 ,Pt.1
:
Contactors.
BS 88
:
Cartridge Fuses.
BS 142
:
Electrical Protective Relays.
BS 159
:
Busbar & Connection.
BS 162
:
Electrical Power Switchgear.
BS 37 Pt.1
:
Electricity Meters General.
BS 5472
:
Low Voltage Switchgear and Control-gear.
BS 6231
:
PVC Insulated Cables for Switchgear.
BS 5486, Part I and BS 5750, Part I:
For the design of switch boards
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The switchgear manufacturer or assembler shall have a previous record of satisfactory service for
more than 5 years.
Page 307/374

B.
Complete range of switchboards mainly MLTBs, MSBs, SMSBs (Switchgear) and Motor Control
Centers (MCC) shall be TTA (Totally typed tested) assemblies as per IEC60439 standards.
Comparison study of proposed switchboards with the type tested assemblies for all seven type tests
specified in IEC60439 shall be submitted for approval. Original type test certificates shall be in the
name of the switchboard/panel manufacturer mentioned above. Switchboards manufactured under
license agreement will not be approved since material and workmanship cannot be guaranteed for the
performance of the Switchboard same as type tested assemblies.
C.
The prototype assemblies shall conform to the following 7 type tests defined in IEC 439-1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Verification of temperature rise.

Verification of dielectric properties.
Verification of short circuit withstand strength.
Verification of the effectiveness of protective circuit.
Verification of clearances and creepage distances.
Verification of mechanical operation.
Verification of degree of protection.
The cost of such tests shall be included in the tender price.
1.5
SUBMITTAL
A.
B.
Shop Drawings.
1.
Submit dimensions drawings of all the switchboards, including sections and elevations,
showing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Product Data
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Arrangement of all components, instruments, indication and dimensions of all busbars.

Positions and method of fixing cables end boxes.
Location of Terminal blocks.
Single line diagram of the circuits showing the rating of all components, the type and
size of the incoming and outgoing feeders.
Other relevant data.
Full specifications of the enclosure and the components of the switchgear and switchboards
with relevant sheets of manufacturer's catalogues.
Test certificates of all components and whole assembled MLTB's (LV Switchgear) from an
internationally recognized testing authority or from independent testing lab in accordance with
IEC 439. All expenses of this work shall be part of Electrical Contractor's scope of work.
Confirmation that the switchboards complies with the relevant specification as mentioned in this
Section.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
Page 308/374

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MAIN LOW TENSION SWITCHBOARD (M.L.T.B.)

A.
General
1.
The Main Low Tension Switchboard shall be of Indoor construction, purpose made, floor
standing, dead front, totally enclosed, cellular cubicle type, dust protected, verminproof and of
clean and modern appearance containing the main components shown on the drawings and/or
specified.
2.
All switchboards shall be coordinated and assembled by one manufacturer using the same
make for similar type of internal components and shall be constructed in accordance with BS
5486; Part 1 or IEC 439.
3.
The switchboard shall be equipped with Air Circuit Breakers, moulded case circuit breakers,
relays, instruments, C.Ts, ancillary devices necessary for operation protection or measurement
purposes. The Auto Transfer Switch with Manual by pass arrangement shall be provided as
indicated on the drawings.
4.
The Normal Components, Fittings and Accessories required for safe and proper operation of
switchgear shall be provided, whether specifically mentioned herein or not.
5.
The switchgear components shall withstand thermal and mechanical stresses set up by short
circuit conditions in accordance with the fault through current of the feeding transformer. In
general minimum fault breaking capacity (Ics at 0.4kV) shall be as follows unless otherwise
specifically indicated on the drawings. Higher breaking capacity ratings may be required to
satisfy calculation/analysis which shall be provided at no extra cost.
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
B.
65KA or 50KA R.M.S. for MLTB if fed directly from transformer as per CP6 contractor.
30KA R.M.S. for MSB, MCC and SMSB if fed from MLTB.
22KA R.M.S. for SMSB and MCC if fed from MSB.
14KA R.M.S. for Individual MCCB
The switchboard shall have 10% equipped spare, and 10%more free space spare.
Construction
1.
Switchboard shall be factory built, totally enclosed, and rear accessible. Size and rating shall
be as indicated on the drawings.
2.
The switchboard shall consist of standard cubicles assembled together on continuous base
channels to form a rigid in line flush fronted free standing continuous switchboard assembly.
Frames are constructed from 2.0mm thick folded sheet steel strengthened wherever
necessary. The cubicle shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand all operating forces without
deformation or damage.
3.
Each cubicle shall be divided into segregated busbar section and circuit section. The circuit
section shall be further divided into segregated compartments for housing mains and
emergency circuit breakers and other devices. Access to internal components of any
compartment must be feasible by isolating its particular switch. The hinged door shall be
mechanically interlocked with the switch in such a manner that the door can be opened in
ÒFF' position.
4.
The switchboards shall be totally enclosed, all hinged doors, covers shall be gasketed to
provide protection against dust.
5.
LPS shall have adequate means of lifting and shall be capable of being rolled or moved into the
installation position and bolted directly to the floor.
6.
The switchboards shall be provided with suitable cable glands to suit the type, size and number
of cables as indicated on the drawings. The cable bracket wherever required shall be
adequately mounted inside the switchboard. The switchboards shall be provided with the
Page 309/374

proper cable fixing clamps and terminal lugs for incoming and outgoing cables as well as earth
bonding connections.
C.
D.
E.
F.
7.
After fabrication, steel work shall be cleaned, zinc sprayed and stove enameled with one prime
coat, two under-coats and one finishing coat.
8.
Finished colour : light grey or as approved by the Engineer.
Labels
1.
All the components in the switchboards shall be identified by means of white labels of an
approved design engraved with 5mm black lettering adequately describing the function of the
unit to which it is attached and shall be secured by screws to the outside of each item. Special
outlets and equipment shall be fitted with labels in a similar manner. Labels secured by
adhesive area not acceptable.
2.
All labels shall be engraved in both Vietnamese and English and shall be approved by the
Engineer.
Switchboard Wiring
1.
Switchboards shall be furnished completely wired including all cleats and terminal blocks.
2.
Control and instrument wiring shall be made with a standard switchboard color coded cable
with fire resistant braid. NO cable sizes smaller than 2.5sq.mm shall be used.
3.
The wiring on instrument panels shall have flexible connections to the terminal blocks.
4.
The end of every wire shall be numbered with the number as stated in the control circuit wiring
diagram of the manufacturer, also number the terminal blocks.
5.
A sufficient number of terminal connections including 10% spare terminals shall be provided for
all control and instrument wiring.
Busbars
1.
The busbars shall be electro-tinned hard drawn, high conductivity 99.9% purity copper, suitably
sleeved for phase identification to BS 158.
2.
All busbars shall extend through the length of the board with same cross section throughout
unless indicated otherwise.
3.
A Copper Earth Busbar, sized at least 50% of the phase busbars, shall be provided along the
full length of the board.
4.
To be adequately supported by porcelain or moulded insulators spaced on suitable centres so

that the complete assembly can withstand the maximum mechanical stresses to which it may
be subjected to under fault conditions.
5.
Busbars shall be housed in separate adequately ventilated compartment which shall not
contain any wiring or apparatus other than that required for connections for busbars.
Main Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)

1.
The ACB shall comply to IEC 947-2 or BS EN60947-2, suitable for triple pole service and shall
have fault breaking capacity (Ics) of 50 KA R.M.S. at 415 Volts. Minimum Icw will be 35KA for 3
seconds.
2.
The Air Circuit Breakers (the conventional type and not moulded case circuit breaker) shall be
triple pole with neutral link type and of 500V 50HZ rating. Current rating shall be as mentioned
on the drawing. They shall be air break, and drawout type with mechanical and electrical
ON/OFF indicators and trip free handle.
Page 310/374

3.
All air circuit breakers shall be electrically operated with spring charging motor. A standby
manual operating handle shall be provided for operating the circuit breaker in case of power or
motor failure.
4.
The air circuit breaker shall be provided with over current, short circuit and earth fault
protection having the following characteristics :
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
The circuit breaker shall have three positions on the drawout mechanism, namely service
position where all main and auxiliary contacts are made, test position where main contacts are
open but auxiliary contacts are closed and isolated position where all contacts are open. An
indicator shall clearly show their positions and provisions shall be made for locking the
breakers in any position.
6.
Mechanical Interlocks shall be provided to prevent withdrawing or inserting of the breaker when
it is ÒN'. Any attempt to do so shall trip the breaker automatically.
7.
The withdrawable part of the circuit breaker shall be effectively connected to earth through
scraping contacts that shall make before and break after the main and auxiliary contacts.
8.
The moving contacts comprising the main and arcing contacts shall be of the spring loaded,
self aligning type. The arc contacts shall be arranged to make before and break after the main
contacts.
9.
The circuit breakers shall have sufficient number of auxiliary contacts for interlocking system as
indicated and described on the drawings and for interfacing with Building Automation System
(BAS), with two spare sets of normally open and normally closed contacts.
10.
Each ACB shall be included but not limited with following components and accessories (O/C,
E/F, S/C) and
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
11.
G.
Adjustable long time delay current setting (40% - 100%) with varied tripping time.
Adjustable short time delay current setting (100% - 1000%) with variable tripping time.
Instantaneous tripping for heavier over current adjustable from 1.5 to 12 times base
current.
Adjustable earth fault trip current setting (20% - 100%) with variable tripping time.
Auxiliary Contacts
Arc Chutes
Folding Extension Rail
Charging Handle
Open and Close Push buttons
Over Current Trip Indicator
Keylock on Trip Button
Spring Charge Condition Indicator
Breaker Position Indicator
Making Current Release
Automatic Shutters for the B/B Terminal
Carriage for every size of ACB exceeding 25 KG in Weight.
The Main Incoming Circuit Breakers shall be provided with cable terminal glands/lugs by the
Contractor to suit the incoming cables from the transformers.
Bus Section Air Circuit Breakers

1.
To be similar to Main Air Circuit Breakers but excluding,

a.
b.
2.
Over current and earth fault protection.

Instruments.
Following indications shall be provided for the Bus Section Air Circuit Breakers :
a.
b.
Circuit Breaker Closed.

Circuit Breaker Open.
Page 311/374

3.
H.
I.
To be electrically and mechanically interlocked with the Incoming Air Circuit Breakers to ensure
the two transformers will not be run in parallel.
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)

1.
The MCCB shall have a combination of thermal and magnetic tripping giving an inverse time
delay protection against sustained overloads and instantaneous tripping under heavy overloads
and short circuits and shall comply to IEC 947-2 or BS EN60947-2.
2.
They shall be of utilisation category 'A' having rated service breaking capacity (Ics) as indicated
in the drawings. The circuit breakers shall be suitable for isolation as per IEC 947-2 and shall
have rated operation voltage of 500V 50 Hz and the insulation voltage of 800 V, 50 Hz. The
breaker shall be available in 3 or 4 pole version as per the drawing.
3.
Breakers shall have a quick make, quick break over current switching mechanism that is
mechanically trip free from the handle so that contacts cannot be held closed against short
circuits and abnormal current.
4.
Tripping due to overload or short circuits shall be clearly indicated by the handle assuming a
position mid-way between the manual ON and OFF position.
5.
Latch surfaces shall be polished.
6.
Poles shall be constructed to open, close and trip simultaneously.
7.
Ampere ratings shall be clearly visible.
8.
Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case suitable for installation inside
switchboards.
9.
Non-interchangeable trip breakers shall have the trip unit sealed.
10.
Breakers with earth leakage relay protection shall be provided with shunt trips.
11.
Frame Sizes : Frame sizes shall be as per manufacturer's standard size and as approved by
the Engineer however minimum frame size will be 100A.
12.
MCCBs up to and including 250A will be provided with thermal magnetic trip units. Above
250A, electronic trip units will be provided with instantaneous and long time protection. The
magnetic trip shall be adjustable type for rating above 250 A.
13.
Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for interfacing with Building Management System (BMS) as
indicated on the drawings and relevant section of BMS Specifications.
Earth Leakage Relay

1.
The relay shall comprise core balance transformer, tripping mechanism and reset testing
buttons.
2.
The sensitivity of relays shall be site adjustable from 0.03A to 1A. Relay will have site
adjustable time delay from instantaneous up to 5 seconds.
3.
The relay shall be connected to the load side and the testing device to be connected to the
supply side.
4.
The relay shall withstand available short circuit. In case of using with the MCCB's integrated
E/L Relay in MCCB can be accepted.
5.
Audible and visual alarm earth leakage relay shall be provided where specified on the
drawings.
a.
Similar in construction to Earth Leakage Relay except it operates an audible and visual
alarm located in the board and remotely in lieu of shunt trip of the breakers.
Page 312/374

b.
J.
Audible Alarm shall be of sufficient level and may be canceled by suitable reset button
but visual indicator remaining ON until the fault is Cleared.
Instruments
The Measuring Instruments shall include ammeters, voltmeters, KWH meters, power factor,
THDi, THDu selector switches and associated accessories as indicated on the drawings and
described herein as follows:
K.
2.2
Contactors
1.
The contactors shall conform to IEC 947-4-1 suitable for class II duty and having a making and
breaking capacity in accordance with utilization category AC3. Unless otherwise specified the
operating coil shall be rated for 220~240V 50Hz supply. Contactors shall be rated for
continuous duty.
2.
All ratings selected for an ambient temperature of 55deg.C.
3.
Contactor sizing for starter combinations will be in conformity to type 2 specifications as per
IEC 60947-4-1. Type 2 co-ordination charts will be furnished on request.
4.
Rated insulation voltage will be equal to or greater than 1000V confirming to IEC 947-4-1.
5.
It shall be possible to change contactor coils on installed units without removing power cables
for maintenance purpose. Contacts should be cadmium free.
6.
For applications above 300A, electronic control circuit which works on DC as well as AC control
circuit should be provided. These contactors incorporating the electronic control should have
facility to provide with inputs for control by a PLC system.
MAIN AND SUB-MAIN SWITCHBOARDS

A.
The main and sub-main switchboards shall be totally enclosed, dust protected and factory fabricated
suitable for operation on 0.4kV, 3 Phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz supply unless shown otherwise.
B.
The main and sub-main switchboards shall comprise main incoming MCCB, busbars, outgoing MCCB,
earth leakage relays, earth bus, etc. with ratings and arrangements as shown on the drawings and all
housed in a sheet steel panel fully rustproofed and stove enamelled equipped with a hinged door with
approved locking device.
C.
The moulded case circuit breakers, earth leakage relays and busbars shall be as specified above in
this section.
D.
The earth bus shall have adequate ratings and length for connecting the incoming and outgoing earth
wires or tapes.
E.
The switchboards shall be complete with all necessary internal wiring and connections.
F.
The arrangement of the boards shall be such that the main MCCB and outgoing MCCB can be
operated when opening the door but to gain access to the MCCB's cabling and terminations a second
cover shall be removed. There shall be ample clearance and ample space available inside the boards
for cabling and terminations. Adequate clearance shall be maintained between phases and noncurrent carrying metal and terminals shall be so located that in the final connected positions there shall
be no crowding of wires in close proximity of metals.
G.
The boards shall be complete with cable glands for convenient terminations of incoming and outgoing
cables. The cable glands shall be so fixed inside the board that ample clearance exists between
various feeders.
Page 313/374

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
The Main Low Tension Boards (M.L.T.B. or LV Switchboard) shall be supplied and installed in
substation LV Rooms as indicated on the drawings (LPS). The Contractor shall supply cable terminal
lugs/glands and other accessories required by Electricity Authorities for connection.
B.
The Contractor shall submit details of proposed equipment and method of installation to the Engineer
for approval prior to commencement of installation work.
C.
The interface with CP6 contractor concerning power supply is at the output plots of transformers and
diesel generator.
3.2
EARTH BONDING
A.
Each panel section shall be individually bonded to main earth bar located in the Electrical Room.
B.
Each panel section shall be cross bonded to adjacent panel section earthing terminal.
Page 314/374

SECTION 262416 - DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (PANEL BOARD)

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
This Section includes all labour, materials and accessories for the complete performance of all
distribution boards in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.

A.

1.
Section 260010 :
2.
Section 260500 :
3.
Section 260526 :
Earthing System
4.
Section 260519 :
Wires and Cables
5.
Section 260533 :
6.
Section 260536 :
Cable Trays
B.
Related documents
1.
1.3
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.
Standards applicable to this Section:

1.
IEC 1008, BS EN 61008 :
2.
IEC 144, BS 5420
:
3.
BS 5486 Pt. 11, Pt. 12
:
4.
5.
1.4
BS EN 60898
BS 6231
Current Operated Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker.

Degree of Protection for Enclosures.
Particular Requirements for HRC Fuses,
Miniature Circuit Breaker Boards.
:
Miniature Circuit Breakers.
PVC Insulated Cable for Switchgear and Control Gear
wiring.
SUBMITTAL
A.
B.
Submit fully detailed specifications for the enclosures and components of distribution boards with
relevant sheet of manufacturer's catalogues.
C.
Submit confirmation that boards offered comply with relevant Specifications, Drawings and Schedule
of Points
D.
Submit shop drawings, equipment list, relevant samples etc. as mentioned under Section 260010.
Page 315/374

1.5

A.
B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Distribution boards shall be provided to serve lighting, fans, socket outlets and other appliances.
Board shall be arranged in banks of ways as indicated on the schedule of points.
B.
Distribution boards shall be flush mounting type unless specifically mentioned otherwise. The boards
shall be totally enclosed, dust protected, verminproof type. Enclosure shall be fabricated from robust
galvanized sheet fully rust-proofed, stove enamelled, of minimum thickness of 1.5mm. The enclosure
shall be protected to IP31 for internal use with neoprene gaskets for the doors.
C.
The distribution board enclosures shall be provided with fixed cover and a hinged door which can be
opened without any obstruction about 120 Degree. The conduit knockouts shall be provided at the top
and bottom. The hinged door with a lock and key shall be integral part of the fixed cover.
D.
The cabinet shall be so constructed so that it is necessary to open the door to operate Miniature
Circuit Breakers or E/L.C.B. Access to interior components and internal wiring shall be gained by
removing a separate barrier within the enclosure.
E.
The distribution boards shall be controlled by related adequately rated ON load isolator to interrupt the
supply to the entire distribution board.
F.
A circuit label shall be provided to indicate the area served by M.C.B.
G.
The distribution boards shall be equipped with chrome plated hinges and locks with 3 keys.
H.
Distribution board shall include 10% equipped spare, and 20% free space spare more.
2.2
BUSBARS
A.
To be of appropriate current carrying capacity at least equal to the rating of the main incoming isolator.
B.
To be of high electrical conductivity copper.
Page 316/374

2.3
MOULDED CIRCUIT NEUTRAL CONNECTOR BLOCK

A.
2.4
To be of ample size to ensure a separate way is available on the connector block for the neutral
conductor of each circuit.
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

A.
The M.C.B. shall comply to BS EN 60898 - C curve
B.
The M.C.B. dollies shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent closing of the breaker of faulty circuit, and
shall be engraved to indicate "ON/OFF' position and rated current.
C.
Frame size: minimum frame size 50A.
D.
Trip Settings: As indicated on schedule of points.
E.
To have a minimum symmetrical RMS interrupting capacity of 10 KA.
F.
To be such that it is possible to replace three single phase units with one three phase unit.
G.
Triple pole miniature circuit breakers shall have inherent characteristics to prevent single phasing and
shall be fully suitable for motor duty.
2.5
CURRENT OPERATED EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (C.O.E/L.C.B. or ELB)

A.
Current operated earth leakage circuit breakers shall provide accident protection by interrupting
dangerous contact with voltage which may be present in faulty electrical appliances as a result of
frame faults, insufficient insulation or misuse.
B.
The E/L.C.B. shall also provide a high degree of protection against earth leakage, fires and electric
shock and can withstand at least 5 KA. The breakers shall generally comply with BS EN61008, IEC
1008.
C.
The breaker shall consist of a core balance transformer, a tripping coil with contact assembly, main
supply contacts, ON/OFF switch, a test button and a trip free mechanism all enclosed in a robust body
of all insulated material.
D.
Degree of Protection against earth leakage throughout the electrical installation shall be as indicated
on the drawings and as follows :
E.
2.6
10mA. trip rating
for under water lighting.
30mA. trip rating
for all socket outlets (Receptacle) and domestic apparatus.
300mA. trip rating -
lighting circuits and all other apparatus and equipment.
The breaker protecting lighting and power circuits shall be mounted in the panel board enclosure.
LIGHTING CONTACTOR (OR RELAY)

A.
The lighting contactors shall have latch relay to contactors controlling lights and have minimum
making and breaking capacity in accordance with utilization category AC3 and shall be suitable for
intermittent duty Class 1.
B.
The mechanical rated life of the contactor shall not be less than 3 million operations.
C.
The contactors shall be single coil, electrically operated and shall be rated for Tungsten, Fluorescent
or discharge lighting load.
D.
Contactors rating and number of poles: as indicated in the Schedule of Points.
E.
Operating coil: suitable for 220~240 V, 50 Hz. supply.
Page 317/374

F.
Main contacts: double break silver to silver type protected by arcing contacts.
G.
Solenoids: shaded pole pattern of such construction that lamination noise is eliminated.
H.
Control of contactor: by local and remote push buttons as indicated.

manual/BMS also be included.
A selector switch for
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Distribution boards shall be supplied and installed as indicated on the Drawings as reviewed by the
Engineer and approved by the Employer.
B.
Distribution boards shall be installed in electrical rooms or electrical closets as indicated on the
Drawings. The top end of the distribution board shall not be higher than 180cm above finished floor
level.
C.
Drawings showing the proposed distribution panel construction and layout, including a diagram of all
internal connections on which the proposed identification markings for all cables and terminals is
shown, shall be submitted to the Engineer review and Employer approval before construction
commences.
Page 318/374

SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
Furnish and install modular tenant metering of the types, sizes and quantities indicated on the contract
drawings. Provide all lugs and accessories necessary for proper installation and operation.

A.
The following sections shall be adhered to in the performance of work specified by this section:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Section 262413 Switchboard

Section 262416 Distribution Boards
Related documents
1.
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.
The modular tenant metering and all accessories shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the latest applicable standards of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
ANSI
NEMA
UL50, UL67, UL414, UL 489
NFPA 70, NEC
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The meter center manufacturer shall also be the manufacturer of the circuit breakers [and fusible
switches].
B.
Manufacturer shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of 10 years.
C.
Products shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Provide product information prior to fabrication and installation.

dimensions, electrical ratings and maintenance data (if applicable).
Product data shall include all
Page 319/374

1.6

A.
B.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
The metering specified herein shall be designed and constructed for use in industrial applications.
The metering shall be compact, pre-bussed modular construction with the ability to add modules to
either side in the future.
SWITCH ENCLOSURES
A.
The modular-tenant metering shall be continuous duty rated. The enclosure shall be built to NEMA 3R
standards.
1.
All modules shall have weather proof rain caps and padlockable tenant breaker covers. The
enclosures shall be UL Listed rated fabricated from zinc-coated G90 steel and painted with an
ANSI 61 light gray paint applied by electro-deposition process. The enclosures shall be
mounted as shown on the drawing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
The contractor shall install all equipment in accordance with the contract drawings and manufacturers
recommendations.
TESTS
A.
FACTORY TESTING
1.
Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment in accordance with the latest
version of applicable NEMA and UL standards.
B.
SITE TESTING
Page 320/374

3.3
1.
Check tightness of all accessible mechanical and electrical connections to assure they are
torqued to the minimum acceptable manufactures recommendations.
2.
Check for proper grounding, fastening and alignment.
ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING

A.
The contractor shall install the necessary accessories in order to place the modular-tenant metering in
final operating condition.
Page 321/374

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
This Section to includes all labour, materials, equipment, appliances and accessories necessary for
the complete performance of all switches, socket outlets etc. In accordance with the Specifications
and Drawings.

A.
The following sections shall be adhered to in the performance of work specified by this section:
1.
Section 260010 :
2.
Section 260500 :
3.
Section 260519 :
Wires and Cables
4.
Section 260533 :
B.
Related documents
1.
1.3
A.
1.4

1.
NEC 406.11
:
Additional Receptacle Requirements.
2.
NEC 370-16
:
Outlet Box
3.
NEC 370-18
:
Pull Box and Junction Box
4.
BS 4343 :
Industrial Plugs, Sockets Outlets and Couplers for a.c. and d.c. Supplies.
5.
BS 3676 :
Switches for Domestic and Similar Purposes (for fixed or portable
mounting).
6.
BS 4662 :
Boxes for Enclosure of Electrical Accessories.
7.
BS 5733 :
General Requirements for Electrical Accessories.
8.
BS 4177 :
Cooker Control Units Rated 30 Amp. and 45 Amp. 250 Volts Single
Phase Supply
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.5

A.
B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Page 322/374

B.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
All individual items of materials shall be of the same make throughout the project unless otherwise
specifically approved by the Engineer.
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Outlet Boxes
1.
2.
B.
Exterior Mounted Boxes

1.
2.3
Galvanized or sheradized one piece pressed steel, sizes and designs shall suit devices to be
fitted.
In fuel tank room and battery room : explosion proof.
Totally sealed to ensure water tightness.
SWITCHES
A.
Lighting Switches
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Waterproof Switches
1.
2.
C.
To be operated by means of a brass disc.

To be watertight and metal clad
Switch Plates
1.
2.
D.
To be compliant with standard NEC 210-70, BS 3676.

Grid fixing type rated 10 or 20 Amps. unless specified otherwise. The grid shall be provided
with suitable earthing terminal.
Recessed with concealed conduit surface pattern elsewhere.
Quick make slow break type.
Single pole, double pole, one way or two way, as indicated.
White finish in all areas unless noted otherwise.
Where two or more switches are grouped together and connected to the same phase, multigang devices and common plates shall be used.
Rectangular, chrome finished switch plates shall be used in all areas unless specified
otherwise. The rocker shall be insulated with ivory finish.
Double Pole Switches

1.
The double pole switches shall be with indication neon lamps and shall be rated 20 Amps. as
specified.
Page 323/374

2.
2.4
The face plate shall be of white and shall be engraved `WATER HEATER', `WATER COOLER'
etc. as specified.
SOCKET OUTLETS
A.
General purpose Socket Outlets (Receptacle)

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
16A Socket Outlet

1.
2.
C.
To be compliant with standard NEC 406.11, BS 1363.

3 rectangular pin (2P+E) shuttered, with combined switch, rated 16A, 20A 250V.
Twin switched sockets rated 16A, 20A, 250V
Switched socket with neon indication to be used wherever connected to emergency power
supply.
To be compliant with standard NEC 406.11, BS 346.

3 round pin (2P+E) shuttered switched pattern complete with plug.
Weatherproof Sockets
1.
16A Socket
2.
To be compliant with standard NEC 406.11, BS 546,
3.
3 round pins and with combined switch.
4.
Weatherproof sockets shall :
a.
b.
c.
D.
Socket Outlet Plates/Switches/Push Buttons and Dimmer Switch etc.

1.
2.5
Have minimum IP44 grade protection;

Housing parts : brass or pressure die-cast finished in grey hammered stove enamel;
Have caps that close tight on socket when plug is not inserted.
White finish in all areas unless specified otherwise readily identifiable.
PUSH BUTTON SWITCHES FOR LIGHTS

A.
General
1.
Push button switches for the operation of contractor controlled lights shall be of the push to
make and push to break type.
The push button plate shall have same finish as of lighting switch plate.
B.
Operating Mechanism
1.
2.
C.
Multiple Pushbuttons
1.
2.6
To be contained in the device box.

Shall have voltage rating 240V.
Where two or more buttons occur in one position they shall be contained in one case and each
shall be appropriately labelled to indicate its function.
DIMMER SWITCHES
A.
Dimmer switches shall be 240 Volts, rated as indicated on the drawings, suitable for dimming of
incandescent and fluorescent lamps.
B.
Switch control knobs shall be matt chrome finish or special finish for VIP areas and shall incorporate
push to ÒN' and push to ÒFF' switch action.
Page 324/374

C.
All switches shall incorporate in design features, all necessary screening and circuitry to suppress
radio interference in accordance with BS 800.
D.
All switch module sizes provided shall be suitable for, and installed within, 35mm deep standard BS
boxes with internal metal dividers to segregate different circuits as necessary.
2.7
DISCONNECT SWITCHES.
A.
2.8
Generally:
1.
To be metal clad with front operated handles interlocked with enclosure to prevent opening
switch in the "ON" position.
2.
Switch shall have "On/Off" indication and means of locking in "Off" position.
3.
Protection class IP65 for outdoor and IP54 for indoor locations.
4.
Load break switch and switch fuses should be ARC TESTED complete system (along with
enclosure) should be type tested from reputed testing laboratory recognized under LOVAG for
degree of protection as well as ARC Testing.
5.
Enclosure should have reliable position indicator. If the contacts are welded together, the
o
handle (front operated) should deviate from ON-Position less than 45 .
JUNCTION, PULL AND TERMINAL BOXES

A.
The Junction Box shall be completed with a terminal block suitable for connecting up to 10 sq.mm.
copper conductor (phase, neutral and earth) and an all insulated moulded white cover plate with
removal covers.
B.
The cover plate shall be raised for connecting outgoing cable.
2.9
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL

A.
Drawing reference
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES

A.
Location of Boxes
1.
2.
B.
Mounting Heights
1.
2.
3.
C.
Determine exact location of boxes on site and obtain the Engineer's approval before
commencing installation.
Make allowance for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness of finish,
window trim, panelling and other construction while locating boxes.
Mount boxes as indicated or as approved by the Engineer.

Where mounting height is not shown or specified, obtain instructions.
Boxes for similar equipment: mount at uniform heights within same or similar areas.
Fixing
1.
2.
Fix outlet boxes securely.

Fix exposed outlet boxes to permanent inserts or lead anchors with machine screws.
Page 325/374

3.2
INSTALLATION OF SWITCHES
A.
Lighting switches near door :

1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Located at the strike side of the door.

Plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall.
Plates shall be installed with an alignment tolerance of 1.5mm.
All switch assembly grid plates shall have their earthing terminal connected to the earth
terminal attached to the switch box by an insulated 2.5 sq.mm protective conductor.
INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION, PULL AND TERMINAL BOXES

A.
Generally
1.
2.
B.
Pull Boxes
1.
3.4
Fix junction, pull and terminal boxes where indicated and where required to facilities pulling of
wires and cables and connection of future appliances.
Locate boxes as inconspicuously as possible, but accessible after work is completed.
Fix at maximum 10m spacing and to limit the number of bends in conduit to not be more than
o
two 90 .
TESTING
A.
Test all switches, socket outlets etc. for correct polarity and continuity of conductors in the presence of
and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
B.
Carry out live phase to earth loop impedance tests at all switches and socket outlets with an approved
earth loop impedance tester to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Ensure that all device plate
have satisfactory earth continuity to the protective conductor system.
C.
Test all 16 or 20 Amp. socket outlets for instantaneous tripping of associated distribution board current
operated earth leakage circuit breaker using testing equipment, reviewed by the Engineer and
approved by the Employer.
Page 326/374

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This Section includes: Cartridge fuses, rated 600 V and less, for use in switches, panelboards,
switchboards and controllers.
B.
If there is no Fuse's expression in drawing whereas its needed, it should be established according to
regulation.
1.2
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.
Standards applicable to this Section

1.
NEC 406.11
Requirements.
2.
NEC 370-16
3.
NEC 370-18
4.
BS 4343
Outlets and Couplers for a.c. and d.c. Supplies.
5.
BS 3676
Similar Purposes (for fixed or portable mounting).
6.
BS 4662
Electrical Accessories.
7.
BS 5733
Electrical Accessories.
8.
BS 4177
Amp. and 45 Amp. 250 Volts Single Phase Supply
1.3
Additional
Receptacle
:
:
:
Outlet Box
Pull Box and Junction Box
Industrial
Plugs,
Sockets
Switches
Boxes
General
Cooker Control Units Rated 30
for
Domestic
and
Enclosure
of
Requirements
for
for
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, and ratings.
Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data.
Fuse size for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

A.
B.
Page 327/374

1.5
COORDINATION
A.
1.6
Coordinate fuse ratings with HVAC and refrigeration equipment nameplate limitations of maximum
fuse size.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to Section 260010 and compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Merlin Gerin.
Cooper Industries, Inc.
Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
Gould Shawmut.
Any equivalent manufacturer providing a product in accordance with the Employers
Requirements.
CARTRIDGE FUSES
A.
Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage
rating consistent with circuit voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with
characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
B.
Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse
ratings.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.
Page 328/374

3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch.
Page 329/374

SECTION 263353 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
This Section includes all labour, materials and accessories for the complete performance of 32Bit
DSP(Digital Signal Processor) Controlled Uninterruptible Power Supply system (hereinafter called
UPS) to be used for AC power for Load that requires power in case of power failure, erratic fluctuation.
UPS consist of Rectifier/Charger, a set of storage Batteries, Inverter, and Static switch, and devices.

A.

1.
Section 260010 :
B.
Related documents
1.
1.3
A.
section.
B.
standards.
C.

1.
ANSI
2.
NEMA
3.
IEC (IEC62040-2)
4.
IEEE 944 (IEEE INVERTER STANDARDS)
5.
UL STANDARDS 1778
6.
FCC Part 15 Sub Part J, Class A
1.4
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5

A.
B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Page 330/374

B.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
General
A.
UPS shall be provided to supply continuous electrical power for the following system/equipment in the
Depot:
1.
Emergency Lighting of depot (Except if using Emergency Lighting Unit or equivalent
technology),
2.
Control and Command of LPS.
3.
All specific emergency equipments
4.
Access control of the OCC
B.
An UPS shall be sized to power its full connected load for two hours. An UPS distribution board shall
enable this period to be extended for selected loads. The UPS shall include a rectifier/charger section,
inverter section, a static by-pass switch, a manual by-pass switch, battery and all necessary control.
C.
The UPS shall be provided in a single cabinet complete with control switches and meter. Its audible
noise level shall not exceed 55 dBA at 1.5m in the front panel, over a load range 10% to 100% full
load.
D.
The battery shall consist of sealed lead-acid cells, thus obviating the specific need for flameproof
equipment in the Electrical Supply Room. These shall be mounted in at least two cabinets such that:
1.
those in one cabinet shall be disconnected for maintenance while the rest provide a full service
for a shorter time;
2.
those so disconnected shall be isolated into groups such that no touch voltage exceeds 120 V;
3.
such isolation shall be interlocked with the cabinet doors to prevent access unless isolated.
2.2
Inverter
A.
2.3
The inverter shall provide a 3 phase 380/220 V, 50Hz output, stabilized to 5% from onload to full load,
with batteries from 100% to 20% charged.
UPS
A.
The UPS shall have a minimum degree of protection of IP31 in accordance with IEC60529.
B.
The following data shall apply:

1.
Input voltage: 380 V 10% T.P. & N.
2.
Input frequency : 50 Hz 5%
3.
Output rating : kVA (the Contractor to design rating)
4.
Output voltage : 400/230 V 1% T.P. & N.
5.
Output frequency : 50 Hz 0.1%
6.
Distortion factor with linear load: Less than 5%
7.
Overload capacity : 440% 10s; 144% 10 min.
8.
Power factor : 0.9 to 0.95
9.
Total harmonic distortion content : Less than 1% with linear load and less than 5% with nonlinear load
Page 331/374

C.
The UPS shall be of the solid state type with manual and solid state bypass switches and shall be
complete with incoming T.P.&.N. mains isolator, input and output ammeters, voltmeters and frequency
meters, power on indication and fault indication. The operation shall be fully automatic with all key
elements being monitored and alarms generated. A control and monitoring panel shall be capable of
displaying various system parameter, alarm indications and fault diagnostic information.
D.
The UPS shall be fitted with a manually operated make before break mechanical by-pass system. The
batteries shall be fitted with a circuit breaker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
A.
The floor of the battery area shall be suitably sealed to prevent acid causing deterioration to the
concrete floor.
Page 332/374

SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Lightning protection system shall be an Early Streamer Emission as specified in the drawings and
Contract documents.
B.
Provide all labour, materials, equipment, services and accessories necessary to furnish and install the
work of this Section, complete and functional, as indicated in the Contract Documents and as specified
herein.
C.
The purpose of the lightning protection system is to minimize the effects of a lightning strike to the
building, from above or from the side, and to safely conduct the discharge to earth without side
flashing and without danger to personnel.
D.
The system shall consist of an interconnected air termination network, down conductors, bonding
conductors, earth electrodes and any other items required to make a complete system. Test joints
shall be provided as required to make routine tests of the system.
E.
Full working details including all builders work requirements shall be provided prior to any excavation
work commencing on site.
F.
The entire lightning protection system, apart from natural building elements used as part of the
system, shall be the product of one manufacturer. Subject to the requirements of this Specification and
architectural considerations, all items shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
G.
Natural conductive elements of the building such as metal roofs, columns and framing, reinforcement,
foundations and piling shall be used as part of the lightning protection system. Where building
elements are to be used as part of the lightning protection system they shall be tested during
construction to ensure that the resistance is low enough for the purpose. A formal record shall be kept
of the resistance readings taken. If readings are higher than acceptable, suitable measures shall be
taken, in consultation with the engineer and the appropriate construction contractors, to reduce the
resistance to an acceptable value.
H.
Where higher buildings or conductive structures surround the location of a lightning protection system
indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall perform simulations and calculations to demonstrate
the necessity of the protection systems. It may be appropriate to not install the system detailed in the
Drawings if existing protection radius and level comply with the standards.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
General Provisions for Electrical Work
Section 260010
B.
Section 260500
C.
Grounding and Bonding
Section 260526
D.
The work of this Section is integral with the whole of the Contract Documents and is not intended to be
interpreted outside that context.
E.
Coordinate the work with all other services affecting the work of this Section.
1.3
A.
section.
Page 333/374

B.
standards.
C.
IEC International
D.
NFPA-781 - USA
E.
BS 6651 : 1992 code of practice for protection of structures against lightning.
F.
BS 7430 : 1991 code of practice for earthing.
G.
BS 6651 U.K
H.
CENDEC - European
I.
French National Standard NF C 17-102
J.
Reference standards as detailed under Section 260010 .
1.4
SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS
A.
Product Data: At the time of submitting samples submit manufacturer's details, catalogues etc.
B.
Shop Drawing: Submit drawings showing route of trunking system and obtain approval before
commencing work.
C.
1.5
PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Delivery, store and handle materials and products in a manner to prevent damage.
B.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
1.7
The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other services.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
Page 334/374

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS / MATERIALS
A.
B.
2.2
General
1.
The type, grade and quality of materials and the dimensions of components shall be as
detailed in applicable standard.
2.
All fittings, fixings, supports etc, shall be purpose made and of the type and manufacture
specified or as shown on the drawings.
3.
Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum and shall be both electrically and mechanically
sound and constructed to prevent the ingress of moisture.
4.
All contact between dissimilar metals or between a metal and a material with which it might
react shall be avoided, except as permitted in applicable standard and provided all the
precautionary measures recommended are employed. If necessary to prevent long-term
corrosion, additional precautions shall be taken such as separation or the insertion of an
intermediate material with which neither of the dissimilar metals/materials reacts, or by
changing the metal or material.
Copper
1.
Conductors shall be of high conductivity annealed copper tapes not less than 25mm x 3mm.
2.
All component parts shall be copper or copper compatible. In corrosive atmospheres the
copper shall be coated with lead.
3.
Fittings and fixings, including screws, for copper conductors shall be of copper alloy such as
phosphor bronze, naval brass or gunmetal. No PVC, polypropylene, polycarbonate nor any
non-metallic fixings shall be used except on membrane roofs where plastic holdfasts or
concrete filled holdfasts may be installed subject to agreement with the engineer and the
roofing installer.
4.
Joints and crossover connections between conductors shall be made using purpose-made
connector clamps of the same manufacture as the conductor.
AIR TERMINATIONS (Air Rod)

A.
Air terminations shall consist of a network of conductors on roofs and on the sides of buildings (where
required), laid on a grid pattern so that no part of the roof or wall protected is more than 5 meters from
a conductor.
B.
Vertical air terminals shall be installed where shown on drawings. Air terminals and associated
fixtures and fittings shall be of the same manufacture as the rest of the system.
C.
The conductors shall be bare unless PVC covering is called for on drawings or Schedules, in which
case the color shall be as indicated. PVC covered conductors shall be bared in order to make
connections and the joints shall be subsequently weatherproofed and taped with PVC tape of the
same color as the covering.
D.
Where roof conductors cross building expansion joints, a flexible link shall be inserted. The flexible
link may take the form of a loop (in flat conductors of equivalent cross section to the fixed conductors)
or a braided or stranded length of conductor. The circumference of circular conductors shall be not
less than 8 times the length of gap to be bridged. The flexible link shall be firmly fixed on both sides of
the expansion joint and shall be as short as practicable on condition that it will not be in tension under
any designed building movement.
Page 335/374

2.3
DOWN CONDUCTORS
A.
Down conductors shall be disposed around and inside the building as shown on drawings or, if not
shown, as required by the BS and in agreement with the engineer.
B.
Where reinforcing bars are insulated to prevent corrosion and where precast or prestressed members
have no metal-to-metal contact with other members then additional provisions shall be made to ensure
electrical continuity.
C.
Where connections are made to reinforcement bars or sections used as down conductors, the point
where such connections emerge from the encasement or cladding shall be sealed, waterproofed and
protected against corrosion by means of an acceptable epoxy resin, cast into place and extending at
least 100mm beyond the junction.
2.4
EARTH ELECTRODES
A.
Earth electrodes shall be molecularly bonded copper clad steel rods driven vertically into the ground.
Threads shall be properly rolled so that the copper cladding is unbroken throughout. Couplings shall
be of silicon aluminium bronze and shall be fully threaded to allow metal-to-metal contact of the rods.
Couplings shall be counter-bored and of sufficient length to completely cover and protect the threaded
portion of the rods to minimize corrosion.
B.
Driving heads for the rods shall be high tensile steel and shall be fully threaded to ensure head-to-rod
contact. Driving shall be accomplished by using a purpose made power hammer. Each rod shall be
fitted, after driving, with a conductor clamp.
C.
Where the ground is unsuitable for copper clad steel rods, other types of earth electrodes complying
with applicable standard may be used. Where building elements are to be used as the earth
electrodes they shall be tested during construction to ensure that the resistance is low enough to
make suitable electrodes. A formal record shall be kept of the resistance readings taken.
2.5
TEST JOINTS
A.
All test joints shall be accessible for testing at the time of installation and for future routine tests.
B.
Test joints shall be provided at the bottom of each down conductor so that the integrity of the earth
electrodes can be tested separately. Where natural building elements are used as down conductors
then test joints shall be provided at the top of the building to measure the resistance to earth.
2.6
BONDING
A.
All exposed metalwork on the roof and on the outside of the building shall be bonded to the lightning
protection system. Interior metalwork shall be bonded if it is close enough to elements of the lightning
protection system to risk the danger of flashover. The need for bonding shall be assessed by the
calculation method given in applicable standard.
B.
In lift installations only, the continuous rigid metal structure shall be bonded to the lightning conductor
and to adjacent structural steelwork and such bonding shall be confined to the top and bottom of the
continuous rigid metal structure. The guide rails are not part of the structure for this purpose but shall
be bonded as exposed conductive parts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEST CERTIFICATES
A.
A test certificate shall be provided on completion of the installation to certify that Inspection and
Testing have been carried out in accordance with the Standards.
Page 336/374

B.
The test certificate shall contain the resistance measurement of each earth electrode and earth
termination network, of each down conductor and of the building as a whole.
C.
In addition to resistance measurements, the certificate shall contain the following information for each
reading:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
the date and time

the weather conditions
the type of soil
the condition of the soil (e.g. wet, dry, average)
Any measures taken to reduce soil resistance
Details of the reference earth used for testing.
EARTHING
A.
Lightning system shall be grounded independently from General and Electronic Electrical installations
as described in the section 260526, in the drawings and in the Contract Documents.
Page 337/374

SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The Contractor shall supply and install all luminaries, accessories and wiring as indicated on the
Drawings and detailed in the specification of the lighting system.
B.
The installation of all luminaries shall be coordinated with other services, false ceiling and related civil
work.
C.
The final arrangement of office light fixtures shall be decided at site in coordination with final partition
layout and furniture arrangement. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the Engineer for the final
arrangement of the lighting fixtures. No extra claim will be considered for rearranging the lighting
fixtures according to the site condition. The Contractor shall submit coordinated shop drawings for the
same for approval of the Engineer.
D.
Specified lamps shall be installed in related luminaries, before commissioning.
1.2
APPLICABLE STANDARDS REFERRED TO IN THIS SECTION

A.
Light fittings shall comply to the following standards as appropriate.

1.
IBS 1204.3, IESNA
Luminaries.
2.
IBC 1204.4
Stairway illumination.
3.
IBC 1204.3.2
Lighting Fixtures
4.
IBC 1204.3.3
Controls
5.
IZC 813.1
Security Criteria for Exterior Lighting
6.
BS 4533
Luminaries.
7.
BS 1853
Service
Tubular Fluorescent Lamps for General Lighting
8.
BS 2818
Lamps
Specification for Ballast for Tubular Fluorescent
9.
BS 4017
Fluorescent Lamps
Specification for capacitors for use in Tubular

Circuits
1.3
10.
BS 3772
11.
BS 5042, PT.4
12.
BS 4782
:
:
Starters for Fluorescent Lamps
Specification for Lamp-holders and Starter-holders

:
Ballasts for Discharge Lamps
SUBMITTALS
A.
The Contractor shall submit the following before ordering the fittings.
1.
Manufacturers technical catalogues showing the type of the fitting proposed, photometric
datas, dimensions, rated voltage, ambient temperature rating, type and size of internal wiring,
etc.
2.
Technical details of the ballast including manufacturer, type of insulating material, max. winding
temperature and rated temperature rise.
Page 338/374

1.4
3.
Technical details of the power factor correction capacitor including manufacturer, voltage,
frequency, capacitance, integral discharge resistor, etc.
4.
Technical details of the starters including manufacturer, type, temperature rating and related
lamp rating.
5.
Sample of each of the proposed lighting fitting.
6.
Shop drawings showing luminaries design and installation requirements.
7.
The Contractor shall submit the name of local agent of each type of luminaries who can supply
spare parts and lamps during the expected life of the luminaries.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Marking shall provide on each luminaries and its components in accordance with referred standard.
B.
Ship each luminary securely wrapped, packaged and labeled for safe handling in shipment and to
avoid damaged or distortion.
C.
Store luminaries in secure and dry storage facility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INCANDESCENT LAMPS
A.
All lamps shall be suitable for function on the specified voltage.
B.
Lamps 150 watt and below shall be inside frosted type and shall be fitted with bayonet type caps.
C.
Minimum average rated life shall be 1500 hours.
2.2
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
Fluorescent Lamps to BS 1853. Size as indicated in fixture.
B.
Fluorescent lamps shall be 26mm dia. slim tube energy saving, type, with cool white light colour,
Grade 1 according to DIN 5035 or colour 850 colour rendering index 85 and colour temperature 4000
K according to BS 1853 and IEC 81. Daylight / 860 - daylight 6400 K and natural daylight / 942 - 4200
K.
C.
The fluorescent lamps shall be rated for following lumens output after 100 hours of operation.
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.3
58 W lamp
36 W lamp
18 W lamp
:
:
:
5400 Lumens
3450 Lumens
1450 Lumens
Minimum average rated life shall be 10000 hours.
CONTROL GEAR FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A.
All control gear for fluorescent lamp shall be electronic, 220~240 V single phase, 50 Hz with Radio
Interfer Suppression etc.
B.
The control gear shall be compact type, fully enclosed in polyster or other suitable insulating material.
Page 339/374

C.
2.4
Each fluorescent fitting which is controlled by dimmer shall be provided with special ballast. The
electronic module and the heating transformer shall be mounted on same base plate and shall suitable
o
o
for ambient temperature 0 C to 50 C. The ballast shall be suitable for the dimming purpose and
complete coordination shall be done with the dimmers for trouble free operation.
LAMP HOLDERS
A.
Shall comply to the relevant IEC or BS.
B.
The body of lamp holders and starter holders shall be of good heat resisting insulating material
capable to prevent during extended normal use any electrical or mechanical failure. Contacts shall be
resilient and shall provide adequate contact pressure.
C.
Lamp holders for fluorescent lamps shall be the spring loaded rotor type for use with bi-pin lamps.
2.5
LIGHTING FITTINGS
A.
B.
2.6
General
1.
All lighting fittings shall be of excellent quality, made by approved reputable manufacturers and
o
shall be suitable in all respects for trouble free operation on 220~240 Volts, 50Hz at 45 C. All
light fittings shall from standard range of production of the manufacturer, for which spare parts
and lamps are easily available during expected life of the fittings and associated equipment.
2.
All fluorescent lighting fitting shall be complete with all internal wiring. The internal wiring shall
be not less than 1.5sq.mm with silicon rubber insulation or high temperature rated PVC clipped
neatly in position.
3.
Radio interference suppression capacitor system shall be provided for each fluorescent fitting.
4.
The lighting fittings shall be provided with terminal block for external wiring connections.
5.
All lighting fittings shall be constructed so that lamps control gears are readily accessible for
maintenance. Diffusers/Louvers shall be provided with hinges and captives screws to permit
easy relamping.
6.
Earthing terminal shall be provided for each fitting.
7.
Description mentioned in the specification indicates the general type desired and do not intend
to restrict selection to fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fittings of similar design,
equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality will be
acceptable.
Discharge Lamp Fittings

1.
All discharge luminaries shall comply with the requirements of BS 4533 and shall be minimum
IP22 unless indicated otherwise in fittings description.
2.
All fittings shall be furnished complete with internal wiring, lamp holders, lamps and suspension
accessories in addition to integral control gear for mercury and metal halide light fittings.
3.
All mercury and metal halide light fittings shall be provided with 220~240 Volts, 50Hz. Ballast
comply with BS 4782 and power factor correction capacitor,(leakproof metallic container type
comply with BS 4017) for improving power factor to a minimum of 0.90 and suitable ignitor for
metal halide lamps.
COMPANY INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall include in Contract Price the total cost of the arrangement for all travelling, lodging,
boarding and daily allowances for Factory Testing as detailed below.
Page 340/374

B.
Factory inspection of manufacturing and testing R&D facilities shall be witnessed by representatives of
the following, prior to starting the production of other units.
C.
Contractor shall provide notice to the Employer for inspection in writing or through telex or fax
with a copy to the third part inspectorate so as to reach the company at least four weeks in advance
incase of foreign inspection.
Employer may elect to arrange independent inspection of materials or equipment at the vendor's or
sub-vendor's premises. Company shall notify the details of such third party inspection assignments
and contractor shall furnish the inspectorate with (un-priced) orders, requisitions, specifications and
other relevant information.
D.
Employer representative or its nominated third party inspectorate, in due coordination with the
contractor shall have the right at all times to inspect or to cause the inspection of materials and
equipment at their place of production, fabrication or installation through out the contract period.
E.
Where third party inspection is stipulated, it shall be obligatory for the contractor to obtain acceptance
or inspection release prior to releasing the equipment for shipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Supply, install and connect the luminaries specified. The luminaries shall be mounted at the heights
detailed on the drawings or specified here or as per Engineer's instruction at site.
B.
Pendant fluorescent fittings shall be suspended by means of two nos. of heavy gauge galvanised steel
conduits. Ball and socket domes covers shall be fitted to the suspension for fixing them to the fixed
conduit box or other fixing.
C.
All fixing screws shall be brass, and where not concealed shall be finished to match the luminaire.
D.
All metal lamp holders and luminaries shall be earthed by means of earth continuity conductors
connected to the body of the fitting or lamp-holder. The earthing wire being connected to a terminal
provided within each fitting specifically for this purpose.
E.
The final connection of all luminaries integrated into suspended ceiling system, shall be with flexible
heat resisting cable terminated at related ceiling rose suitably rated and mounted in the ceiling void
directly adjacent to the luminaire. The length of flexible cable shall be sufficient to move the fitting by
two tiles in any direction as required at site.
F.
The weight of each light fitting shall rest only on the ceiling support channels in the case of plaster or
acoustical tile ceilings. All hangers, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets for safe
installation of luminaires shall be erected in place. The complete system shall be compatible.
G.
Installation details of all light fittings shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer.
H.
All lighting fittings shall be properly installed in coordination with all other services.
I.
All lighting fittings shall be installed true and level and shall be free of dents and any other
irregularities.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF LAMPS
A.
Install lamps of rating as specified for related luminaires.
B.
Do not install used lamps in the luminaires.
Page 341/374

3.3
COMMISSIONING OF LIGHTING SYSTEM

A.
Complete lighting system shall be commissioned before handing over of the project. Insulation tests,
performance tests and illumination level measurements shall be conducted in presence of the
Engineer.
B.
All instruments and personnel required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor.
PART 4 - SPECIFICATION OF LAMP (IN PIT)
No.
DETAILS
CHARACTERISTICS
Body
Aluminium alloy
Colour of body
Can be painted in any RAL

colour. For special applications such as illuminating
monuments,the MY 1 luminaire can be fitted with colour filters
treated to withstand UV rays thus guaranteeing colour
permanence.
Protector
MY 1:polycarbonate
MY 2: borosilicate glass
Impact resistance of protector
MY 1 (PC): IK 10
MY 2 (glass / PC): IK 06 / IK 10 standard EN 50102
Boulon, clip
Stainless steel
Fixation clamp
Simple, reliable, maintain the tightness IP67
Reflector
Can be fitted with many kinds of reflector for many lighting

purposes. The photometry depends on the number of lamps and
how they are arranged.
The refractor protectors of the MY luminaires significantly
cut down glare and provide a comfortable light distribution.
Tightness level
IP 67 High tightness luminaires
Electrical Insulation class
Class I or II (*)- IEC 536 TCVN 5828:1994
10
Installation
Be mounted by means of a bracket and allows it to be adjusted in

position.
11
Weight (w/t CG and lamp)
1,5 kg -6,5kg depends on the number of lamps.
12
Fluorescent lamps
Fluorescent lamps 18W- 58W
Page 342/374

Compact fluorescent lamps
Compact fluorescent lamps 7-55 W
13
Connection terminal
Polyamid plastic, heat resistance upto 130 C
14
Wire
Silicone wire, heat resistance, fire-proof
15
Socket
Enamel socket, damp-proof
16
Ballast
Heat resistance up to 130 , energy saving, noiseless
17
Capacitor
Alluminium cover, heat resistance up to 100
Max voltage: 280V, Appropriate for using in tropical climate area.

18
Power factor (cos )
> 0.90
19
Coefficient of utilization k
> 86%
20
Convenience
Without tools
21
Manufacturer
Vietnam Schreder Co.,ltd
22
Promotion
1 year guaranteed
PART 5 - Workshop lamp
5.1.
DESCRIPTION
Highbay luminaire for lamps from 70W to 400W with lamp in vertical position.
- Body and control gear box made of painted gravity casting aluminium alloy.
- Control gear to be fixed on a removable galvanised steel plate.
- Reflector in spun high purity, polished and anodisied aluminium.
- A glass protector with high thermal and mechanical resistance is set into the reflector with an
EPDM gasket.
- Colour: grey
5.2.
CHARACTERISTICS
Tightness optical
resistance
IP 65
Page 343/374

Tightness control gear
compartment
5.3.
IP 54
Electrical insulation
Class I
Shock resistance protector
5Joules
POLAR DIAGRAM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes the following

1.
Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballast
Page 344/374

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Fluorescent lamp
Compact Fluorescent lamp
High-Intensity-Discharge lamp(HID)
Incandescent PAR lamp
LEDs
B.
The Contractor shall supply and install all luminaries, accessories and wiring as indicated on the
drawings and detailed in the specification of the lighting system.
C.
The installation of all luminaries shall be coordinated with other services, false ceiling and related civil
work.
D.
Specified lamps shall be installed in related luminaires, before commissioning.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
Lighting Fixtures shall comply to the following standards as apporopriate.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.4
IBS 1204.3, IESNA : Luminaries.

IBC 1204.4 : Stairway illumination.
IBC 1204.3.2 : Lighting fixtures
IBC 1204.3.3 : Controls
IZC 813.1 : Security criteria for exterior lighting
BS 4533 : Luminaries.
BS 1853 : Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service
BS 2818 : Specification for ballast for tubular fluorescent lamps
BS 4017 : Specification for capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent lamps circuits
BS 3772 : Starters for fluorescent lamps
BS 5042, PT.4 : Specification for lamp-holders and starter-holders
BS 4782 : Ballasts for discharge lamps
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each luminaire, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on
features, accessories, finishes, and the following.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.5
Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and detailed drawings showing : materials,
construction, arrangements of components and wiring, gasketting for weather tightness,
mounting method and adjusting aspect, electrical data including volts, amperes and watts.
Lamp: Lamp designation, initial and mean lumen output, average rated hours of lamp life, color
rendering index and color temperature.
Photometric data: If requested supply complete photometric data for each fixture.
Shop Drawings: dimensioned drawings of luminaires, including fixture accessories. Shop
drawings may be submitted for review before fabrication.
Manuals: Prior to final inspection, provide complete set of operating and maintenance manuals.
Include technical data sheets and parts ordering information. Include testing and maintenance
requirements and instructions for emergency lighting equipment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All lighting fixtures shall be manufactured, and installed in compliance with agencies having jurisdiction
and marketed for intended use.
B.
All lighting fixtures shall comply with IBC or BS
C.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers data including all required information described before.
D.
Samples for verification: For exterior luminaires designed for sample submission in the specification.
After sample acceptance, the fixture shall be sent to the project for use as a standard. When the
Page 345/374

submission is rejected, the fixture shall be returned to the manufacturer to immediately make a new
submission that meets the contract requirements.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Lighting fixture shall be wrapped for protection during delivery, storage, and handling. Wet or damp
wrapping shall be removed, and disposed of, to prevent staining finish.
B.
Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, protective packaging.
C.
Store materials in original packaging in a manner to prevent soiling and physical damage, prior to
installation.
D.
Handle in a manner to prevent damage to finished surfaces.
E.
Where possible, maintain protective covering until installation is complete and remove such coverings
as part of final cleanup.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
1.8
Special Warranty: Manufecturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
lighting fixtures or component of fixtures and lamps that fail in materials or workmanship. Stain,
Corrode, face, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specific warranty period.
EXTRA MATARIALS
The contractor shall furnish the following as part of this contract. Extra materials shall be packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
A.
Lamps: 10 for every 100 [10%] of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
B.
Glass/Plastic lenses/Louvers and Other Optical Parts: 5 for every 100 [5%] of each type and rating
installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
C.
Ballasts: 5 for every 100 [5%] of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
D.
Globes and Guards: 10 for every 100 [10%] of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Lighting fixture shall comply with IBC or BS and listed, suitable for installation in damp & wet locations.
B.
Provide each fixture with lamps as indicated in the lighting fixture schedule. If lamps are not indicated,
contact the architect for clarification.
C.
Lighting fixture shall be rigidly constructed, stable and assembled with secure fastenings.
D.
Metal part shall be free of sharp edges, corners, and burrs.
E.
Sheet metal components shall be corrosion resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Exposed hardware shall be stainless steel.
Page 346/374

G.
Gasket shall be heat and aging resistant gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractor in luminaire
doors.
H.
Yokes, brackets and supplementary supporting members needed to mount lighting fixtures structure
shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.
2.2
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A.
Ballast shall be capable for operation in starting temperature of -20C (0F) to 60C (128F)
B.
Ballast shall have a 5 year written warranty that includes free replacement for warranty period.
C.
Ballast shall be electronic or electro magnetic type.
D.
Ballast for Compact Fluorescent lamps shall be suitable for cold weather starting and shall have
minimum power factor of 90%.
2.3
HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLAST (Metal Halide)

A.
General: comply with IBC or BS
B.
HID Ballast shall be CWA (Constant-wattage autotransformer) or regulating High Power Factor type
C.
Minimum starting temperature of ballast shall be -30C (-22F) for single lamp ballast.
D.
Normal ambient ballast operating temperature shall be 40C (104F)
E.
Ballast shall be constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life.
F.
Metal halide ballast shall be auto stabilized type with lead peaked circuiting.
G.
Metal halide ballast power factor shall be minimum 90%.
H.
Metal halide ballast shall be purse start type.
2.4
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
T5 High efficiency fluorescent lamp: CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature shall be 3000K, average
lamp life of 12,000 hours at 3 hours per start.
1.
2.5
T5 Single tube 28watt (High efficiency) : 2600 initial lumens (minimum)
COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A.
Base wattage and tube size per luminaire specification. CRI 82(minimum) and color temperature shall
be 3000K
1.
2.
2.6
TC-D 18W
TC-TEL 26W
:
:
1200lm
1800lm
HIGH-INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS

A.
Ceramic Metal Halide lamps: Base wattage and tube size per luminaire specification. CRI 80
(minimum) and color temperature of 3000K unless indicated otherwise.
Page 347/374

2.7
INCANDESCENT LAMPS
A.
2.8
Incandescent PAR 38 lamps: Rated 120watt, 3100 initial lumens (minimum), 30 beam angle (spot ),
9300 Central Beam Candle Power, average rated lamp life of 1500 hour (minimum).
LIGHT EMITTING DIODES:

A.
2.9
LEDs shall be of the specified wattage and lumen output, beam angle as indicated in the fixture
specification. LEDs shall have color temperature of 3000K unless indicated otherwise. LEDs shall
have an average lamp life of 50,000 hours. Lamp lumen depreciation at 50,000 hours shall not be
more than 30% of initial.
LAMP HOLDERS
A.
Shall comply to the relevant IBC or BS.
B.
The body of lamp holders and starter holders shall be of good heat resisting insulating material
capable to provent during extended normal use any electrical or mechanical failure. Contacts shall be
resilient and shall provide adequate contact pressue.
C.
Lamp holders for fluorescent lamps shall be the spring loaded rotor type for use with bi-pin lamps
2.10
FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturers standard paint applied to factory assembled and tested luminaire before
shipping.
B.
Factory Painted finish for steel luminiares:

1.
Surface preparation: Clean surfaces to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that
could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mil
scale and rust.
2.
Interior Surfaces: Apply one coat of bituminous paint on interior of pole, or other acceptable
method of preventing corrosion.
3.
Exterior Surfaces: Manufactures standard finish paint of one or more prime coats and two
finish coats of high gloss, high build polyurethane enamel.
C.
Undercoat: Except for stainless steel all ferrous metal surfaces shall be given a five stage phosphate
treatment or other acceptable base bonding treatment.
D.
Uniformity : Provide finish of uniform thickness and color, free from streaks, stains.
2.11
REFLECTORS
A.
Reflectors shall be free of spinning lines, and stain.
B.
Reflecting surface shall have minimum reflectance as below, unless indicated otherwise:
1.
2.
3.
2.12
A.
White Surfaces : minimum 90% (semi gloss)

Specular Surfaces: minimum 83%
Brushed Surfaces: minimum 75%
LENSES
Plastic lenses: Plastic lenses or diffusers shall be made of 100% virgin acrylic.
Page 348/374

B.
Glass lenses: Unless indicated otherwise all glass shielding or lenses shall be made of tempered
borosilicate glass.
C.
Glass lenses, refractors and diffusers shall be tempered for high impact and heat resistance. The
glass shall have minimum transmittance of 92%
2.13
A.
LIGHTING FIXTURE
All lighting fittings shall be of excellent quality, made by approved reputable manufacturers and shall
o
be suitable in all respects for trouble free operation on 220~240 Volts, 50Hz at 45 C. All light fittings
shall from standard range of production of the manufacturer, for which spare parts and lamps are
easily available during expected life of the fittings and associated equipment.
B.
All fluorescent lighting fitting shall be complete with all internal wiring. The internal wiring shall be not
less than 0.75sq.mm with silicon rubber insulation or high temperature rated PVC clipped neatly in
position.
C.
Radio interference suppression capacitor system shall be provided for each fluorescent fitting.
D.
The lighting fittings shall be provided with terminal block for external wiring connections.
E.
All lighting fittings shall be constructed so that lamps control gears are readily accessible for
maintenance. Diffusers/Louvers shall be provided with hinges and captives screws to permit easy
relamping.
F.
Earthing terminal shall be provided for each fitting.
G.
Description mentioned in the specification indicates the general type desired and do not intend to
restrict selection to fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fittings of similar design, equivalent light
distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable.
2.14
COMPANY INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall include in Contract Price the total cost of the arrangement for all travelling, lodging,
boarding and daily allowances for Factory Testing as detailed below.
B.
Factory inspection of manufacturing and testing R&D facilities, shall be witnessed by representatives
of the following, prior to starting the production of other units.
C.
Contractor shall provide notice to the Employer for inspection in writing or through telex or fax with a
copy to the third part inspectorate so as to reach the company at least four weeks in advance incase
of foreign inspection. Employer may elect to arrange independent inspection of materials or equipment
at the vendor's or sub-vendor's premises. Company shall notify the details of such third party
inspection assignments and contractor shall furnish the inspectorate with (un-priced) orders,
requisitions, specifications and other relevant information.
D.
Employer representative or its nominated third party inspectorate , in due coordination with the
contractor shall have the right at all times to inspect or to cause the inspection of materials and
equipment at their place of production , fabrication or installation through out the contract period.
E.
Where third party inspection is stipulated, it shall be obligatory for the contractor to obtain acceptance
or inspection release prior to releasing the equipment for shipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALATION
A.
Install lighting fixtures as indicated on the drawings.
Page 349/374

B.
3.2
Fixtures shall be completely wired and lamps installed in each fixtures.
AIMING AND ADUUSTMENT

A.
Adjust fixtures that require aiming, or adjustments. Aiming shall be done under lighting designers
direction.
B.
Exterior fixtures shall be aimed or focused at night time.
C.
Mounting : Mounting height is to obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job
before installation is commenced.
D.
Installation of fixture locations shall be in strict accordance with the intent of the contract drawings and
approved shop, specifications and drawings.
E.
Instructions: Each lighting fixture shall be package with complete illustration and instructions showing
how to install. Install lighting fixture in strict conformance with manufactures recommendations and
instructions.
3.3

A.
Inspect each fixtures for damages. Replace damaged fixtures or relamp failed lamps, replace
damaged reflectors, baffles, lenses, diffusers or other failed components.
B.
Tests: After installing and energizing fixtures, inspect and verify malfunctioning units. Measure light
levels at night when required.
C.
Report: Prepare written form of report of inspection, test and verification
Page 350/374

SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
1.
Physical LAN equipment (sockets, wirings) from the telecommunication bus bar to the LAN
sockets.
2.
Cable trays
3.
The works of logical design, other LAN equipments and fiber optical cables, which connect
buildings together are not included in the scope of this package.
A.
Published Specifications standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or

B.
standards.
C.
Comply with all applicable codes (not exhaustive list):

International standards IEEE 802 (ISO, ITU-T, IEC, UL, etc)
Regulation for arrange technical system TCXDVN 2008
Regulation of Ministry of Communication for communication equipment installation and product of
communication service TCN-2006
D.
1.3
Equivalent Vietnamese Standards (VS) can be substituted for Foreing Standards specified in this
section.
1.
2.
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
Sockets
2.
Wires
3.
Cable trays
B.
maintenance and repair data.
1.4

A.
Page 351/374

B.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.6
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
The contractor shall submit manufacturers data for following items for Engineers approval.
1.
Wiring characteristics,
2.
Sockets characteristics.
SOCKETS
A.
In each building, sockets for physical type RJ45 (double sockets) shall be provided for each necessary
rooms.
B.
Sockets installed in wet rooms shall be equipped with IP55 devices
C.
RJ45 sockets shall be the same type (model and manufacturer) than power sockets used by the Low
Voltage.
2.3
WIRES
A.
2.4
LAN cables (UTP CAT5E) shall be wired to connect sockets to technical rooms, where it will be
equipped with switch boxes and other LAN devices by other dedicated contractor. Each double socket
will respond by 01 cable.
CABLE TRAY (see section 260536 for more information)

A.
Cable trays shall be provided for each building
B.
All kind of cables (Low Voltage, LAN, CCTV, Access control, etc. shall be installed in the cables tray.
C.
Cable tray shall be galvanized steel box (2 separated levels, one for the low voltage cable and one for
the telecom cable).
D.
Cable trays system shall be provided for each building so that from each required room, the other
dedicated contractor can easily find and make wiring to a cable tray.
E.
Cable trays shall link technical rooms, shafts and underground cable ducts together.
Page 352/374

F.
Cable tray shall include 30% of spare.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Cables trays shall be hung under roof or frame structures of buildings
B.
Sockets shall be fixed on the wall.
C.
Identification
1.
each equipment shall be clearly identified in the miscellaneous drawings and cables layouts.
3.2
TESTS
A.
Notify and perform tests in the presence of Employers representative.
Page 353/374

Division 32
Exterior Improvements
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GEOTEXTILE
DESCRIPTION
TYPES OF GEOTEXTILE
THREAD AND SEWING MACHINE
EXECUTION
CHECKING AND APPROVAL
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS, SLABS AND EDGINGS

REFERENCE STANDARDS
MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION METHODS
3.1
3.2
3.3
SIDE WALK PAVEMENT

REFERENCE STANDARDS
MATERIAL
CONSTRUCTION METHODS
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
LANDSCAPING
TOP SOIL
TURFING (SODDING)
TREES AND PLANTS
ACCESSORIES
FERTILIZERS
PLANTING TREES
PLANTING SHRUB AND HERBACEOUS PLANTS
COMPLETION AND MAINTENANCE
2.
3.
4.
Page 354/374

1. GEOTEXTILE
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This work including works of supply and execution of geotextile as a section of base course
in weal soil area, where is specified in design drawings.
Before transporting geotextile into the construction site, the Constructor must submit all
document related to that to Engineer to get approval.
1.2 TYPES OF GEOTEXTILE

Otherwise specified in design document, geotextile must meet the following requirements:
a.
b.
-
Non-woven geotextile (for separation of weak soil from back filling, or for
filtertration layer):
Non-woven type
Tensile strength in longitudinal and cross directions (ASTM D4595): 12kN/m;
Tensile strength under sudden force (ASTM D4632): 0,8kN;
Strength against tearing (ASTM D4533): 0,3 kN;
Strength against puncture CBR (BS 6906-4): 1500N;
Extension at breaking (ASTM D4595): 65%;
Screen size (ASTM D4751): O95 0,125mm and O95 0,64.D85 ; with D85 is
diameter of backfill grain (sand) with condition that contents of smaller grain is 85%;
Coefficient of permeability (ASTM D4491): 0,1 s-1;
Durability under UV (ASTM D4355): remaining strength >70% after 3 months under
UV.
Woven geotextile (for enforcement):
Woven type
Material: Polyester;
Tensile strength (ASTM D4595): longitudinal direction 200kN/m, cross direction
50kN/m;
Tensile strength under sudden force (ASTM D4632): 1,8kN;
Strength against puncture CBR (BS 6906-4): 4000N;
Extension at breaking (ASTM D4595): 15%;
Screen size (ASTM D4751): O95 0,125mm and O95 0,64.D85 ; with D85 is
diameter of backfill grain (sand) with condition that contents of smaller grain is 85%;
Coefficient of permeability (ASTM D4491): 0,1 s-1;
Durability under UV (ASTM D4355): remaining strength >70% after 3 months under
UV.
1.3 THREAD AND SEWING MACHINE

Thread must be specialized type, dia. 1 - 1,5mm; tensile strength not under 40kN/ 1
thread.
Sewing machine must be specialized type with thread step of 7 - 10mm.
Page 355/374

1.4 EXECUTION
-
Re-alight center line and border of the area for geotextile lining.
Geotextile will be spreaded on the area specified in design:
o Drain to make the ground dry by water pump or other resolution for the geotextile
spreaded area.
o Things such as stumps, grass, waste, sharp materials on the area must be
cleared off
o Smooth levelling so that uneven area is not over 5%.
Geotextile is spreaded in the cross direction to the design alignment. Over lap joint
must be treated by specialized sewing machine. In case of overlap joint, the joint
width must not be under 500mm. Using sewing machine to sew the joint with double
sewing line with joint band > 100mm. Sewing line is offset 5-15cm from edge of
wrappage line. Thread step is 7-10mm.
Geotextile must be laid in right direction and location in road base. In backfill
duration, it must be kept at right tension state and fixed with bamboo or wooden
stakes.
The Contractor will have to use tyred compactor for the filling work after to ensure
that the geotextile will not be broken.
For the 1st layer of filling above the geotextile, after grading, using tyred compactor
with load increased step by step to meet compaction ratio as desiged. For 2nd layer
and above ones, doing compaction as normal for other places.
Construction vehicles are not allowed to run dicrectly on spreaded surface of
goetextile.
Any teared or broken goetextile must be replaced with a good one.
Geotextile must be stored in good condition and do not let it contact with daylight in
over 3 days.
1.5 CHECKING AND APPROVAL

Checking and approval before construction comprises works of checking equipment and
material as mentioned in section 2.3.7.2
Checking of geometric dimentions, elevation of ground before spreading of
geotextile. It must be approved by Engineer.
- Quantity of sampling for criteria in setion 2.3.7.2 is 1 sample/10.000m2 or when
changing lot of product.
- Checking of sewing machine and geotextile as per requirements in sections 2.3.7.2
and 2.3.7.4.
Checking contruction works
-
Checking the contact between the geotextile with the ground. Leftover parts at side
are not allow to fold up as required in section 2.3.7.4.
- Checking sewing joint by watching at site. False joints must be re-sewed as per
request by Engineer.
Checking after spreading will be done in work of road base construction.
-
Page 356/374

2. PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS, SLABS AND EDGINGS

SCOPE : This work shall consist of kerbs, channels, edgings, slabs or combination of these
made of precast concrete and constructed in accordance with the lines, levels, grades
dimensions and types shown on the Drawings. This work shall also include excavation in
unclassified materials, construction of a bed course and backing. Materials used for precast
concrete kerbs, slabs, channels and edgings shall comply with TCVN 356: 2005 and 22TCN
334-06.
2.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS

TCVN 356: 2005
22TCN 334-06
Concrete and reinforced concrete - Design standard

Technical processing of work excution and acceptance
stabilized aggregate base cour in road pavement structure
2.2 MATERIALS
Bed course material and backing shall be as described in the other Sections.
Concrete shall be of the class indicated on the Drawings and shall conform to the
requirements of the Section Erreur ! Source du renvoi introuvable. of the Specification.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

Precast concrete units shall be cast in steel moulds, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer, which are dimensionally accurate. Stripped units shall have a smooth blemish
free appearance on the faces which will be exposed when installed in the Works.
Excavation shall be made to the required depth and width to accommodate the bedding to
the type of kerb, channel or edging to be used, and the base upon which the kerb, channel
or edging is to be set shall be compacted to a firm even surface. All soft and unsuitable
material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material as directed by the Engineer.
Concrete backing to kerbs, channels and edgings shall be placed so as not to interfere with
pedestrian guardrail, sign posts and the like which are to be installed subsequently.
Precast concrete paving slabs shall be laid to the patterns and falls indicated in the
Drawings.
Where coloured units are required, the colouring agent shall be approved by the Engineer
and sample units shall be cast at the Contractor's expense to determine the proportions of
colouring agent required to achieve the correct colour, as determined by the Engineer.
For curves of 12m radius or less, kerbs of appropriate radius shall be used.
The finished work shall be true to line grade and level to within 3mm in 3m and shall present
a smooth appearance free from kinks and distortion visible to the eye.
Where shown on the drawings insitu footwalk construction shall comply with the
requirements of the specification for the materials used.
Page 357/374

3. SIDE WALK PAVEMENT
SCOPE: This work shall consist of sidewalk pavement.
This specification is also applied for sidewalks, walks at medium or at foot of wall or at
specific areas as required by Engineer.
Materials used for side walk pavement:
- Self lock concrete block;

- Concrate plate (piece);
- Red brick (heated earth).
Area to be tiled will follow design drawing or specified by Engineer.
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
TCVN 6477:1999
TCVN 6260-1997
: Portland blended cements. Technical requirements;
TCVN 6355-3:1998
: Bricks. Method of test.
: Concrete block;
TCVN 340-1986
: Sand for construction works - Method for determination of
volummetric mass and porosity;
3.2 MATERIAL
3.2.1 Concrete
Coarse aggregate must have Los Angeles index less than 22% (test as per AASHTO
T96).
Percentage of fine particle gone through sieve 0,075mm must not over 3%.
Concrete mixture to produce self lock block must contain 30 - 40% coarse aggregate
with particle size 5 - 10mm.
3.2.2 Self lock concrete block

Shape, size, quality, color etc., of self lock concrete block must conform to the following
requirements:
Shape: before making order to manufacturer, Contractor must submit to Engineer proposed
sample of self lock concrete block with relevant certificates of tests and material for approval.
Thickness: pending on used area, thickness of self lock concrete block will be minimum as
below:
- For road sidewalk and walkway: min. 6cm;

- For area having medium car/truck running over: min. 8cm;
- For area having heavy car/truck running over: min. 10cm.
Tolerance of size:
- For legth and width: 2mm;

- thickness: 3mm.
The block must meet requirement of bearing capacity and anti-grinding as below:
- Ave. compressive capacity: 490 Kg/cm2;

- Min. compressive capacity: 250 Kg/cm2;
- Broken compressive capacity : 400 Kg/cm2;
Page 358/374

- self lock concrete block must have high durability under weather condition and must
have anti-grinding index not under 1,5.
Sampling: rondom getting 10 pcs at different places in a lot so that samples can present for
the lot. After that using 5 samples for compressive test and the other 5 for grinding tests.
Lot is a sery of the same type of block, having same size, color, manufactured with the same
mixture in a continuous duration. Popular size of a lot is not over 10000 pcs.
3.2.3 Concrete plate
Concrete plate for sidewalk pavement:
- Precast in factory in shape of square or rectangle. Size is shown in design

drawings.
- Smooth surface with tolerance not over what was specified for self lock concrete
block.
- Requirements of compressive and anti-grinding capacity are same with self lock
concrete block.
- Do not use concrete plate at are having truck/car running over.

3.2.4 Red brick
Red brick is usually used for tiling on walk ways on road isle for landscaping purpose.
Red brick must meet requirements as below:
- Burned brick with shape and size must meet requirements in design drawings.
Normally, mosaic on brick is cross or diagonal hatching or lozenged.
- The brick piece must even without deformation or crack. Color of a lot of around
10.000 must be unified.
- Do not use red brick at are having truck/car running over.

3.2.5 Lining sand
Lining sand must be clean, with humidity of around 8%.
3.2.6 Lining motar
Lining mortar must follow item Erreur ! Source du renvoi introuvable. of this
Sepcification.
3.2.7 Joint filler
Pending on type of tiling media, the joint between block will be filled as required
below::
- For self lock block: filled with fine sand, grain size not over 1.18mm and containing
around 10% of dusty particle.
- Concrete plate and red brick: filled with mortar as said in item Erreur ! Source du
renvoi introuvable. of this Sepcification.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

3.3.1 Ground preparation
Ground must be well prepared to meet all requirement of dimensions, slope in design
drawing. Compaction ratio of ground must be not under K95.
Page 359/374

3.3.2 Lining layer
Sandy lining layer:

The sandy lining layer must be dry and clean. Thicknees must be 20% over design
compacted thickness.
Before compaction, it must be well graded with ruler to have good form and slope as
designed.
Lining mortar:
Mortar will be pured into small heap. Using wooden ruler and hawk to spread it well on
the prepared ground surface. Face of mortar must be unified, flat, with slope as designed.
Thickness of the mortar layer must conform with that shown in design drawings.
Construction of mortar lining layer must meet requirements in item Erreur ! Source du
renvoi introuvable. of this Sepcification.
3.3.3 Tiling
Self lock blocks are tiled on surface of sandy lining layer.

Concrete plate and red brick area tiled on surface of mortar lining layer.
Tiling work will be done from curb to inside following shape mentioned in design
drawing or specified by Engineer.
There must be gap of 2 - 4mm between blocks, which will be then filled with sand or
mortar.
Do not use broken or deformed pieces for tiling.
Edge of tiled area or slot between tiled area with other structure must be locked with
cement mortar.
Compaction:
Compaction is just applied for self lock block and in at least 1 day after tiling. Using tablet
compactor with the following requirements:
Area of compaction table: 0,35 - 0,50 m2.
Centrifugal force: 16 - 20KN.
Vibrating frequency: 75 - 100Hz.
Limitation of compaction area is from center to 1m offset in from edge of tiled area.
After the 1st compaction, doing sand filling to joint and well grade it to fill up all gaps between
blocks
Apply 3-4 times of compaction to tiled areas.
For area tiled with self lock block and having truck moving over, using tyred compacter 10 14 ton to do 8 - 10 times, after that fining the compaction by portabe table compactor.
Pieces damaged in compaction will be replaced by new one without additional payment.
3.3.4 Maintenance
After tiling, the tiled area will be maintained with duration as specified in contract. Gap
between blocks will be frequently checked and added with sand.
Surface of tiled area must be frequently cleaned.
All damage happened in maintenace duration must be recoverd by Conrtactor and following
request of Engineer.
Work of maintenance and recovering will not be paid additionally.
4. LANDSCAPING
Works shall be performed by personnel familiar with the accepted procedure of planting and
under the constant supervision of a qualified planting foreman.
Page 360/374

4.1 TOP SOIL

a. Materials
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 5 days before he intends to commence
topsoil stripping operations. After inspection and approval by the Engineer, and prior to
stripping any topsoil, the Contractor shall remove noxious weeds and tall grass, brush,
stones larger than 25 mm in any dimension, and roots.
Imported top soil shall conform to TCVN 5257-90 of light and friable texture and with neutral
soil reactions. Maximum size of stones in any dimension shall be 25 mm and free of weed
seeds, tall grass, roots or perennial weeds, sticks, stubble or other litter and fresh water.
Fertilizer conforms to TCVN 7159:2002
b. Preparation of Sub Soil
Sub soil shall be graded to smooth flowing contours and achieve tolerances specified for the
finished level of top soil. Loosen stiff clays and other cohesive sub soils with a single line
ripper 450 mm deep at 1m centres.
c. Spreading Top Soil
Imported/spoil heap top soil shall be spread over prepared sub soil in layers not exceeding
150 mm and firm each layer before spreading the next. Overall minimum depths after
firming and settlement shall be
General grass areas - 150 mm
Shrub - 400 mm
Tree
- 600 mm
In case of in-situ topsoil, break up hard ground with a ripper, plough or double-dig of full
depth to ensure forming in of old vegetation. Soil levels may be adjusted by blade grading
and/or local filling provided the final depth of top soil is not less than the specified.
Top soil contaminated with sub soil, rubbish, oil based products or other materils toxic to
plant life shall not be used.
d. Cultivation
Any compacted top soil shall be broken up to full depth. Undesirable material brought to the
surface including stones larger than 50 mm in any dimension, roots, tufts of grass and
foreign matter shall be removed.
To enrich soil, additives such as mulch, compost, fertilizer shall apply evenly and work into
top soil.
When top soil is reasonably dry and workable same shall be graded to smooth flowing
contours with falls for adequate drainage, removing all minor hollows and ridges.
4.2 TURFING (SODDING)

a. Turves/Sods
Page 361/374

Turves/sods of 20 mm squares, 20 mm thick shall be sufficiently fibrous to withstand the
handling conditions, free from undesirable grasses and weeds. Samples shall be submitted
for approval by the Engineer.
b. Fertilizers
Either approved granular types containing not less than 8% Nitrogen, 12 1/2% Phosphorous
and 8% Potassium, applied according to manufactures recommendation, 3-5 days before
grassing. Rake and consolidate to provide a suitable tilth for growth of grass , or
A mixture of 1 oz lime, 1 kg loamey soil and 1 kg well rotted and dried cow dung spread over
1 m2 and raked well with 20 grms Ammonium Sulphate dissolved in 4 litres water sprinkled
over 1 m2 applied 2 days prior to grassing. Rake and consolidate to provide a suitable tilth
for growth of grass.
c. Defects Liability
Bare areas and areas of dead grass which become apparent before Substantial Completion
of the Contract Works or six weeks after the first cut, whichever is the later, shall be
regarded as defects due to materials or workmanship not in accordance with the contract.
They shall be made good by recultivation and returfing.
d. Manufacturers Recommendations
Manufacturers recommendations for storage, handling and application of fertilizers and
herbicides shall be strictly followed.
e. Preparing Soil
Soiling/cultivating/grading shall be carried out as specified in Section Erreur ! Source du
renvoi introuvable..
f. Final Cultivation
After final grading, soil shall be lightly and uniformly firmed and top 25 mm reduced to a fine
tilth. All stones more than 50 mm in any dimension on general areas and 25 mm on fine
lawns shall be removed and then raked to a true, even surface.
g. Weeds
Prior to turfing, soil shall be kept free of weeds and approval shall be obtained for same.
h. Turfing
Supply of turves shall arrange to avoid stacking for long periods. Height of turves stacked
shall not be more than 1 m and turves shall not be laid when persistent drying winds are
likely to occur, or, when soil is water logged/excessively dry.
Turves shall laid with broken joints, well butted up, working from planks laid on previonsly
laid turves. Levels shall be adjusted by raking out or infilling with fine soil under turves.
Rollers shall not be used for consolidation; instead, wooden beaters shall be used to firm
lightly and evenly after laying.
Whole turves shall be used for edges and shall be trimmed to a clean line.
Turfing on banks exceeding 300 slope shall be carried out diagonally or horizontally and
secured with either,
Page 362/374

(1)
Pointed softwood pegs, 200 mm long x 25 mm square, or,
(2)
Galvanized wire pins, bent or hair pin pattern 200 mm long x 4 mm dia.
Number and distribution of fixing shall be agreed with the Engineer and shall be removed
when turf is well established.
All joints shall be filled completely, with finely sifted top soil brushed well into joints. Around
individual trees, an area of 800 mm gap shall be left open.
Care shall be taken to ensure sufficient water is applied to maintain healthly growth specially
during establishment of grass areas. This shall be carried out using a fine rose or sprinkler
until full depth of top soil is saturated.
When grass is 50-70 mm high, all stones larger than 40 mm in any dimension shall be
picked off and rolled with a light roller.
Forty eight hours later, grass shall be cut to approximately 35mm high, with a roto-scythe or
by any other approved method avoiding root pulling. All clippings shall be removed and
disposed of. After a growth of 25 mm height another cutting shall be carried out. Until a
reasonable cover of specified mixture or single species free of weed is established,
additional cuttings shall be carried out.
Works shall be left in a clean, tidy condition and soil shall be removed from all hard surfaces.
Before handover ensure that any sinkage below specified levels are rectified.Any damages
to grass shall be made good until area is accepted.
4.3 TREES AND PLANTS

Trees and Plants shall be obtained from an approved source where possible with soil and
climatic conditions similar to those prevailing at site. If specified plants are unobtainable,
alternatives may be submitted, stating prices and how they differ from the specifications.
Such substitutions may not be acceptable and if so submissions of further alternatives may
become necessary.
Herbaceous plants shall be well rooted, hardy and not less than one year of full growth.
Nursery stock trees and shrubs shall be well formed and healthy with vigorous sound roots
supplied in accordance with the following sizes.
Trees - 900mm - 1800mm high
Large shrubs - 900mm - 1200mm high
Medium shrubs, Hedge plants
- 600mm - 900mm high
Small shrubs - 300mm - 600mm high

Ground cover, highbed plants
- 50mm - 300mm
Page 363/374

4.4 ACCESSORIES
Stakes for shrubs where so directed shall be sawn or riven timber 1500mm long and not less
than 25 mm2, treated with an approved non injurious timber preservative (neither Creosote
nor Tar).
Stakes for trees shall be pressure impregnated softwood, straight and free of projections
and pointed at one end. Minimum thickness (75-100 mm). For feathered trees minimum
length of stake above ground should be half full height of trees and below ground 900 mm.
All other types minimum length of stake above ground shall be height of clear stem and
below ground 900 mm.
Tree guards - to approval
4.5 FERTILIZERS
Only the products on the current list of the Agricultural Chemicals Approval Scheme shall be
used and to approval of the Engineer.
Lime
Fine ground limestone containing not less than 50% CaO or equivalent.
Manure
Well rotted farmyard of vegetable manure or garden compost.
Leaf mould
Well rotted leaves from woodland or forest to approval.
Peat
To BS 4156. Do not use alkaline peat unless instructed.
Fungicidal sealant
Manufacturer and reference to approval
4.6 PLANTING TREES

a. Plant Locations
All trees shall be planted in accordance with the spacing and locations designated on the
Drawings. Locations of all plants shall be staked on the ground and shall be approved by
the Engineer before any digging of plant pits and top soiling of lawn areas are made.
b. Standard Nursery Practices
Unless bare root trees or trees in other types or sizes of containers are specified, all trees
shall be grwon or estaiblished in containers of not less than 20 liters capacity, or balled in
burlap in accordance with starndard nursery partices.
c. Storage
In relocation of plants from the nursery to the final location in the plant pits, all plant roots
and earth-balls shall be kept damp and thoroughly protected from sun and drying winds until
final planting. All plastics bags, burlap or containers previously used as pots when in
nursery shall not be used in the final locations of plants.
Before planting trees thoroughly mix top soil excavated from the pit and additional top soil as
required with other ingredients in the following proportions.
Page 364/374

Top soil
- 75%
Manure
- 25%
Cut back any broken or damaged roots to sound growth. Treat cut ends over 25 mm dia
with fungicidal sealant.
Place backfilling material in 150-250 mm layers, ensuring close contact with roots and
elimination of air pockets.
When planting root balled trees, backfill shall be firmed around root-ball in 150 mm layers
taking care not to disturb roots and water trees thoroughly immediately after backfilling.
After watering spread a 50 mm layer of organic manure over the whole area of the tree pit.
After planting, all trees shall be pruned of all broken or damaged branches. Pruning shall be
done only at time of planting and according to stardard horticultural practice to preserve the
natural character of the plants. Only clean, sharp tools shall be used.
4.7 PLANTING SHRUB AND HERBACEOUS PLANTS

Recultivate shrub areas to 300 mm depth if left for any length of time. Remove all weeds
and rubbish.
Before excavating planting holes apply moist peat or leaf mould to a depth of 30 mm over
the whole bed and work into soil.
Planting holes for shrubs to be 150 mm wider than root spread and 400 mm deep. Planting
holes for climbers to be 300 mm wider than root spread and 500 mm deep.
Finished level to be at original soil mark on shrubs and 30 mm above surrounding level to
allow for settlement.
For hedges shrubs shall be planted in trenches large enough to take full spread of roots and
set out evenly as scheduled.
Immediately after planting shrubs, carefully cut back any damaged, dead or diseased
branches, remove any weak, thin or malformed growth and treat with fungicidal sealant.
Water plants thoroughly using a fine rose. Spread a layer of organic manure to a depth of a
20 mm over soil of plant beds.
4.8 COMPLETION AND MAINTENANCE

After planting fork and or rake soil to a fine tilth with approved cambers and no hollows.
Newly planted areas shall be protected with approved temporary fencing if so directed by the
Engineer or when shown on drawings. Maintain fencing until planting is well established
then remove and reinstate ground. Make good any damage to planting until area is
accepted.
Page 365/374

Maintain plants and planting areas in good condition including watering, pruning, application
of approved chemicals to combat insect attack , disease and weeds, forking and hoeing of
beds and removal of all rubbish, upto Substantial Completion.
At the end of Maintenance apply a mulch of organic manure to a depth of 30 mm over all
End of division 32
Page 366/374

SECTION 333000 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This section provides technical requirements for the industrial waste water treatment unit located in
the building No27.
Industrial waste water contaminated with oil and grease form workshops shall be collected and
transported to the industrial waste water treatment unit before discharging into outdoor sewerage
pipelines, which then will connect with city pipeline outside of the depot.
In this project, all tanks of the waste water treatment unit shall be built at site with reinforced concrete
structure as per design drawings.
Oil in water shall be removed by oil absorbent material, which shall be filled in treatment tank.
3
Capacity of the waste water treatment unit is 2.0 m of industrial waste water per day.
The Contractor shall do commissioning, testing, training of operation for Employer.
Unless otherwise specified in General chapter or Contract, the Contractor shall do 2 years of warranty
and after that 3 year optional maintenance if required.
1.2

The related works of concrete, rebar, formwork, masonry in sections of the following divisions shall be
applied:
1.3
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
1.
Division 03: Concrete
2.
Division 04: Masonry
1.
Equivalent Vietnamese Standards (VS) can be substituted for foreign Standards specified in
this section.
2.
standards.
3.
The treated waste water shall meet the requirement of QCVN 24: 2009/BTNMT - National
Technical Regulation on Industrial Wastewater
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

Page 367/374

B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.7
A.
SPARE PARTS
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 OIL ABSORBENT MATERIAL

A.
The oil absorbent material shall have to meet the minimum requirement as the following:
-
Recycled treated absorbent material for the absorption, and encapsulation of petroleum hydrocarbon
liquid spills on water.
100% fully biodegradable and will readily attach itself to all forms of petroleum hydrocarbons on water.
Can absorb up to at least 10 times its own weight in medium weight petroleum hydrocarbons
Appearance: odorless fibers or particles presented in pack. Size of each pack is around 10-20 litters
Solubility in Water (g/L): Insoluble
Corrosiveness: No Hazard
Oxidizing Properties: No Hazard
Reactivity: No Hazard
The ingredients are NOT considered hazardous in the quantities present and are considered
proprietary information
Not flammable under conditions of normal use
B.
Storage:
-
Observe storage instructions on container. Keep container in a dry, cool, ventilated area.
Avoid dispersal of dust. Will not spontaneously combust, even when stored in large quantities.
C.
Provided volume of material:

-
The volume of oil absorbent material to be provided in this package must enough for 2 years
operation in duration of warranty and the supply source shall have to be available for 3 year of
optional maintenance after that.
Page 368/374

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
All the treatment tanks shall be built in accordance with parameter shown on design drawings.
B.
Wall construction waste in the tanks shall be removed well before installation of cover slab and backfill.
C.
Leakage tests shall be done for tanks to ensure that there is not any crack or leakage on structure of
tank. The procedure for leakage/crack testing shall be done as below:
-
After 14-days of final concreting, the tank shall be filled with full water inside and be supervised in 7
days to discover crack or leakage, which may appeared on walls of the tanks.
The crack or leakage areas shall be chiseled out then re-plastered with waterproof additive mixed
cement mortar grade 100. Ten days after that, the leakage test shall be done again to ensure that
there is not any leakage remaining.
If the leakage is not recoverable, the Contractor shall have to rebuild the tank
All expenses for leakage test, repairing or rebuild shall be borne by the Contractor.
D.
Inlet and outlet pipes of tanks shall be installed with water stop. Those pipes shall be laid and fixed at
right position on tank wall before concreting.
E.
Interface requirements:
-
The construction works of treatment tanks shall be interfaced with plumbing works and construction
works of building foundation and other structures.
Page 369/374

SECTION 333600 SEPTIC TANK

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Septic tanks shall be provided at location indicated by the drawings
All kind of domestic waste water in the Depot shall be treated by septic tanks before discharging into
outdoor sewerage pipelines.
In this project, septic tanks shall be built at site with reinforced concrete structure as per design
drawings.
1.2

The related works of concrete, rebar, formwork, masonry in sections of the following divisions shall be
applied:
1.3
1.
Division 03: Concrete
2.
Division 04: Masonry
A.
section.
B.
standards.
1.4
A.
1.5
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Page 370/374

1.7
A.
SPARE PARTS
PART 2 - EXECUTION
A.
All the septic tanks shall be built in accordance with parameter shown on design drawings.
B.
Wall construction waste in the tanks shall be removed well before installation of cover slab and backfill.
C.
Leakage tests shall be done for all septic tanks to ensure that there is not any crack or leakage on
structure of tank. The procedure for leakage/crack testing shall be done as below:
-
After 14-days of final concreting, the septic tank shall be filled with full water inside and be supervised
in 7 days to discover crack or leakage, which may appeared on walls of the tanks.
The crack or leakage areas shall be chiseled out then re-plastered with waterproof additive mixed
cement mortar grade 100. Ten days after that, the leakage test shall be done again to ensure that
there is not any leakage remaining.
If the leakage is not recoverable, the Contractor shall have to rebuild the tank
All expenses for leakage test, repairing or rebuild shall be borne by the Contractor.
D.
Inlet and outlet pipes of septic tank shall be installed with water stop. Those pipes shall be laid and fixed
at right position on tank wall before concreting.
E.
Interface requirements:
-
The construction works of septic tanks shall be interfaced with plumbing works and construction works
of building foundation and other underground structures.
Page 371/374

SECTION 337119 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
1.
Underground Ducts: They shall project a minimum of 150 mm above ground level, except
where otherwise specified on the drawings and under roads and verges where
2.
Manholes.
A. Equivalent Vietnamese Standards (VS) can be substituted for foreign Standards specified in this
section.
B. All supplies and services offered in response to this specification shall be based on the latest
standards.
C. Published Specifications standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or
D. In particular the following standards shall be followed:
1.3
a.
TCVN 356 : 2005
b.
TCVN 6557 : 2000
DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, Coordination Service Drawings (CSD), product data, samples and
1.4

A. Receive and accept materials and equipment at the site; properly handle, house, and protect
them from damage and the weather until installation. Replace equipment damaged in the course
of handling without additional charge.
B. Arrange for and provide storage space in an area at the job site for all materials and equipment
to be received and/or installed in this project.
1.5
WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for products furnished under this Contract.
manufacturers and the Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents (Defect Notification Period).
B. Guarantee all materials, equipment, apparatus and workmanship to be free of defective materials
and faulty workmanship for at least the Defect Notification Period defined in the Contract
documents.
Page 372/374

1.6
SPARE PARTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
The contractor shall submit manufacturers data for following items for Engineers approval.
1.
Electrical Underground Ducts
2.
Manholes
2.2
UNDERGROUND DUCTS
A.
B.
Cable trenches shall be prepared such that the cable minimum bending radius are not reduced during
cable installation.
Cables shall be segregated into the following categories:

Power (750 V and greater);
Power (less than 750 V);
Instrumentation/telemetry;
Control;
Telecommunications
C.
Cables shall be laid in a manner such that any electrical interference between cables shall not have a
detrimental effect on the life and operation of equipment installed within the installation. As a general
rule there shall be a minimum separation of 600 mm between HV power and all other cables and 300
mm between LV power and all other cables. Instrumentation, control and telecommunications cables
shall be laid together in PVC-U duct of minimum diameter 100 mm.
D.
Buried cable up to 750 V shall have a minimum cover of 500 mm measured to the top of the highest
cable. On crossing roadways the cable shall be run through a PVC-U duct of minimum diameter 100
mm with a minimum of 1 000 mm cover and encased on all sides by 150 mm of concrete.
E.
Higher voltage cables shall be buried with a minimum cover of 1 m.
F.
Where, for any reason the minimum specified cover cannot be provided then the cables shall be run in
cable ducts encased on all sides by at least 150 mm concrete.
G.
The bottom of the trench shall be free of sharp stones and the like.
H.
Protective covers shall be interlocking clay or concrete cable tiles not less than 100 mm wide and
clearly and indelibly marked : " DANGER ELECTRICITY "
I.
Warning tape shall be run in one or more continuous strips and laid so as to adequately cover the
cables. It shall be red and shall be clearly and indelibly marked as follows : " DANGER ELECTRIC
CABLES "
J.
The graded backfill above the sand shall be free from boulders and other sharp, deleterious material.
K.
Cable markers shall be installed to indicate the position of underground cable(s). Cable markers shall
be installed in accordance with the following :
At each side of each road crossing.
At every change of direction.
At each point where cable(s) enter or pass under a building or structure, at 300 mm above ground
level.
At each joint authorized by the Engineer.
At intervals not exceeding 45 m on straight runs.
Page 373/374

L.
2.3
Marker posts shall be as shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
COVER SLABS AND COVERS

A.
Cover slabs shall be provided for the drainage and sewer system unless otherwise specified or
directed by the Engineer. For Sewer System Cover slabs shall be either pre-cast or cast in-situ
concrete. Unless otherwise shown, all cover slabs shall be reinforced with two layers of mesh
reinforcement to TCVN 356: 2005. Cover slabs shall have two recessed lifting points. Concrete for
cover slabs shall comply with all applicable requirements of Section Concrete, Reinforcement &
Formwork. For drainage system, cover slabs shall be pre-cast concrete.
B.
Chambers and manholes for the stormwater drainage and utility duct system shall have heavy duty
ductile iron covers or R.C cover, which must be strong enough to bear vehicle with axle load P=100KN
(for vehicle passing area) or load of 200kg/m for non-vehicle area.
C.
Where chambers project above ground level, covers when in position shall be flush with the adjacent
cover slab top surface. For chambers under roads and verges frames shall be solidly bedded in
cement mortar so that the covers when in position are fair and even with the adjacent surfaces.
D.
All chambers and catch basins shall be watertight.
E.
The chambers shall be constructed so that the top of the cover is level with finished road level.
2.4
STEP IRONS
A.
Step irons made of either malleable cast iron or solid steel bar shall be provided in manholes,
chambers and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Vertical spacing between step irons shall be 300 mm.
C.
Steps shall be malleable cast iron. All steps shall be hot dip galvanized after manufacture.
D.
Solid steel bar step irons shall have a diameter of 25 mm with the surface roughened by random spot
welds.
E.
Step iron for sewer manholes shall be plastic encapsulated type as specified in TCVN 6557:2000.
2.5
ALUMINIUM LADDERS
A.
Aluminium ladders shall be provided in utility ducts and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Aluminium for ladders shall comply with all applicable requirements of section Metalwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TESTS
A.
Notify and perform tests in the presence of Employers representative.
Page 374/374

Technical Specs CP5 2A - EN - Part 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Specs CP5 2A - EN - Part 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HANOI PEOPLES COMMITTEE

HANOI METROPOLITAN RAIL TRANSPORT PROJECT BOARD (HRB)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART 2

Location: Tu Liem District, Ha Noi

PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION CONSULTANT: SYSTRA S.A

HANOI PEOPLES COMMITTEE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART 2

Location: Tu Liem District, Ha Noi

Hanoi, 18 June, 2011

HANOI METROPOLITAN RAIL

Architectural Works of Depot Package - Design Report

Contractor Approval / Revision Record Sheet

Subject of issue / Revision

Contractor specific comments:

Architectural Works of Depot Package - Design Report

Electric traction elevators

General requirement for fire fighting and detection system

Fire suppression standpipe systems

Clean-agent fire extinguishing systems

Staircase pressurization system

Fire detection and alarm system

General provisions for plumbing work section

Common work results for plumbing

Facility water distribution

Plumbing fixture section

HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

General provisions for HVAC section

Common work results for HVAC

Meters and gages for HVAC

Vibration and Seismic Control for HVAC

Testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC

Instrumentation and control for HVAC

Air distribution system equipment

Mechanical ventilation system

Chilled water system

Architectural Works of Depot Package - Design Report

Air handling system equipment section

Basic materials and common work

Low voltage cable

Grounding and bonding for electrical systems

Raceway & boxes for electrical systems

Uninterruptible power system

Lighting protection system

Sanitary sewerage utilities

Utility septic tanks

Electrical underground ducts and manholes

Architectural Works of Depot Package - Design Report

SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

Elevators shall be of public service and heavy duty type.

Elevators shall be of electrical type and machine-room-less type.

Elevators shall be used for disabled passengers.

Each elevator shall be independent (electrically and mechanically).

RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS

Equivalent Vietnamese Standards (VS) can be substituted for foreign Standards

Architectural Works of Depot Package - Design Report

The regulations in force relative to protection of workers against electric

UTE Standards S 30-006 and NF EN 21683 or the equivalent International

Architectural Works of Depot Package - Design Report

To inform the Employer with which standards he will comply with,

To demonstrate equivalence or improvement (safety and performance) with

Submit shop drawings, Coordination Service Drawings (CSD), product data,

Layout of electromechanical equipment s

Electrical and electronic equipment